latex core update from latex-tds (27aug06)

git-svn-id: svn://tug.org/texlive/trunk@2043 c570f23f-e606-0410-a88d-b1316a301751

115 files changed, 12869 insertions, 797 deletions

diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/Makefile.unx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/Makefile.unx
deleted file mode 100644
index 414293e93b0..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/Makefile.unx
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,56 +0,0 @@
-
-########################################################################
-#   Start of customization section
-########################################################################
-
-# The directory where all runtime files reside
-DESTDIR=
-
-# The directory where the format files reside
-FORMATDIR=
-
-######### Edit the following only if you want to move *.fd or *.ist
-######### to a different place.
-
-# The directory where the .fd files reside:
-FDDIR=$(DESTDIR)
-
-# The directory where class and package files reside:
-INPUTDIR=$(DESTDIR)
-
-# The directory where the makeindex style files reside
-ISTDIR=$(DESTDIR)
-
-########################################################################
-#   End of customization section
-########################################################################
-
-FORMAT=latex
-
-
-default:
-	@if test ! "${DESTDIR}" -o ! "$(FORMATDIR)" ; then \
-	  echo "Destination directories not set." ; \
-	  echo "Please edit the Makefile first!" ; \
-	  exit 1 ; \
-	else \
-	  make format ; \
-	fi
-
-
-format:	$(FORMAT).fmt
-
-$(FORMAT).fmt:	$(FORMAT).ltx
-	initex $(FORMAT).ltx
-
-
-install: $(FORMAT).fmt
-	cp -i $(FORMAT).fmt $(FORMATDIR)
-	cp -i *.fd $(FDDIR)
-	cp -i *.cls *.clo *.sty *.def *.tex $(INPUTDIR)
-	cp -i *.ist $(ISTDIR)
-
-clean:
-	rm $(FORMAT).fmt
-	rm *.dvi *.log *.aux *.glo *.idx *.ind *.gls *.lof *.lot *.toc
-
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/alltt.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/alltt.dtx
index 9b546ca9d82..bb5e2213ef4 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/alltt.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/alltt.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 % \iffalse meta-comment
 %
-% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006
 % The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 % in this file. 
 % 
@@ -8,12 +8,12 @@
 % -------------------------------------------
 % 
 % It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
 % of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 % The latest version of this license is in
 %    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
 % 
 % This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
 % 
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/alltt.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/alltt.ins
index eceb19c9c86..f303c6bac6a 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/alltt.ins
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/alltt.ins
@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
 %% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
 %% LaTeX or TeX.
 %%
-%% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+%% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005
 %% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 %% in this file. 
 %% 
@@ -11,12 +11,12 @@
 %% -------------------------------------------
 %% 
 %% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3b
 %% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 %% The latest version of this license is in
 %%    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%% and version 1.3b or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+%% version 2005/12/01 or later.
 %% 
 %% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
 %% 
@@ -40,7 +40,7 @@
 
 This is a generated file.
 
-Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006
 The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 in this file. 
 
@@ -48,12 +48,12 @@ This file was generated from file(s) of the LaTeX base system.
 --------------------------------------------------------------
 
 It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
 of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 The latest version of this license is in
    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
+and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+version 2005/12/01 or later.
 
 This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
 
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/autoload.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/autoload.ins
index 62da1132621..0991f19cbb0 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/autoload.ins
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/autoload.ins
@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
 %% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
 %% LaTeX or TeX.
 %%
-%% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+%% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005
 %% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 %% in this file. 
 %% 
@@ -11,12 +11,12 @@
 %% -------------------------------------------
 %% 
 %% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3b
 %% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 %% The latest version of this license is in
 %%    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%% and version 1.3b or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+%% version 2005/12/01 or later.
 %% 
 %% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
 %% 
@@ -41,7 +41,7 @@
 
 This is a generated file.
 
-Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006
 The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 in this file. 
 
@@ -49,12 +49,12 @@ This file was generated from file(s) of the LaTeX base system.
 --------------------------------------------------------------
 
 It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
 of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 The latest version of this license is in
    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
+and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+version 2005/12/01 or later.
 
 This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
 
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/cfgguide.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/cfgguide.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..fac0b2d0132
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/cfgguide.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,561 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file. 
+% 
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+% 
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+%    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
+% 
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+% 
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+% 
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution 
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with 
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+% 
+% \fi
+% Filename: cfgguide.tex
+
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1995/12/01]
+
+\documentclass{ltxguide}[1995/11/28]
+
+\newcommand{\filesection}[1]{\subsection{\sffamily{#1}}}
+\newcommand{\iniTeX}{ini\TeX}
+
+\setcounter{secnumdepth}{0}
+
+\title{Configuration options for \LaTeXe}
+
+\author{\copyright~Copyright 1998, 2001, 2003 \LaTeX3 Project Team.\\
+   All rights reserved.}
+
+\date{14 February 2003}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\maketitle
+
+\tableofcontents
+
+\newpage
+
+\section{Configuring \LaTeX}
+
+Since one of the main aims of the new standard \LaTeX{} is to give all
+users the freedom provided by a reliable document processing system
+linked to a highly portable document format, the number of
+configuration possibilities is strictly limited.  The reasons for this
+are explained in more detail in the article
+\textit{Modifying \LaTeX{}} in the file \texttt{modguide.tex}.
+An important consequence of this is that any document that relies on
+any extension package must declare this package within the document
+file; this helps to ensure that the document will work at a different
+site, where the \LaTeX{} system may be configured differently.
+
+Local configuration options are, by convention, placed in
+`configuration files', which have extension |.cfg|.  This document
+describes the possibilities for configuration in this release of
+\LaTeX; it also explains how to configure the font definition files to
+take advantage of the available fonts.
+
+The last section considers briefly how to proceed if you require
+further customisation of the formatter.
+
+
+\section{System configuration}
+
+\filesection{texsys.cfg}
+
+This is the only configuration file that \emph{must} be present.
+During installation, if \LaTeX\ cannot find a file with this name
+then a default file |texsys.cfg|, consisting entirely of comments, is
+written out and used. Note that, until this file has been read,
+\LaTeX{} is not able to test reliably whether a given file exists on
+the system.
+
+The contents of the file |texsys.cfg| allow \LaTeX{} to cope with
+various differences between the behaviours of different \TeX{} systems,
+mainly in relation to file handling.  The default version of this file
+contains, in its comments, possible settings that may be needed for a
+range of \TeX{} systems.  For more information, typeset the file
+|ltdirchk.dtx|.
+
+If you have copied your \LaTeX{} installation from a computer that
+used a different operating system then you may well have a version of
+|texsys.cfg| that will make it difficult to install \LaTeX{} on your
+system.  If this happens then start the process again with an empty
+|texsys.cfg| file; this will produce an installation that should, at
+least, allow you to typeset the documentation.  However, it is
+possible that \LaTeX{} can still find only those files that are in the
+current directory; in this case you must set the macro |\input@path|
+correctly for your system.
+
+
+\section{Configuring the \LaTeX\ format}
+
+There are four configuration files that enable personal preferences to
+be incorporated into the \LaTeX{} format file |latex.fmt|.  The range
+of preferences that can be configured by these files is strictly
+limited as this helps to ensure document portability.
+
+All four files work in the same way: if the file \m{file}|.cfg| is
+found, it will be input by \iniTeX; otherwise a default file
+\m{file}|.ltx| will be input; this is sometimes done via a
+minimal \m{file}|.cfg| that simply inputs \m{file}|.ltx|.  Thus,
+providing your own version of any of these |.cfg| files can completely
+override any settings in the corresponding default standard |.ltx|
+file.
+
+
+\subsection{Font configuration}
+
+Before you even think about configuring the font declarations by
+producing a file |fontmath.cfg| or |fonttext.cfg|, you should
+read the documented file |fontdef.dtx|.  This is the source file from
+which the default files |fonttext.ltx| and |fontmath.ltx| are
+produced; it contains information concerning the
+contents of the default files and what sort of customisation is
+possible.  In particular, it describes in detail the effects of
+individual customisations on document portability including: which
+customisations can be made without endangering the ability to exchange
+documents with other sites (even if the formatting differs); and which
+things should be left untouched because they will make your system so
+different from others that the documents it produces will be
+non-portable.
+
+\textbf{WARNING } Please note that use of either of these font
+configuration files has the following consequences.
+   \begin{itemize}
+   \item Since the content of the file |fontdef.dtx| \emph{might}
+     change in the future, anyone writing a font configuration file
+     must be prepared to update it for use with future releases.
+   \item Documents produced on your system are likely, at best, to be
+     portable only in the sense of being processable at a different
+     site---the actual formatting will not be the same if different
+     fonts are used.
+   \item The \LaTeX3 project team will not be able to support you in
+     diagnosing problems if these cannot be reproduced with a format
+     that does not use any configuration files.
+   \end{itemize}
+
+\filesection{fonttext.cfg}
+
+The file |fonttext.cfg| can contain declarations relating to the use
+of fonts in text modes.
+
+If it exists, it defines which font shapes, families and encodings are
+normally used in text mode, as well as the behavior of font attribute
+commands such as |\textbf| etc.
+
+It could be used, for example, to produce a \LaTeX\ format that, by
+default, typesets documents using Times fonts.  Be warned, however,
+that such customisation can have unfortunate consequences; so please
+read carefully this section and the file |fontdef.dtx| below if you
+are thinking of doing this.
+
+Please note carefully the above \textbf{warning}.
+
+\filesection{fontmath.cfg}
+
+The file |fontmath.cfg| can contain declarations relating to the use
+of fonts in math mode.
+
+If it exists, it defines which fonts in which sizes are used in math
+mode, and how they are used.  It also defines all the math mode
+commands that `are likely to' depend on the choice of math fonts used
+(e.g.~commands that depend on the position of a glyph in a math font).
+
+The main reason for the existence of this file is to provide for future
+updates when a standard math font encoding is available. Right now we
+do \emph{not} encourage the use of this configuration file other than
+for special applications. Writing a proper configuration file for math
+mode needs expert knowledge!
+
+Please note carefully the above \textbf{warning}.
+
+\filesection{preload.cfg}
+
+The contents of the file |preload.cfg| can control the preloading of
+commonly used fonts.  Preloading fonts speeds up the processing of
+documents but, because fonts cannot be `unloaded', you should not
+preload too many; otherwise you may be unable to process documents
+requiring unusual font families.
+
+The default file |preload.ltx| is produced from |preload.dtx|.  It
+loads only a few fonts and these are a good choice if you normally use
+documents at the default, 10\,pt, size. If you normally use 11\,pt
+or~12\,pt then the time for \LaTeX\ to startup may be noticeably
+decreased if you preload the corresponding fonts for the sizes you
+use.  Similarly, if you normally use a different font family, for
+example Times Roman (|ptm|) then you may want to preload fonts in this
+family rather than the default Computer Modern fonts.
+
+\subsection{Hyphenation configuration}
+
+\filesection{hyphen.cfg}
+
+In order to hyphenate text, \TeX{} must have hyphenation patterns and,
+since these patterns can be loaded only by \iniTeX, the choice of
+which patterns to load must be made when the format is created.
+
+The hyphenation patterns for American English are stored in the file
+named |hyphen.tex|; \LaTeX~2.09 always loaded this file when its
+format was made.
+
+With \LaTeXe{} it is possible to configure which hyphenation patterns
+are to be loaded into the format.  When \iniTeX{} is processing
+|latex.ltx|, it looks for a file called |hyphen.cfg|; this file can
+be used to control which hyphenation patterns are loaded.  If a file
+|hyphen.cfg| cannot be found then \iniTeX{} will load the file
+|hyphen.ltx|.
+
+The file |hyphen.ltx| loads the file |hyphen.tex| if it can find it;
+otherwise it stops with an error since a format with no hyphenation
+patterns is not very useful.  It then sets |\language=0| and it sets
+the values |\lefthyphenmin=2| and |\righthyphenmin=3|, which are
+needed for American English.
+
+Thus, if you want any other patterns to be loaded then you should
+create a file |hyphen.cfg|.  For each language for which you wish to
+load hyphenation patterns this file should:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item set |\language=|\m{number};
+\item load the file which contains the hyphenation patterns for that
+  language.
+\end{itemize}
+If the patterns you use require some definitions or assignments then
+a group should be used to keep such changes local to their file.
+
+\textbf{Note.} The hyphenation files that are read in should \emph{only}
+set the hyphenation tables for the language, using the commands
+|\hyphenation| and |\patterns|. In particular they should make no
+assignments to the lowercase/uppercase tables (|\lccode| and
+|\uccode|) and should not make any global command definitions to be
+used after the file has been read. Unfortunately some older
+hyphenation files do contain such settings; thus they are
+\emph{incompatible} with the mechanisms \LaTeX\ uses to ensure
+independence of input and output encodings.
+
+After this the file |hyphen.cfg| should:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item set |\language| to its default value;
+\item set |\lefthyphenmin| and |\righthyphenmin| to the correct values
+  for this default language.
+\end{itemize}
+
+There are packages available, such as `french', that can help you with
+this configuration.  The `babel' collection contains many examples of
+setting up a multi-lingual \LaTeX{} format.  The documentation in
+|lthyphen.dtx| (the source file for |hyphen.ltx|) also contains some
+useful examples.
+
+[We intend in a future release of \LaTeX{} to provide a set of
+standard commands for use in configuring hyphenation.]
+
+
+\section{Configuring the font definition files}
+
+If you have special fonts available (or if some fonts are unavailable)
+at your site then you may need to produce customised versions of the
+font definition files; these have extension \texttt{.fd} and are read
+by \LaTeX{} to obtain information about the font files installed at your
+system and when to load them.
+
+Although we do not encourage such customisation, you will find
+information about the content of these files and its syntax in the
+documented source file \texttt{cmfonts.fdd} and
+\textit{\LaTeXe{} font selection} in the file \texttt{fntguide.tex}.
+[We hope to be able to provide further information and examples on
+this subject at some time in the future.]
+
+Please note that the use of customised font definition files has the
+following consequences.
+   \begin{itemize}
+   \item Documents produced on your system will, at best, to be
+     portable only in the sense of being processable at a different
+     site---the actual formatting will not be the same if different
+     fonts are used.
+   \item The \LaTeX3 project team will not be able to support you in
+     diagnosing problems if these cannot be reproduced with a format
+     that does not use any customised font definition files.
+   \end{itemize}
+
+Please also note that the whilst licence conditions on the standard
+font definition files allow you to produce a customised version for
+your own use, they do not allow you to distribute such a customised
+font definition file under the original file name!
+
+
+\subsection*{Note to system administrators}
+
+If you install a version of \LaTeX{} with a locally configured font
+set-up then this system is likely to produce documents that are no
+longer `formatting compatible'; for example, the use of different
+default fonts will most likely produce different line and page breaks.
+If you do install, on a multi-user system, a system that is configured
+in such a way that it is not `formatting compatible' then you should
+consider carefully the needs of users who need to create portable
+documents.  A good way to provide for their needs is to make
+available, in addition, a standard form of \LaTeX{} without any
+`formatting incompatible' customisations.
+
+
+\section{Configuring compatibility mode}
+
+When processing documents that begin with |\documentstyle|, \LaTeXe{}
+tries to emulate the old \LaTeX~2.09 system as far as possible.
+
+\filesection{latex209.cfg}
+
+Whenever a \LaTeX{} document starts with |\documentstyle|, rather than
+with |\documentclass|, \LaTeX{} assumes that it is a \LaTeX~2.09
+document and therefore processes it in `compatibility mode'.  This
+does the following:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item sets the flag |\@compatibilitytrue|;
+\item inputs the file |latex209.def|;
+\item inputs the file |latex209.cfg| if it exists.
+\end{itemize}
+
+The \LaTeX~2.09 set-up allowed the format itself to be customised.
+When making the format with \iniTeX, the process ended with this
+request:
+\begin{quote}\tt
+   Input any local modifications here.
+\end{quote}
+
+If your site did input any modifications at that point then the
+\LaTeXe{} `compatibility mode' will not fully emulate \LaTeX~2.09
+\emph{as installed at your site}.  In this case you should put all
+these `local modifications' into a file called |latex209.cfg| and put
+this file in the default input path at your site.  These `local
+modifications', although not stored in the format, will then be loaded
+before any old-style document is processed.  This should ensure that
+you can continue to process any old documents that made use of this
+local customisation.
+
+
+\section[Configuration files for standard packages and classes]%
+        {Configuration files for standard packages\\ and classes}
+
+Most of the packages in the distribution do not have any associated
+configuration files. The exceptions are listed here.
+
+\filesection{sfonts.cfg}
+
+The file |sfonts.cfg| can contain declarations relating to the use of
+fonts in the slides class.
+If it exists, it is read instead of the file |sfonts.def|.
+
+Please note that use of this configuration file has the following
+consequences.
+   \begin{itemize}
+   \item Since the font set-up for slides has not yet been revised to
+     fit modern usage, the content of this file should be completely
+     updated sometime.  Thus anyone writing such a configuration
+     file must be prepared to update it for use with future releases.
+   \item Documents are portable only in the sense of being processable
+     at a different site---the actual formatting will not be the same
+     if different fonts are used.
+   \item The \LaTeX3 project team will not be able to support you in
+     diagnosing problems if these cannot be reproduced with a format
+     that does not use this configuration file.
+   \end{itemize}
+
+
+\filesection{ltnews.cfg}
+
+The file |ltnews.cfg| can be used to customise some aspects of the
+behaviour of the \textsf{ltnews} class; this class is used to typeset
+the the one page newsletter accompanying every \LaTeX{} distribution.
+If this file is present then it is read in at the beginning of the
+file |ltnews.cls|.
+
+
+\filesection{ltxdoc.cfg}
+
+The file |ltxdoc.cfg| can be used to customise some aspects of the
+behaviour of the \textsf{ltxdoc} class; this class is used to typeset
+the documented code in the |.dtx| files.  If this file is present then
+it is read in at the beginning of the file |ltxdoc.cls|.
+
+As this file is read before the \textsf{article} class is loaded, you
+may pass options to \textsf{article}. For example the following line
+might be added to |ltxdoc.cfg| to format the documentation for A4 paper
+instead of the default US letter paper size.
+\begin{quote}
+|\PassOptionsToClass{a4paper}{article}|
+\end{quote}
+You should note however, that even if paper size options are specified,
+the \textsf{ltxdoc} class always sets the |\textwidth| parameter to
+355\,pt, to enable 72 columns of text to appear in the verbatim code
+listings. If you really need to over-ride this you could use:
+\begin{quote}
+|\AtEndOfClass{\setlength{\textwidth}{ ...}}|
+\end{quote}
+To set the |\textwidth| to your desired value at the end of the
+\textsf{ltxdoc} class.
+
+By default, most of the |.dtx| documented code files in the
+distribution will produce a `description' section followed by full
+source listing of the package.  If you wish to suppress the source
+listings you may add the following line to |ltxdoc.cfg|:
+\begin{quote}
+|\AtBeginDocument{\OnlyDescription}|
+\end{quote}
+
+The documentation of the \textsf{ltxdoc} package, which may be typeset
+from the file |ltxdoc.dtx|, contains more examples of the use of this
+configuration file.
+
+\filesection{ltxguide.cfg}
+
+The class \textsf{ltxguide} is used by the `guide' documents, such as
+this document, in the \LaTeX\ distribution.  A configuration file
+|ltxguide.cfg| may be used with this class in a way very similar to
+the customisation of the \textsf{ltxdoc} class described in the
+previous section.
+
+\section{Configuration for other supported packages}
+
+The `graphics' bundle of packages needs two configuration files,
+primarily to specify the driver used to process the |.dvi| file that
+\LaTeX{} produces. More documentation on these files comes with the
+graphics bundle but we mention them here for completeness.
+
+\filesection{graphics.cfg}
+   Normally this file just specifies a default option, by calling
+   |\ExecuteOptions|, for example |\ExecuteOptions{dvips}| or
+   |\ExecuteOptions{textures}|.
+
+   This file is read by the \textsf{graphics} package, and so affects
+   all the packages in the bundle that are based on \textsf{graphics}:
+   \textsf{graphicx}, \textsf{epsfig}, \textsf{lscape}.
+
+\filesection{color.cfg}
+   Normally this file is identical to |graphics.cfg|. It specifies the
+   default driver option for the \textsf{color} package.
+
+\section{Non-standard versions}
+
+If you feel the need to make a version of \LaTeX{} that differs from
+the standard version in ways that are not possible using the above
+configuration possibilities, then you should first read
+\textit{Modifying \LaTeX{}} in the file |modguide.tex|; this
+will probably make you realise that you do not have any such need.
+
+Thus we are sure that you will never need to create a non-standard
+version and, even if you do create one, we hope that you will not
+distribute such a version.  Nevertheless, you are permitted to do this
+provided you take great care to do the following:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item
+respect the conditions in legal.txt and individual files regarding
+modification of files and changing the name;
+
+\item
+change all the relevant `|\typeout| banners': i.e.~those produced by
+all the non-standard files in your version and by the format;
+
+\item
+  ensure that the method used to run your version is clearly
+  distinguished from that used to run standard \LaTeX{}; e.g.~by using
+  a command name or menu entry that is clearly different from
+  \texttt{latex} (or \texttt{LaTeX} etc).
+\end{itemize}
+
+\subsection{Examples}
+
+Since we have been prompted, despite our misgivings, to document how
+to do this by members of the League for Programming Freedom, it seems
+appropriate to describe here a possible modification of \LaTeX{} to
+produce a system called fsf\TeX.
+
+To do this, you should create a file called \texttt{fsftex.tex} and
+then run it using \iniTeX{} and the standard \LaTeX{} format.
+
+The contents of the file \texttt{fsftex.tex} should be as shown on
+page \pageref{fsfcode}.  The particular changes to the \LaTeX{} kernel
+that you wish to make need to be added to the file at the position
+indicated.  You can also choose the extensions you want to use for the
+class and package files in your system.
+
+\newpage
+\label{fsfcode}
+
+\begin{footnotesize}
+\begin{verbatim}
+% fsftex.tex
+%
+% iniTEX Source code to make a `fsftex' format.
+%
+% To make this format on Unix:
+%
+%   initex \&latex fsftex
+%
+% Then to run the format on file.tex:
+%
+%   tex &fsftex file
+%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% *** VERY IMPORTANT!!! ***
+% Change the typeout banner so users know that they
+%       are NOT running Standard LaTeX.
+\everyjob{\typeout{fsfTeX 1.0 based on LaTeX2e \fmtversion}}
+\makeatletter
+
+% fsfTeX changes some LaTeX internals:
+%   ... put what you like here ...
+\def \fsf@xxxx {Some arbitrary \emph{freely modifiable} code goes here}
+
+% fsfTeX class files have extension .fcl (this week):
+\def \@clsextension {fcl}
+
+% fsfTeX package files have extension .fsy:
+\def \@pkgextension {fsy}
+
+% Change the file handling so that when a fsfTeX package or class
+% is not available, the standard LaTeX file will be read.
+%
+% For example, \documentclass{article} will load article.fcl if such
+% a file exists, but article.cls otherwise.  This allows arbitrary
+% processing on `article' documents without changing the standard
+% article.cls file.
+
+\let\fsf@missingfileerror\@missingfileerror
+
+\def\@missingfileerror#1#2{%
+  \ifx #2\@clsextension
+    \InputIfFileExists {#1.cls}%
+      {\wlog {fsfTeX: loading #1.cls rather than #1.#2.}}%
+      {\fsf@missingfileerror {#1}{#2}}%
+  \else
+    \ifx #2\@pkgextension
+      \InputIfFileExists {#1.sty}%
+        {\wlog {fsfTeX: loading #1.sty rather than #1.#2.}}%
+        {\fsf@missingfileerror {#1}{#2}}%
+    \else
+      \fsf@missingfileerror {#1}{#2}%
+    \fi
+  \fi
+}
+
+\makeatother
+\dump
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{footnotesize}
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/classes.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/classes.dtx
index 498bed48e0b..0f40af2b407 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/classes.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/classes.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 % \iffalse meta-comment
 %
-% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006
 % The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 % in this file. 
 % 
@@ -8,12 +8,12 @@
 % -------------------------------------------
 % 
 % It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
 % of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 % The latest version of this license is in
 %    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
 % 
 % This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
 % 
@@ -69,7 +69,7 @@
 %<*driver>
 \ProvidesFile{classes.drv}
 %</driver>
-              [2004/02/16 v1.4f
+              [2005/09/16 v1.4f
 %<article|report|book> Standard LaTeX document class]
 %<10pt|11pt|12pt>      Standard LaTeX file (size option)]
 %    \end{macrocode}
@@ -135,6 +135,7 @@
 %    We do want an index, using linenumbers
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \EnableCrossrefs
+\CodelineIndex
 %    \end{macrocode}
 %    We use so many \file{docstrip} modules that we set the
 %    \texttt{StandardModuleDepth} counter to 1.
@@ -1954,7 +1955,7 @@
 %
 %    We always start a new page, leave some white space and center the
 %    information. The title is set in a |\LARGE| font, the author
-%    names and the in a |\large| font.
+%    names and the date in a |\large| font.
 % \changes{v1.3o}{1995/11/02}{(CAR) Make \cs{footnote} always work in
 %      title, etc}
 %    \begin{macrocode}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/classes.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/classes.ins
index 0ae699f7832..0be40f11bd0 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/classes.ins
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/classes.ins
@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
 %% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
 %% LaTeX or TeX.
 %%
-%% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+%% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005
 %% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 %% in this file. 
 %% 
@@ -11,12 +11,12 @@
 %% -------------------------------------------
 %% 
 %% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3b
 %% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 %% The latest version of this license is in
 %%    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%% and version 1.3b or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+%% version 2005/12/01 or later.
 %% 
 %% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
 %% 
@@ -40,7 +40,7 @@
 
 This is a generated file.
 
-Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006
 The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 in this file. 
 
@@ -48,12 +48,12 @@ This file was generated from file(s) of the LaTeX base system.
 --------------------------------------------------------------
 
 It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
 of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 The latest version of this license is in
    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
+and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+version 2005/12/01 or later.
 
 This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
 
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/clsguide.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/clsguide.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..1ec54d934c9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/clsguide.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,1874 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file. 
+% 
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+% 
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+%    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
+% 
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+% 
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+% 
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution 
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with 
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+% 
+% \fi
+% Filename: clsguide.tex
+
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1995/12/01]
+
+\documentclass{ltxguide}[1995/11/28]
+
+\title{\LaTeXe~for class and package writers}
+
+\author{Copyright \copyright~1995--2006 The \LaTeX3 Project\\
+   All rights reserved}
+
+\date{15 February 2006} 
+
+\begin{document}
+ 
+\maketitle
+ 
+\tableofcontents
+ 
+\section{Introduction}
+
+This document is an introduction to writing classes and packages for
+\LaTeX{}, with special attention given to upgrading existing
+\LaTeX~2.09 packages to \LaTeXe{}.  The latter subject is also
+covered in an article by Johannes Braams published in TUGboat~15.3.
+ 
+\subsection{Writing classes and packages for \LaTeXe}
+ 
+\LaTeX{} is a document preparation system that enables the document
+writer to concentrate on the contents of their text, without bothering
+too much about the formatting of it.  For example, chapters are
+indicated by |\chapter{<title>}| rather than by selecting 18pt bold.
+ 
+The file that contains the information about how to turn logical
+structure (like `|\chapter|') into formatting (like `18pt bold ragged
+right') is a \emph{document class}.  In addition, some features (such
+as colour or included graphics) are independent of the document class
+and these are contained in \emph{packages}.
+ 
+One of the largest differences between \LaTeX~2.09 and \LaTeXe{} is in
+the commands used to write packages and classes.  In \LaTeX~2.09,
+there was very little support for writing |.sty| files, and so writers
+had to resort to using low-level commands.
+ 
+\LaTeXe{} provides high-level commands for structuring packages.
+It is also much easier to build classes and packages on top of each
+other, for example writing a local technical report class |cetechr|
+(for the Chemical Engineering department) based on |article|.
+ 
+\subsection{Overview}
+ 
+This document contains an overview of how to write classes and
+packages for \LaTeX{}.  It does \emph{not} introduce all of the
+commands necessary to write packages: these can be found in either
+\emph{\LaTeXbook} or \emph{\LaTeXcomp}.  But it does describe the new
+commands for structuring classes and packages.
+
+\begin{description}
+ 
+\item[Section~\ref{Sec:general}] contains some general advice about
+  writing classes and packages.  It describes the difference between
+  classes and packages, the command naming conventions, the use of
+  |doc| and |docstrip|, how \TeX's primitive file and box commands
+  interact with \LaTeX{}. It also contains some hints about general
+  \LaTeX{} style.
+ 
+\item[Section~\ref{Sec:structure}] describes the structure of classes
+  and packages.  This includes building classes and packages on top of
+  other classes and packages, declaring options and declaring
+  commands.  It also contains example classes.
+ 
+\item[Section~\ref{Sec:commands}] lists the new class and package
+   commands.
+ 
+ \item[Section~\ref{Sec:upgrade}] gives detailed advice on how to
+   upgrade existing \LaTeX~2.09 classes and packages to \LaTeXe{}.
+ 
+\end{description}
+ 
+\subsection{Further information}
+ 
+For a general introduction to \LaTeX{}, including the new features of
+\LaTeXe{}, you should read \emph{\LaTeXbook}
+by Leslie Lamport~\cite{A-W:LLa94}.
+ 
+A more detailed description of the new features of \LaTeX, including an
+overview of more than 200 packages and nearly 1000 ready to run examples, is
+to be found in \emph{\LaTeXcomp second edition} by Frank Mittelbach and
+Michel Goossens~\cite{A-W:MG2004}.
+
+The \LaTeX{} system is based on \TeX{}, which is
+described in \emph{The \TeX book} by Donald E.~Knuth~\cite{A-W:DEK91}.
+ 
+There are a number of documentation files which accompany every copy
+of \LaTeX{}.  A copy of \emph{\LaTeX{} News} will come out with each
+six-monthly release of \LaTeX{}, and is found in the files
+|ltnews*.tex|.  The author's guide \emph{\usrguide} describes the new
+\LaTeX{} document features; it is in |usrguide.tex|.  The guide
+\emph{\fntguide} describes the \LaTeX{} font selection scheme for
+class- and package-writers; it is in |fntguide.tex|. Configuring
+\LaTeX{} is covered by the guide \emph{\cfgguide} in
+\texttt{cfgguide.tex} whilst the philosophy behind our policy on 
+modifying \LaTeX{} is described in \emph{\modguide} in
+\texttt{modguide.tex}.
+
+The documented source code (from the files used to produce the kernel
+format via |latex.ltx|) is now available as
+\emph{The \LaTeXe\ Sources}.
+This very large document also includes an index of
+\LaTeX{} commands.  It can be typeset from the \LaTeX{} file
+|source2e.tex| in the |base| directory, using the source files and
+the class file |ltxdoc.cls| from this directory.
+
+For more information about \TeX{} and \LaTeX{}, please contact your
+local \TeX{} Users Group, or the international \TeX{} Users Group.
+Addresses and other details can be found at:
+\begin{quote}\small\label{addrs}
+    \texttt{http://www.tug.org/lugs.html}
+\end{quote}
+
+
+\subsection{Policy on standard classes}
+
+Many of the problem reports we receive concerning the standard classes
+are not concerned with bugs but are suggesting, more or less politely,
+that the design decisions embodied in them are `not optimal' and
+asking us to modify them.
+
+There are several reasons why we should not make such changes to these
+files.
+\begin{itemize}
+\item
+  However misguided, the current behaviour is clearly what was
+  intended when these classes were designed.
+\item
+  It is not good practice to change such aspects of `standard classes'
+  because many people will be relying on them.
+\end{itemize}
+
+We have therefore decided not to even consider making such
+modifications, nor to spend time justifying that decision.  This does
+not mean that we do not agree that there are many deficiencies in the
+design of these classes, but we have many tasks with higher priority
+than continually explaining why the standard classes for \LaTeX{}
+cannot be changed.
+
+We would, of course, welcome the production of better classes, or of
+packages that can be used to enhance these classes.  So your first
+thought when you consider such a deficiency will, we hope, be ``what
+can I do to improve this?''  
+
+Similar considerations apply to those parts of the kernel that are
+implementing design decisions, many of which should be left to the
+class file but are not in the current system.  We realise that in such
+cases it is much more difficult for you to rectify the problem
+yourself but it is also the case that making such changes in the
+kernel would probably be a major project for us; therefore such
+enhancements will have to wait for \LaTeX3.
+
+\section{Writing classes and packages}
+\label{Sec:writing}
+ 
+This section covers some general points concerned with writing
+\LaTeX{} classes and packages.
+
+
+\subsection{Old versions}
+
+If you are upgrading an existing \LaTeX~2.09 style file then we
+recommend freezing the 2.09 version and no longer maintaining it.
+Experience with the various dialects of \LaTeX{} which existed in the
+early 1990's suggests that maintaining packages for different versions
+of \LaTeX{} is almost impossible.  It will, of course, be necessary
+for some organisations to maintain both versions in parallel for some
+time but this is not essential for those packages and classes
+supported by individuals: they should support only the new standard
+\LaTeXe{}, not obsolete versions of \LaTeX{}.
+
+
+\subsection{Using `docstrip' and `doc'}
+ 
+If you are going to write a large class or package for \LaTeX{} then
+you should consider using the |doc| software which comes with
+\LaTeX{}. 
+\LaTeX{} classes and packages written using this can be
+processed in two ways: they can be run through \LaTeX{}, to produce
+documentation; and they can be processed with |docstrip|, to produce
+the |.cls| or |.sty| file.
+ 
+The |doc| software can automatically generate indexes of definitions,
+indexes of command use, and change-log lists.  It is very useful for
+maintaining and documenting large \TeX{} sources.
+ 
+The documented sources of the \LaTeX{} kernel itself, and of the
+standard classes, etc, are |doc| documents; they are in the |.dtx|
+files in the distribution.  You can, in fact, typeset the source code
+of the kernel as one long document, complete with index, by running
+\LaTeX{} on |source2e.tex|.  Typesetting these documents uses the
+class file |ltxdoc.cls|.
+ 
+For more information on |doc| and |docstrip|, consult the files
+|docstrip.dtx|, |doc.dtx|, and \emph{\LaTeXcomp}.  For examples of its
+use, look at the |.dtx| files.
+
+\subsection{Is it a class or a package?}
+\label{Sec:classorpkg}
+ 
+The first thing to do when you want to put some new \LaTeX{} commands
+in a file is to decide whether it should be a \emph{document class} or a
+\emph{package}.  The rule of thumb is:
+\begin{quote}
+  If the commands could be used with any document class, then make
+  them a package; and if not, then make them a class.
+\end{quote}
+
+There are two major types of class: those like |article|, |report| or
+|letter|, which are free-standing; and those which are extensions or
+variations of other classes---for example, the |proc| document class,
+which is built on the |article| document class.
+
+Thus, a company might have a local |ownlet| class for printing letters
+with their own headed note-paper.  Such a class would build on top of
+the existing |letter| class but it cannot be used with any other
+document class, so we have |ownlet.cls| rather than |ownlet.sty|.
+ 
+The |graphics| package, in contrast, provides commands for including
+images into a \LaTeX{} document.  Since these commands can be used
+with any document class, we have |graphics.sty| rather than
+|graphics.cls|.
+ 
+
+\subsection{Command names}
+ 
+\LaTeX{} has three types of command.
+ 
+There are the author commands, such as |\section|, |\emph| and
+|\times|:  most of these have short names, all in lower case.
+ 
+There are also the class and package writer commands:
+most of these have long mixed-case names such as the following.
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \InputIfFileExists  \RequirePackage  \PassOptionsToClass
+\end{verbatim}
+ 
+Finally, there are the internal commands used in the \LaTeX{}
+implementation, such as |\@tempcnta|, |\@ifnextchar| and |\@eha|:
+most of these commands contain |@| in their name, which means they
+cannot be used in documents, only in class and package files.
+ 
+Unfortunately, for historical reasons the distinction between these
+commands is often blurred.  For example, |\hbox| is an internal
+command which should only be used in the \LaTeX{} kernel, whereas
+|\m@ne| is the constant $-1$ and could have been |\MinusOne|.
+ 
+However, this rule of thumb is still useful: if a command has |@| in
+its name then it is not part of the supported \LaTeX{} language---and
+its behaviour may change in future releases!  If a command is
+mixed-case, or is described in \emph{\LaTeXbook}, then you can rely on
+future releases of \LaTeXe{} supporting the command.
+ 
+\subsection{Box commands and colour}
+\label{Sec:colour}
+ 
+Even if you do not intend to use colour in your own documents, by
+taking note of the points in this section you can ensure that your
+class or package is compatible with the |color| package. This may
+benefit people using your class or package who have access to colour
+printers.
+ 
+The simplest way to ensure `colour safety' is to always use \LaTeX{}
+box commands rather than \TeX{} primitives, that is use |\sbox| rather
+than |\setbox|, |\mbox| rather than |\hbox| and |\parbox| or
+the |minipage| environment rather than |\vbox|.
+The \LaTeX{} box commands have new options which mean that they are now
+as powerful as the \TeX{} primitives.
+ 
+As an example of what can go wrong, consider that in 
+|{\ttfamily <text>}|
+the font is restored just \emph{before} the |}|, whereas in the
+similar looking construction
+|{\color{green} <text>}|
+the colour is restored just \emph{after} the final |}|. Normally this
+distinction does not matter at all; but consider a primitive \TeX{}
+box assignment such as:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \setbox0=\hbox{\color{green} <text>}
+\end{verbatim}
+Now the colour-restore occurs after the |}| and so is \emph{not}
+stored in the box. Exactly what bad effects this can have depends on
+how colour is implemented: it can range from getting the wrong
+colours in the rest of the document, to causing errors in the
+dvi-driver used to print the document.
+ 
+Also of interest is the command |\normalcolor|.   This is 
+normally just |\relax| (i.e., does nothing)
+but you can use it rather like |\normalfont| to 
+set regions of the page such as captions or section headings to the 
+`main document colour'.
+
+
+\subsection{Defining text and math characters}
+\label{Sec:chars}
+
+Because \LaTeXe{} supports different encodings, definitions of commands
+for producing symbols, accents, composite glyphs, etc.\ must be
+defined using the commands provided for this purpose and described in
+\emph{\fntguide}.  This part of the system is still under development
+so such tasks should be undertaken with great caution.
+
+Also, |\DeclareRobustCommand| should be used for encoding-independent
+commands of this type.
+
+Note that it is no longer possible to refer to the math font set-up
+outside math mode: for example, neither |\textfont 1| nor
+|\scriptfont 2| are guaranteed to be defined in other modes.
+
+
+\subsection{General style}
+\label{Sec:general}
+
+The new system provides many commands designed to help you produce
+well-structured class and package files that are both robust and
+portable.  This section outlines some ways to make intelligent use of
+these. 
+
+\subsubsection{Loading other files}
+\label{Sec:loading}
+
+\NEWdescription{1995/12/01}
+\LaTeX{} provides these commands: 
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \LoadClass        \LoadClassWithOptions
+   \RequirePackage   \RequirePackageWithOptions
+\end{verbatim}
+for using classes or packages inside other classes or packages.  We
+recommend strongly that you use them, rather than the primitive
+|\input| command, for a number of reasons.
+ 
+Files loaded with |\input <filename>| will not be listed in the
+|\listfiles| list.
+ 
+If a package is always loaded with |\RequirePackage...| or |\usepackage|
+then, even if its loading is requested several times, it will be
+loaded only once.  By contrast, if it is loaded with |\input| then it
+can be loaded more than once; such an extra loading may waste time and
+memory and it may produce strange results.
+ 
+If a package provides option-processing then, again, strange results
+are possible if the package is |\input| rather than loaded by means of
+|\usepackage| or |\RequirePackage...|.
+ 
+If the package |foo.sty| loads the package |baz.sty| by use of
+|\input baz.sty| then the user will get a warning:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   LaTeX Warning: You have requested package `foo',
+                  but the package provides `baz'.
+\end{verbatim}
+Thus, for several reasons, using |\input| to load packages is not a
+good idea.
+ 
+Unfortunately, if you are upgrading the file |myclass.sty| to a class
+file then you have to make sure that any old files which contain
+|\input myclass.sty| still work.
+
+This was also true for the standard classes (|article|, |book| and
+|report|), since a lot of existing \LaTeX~2.09 document styles contain
+|\input article.sty|.  The approach which we use to solve this is
+to provide minimal files |article.sty|, |book.sty| and |report.sty|,
+which simply load the appropriate class files.
+
+For example, |article.sty| contains just the following lines:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
+   \@obsoletefile{article.cls}{article.sty}
+   \LoadClass{article}
+\end{verbatim}
+You may wish to do the same or, if you think that it is safe to do so,
+you may decide to just remove |myclass.sty|.
+ 
+\subsubsection{Make it robust}
+
+We consider it good practice, when writing packages and classes, to use
+\LaTeX{} commands as much as possible.
+
+Thus, instead of using |\def...| we recommend using one of
+|\newcommand|, |\renewcommand| or |\providecommand|; |\CheckCommand| is
+also useful. Doing this makes
+it less likely that you will inadvertently redefine a command, giving
+unexpected results.
+ 
+When you define an environment, use |\newenvironment| or
+|\renewenvironment| instead |\def\foo{...}| and |\def\endfoo{...}|.
+ 
+If you need to set or change the value of a \m{dimen} or \m{skip}
+register, use |\setlength|.
+ 
+To manipulate boxes, use \LaTeX{} commands such as |\sbox|,
+|\mbox| and |\parbox| rather than |\setbox|, |\hbox| and |\vbox|.
+ 
+Use |\PackageError|, |\PackageWarning| or |\PackageInfo| (or the
+equivalent class commands) rather than |\@latexerr|, |\@warning| or
+|\wlog|.
+ 
+It is still possible to declare options by defining |\ds@<option>| and
+calling |\@options|; but we recommend the |\DeclareOption| and
+|\ProcessOptions| commands instead.  These are more powerful and use
+less memory.  So rather than using:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \def\ds@draft{\overfullrule 5pt}
+   \@options
+\end{verbatim}
+you should use:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \DeclareOption{draft}{\setlength{\overfullrule}{5pt}}
+   \ProcessOptions\relax
+\end{verbatim}
+
+The advantage of this kind of practice is that your code is more
+readable and, more important, that it is less likely to break when
+used with future versions of \LaTeX{}.
+
+\subsubsection{Make it portable}
+
+It is also sensible to make your files are as portable as possible. To
+ensure this; they should contain only visible 7-bit text; and the
+filenames should contain at most eight characters (plus the three
+letter extension).  Also, of course, it \textbf{must not} have the
+same name as a file in the standard \LaTeX{} distribution, however
+similar its contents may be to one of these files.
+
+It is also useful if local classes or packages have a common prefix,
+for example the University of Nowhere classes might begin with |unw|.
+This helps to avoid every University having its own thesis class, all
+called |thesis.cls|.
+ 
+If you rely on some features of the \LaTeX{} kernel, or on a package,
+please specify the release-date you need.  For example, the package
+error commands were introduced in the June 1994 release so, if you use
+them then you should put:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1994/06/01]
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsubsection{Useful hooks}
+
+Some packages and document styles had to redefine the command
+|\document| or |\enddocument| to achieve their goal.  This is no
+longer necessary. You can now use the `hooks' |\AtBeginDocument| and
+|\AtEndDocument| (see Section~\ref{Sec:delays}).  Again, using these
+hooks makes it less likely that your code breaks with future versions
+of \LaTeX{}. It also makes it more likely that your package can work
+together with someone else's.
+
+\NEWdescription{1996/12/01}
+However, note that code in the |\AtBeginDocument| hook is part of the
+preamble.  Thus there are restrictions on what can be put there; in
+particular, no typesetting can be done.
+
+\section{The structure of a class or package}
+\label{Sec:structure}
+ 
+\LaTeXe{} classes and packages have more structure than \LaTeX~2.09
+style files did.  The outline of a class or package file is:
+\begin{description}
+\item[Identification] The file says that it is a \LaTeXe{} package or
+   class, and gives a short description of itself.
+\item[Preliminary declarations]
+   Here the file declares some commands and can also load
+   other files.  Usually these commands will be just those needed for
+   the code used in the declared options.
+\item[Options] The file declares and processes its options.
+\item[More declarations] This is where the file does most of its work:
+   declaring new variables, commands and fonts; and loading other files.
+\end{description}
+ 
+\subsection{Identification}
+ 
+The first thing a class or package file does is identify itself.
+Package files do this as follows:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
+   \ProvidesPackage{<package>}[<date> <other information>]
+\end{verbatim}
+For example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
+   \ProvidesPackage{latexsym}[1994/06/01 Standard LaTeX package]
+\end{verbatim}
+Class files do this as follows:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
+   \ProvidesClass{<class-name>}[<date> <other information>]
+\end{verbatim}
+For example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
+   \ProvidesClass{article}[1994/06/01 Standard LaTeX class]
+\end{verbatim}
+\NEWdescription{1998/06/19}
+The \m{date} should be given in the form `\textsc{yyyy/mm/dd}' and
+must be present if the optional argument is used (this is also true
+for the |\NeedsTeXFormat| command). 
+Any derivation from this syntax will result in low-level \TeX{}
+errors---the commands expect a valid syntax to speed up the daily
+usage of the package or class and make no provision for the case that
+the developer made a mistake!
+
+This date is checked whenever a user specifies a date in their
+|\documentclass| or |\usepackage| command.  For example, if you wrote:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \documentclass{article}[1995/12/23]
+\end{verbatim}
+then users at a different location 
+would get a warning that their copy of |article| was out of
+date.
+ 
+The description of a class is displayed when the class is used.  The
+description of a package is put into the log file.  These descriptions
+are also displayed by the |\listfiles| command.  The phrase
+\texttt{Standard LaTeX} \textbf{must not} be used in the identification
+banner of any file other than those in the standard \LaTeX{}
+distribution.
+
+ 
+\subsection{Using classes and packages}
+ 
+The first major difference between \LaTeX~2.09 style files and
+\LaTeXe{} packages and classes is that \LaTeXe{} supports
+\emph{modularity}, in the sense of building files from small
+building-blocks rather than using large single files.
+ 
+A \LaTeX{} package or class can load a package as follows:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \RequirePackage[<options>]{<package>}[<date>]
+\end{verbatim}
+For example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \RequirePackage{ifthen}[1994/06/01]
+\end{verbatim}
+This command has the same syntax as the author command |\usepackage|.
+It allows packages or classes to use features provided by other
+packages.  For example, by loading the |ifthen| package, a package
+writer can use the `if\dots then\dots else\dots' commands provided
+by that package.
+ 
+A \LaTeX{} class can load one other class as follows:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \LoadClass[<options>]{<class-name>}[<date>]
+\end{verbatim}
+For example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \LoadClass[twocolumn]{article}
+\end{verbatim}
+This command has the same syntax as the author command |\documentclass|.
+It allows classes to be based on the syntax and appearance of another
+class.  For example, by loading the |article| class, a class writer
+only has to change the bits of |article| they don't like, rather than
+writing a new class from scratch.
+
+\NEWfeature{1995/12/01}
+The following commands can be used in the common case that you want to
+simply load a class or package file with exactly those options that
+are being used by the current class.
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \LoadClassWithOptions{<class-name>}[<date>]
+   \RequirePackageWithOptions{<package>}[<date>]
+\end{verbatim}
+For example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \LoadClassWithOptions{article}
+   \RequirePackageWithOptions{graphics}[1995/12/01]
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsection{Declaring options}
+ 
+\NEWdescription{1998/12/01}
+The other major difference between \LaTeX~2.09 styles and \LaTeXe{}
+packages and classes is in option handling.  Packages and classes can
+now declare options and these can be specified by authors; for
+example, the |twocolumn| option is declared by the |article| class.
+Note that the name of an option should contain only those characters
+allowed in a `\LaTeX{} name'; in particular it must not contain any
+control sequences.
+
+An option is declared as follows:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \DeclareOption{<option>}{<code>}
+\end{verbatim}
+For example, the |dvips| option (slightly simplified)
+to the |graphics| package is implemented as:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \DeclareOption{dvips}{\input{dvips.def}}
+\end{verbatim}
+This means that when an author writes |\usepackage[dvips]{graphics}|,
+the file |dvips.def| is loaded.  As another example, the |a4paper|
+option is declared in the |article| class to set the |\paperheight|
+and |\paperwidth| lengths:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \DeclareOption{a4paper}{%
+      \setlength{\paperheight}{297mm}%
+      \setlength{\paperwidth}{210mm}%
+   }
+\end{verbatim}
+Sometimes a user will request an option which the class
+or package has not explicitly declared.  By default this will produce
+a warning (for classes) or error (for packages); this behaviour
+can be altered as follows:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \DeclareOption*{<code>}
+\end{verbatim}
+For example, to make the package |fred| produce a warning rather than
+an error for unknown options, you could specify:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \DeclareOption*{%
+      \PackageWarning{fred}{Unknown option `\CurrentOption'}%
+   }
+\end{verbatim}
+Then, if an author writes |\usepackage[foo]{fred}|, they will get a
+warning \texttt{Package fred Warning: Unknown option `foo'.}  As
+another example, the |fontenc| package tries to load a file
+|<ENC>enc.def| whenever the \m{ENC} option is used.  This
+can be done by writing:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \DeclareOption*{%
+      \input{\CurrentOption enc.def}%
+   }
+\end{verbatim}
+\NEWdescription{1998/12/01}
+It is possible to pass options on to another package or class, using
+the command |\PassOptionsToPackage| or |\PassOptionsToClass| (note
+that this is a specialised operation that works only for option
+names).  For example, to pass every unknown option on to the |article|
+class, you can use:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \DeclareOption*{%
+      \PassOptionsToClass{\CurrentOption}{article}%
+   }
+\end{verbatim}
+If you do this then you should make sure you load the class at some
+later point, otherwise the options will never be processed!
+ 
+So far, we have explained only how to declare options, not how to
+execute them.  To process the options with which the file was called,
+you should use:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \ProcessOptions\relax
+\end{verbatim}
+This executes the \m{code} for each option that was both specified and
+declared (see Section~\ref{Sec:commands.options} for details of how
+this is done).
+ 
+For example, if the |jane| package file contains:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \DeclareOption{foo}{\typeout{Saw foo.}}
+   \DeclareOption{baz}{\typeout{Saw baz.}}
+   \DeclareOption*{\typeout{What's \CurrentOption?}}
+   \ProcessOptions\relax
+\end{verbatim}
+and an author writes |\usepackage[foo,bar]{jane}|, then they will see
+the messages \texttt{Saw foo.} and \texttt{What's bar?}
+ 
+\subsection{A minimal class file}
+ 
+Most of the work of a class or package is in defining new commands, or
+changing the appearance of documents.  This is done in the body of the
+package, using commands such as |\newcommand| or |\setlength|.
+
+\LaTeXe{} provides several new commands to help class and package
+writers; these are described in detail in Section~\ref{Sec:commands}.
+ 
+There are four things that every class file \emph{must} contain: these
+are a definition of |\normalsize|, values for |\textwidth| and
+|\textheight| and a specification for page-numbering.  So a minimal
+document class file\footnote {This class is now in the standard
+distribution, as \texttt{minimal.cls}.} looks like this:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
+   \ProvidesClass{minimal}[1995/10/30 Standard LaTeX minimal class]
+   \renewcommand{\normalsize}{\fontsize{10pt}{12pt}\selectfont}
+   \setlength{\textwidth}{6.5in}
+   \setlength{\textheight}{8in}
+   \pagenumbering{arabic}       % needed even though this class will
+                                % not show page numbers
+\end{verbatim}
+However, this class file will not support footnotes, marginals,
+floats, etc., nor will it provide any of the 2-letter font commands
+such as |\rm|; thus most classes will contain more than this minimum!
+ 
+\subsection{Example: a local letter class}
+ 
+A company may have its own letter class, for setting letters in the
+company style.  This section shows a simple implementation of such a
+class, although a real class would need more structure.
+ 
+The class begins by announcing itself as |neplet.cls|.
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
+   \ProvidesClass{neplet}[1995/04/01 NonExistent Press letter class]
+\end{verbatim}
+Then this next bit passes any options on to the |letter| class, which
+is loaded with the |a4paper| option.
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \DeclareOption*{\PassOptionsToClass{\CurrentOption}{letter}}
+   \ProcessOptions\relax
+   \LoadClass[a4paper]{letter}
+\end{verbatim}
+In order to use the company letter head, it redefines the
+|firstpage| page style: this is the page style that is used on
+the first page of letters.
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \renewcommand{\ps@firstpage}{%
+      \renewcommand{\@oddhead}{<letterhead goes here>}%
+      \renewcommand{\@oddfoot}{<letterfoot goes here>}%
+   }
+\end{verbatim}
+And that's it!
+ 
+\subsection{Example: a newsletter class}
+ 
+A simple newsletter can be typeset with \LaTeX{}, using a variant of the
+|article| class.
+The class begins by announcing itself as |smplnews.cls|.
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
+   \ProvidesClass{smplnews}[1995/04/01 The Simple News newsletter class]
+
+   \newcommand{\headlinecolor}{\normalcolor}
+\end{verbatim}
+It passes most specified options on to the |article| class: apart from
+the |onecolumn| option, which is switched off, and the |green| option,
+which sets the headline in green.
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \DeclareOption{onecolumn}{\OptionNotUsed}
+   \DeclareOption{green}{\renewcommand{\headlinecolor}{\color{green}}}
+
+   \DeclareOption*{\PassOptionsToClass{\CurrentOption}{article}}
+
+   \ProcessOptions\relax
+\end{verbatim}
+It then loads the class |article| with the option |twocolumn|.
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \LoadClass[twocolumn]{article}
+\end{verbatim}
+Since the newsletter is to be printed in colour, it now loads the
+|color| package.  The class does not specify a device driver option
+since this should be specified by the user of the |smplnews| class.
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \RequirePackage{color}
+\end{verbatim}
+The class then redefines |\maketitle| to produce the title in 72pt
+Helvetica bold oblique, in the appropriate colour.
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \renewcommand{\maketitle}{%
+      \twocolumn[%
+         \fontsize{72}{80}\fontfamily{phv}\fontseries{b}%
+         \fontshape{sl}\selectfont\headlinecolor
+         \@title
+      ]%
+   }
+\end{verbatim}
+It redefines |\section| and switches off section numbering.
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \renewcommand{\section}{%
+      \@startsection
+         {section}{1}{0pt}{-1.5ex plus -1ex minus -.2ex}%
+         {1ex plus .2ex}{\large\sffamily\slshape\headlinecolor}%
+   }
+ 
+   \setcounter{secnumdepth}{0}
+\end{verbatim}
+It also sets the three essential things.
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \renewcommand{\normalsize}{\fontsize{9}{10}\selectfont}
+   \setlength{\textwidth}{17.5cm}
+   \setlength{\textheight}{25cm}
+\end{verbatim}
+In practice, a class would need more than this: it would provide
+commands for issue numbers, authors of articles, page styles and so
+on; but this skeleton gives a start.  The |ltnews| class file is not
+much more complex than this one.
+ 
+\section{Commands for class and package writers}
+\label{Sec:commands}
+ 
+This section describes briefly each of the new commands for class and
+package writers.  To find out about other aspects of the new system,
+you should also read \emph{\LaTeXbook}, \emph{\LaTeXcomp} and
+\emph{\usrguide}.
+ 
+\subsection{Identification}
+ 
+The first group of commands discussed here are those used
+to identify your class or package file.
+ 
+\begin{decl}
+|\NeedsTeXFormat| \arg{format-name} \oarg{release-date}
+\end{decl}
+This command tells \TeX{} that this file should be processed using a
+format with name \m{format-name}.  You can use the optional argument
+\m{release-date} to further specify the earliest release date of the
+format that is needed.  When the release date of the format is older
+than the one specified a warning will be generated. The standard
+\m{format-name} is \texttt{LaTeX2e}.  The date, if present, must be in
+the form \textsc{yyyy/mm/dd}.
+ 
+Example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1994/06/01]
+\end{verbatim}
+ 
+\begin{decl}
+|\ProvidesClass| \arg{class-name} \oarg{release-info} \\
+|\ProvidesPackage| \arg{package-name} \oarg{release-info}
+\end{decl}
+This declares that the current file contains the definitions for the
+document class \m{class-name} or package \m{package-name}.
+
+The optional \m{release-info}, if used, must contain:
+\begin{itemize}
+  \item the release date of
+  this version of the file, in the form \textsc{yyyy/mm/dd};
+\item optionally followed by a space and a short description, possibly
+  including a version number.
+\end{itemize}
+The above syntax must be followed exactly so that this information
+can be used by |\LoadClass| or |\documentclass| (for classes) or
+|\RequirePackage| or |\usepackage| (for packages) to test that the
+release is not too old.
+
+The whole of this \m{release-info} information is displayed by
+|\listfiles| and should therefore not be too long.
+ 
+Example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \ProvidesClass{article}[1994/06/01 v1.0 Standard LaTeX class]
+   \ProvidesPackage{ifthen}[1994/06/01 v1.0 Standard LaTeX package]
+\end{verbatim}
+ 
+\begin{decl}
+  |\ProvidesFile| \arg{file-name} \oarg{release-info}
+\end{decl}
+This is similar to the two previous commands except that here the full
+filename, including the extension, must be given. It is used for
+declaring any files other than main class and package files.
+ 
+Example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \ProvidesFile{T1enc.def}[1994/06/01 v1.0 Standard LaTeX file]
+\end{verbatim}
+ 
+Note that the phrase \texttt{Standard LaTeX} \textbf{must not} be used
+in the identification banner of any file other than those in the
+standard \LaTeX{} distribution.
+
+\subsection{Loading files}
+\label{Sec:loadf}
+
+\NEWfeature{1995/12/01}
+This group of commands can be used to create your own document class or
+package by building on existing classes or packages.
+\begin{decl}
+  |\RequirePackage| \oarg{options-list} \arg{package-name}
+     \oarg{release-info}\\
+  |\RequirePackageWithOptions| \arg{package-name}
+     \oarg{release-info}
+\end{decl}
+Packages and classes should use these commands to load other packages.
+
+The use of |\RequirePackage| is the same as the author command
+|\usepackage|.
+ 
+Examples:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \RequirePackage{ifthen}[1994/06/01]
+   \RequirePackageWithOptions{graphics}[1995/12/01]
+\end{verbatim}
+ 
+\begin{decl}
+  |\LoadClass| \oarg{options-list} \arg{class-name}
+     \oarg{release-info}\\
+  |\LoadClassWithOptions| \arg{class-name}
+     \oarg{release-info}
+\end{decl}
+\NEWfeature{1995/12/01}
+These commands are for use \emph{only} in class files, they cannot be
+used in packages files;
+they can be used at most once within a class file.
+ 
+The use of|\LoadClass| is the same as
+the use of |\documentclass| to load a class file.
+
+Examples:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \LoadClass{article}[1994/06/01]
+   \LoadClassWithOptions{article}[1995/12/01]
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\NEWfeature{1995/12/01}
+The two |WithOptions| versions simply load the class (or package) file
+with exactly those options that are being used by the current file
+(class or package).  See below, in \ref{Sec:opmove}, for further
+discussion of their use.
+
+
+\subsection{Option declaration}
+\label{Sec:commands.options.dec}
+
+\NEWdescription{1998/12/01}
+The following commands deal with the declaration and handling of
+options to document classes and packages.  Every option name must be a
+`\LaTeX{} name'.
+
+There are some commands designed especially for use within the
+\m{code} argument of these commands (see below).
+
+\begin{decl}
+  |\DeclareOption| \arg{option-name} \arg{code}
+\end{decl}
+This makes \m{option-name} a `declared option' of the class or package
+in which it is put.  
+
+The \m{code} argument contains the code to be executed if that option
+is specified for the class or package; it can contain any valid
+\LaTeXe{} construct.
+
+Example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \DeclareOption{twoside}{\@twosidetrue}
+\end{verbatim}
+ 
+\begin{decl}
+  |\DeclareOption*| \arg{code}
+\end{decl}
+This declares the \m{code} to be executed for every option which is
+specified for, but otherwise not explicitly declared by, the class or
+package; this code is called the `default option code' and it can
+contain any valid \LaTeXe{} construct.
+
+If a class file contains no |\DeclareOption*| then, by default, all
+specified but undeclared options for that class will be silently
+passed to all packages (as will the specified and declared options for
+that class).
+
+If a package file contains no |\DeclareOption*| then, by default, each
+specified but undeclared option for that package will produce an error.
+
+
+\subsection{Commands within option code}
+\label{Sec:within.code}
+
+These two commands can be used only within the \m{code} argument of
+either |\DeclareOption| or |\DeclareOption*|.  Other commands commonly
+used within these arguments can be found in the next few subsections.
+
+\begin{decl}
+  |\CurrentOption|
+\end{decl}
+This expands to the name of the current option.
+ 
+\begin{decl}
+  |\OptionNotUsed|
+\end{decl}
+This causes the current option to
+be added to the list of `unused options'.
+
+\NEWfeature{1995/06/01}
+  You can now include hash marks (\texttt{\#}) within these \m{code}
+  arguments without special treatment (formerly, it had been
+  necessary to double them).
+
+\subsection{Moving options around}
+\label{Sec:opmove} 
+
+These two commands are also very useful within the \m{code} argument
+of |\DeclareOption| or |\DeclareOption*|:
+\begin{decl}
+  |\PassOptionsToPackage| \arg{options-list} \arg{package-name}\\
+  |\PassOptionsToClass| \arg{options-list} \arg{class-name}
+\end{decl}
+The command |\PassOptionsToPackage| passes the option names in
+\m{options-list} to package \m{package-name}.
+This means that it adds the \m{option-list} to the
+list of options used by any future |\RequirePackage| or |\usepackage|
+command for package \m{package-name}.
+ 
+Example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \PassOptionsToPackage{foo,bar}{fred}
+   \RequirePackage[baz]{fred}
+\end{verbatim}
+is the same as:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \RequirePackage[foo,bar,baz]{fred}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Similarly, |\PassOptionsToClass| may be used in a class file to pass
+options to another class to be loaded with |\LoadClass|.
+ 
+\NEWdescription{1995/12/01}
+The effects and use of these two commands should be contrasted with
+those of the following two (documented above, in \ref{Sec:loadf}):
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \LoadClassWithOptions
+   \RequirePackageWithOptions
+\end{verbatim}
+The command|\RequirePackageWithOptions| is similar to
+|\RequirePackage|, but it always loads the required package with
+exactly the same option list as that being used by the current class
+or package, rather than with any option explicitly supplied or passed
+on by |\PassOptionsToPackage|.
+
+The main purpose of |\LoadClassWithOptions| is to allow one class to
+simply build on another, for example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+  \LoadClassWithOptions{article}
+\end{verbatim}
+This should be compared with the slightly different construction
+\begin{verbatim}
+  \DeclareOption*{\PassOptionsToClass{\CurrentOption}{article}}
+  \ProcessOptions\relax
+  \LoadClass{article}
+\end{verbatim}
+As used above, the effects are more or less the same, but the first is
+a lot less to type; also the |\LoadClassWithOptions| method runs
+slightly quicker.
+
+If, however, the class declares options of its own then
+the two constructions are different.  Compare, for example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+  \DeclareOption{landscape}{\@landscapetrue}
+  \ProcessOptions\relax
+  \LoadClassWithOptions{article}
+\end{verbatim}
+with:
+\begin{verbatim}
+  \DeclareOption{landscape}{\@landscapetrue}
+  \DeclareOption*{\PassOptionsToClass{\CurrentOption}{article}}
+  \ProcessOptions\relax
+  \LoadClass{article}
+\end{verbatim}
+In the first example, the \textsf{article} class will be loaded with
+option |landscape| precisely when the current class is called with
+this option. By contrast, in the second example it will never be
+called with option \texttt{landscape} as in that case \textsf{article}
+is passed options only by the default option handler, but this handler
+is not used for |landscape| because that option is explicitly
+declared.
+
+\subsection{Delaying code}
+\label{Sec:delays}
+
+These first two commands are also intended primarily for use within 
+the \m{code} argument of |\DeclareOption| or |\DeclareOption*|.
+
+\begin{decl}
+  |\AtEndOfClass| \arg{code}\\
+  |\AtEndOfPackage| \arg{code}
+\end{decl}
+These commands declare \m{code} that is saved away internally and then
+executed after processing the whole of the current class or package
+file.
+ 
+Repeated use of these commands is permitted: the code in the
+arguments is stored (and later executed) in the order of their
+declarations.
+ 
+\begin{decl}
+  |\AtBeginDocument| \arg{code}\\
+  |\AtEndDocument| \arg{code}
+\end{decl}
+These commands declare \m{code} to be saved internally and executed
+while \LaTeX{} is executing |\begin{document}| or |\end{document}|.
+ 
+The \m{code} specified in the argument to |\AtBeginDocument| is
+executed near the end of the |\begin{document}| code, \emph{after} the
+font selection tables have been set up.  It is therefore a useful
+place to put code which needs to be executed after everything has been
+prepared for typesetting and when the normal font for the document is
+the current font.
+
+\NEWdescription{1995/12/01}
+The |\AtBeginDocument| hook should not be used for code that does any
+typesetting since the typeset result would be unpredictable.
+
+The \m{code} specified in the argument to |\AtEndDocument| is
+executed at the beginning of the |\end{document}| code,
+\emph{before} the final page is finished and before any leftover
+floating environments are processed. If some of the \m{code} is to be
+executed after these two processes, you should include a |\clearpage|
+at the appropriate point in \m{code}.
+ 
+Repeated use of these commands is permitted: the code in the
+arguments is stored (and later executed) in the order of their
+declarations.
+ 
+\begin{decl}[1994/12/01]
+  |\AtBeginDvi| \arg{specials}
+\end{decl}
+These commands save in a box register things which are written to the
+|.dvi| file at the beginning of the `shipout' of the first page of the
+document.
+
+This should not be used for anything that will add any typeset
+material to the |.dvi| file.
+ 
+Repeated use of this command is permitted.
+ 
+
+\subsection{Option processing}
+\label{Sec:commands.options}
+ 
+\begin{decl}
+  |\ProcessOptions|
+\end{decl}
+This command executes the \m{code} for each selected option.
+ 
+We shall first describe how |\ProcessOptions| works in a package file,
+and then how this differs in a class file.
+ 
+To understand in detail what |\ProcessOptions| does in a package file,
+you have to know the difference between \emph{local} and \emph{global}
+options.
+\begin{itemize}
+\item \textbf{Local options} are those which have been explicitly
+  specified for this particular package in the \m{options} argument of
+  any of these:
+\begin{quote}
+    |\PassOptionsToPackage{<options>}| \ |\usepackage[<options>]|\\
+    |\RequirePackage[<options>]|
+\end{quote}
+\item \textbf{Global options} are any other options that are specified
+  by the author in the \m{options} argument of
+    |\documentclass[<options>]|.
+\end{itemize}
+For example, suppose that a document begins:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \documentclass[german,twocolumn]{article}
+   \usepackage{gerhardt}
+\end{verbatim}
+whilst package |gerhardt| calls package |fred| with:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \PassOptionsToPackage{german,dvips,a4paper}{fred}
+   \RequirePackage[errorshow]{fred}
+\end{verbatim}
+then:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item |fred|'s local options are |german|, |dvips|, |a4paper|
+  and |errorshow|;
+\item |fred|'s only global option is |twocolumn|.
+\end{itemize}
+
+When |\ProcessOptions| is called, the following happen.
+\begin{itemize}
+\item \emph{First}, for each option so far declared in |fred.sty|
+  by |\DeclareOption|, it looks to see if that option is either a
+  global or a local option for |fred|: if it is then the corresponding
+  code is executed.
+
+  This is done in the order in which these options
+  were declared in |fred.sty|.
+\item \emph{Then}, for each remaining \emph{local} option, the command
+  |\ds@<option>| is executed if it has been defined somewhere (other
+  than by a |\DeclareOption|); otherwise, the `default option code' is
+  executed.  If no default option code has been declared then an error
+  message is produced.
+
+  This is done in the order in which these
+  options were specified.
+\end{itemize}
+Throughout this process, the system ensures that the code declared for
+an option is executed at most once.
+
+Returning to the example, if |fred.sty| contains:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \DeclareOption{dvips}{\typeout{DVIPS}}
+   \DeclareOption{german}{\typeout{GERMAN}}
+   \DeclareOption{french}{\typeout{FRENCH}}
+   \DeclareOption*{\PackageWarning{fred}{Unknown `\CurrentOption'}}
+   \ProcessOptions\relax
+\end{verbatim}
+then the result of processing this document will be:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   DVIPS
+   GERMAN
+   Package fred Warning: Unknown `a4paper'.
+   Package fred Warning: Unknown `errorshow'.
+\end{verbatim}
+Note the following:
+
+\begin{itemize}
+\item the code for the |dvips| option is executed before that for the
+  |german| option, because that is the order in which they are declared
+  in |fred.sty|;
+\item the code for the |german| option is executed only once, when the
+  declared options are being processed;
+\item the |a4paper| and |errorshow| options produce the warning from
+  the code declared by |\DeclareOption*| (in the order in which they
+  were specified), whilst the |twocolumn| option does not: this is
+  because |twocolumn| is a global option.
+\end{itemize}
+ 
+In a class file, |\ProcessOptions| works in the same way, except
+that: \emph{all} options are local; and the default value for
+|\DeclareOption*| is |\OptionNotUsed| rather than an error.
+
+\NEWdescription{1995/12/01}
+Note that, because |\ProcessOptions| has a |*|-form, it is wise to
+follow the non-star form with |\relax|, as in the previous examples,
+since this prevents unnecessary look ahead and possibly misleading
+error messages being issued.
+
+\begin{decl}
+  |\ProcessOptions*| \\
+  |\@options|
+\end{decl}
+This is like |\ProcessOptions| but it executes the options in the
+order specified in the calling commands, rather than in the order of
+declaration in the class or package. For a package this means that the
+global options are processed first. 
+
+The |\@options| command from \LaTeX~2.09 has been made equivalent to
+this in order to ease the task of updating old document styles to
+\LaTeXe{} class files.
+
+\begin{decl}
+  |\ExecuteOptions| \arg{options-list}
+\end{decl}
+
+For each option in the \m{options-list}, in order, 
+this command simply executes the command 
+|\ds@<option>| (if this command is not defined, then that option is
+silently ignored).
+
+It can be used to provide a `default option list' just before
+|\ProcessOptions|.  For example, suppose that in a class file you want
+to set up the default design to be: two-sided printing; 11pt fonts;
+in two columns. Then it could specify:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \ExecuteOptions{11pt,twoside,twocolumn}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+
+\subsection{Safe file commands}
+ 
+These commands deal with file input; they ensure that the non-existence
+of a requested file can be handled in a user-friendly way.
+ 
+\begin{decl}
+|\IfFileExists| \arg{file-name} \arg{true} \arg{false}
+\end{decl}
+If the file exists then the code specified in \m{true} is
+executed.
+ 
+If the file does not exist then the code specified in \m{false} is
+executed.
+ 
+This command does \emph{not} input the file.
+
+\begin{decl}
+  |\InputIfFileExists| \arg{file-name} \arg{true} \arg{false}
+\end{decl}
+This inputs the file \m{file-name} if it exists and, immediately
+before the input, the code specified in \m{true} is executed.
+
+If the file does not exist then the code specified in \m{false} is
+executed.
+ 
+It is implemented using |\IfFileExists|.
+
+
+\subsection{Reporting errors, etc}
+ 
+These commands should be used by third party classes and packages to
+report errors, or to provide information to authors.
+ 
+\begin{decl}
+  |\ClassError| \arg{class-name} \arg{error-text} \arg{help-text}\\
+  |\PackageError| \arg{package-name} \arg{error-text} \arg{help-text}
+\end{decl}
+These produce an error message.  The \m{error-text} is displayed and the
+|?| error prompt is shown.  If the user types |h|, they will be shown
+the \m{help-text}.
+ 
+Within the \m{error-text} and \m{help-text}: |\protect| can be used to
+stop a command from expanding; |\MessageBreak| causes a line-break;
+and |\space| prints a space.
+
+Note that the \m{error-text} will have a full stop added to it, so do
+not put one into the argument.
+
+For example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \newcommand{\foo}{FOO}
+   \PackageError{ethel}{%
+      Your hovercraft is full of eels,\MessageBreak
+      and \protect\foo\space is \foo
+   }{%
+      Oh dear! Something's gone wrong.\MessageBreak
+      \space \space Try typing \space <<return>>
+      \space to proceed, ignoring \protect\foo.
+   }
+\end{verbatim}
+produces this display:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   ! Package ethel Error: Your hovercraft is full of eels,
+   (ethel)                and \foo is FOO.
+
+   See the ethel package documentation for explanation.
+\end{verbatim}
+If the user types |h|, this will be shown:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   Oh dear! Something's gone wrong.
+     Try typing  <<return>>  to proceed, ignoring \foo.
+\end{verbatim}
+ 
+\begin{decl}
+  |\ClassWarning| \arg{class-name} \arg{warning-text}\\
+  |\PackageWarning| \arg{package-name} \arg{warning-text}\\
+  |\ClassWarningNoLine| \arg{class-name} \arg{warning-text}\\
+  |\PackageWarningNoLine| \arg{package-name} \arg{warning-text}\\
+  |\ClassInfo| \arg{class-name} \arg{info-text}\\
+  |\PackageInfo| \arg{package-name} \arg{info-text}
+\end{decl}
+The four |Warning| commands are similar to the error commands, except
+that they produce only a warning on the screen, with no error prompt.
+
+The first two, |Warning| versions, also show the line number where the
+warning occurred, whilst the second two, |WarningNoLine| versions, do
+not.
+
+The two |Info| commands are similar except that they log the
+information only in the transcript file, including the line number.
+There are no |NoLine| versions of these two.
+
+Within the \m{warning-text} and \m{info-text}: |\protect| can be used to
+stop a command from expanding; |\MessageBreak| causes a line-break;
+and |\space| prints a space.
+Also, these should not end with a full stop as one is
+automatically added.
+ 
+
+\subsection{Defining commands}
+\label{Sec:commands.define}
+ 
+\LaTeXe{} provides some extra methods of (re)defining commands that are
+intended for use in class and package files.
+
+\NEWfeature{1994/12/01}
+The \texttt{*}-forms of these commands should be used to define
+commands that are not, in \TeX{} terms, long.  This can be useful for
+error-trapping with commands whose arguments are not intended to
+contain whole paragraphs of text.
+
+\begin{decl}
+  |\DeclareRobustCommand| \arg{cmd} \oarg{num} \oarg{default}
+     \arg{definition}\\
+  |\DeclareRobustCommand*| \arg{cmd} \oarg{num} \oarg{default}
+     \arg{definition}
+\end{decl}
+This command takes the same arguments as |\newcommand| but it declares
+a robust command, even if some code within the\m{definition} is
+fragile.  You can use this command to define new robust commands, or
+to redefine existing commands and make them robust.  A log is put into
+the transcript file if a command is redefined.
+ 
+For example, if |\seq| is defined as follows:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \DeclareRobustCommand{\seq}[2][n]{%
+     \ifmmode
+       #1_{1}\ldots#1_{#2}%
+     \else
+       \PackageWarning{fred}{You can't use \protect\seq\space in text}%
+     \fi
+   }
+\end{verbatim}
+Then the command |\seq| can be used in moving arguments, even though
+|\ifmmode| cannot, for example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \section{Stuff about sequences $\seq{x}$}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Note also that there is no need to put a |\relax| before the
+|\ifmmode| at the beginning of the definition; this is because the
+protection given by this |\relax| against expansion at the wrong time
+will be provided internally.
+
+\begin{decl}
+  |\CheckCommand| \arg{cmd} \oarg{num} \oarg{default}
+     \arg{definition}\\
+  |\CheckCommand*| \arg{cmd} \oarg{num} \oarg{default}
+     \arg{definition}
+\end{decl}
+This takes the same arguments as |\newcommand| but, rather than define
+\m{cmd}, it just checks that the current definition of \m{cmd} is
+exactly as given by \m{definition}.  An error is raised if these
+definitions differ.
+ 
+This command is useful for checking the state of the system before
+your package starts altering the definitions of commands.  It allows
+you to check, in particular, that no other package has redefined the
+same command.
+
+\subsection{Moving arguments}
+
+\NEWdescription{1994/12/01}
+The setting of protect whilst processing (i.e.~moving) moving arguments
+has been reimplemented, as has the method of writing information from
+the |.aux| file to other files such as the |.toc| file.  Details can
+be found in the file |ltdefns.dtx|.
+
+We hope that these changes will not affect many packages.
+
+\section{Miscellaneous commands, etc}
+\label{Sec:commands.misc}
+
+\subsection{Layout parameters}
+ 
+\begin{decl}
+|\paperheight|\\
+|\paperwidth|
+\end{decl}
+These two parameters are usually set by the class to be the size of
+the paper being used. This should be actual paper size, unlike
+|\textwidth| and |\textheight| which are the size of the main text
+body within the margins.
+
+
+\subsection{Case changing}
+\label{sec:case}
+
+\begin{decl}
+  |\MakeUppercase| \arg{text} \\
+  |\MakeLowercase| \arg{text}
+\end{decl}
+
+\NEWfeature{1995/06/01}
+\TeX{} provides two primitives |\uppercase| and |\lowercase| for
+changing the case of text.  These are sometimes used in document
+classes, for example to set information in running heads in all
+capitals.
+
+Unfortunately, these \TeX{} primitives do not change the case of
+characters accessed by commands like |\ae| or |\aa|.  To overcome this
+problem, \LaTeX{} provides two new commands |\MakeUppercase| and
+|\MakeLowercase| to do this.
+
+For example:
+\begin{quotation}
+\begin{tabular}{rl}
+   |\uppercase{aBcD\ae\AA\ss\OE}| & \uppercase{aBcD\ae\AA\ss\OE}\\
+   |\lowercase{aBcD\ae\AA\ss\OE}| & \lowercase{aBcD\ae\AA\ss\OE}\\
+   |\MakeUppercase{aBcD\ae\AA\ss\OE}| & 
+                                      \MakeUppercase{aBcD\ae\AA\ss\OE}\\
+   |\MakeLowercase{aBcD\ae\AA\ss\OE}| & \MakeLowercase{aBcD\ae\AA\ss\OE}
+\end{tabular}
+\end{quotation}
+
+The commands |\MakeUppercase| and |\MakeLowercase| themselves are
+robust, but they have moving arguments.
+
+The commands use the \TeX{} primitives |\uppercase| and |\lowercase|,
+and so have a number of unexpected `features'.  In particular, they
+change the case of everything (except characters in the names of
+control-sequences) in their text argument: this includes mathematics,
+environment names, and label names.
+
+For example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \MakeUppercase{$x+y$ in \ref{foo}}
+\end{verbatim}
+produces $X+Y$ and the warning:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   LaTeX Warning: Reference `FOO' on page ... undefined on ...
+\end{verbatim}
+In the long run, we would like to use all-caps fonts rather than any
+command like |\MakeUppercase| but this is not possible at the moment
+because such fonts do not exist.
+
+\NEWdescription{1995/12/01}
+In order that upper/lower-casing will work reasonably well, and in
+order to provide any correct hyphenation, \LaTeXe{} \emph{must} use,
+throughout a document, the same fixed table for changing case.
+The table used is designed for the font encoding |T1|; this works well
+with the standard \TeX{} fonts for all Latin alphabets but will cause
+problems when using other alphabets.
+
+\subsection{The `openany' option in the `book' class}
+
+\NEWdescription{1996/06/01}
+The |openany| option allows chapter and similar openings to
+occur on left hand pages. Previously this option affected only
+|\chapter| and |\backmatter|.  It now also affects
+|\part|, |\frontmatter| and |\mainmatter|.
+
+\subsection{Better user-defined math display environments}
+
+\begin{decl}
+  |\ignorespacesafterend|
+\end{decl}
+
+\NEWfeature{1996/12/01}
+\NEWdescription{2003/12/01}
+Suppose that you want to define an environment for displaying text
+that is numbered as an equation.  A straightforward way to do this is
+as follows:
+\begin{verbatim}
+  \newenvironment{texteqn}
+    {\begin{equation}
+       \begin{minipage}{0.9\linewidth}}
+      {\end{minipage}
+     \end{equation}}
+\end{verbatim}
+However, if you have tried this then you will probably have noticed
+that it does not work perfectly when used in the middle of a paragraph
+because an inter-word space appears at the beginning of the first
+line after the environment.
+
+There is now an extra command (with a very long name) available that
+you can use to avoid this problem; it should be inserted as shown here:
+\begin{verbatim}
+  \newenvironment{texteqn}
+    {\begin{equation}
+       \begin{minipage}{0.9\linewidth}}
+      {\end{minipage}
+     \end{equation}
+     \ignorespacesafterend}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+This command may also have other uses.
+
+\subsection{Normalising spacing}
+
+\begin{decl}
+  |\normalsfcodes|
+\end{decl}
+
+\NEWfeature{1997/06/01}
+This command should be used to restore the normal settings of the
+parameters that affect spacing between words, sentences, etc.
+
+An important use of this feature is to correct a problem, reported by
+Donald Arseneau, that punctuation in page headers has always (in all
+known \TeX{} formats) been potentially wrong whenever a page break
+happens while a local setting of the space codes is in effect.  These
+space codes are changed by, for example, the command
+\verb|\frenchspacing|) and the \textsf{verbatim} environment.
+
+It is normally given the correct definition automatically in
+|\begin{document}| and so need not be explicitly set; however, if it
+is explicitly made nonempty in a class file then automatic
+default setting will be over-ridden.
+
+
+\section{Upgrading \LaTeX~2.09 classes and packages}
+\label{Sec:upgrade}
+ 
+This section describes the changes you may need to make when you
+upgrade an existing \LaTeX{} style to a package or class but we shall
+start in optimistic mode.
+ 
+Many existing style files will run with \LaTeXe{} without any
+modification to the file itself.  When everything is running OK,
+please put a note in the newly created package or class file to record
+that it runs with the new standard \LaTeX{}; then distribute it to
+your users.
+
+\subsection{Try it first!}
+\label{Sec:try-it}
+
+The first thing you should do is to test your style in `compatibility
+mode'.  The only change you need to make in order to do this is,
+possibly, to change the extension of the file to |.cls|: you should
+make this change only if your file was used as a main document style.
+Now, without any other modifications, run \LaTeXe{} on a document that
+uses your file.  This assumes that you have a suitable collection of
+files that tests all the functionality provided by your style file.
+(If you haven't, now is the time to make one!)
+
+You now need to change the test document files so that they are
+\LaTeXe{} documents: see \emph{\usrguide} for details of how to do
+this and then try them again.  You have now tried the test documents
+in both \LaTeXe{} native mode and \LaTeX~2.09 compatibility mode.
+
+\subsection{Troubleshooting}
+\label{Sec:trouble}
+
+If your file does not work with \LaTeXe{}, there are two likely
+reasons.
+\begin{itemize}
+\item \LaTeX{} now has a robust, well-defined designer's interface for
+  selecting fonts, which is very different from the \LaTeX~2.09
+  internals.  
+\item Your style file may have used some \LaTeX~2.09 internal commands
+  which have changed, or which have been removed.
+\end{itemize}
+
+When you are debugging your file, you will probably need more
+information than is normally displayed by \LaTeXe.  This is achieved
+by resetting the counter |errorcontextlines| from its default value of
+$-1$ to a much higher value, e.g.~999.
+
+\subsection{Accommodating compatibility mode}
+
+Sometimes an existing collection of \LaTeX~2.09 documents makes it
+inconvenient or impossible to abandon the old commands entirely.
+If this is the case, then it is possible to accommodate both conventions
+by making special provision for documents processed in compatibility
+mode.
+
+\begin{decl}
+|\if@compatibility|
+\end{decl}
+This switch is set when a document begins with |\documentstyle| rather
+than |\documentclass|.  Appropriate code can be supplied for either
+condition, as follows:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \if@compatibility
+     <code emulating LaTeX 2.09 behavior>
+   \else
+     <code suitable for LaTeX2e>
+   \fi
+\end{verbatim}
+
+
+\subsection{Font commands}
+ 
+Some font and size commands are now defined by the document class
+rather than by the \LaTeX{} kernel.  If you are upgrading a
+\LaTeX~2.09 document style to a class that does not load one of the
+standard classes, then you will probably need to add definitions for
+these commands.
+ 
+\begin{decl}
+   |\rm| |\sf| |\tt| |\bf| |\it| |\sl| |\sc|
+\end{decl}
+None of these short-form font selection commands are defined in the
+\LaTeXe{} kernel.  They are defined by all the standard class files.
+
+If you want to define them in your class file, there are several
+reasonable ways to do this.
+
+One possible definition is:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \newcommand{\rm}{\rmfamily}
+   ...
+   \newcommand{\sc}{\scshape}
+\end{verbatim}
+This would make the font commands orthogonal; for example
+|{\bf\it text}| would produce bold italic, thus: \textbf{\textit{text}}.
+It will also make them produce an error if used in math mode.
+ 
+Another possible definition is:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \DeclareOldFontCommand{\rm}{\rmfamily}{\mathrm}
+   ...
+   \DeclareOldFontCommand{\sc}{\scshape}{\mathsc}
+\end{verbatim}
+This will make |\rm| act like |\rmfamily| in text mode (see above) and
+it will make |\rm| select the |\mathrm| math alphabet in math mode.
+
+Thus |${\rm math} = X + 1$| will produce `${\rm math} = X + 1$'.
+
+If you do not want font selection to be orthogonal then you can
+follow the standard classes and define:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \DeclareOldFontCommand{\rm}{\normalfont\rmfamily}{\mathrm}
+   ...
+   \DeclareOldFontCommand{\sc}{\normalfont\scshape}{\mathsc}
+\end{verbatim}
+This means, for example, that |{\bf\it text}| will produce medium
+weight (rather than bold) italic, thus: \textit{text}.  
+
+\begin{decl}
+   |\normalsize| \\
+   |\@normalsize|
+\end{decl}
+The command |\@normalsize| is retained for compatibility with
+\LaTeX~2.09 packages which may have used its value; but redefining it
+in a class file will have no effect since it is always reset to have
+the same meaning as |\normalsize|.
+
+This means that classes \emph{must} now redefine |\normalsize| rather
+than redefining |\@normalsize|; for example (a rather incomplete one):
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \renewcommand{\normalsize}{\fontsize{10}{12}\selectfont}
+\end{verbatim}
+Note that |\normalsize| is defined by the \LaTeX{} kernel to be an
+error message.
+
+\begin{decl}
+   |\tiny| |\footnotesize| |\small| |\large|\\
+   |\Large| |\LARGE| |\huge| |\Huge|
+\end{decl}
+None of these other `standard' size-changing commands are defined in
+the kernel: each needs to be defined in a class file if you need it.
+They are all defined by the standard classes.
+
+This means you should use |\renewcommand| for |\normalsize| and
+|\newcommand| for the other size-changing commands.
+
+
+\subsection{Obsolete commands}
+ 
+Some packages will not work with \LaTeXe{}, normally because they relied
+on an internal \LaTeX{} command which was never supported and has now
+changed, or been removed.
+ 
+In many cases there will now be a robust, high-level means of
+achieving what previously required low-level commands.  Please consult
+Section~\ref{Sec:commands} to see if you can now use the \LaTeXe{}
+class and package writers commands.
+
+Also, of course, if your package or class redefined any of the kernel
+commands (i.e.~those defined in the files |latex.tex|, |slitex.tex|,
+|lfonts.tex|, |sfonts.tex|) then you will need to check it very
+carefully against the new kernel in case the implementation has
+changed or the command no longer exists in the \LaTeX2e{} kernel.
+
+Too many of the internal commands of \LaTeX~2.09 have been
+re-implemented or removed to be able to list them all here. You must
+check any that you have used or changed.
+
+We shall, however, list some of the more important commands which are
+no longer supported.
+ 
+\begin{decl}
+   |\tenrm| |\elvrm| |\twlrm| \dots\\
+   |\tenbf| |\elvbf| |\twlbf| \dots\\
+   |\tensf| |\elvsf| |\twlsf| \dots\\
+   \qquad$\vdots$
+\end{decl}
+The (approximately) seventy internal commands of this form are no longer
+defined.  If your class or package uses them then \emph{please}
+replace them with new font commands described in \emph{\fntguide}.
+
+For example, the command |\twlsf| should be replaced by:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \fontsize{12}{14}\normalfont\sffamily\selectfont
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Another possibility is to use the |rawfonts| package, described in
+\emph{\usrguide}.
+
+Also, remember that many of the fonts preloaded by \LaTeX~2.09 
+are no longer preloaded.
+
+\begin{decl}
+   |\vpt| |\vipt| |\viipt| \dots
+\end{decl}
+These were the internal size-selecting commands in \LaTeX~2.09.
+(They can still be used in \LaTeX~2.09 compatibility mode.)
+Please use the command |\fontsize| instead: see \emph{\fntguide} for
+details.
+
+For example, |\vpt| should be replaced by:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \fontsize{5}{6}\normalfont\selectfont
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\begin{decl}
+  |\prm|, |\pbf|, |\ppounds|, |\pLaTeX| \dots
+\end{decl}
+\LaTeX~2.09 used several commands beginning with |\p| in order to
+provide `protected' commands.  For example, |\LaTeX| was defined to be
+|\protect\pLaTeX|, and |\pLaTeX| was defined to produce the \LaTeX{}
+logo.  This made |\LaTeX| robust, even though |\pLaTeX| was not.
+
+These commands have now been reimplemented using
+|\DeclareRobustCommand|
+(described in Section~\ref{Sec:commands.define}).
+If your package redefined one of the |\p|-commands then you must
+remove the redefinition and use |\DeclareRobustCommand| to redefine the
+non-|\p| command.
+ 
+\begin{decl}
+|\footheight|\\
+|\@maxsep|\\
+|\@dblmaxsep|
+\end{decl}
+These parameters are not used by \LaTeXe{} so they have been removed,
+except in \LaTeX~2.09 compatibility mode.  Classes should no longer
+set them.
+ 
+\begin{thebibliography}{1}
+ 
+\bibitem{A-W:DEK91}
+Donald~E. Knuth.
+\newblock {\em The \TeX book}.
+\newblock Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, 1986.
+\newblock Revised to cover \TeX3, 1991.
+ 
+\bibitem{A-W:LLa94}
+Leslie Lamport.
+\newblock {\em {\LaTeX:} A Document Preparation System}.
+\newblock Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, second edition, 1994.
+ 
+\bibitem{A-W:MG2004}
+Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens.
+\newblock {\em The {\LaTeX} Companion second edition}.
+\newblock With Johannes Braams, David Carlisle, and Chris Rowley.
+\newblock Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, 2004.
+
+\end{thebibliography}
+
+\newpage
+\thispagestyle{empty}
+
+\section*{\LaTeXe{} Summary sheet: updating old styles}
+
+Section references below are to \emph{\clsguide}.
+
+\begin{enumerate}
+
+\item Should it become a class or a package?
+  See Section~\ref{Sec:classorpkg} for how to answer this question.
+
+\item If it uses another style file, then you will need to obtain an
+  updated version of this other file.  Look at Section~\ref{Sec:loading}
+  for information on how to load other class and package files.
+
+\item Try it: see Section~\ref{Sec:try-it}.
+
+\item It worked?  Excellent, but there are probably still some things
+  you should change in order to make your file into a well-structured
+  \LaTeXe{} file that is both robust and portable. So you should now
+  read Section~\ref{Sec:writing}, especially~\ref{Sec:general}.  You
+  will also find some useful examples in Section~\ref{Sec:structure}.
+
+  If your file sets up new fonts, font-changing commands or symbols,
+  you should also read \emph{\fntguide}.
+  
+\item It did not work?  There are three possibilities here:
+  \begin{itemize}
+  \item  error messages are produced whilst reading your file;
+  \item  error messages are produced whilst processing test documents;
+  \item  there are no errors but the output is not as it should be.
+  \end{itemize}
+  Don't forget to check carefully for this last possibility.
+
+  If you have got to this stage then you will need to read
+  Section~\ref{Sec:upgrade} to find the solutions that will make your
+  file work.
+\end{enumerate}
+
+\end{document}
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/cmextra.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/cmextra.ins
index 88df1a1a397..9a7f60e3b1b 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/cmextra.ins
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/cmextra.ins
@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
 %% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
 %% LaTeX or TeX.
 %%
-%% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+%% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005
 %% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 %% in this file. 
 %% 
@@ -11,12 +11,12 @@
 %% -------------------------------------------
 %% 
 %% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3b
 %% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 %% The latest version of this license is in
 %%    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%% and version 1.3b or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+%% version 2005/12/01 or later.
 %% 
 %% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
 %% 
@@ -40,7 +40,7 @@
 
 This is a generated file.
 
-Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005
 The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 in this file. 
 
@@ -48,12 +48,12 @@ This file was generated from file(s) of the LaTeX base system.
 --------------------------------------------------------------
 
 It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
 of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 The latest version of this license is in
    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
+and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+version 2005/12/01 or later.
 
 This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the LaTeX
 base system. You may however distribute the LaTeX base system without
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/cmfonts.fdd b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/cmfonts.fdd
index f493f30c724..2da915d97fb 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/cmfonts.fdd
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/cmfonts.fdd
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 % \iffalse meta-comment
 %
-% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006
 % The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 % in this file. 
 % 
@@ -8,12 +8,12 @@
 % -------------------------------------------
 % 
 % It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
 % of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 % The latest version of this license is in
 %    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
 % 
 % This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
 % 
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/cmfonts.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/cmfonts.ins
index 8c06ef303f1..5c545bf4ecb 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/cmfonts.ins
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/cmfonts.ins
@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
 %% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
 %% LaTeX or TeX.
 %%
-%% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+%% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005
 %% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 %% in this file. 
 %% 
@@ -11,12 +11,12 @@
 %% -------------------------------------------
 %% 
 %% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3b
 %% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 %% The latest version of this license is in
 %%    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%% and version 1.3b or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+%% version 2005/12/01 or later.
 %% 
 %% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
 %% 
@@ -40,7 +40,7 @@
 
 This is a generated file.
 
-Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005
 The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 in this file. 
 
@@ -48,12 +48,12 @@ This file was generated from file(s) of the LaTeX base system.
 --------------------------------------------------------------
 
 It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
 of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 The latest version of this license is in
    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
+and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+version 2005/12/01 or later.
 
 This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the LaTeX
 base system. You may however distribute the LaTeX base system without
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/cyrguide.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/cyrguide.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..2d4274806b7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/cyrguide.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,398 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file. 
+% 
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+% 
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+%    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
+% 
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+% 
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+% 
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution 
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with 
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+% 
+% \fi
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1995/12/01]
+
+\documentclass{ltxguide}[1999/02/28]
+
+\title{Cyrillic languages support in \LaTeX}
+
+\author{\copyright~Copyright 1998--1999,\\ Vladimir Volovich,
+        Werner Lemberg and \LaTeX3 Project Team.\\ All rights reserved.}
+
+\date{12 March 1999}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\maketitle
+\tableofcontents
+
+\begin{abstract}
+  This document contains basic information on the Cyrillic setup for
+  \LaTeX{}: how to get the fonts, how to set them up, how to use
+  the interface, its interaction with \babel{}, etc. This is only a first
+  draft of the document and it will probably be modified in future; so
+  please send in comments on it via the \texttt{latexbug} system
+  (see below).
+\end{abstract}
+
+
+\section{Introduction}
+
+Most Latin-based European languages were supported in \LaTeX{} by
+introducing the~|T1|~font encoding and by using the \textsf{fontenc}
+and \textsf{inputenc} packages; these use only standard \TeX{} means
+to support any \mbox{8-bit} input encoding and this one standard font
+encoding.  The restriction to a single font encoding guarantees that
+multiple languages can happily coexist in one document (\eg
+hyphenation will be correct for all languages).
+
+Starting with the December~1998 Release, \LaTeX{} finally supports
+Cyrillic languages.  This support is based on the new standard
+Cyrillic \TeX{} font encodings---|T2A|, |T2B|, |T2C|, and~|X2|.  The
+first three of these satisfy some basic requirements for
+\LaTeX{}~|T*|~encodings, and thus can be used in multi-lingual documents
+with other languages based on standard font encodings.
+
+The reason why we need four different Cyrillic font encodings is that
+these font encodings support \emph{all} the Cyrillic languages that
+have been used during the twentieth century (see
+Section~\ref{fontencs})!  The number of Cyrillic glyphs is large, so
+they cannot be represented with 128~character slots; the other (lower)
+128~slots are reserved for Latin letters and other invariant symbols
+that are needed for the encoding to be a conformant
+\LaTeX{}~\texttt{T}~encoding.
+
+There are some glyphs in the |T2*|~encodings which do not yet have
+associated characters in \emph{Unicode}, the world-wide character
+standard.  Also, one more font encoding, |T2D|,~is planned for a
+forthcoming release of \LaTeX{}.  A lot of Cyrillic input encodings
+are already supported (see Section~\ref{inputencs}), and additional
+encodings could be added easily.
+
+
+\subsection{Acknowledgments}
+\label{sec:acks}
+
+The work on |T2*|~encodings was carried out by the T2~Team, led by
+Alexander Berdnikov (other members are Mikhail Kolodin and Andrew
+Janishewskii).  The LH~fonts were produced by Olga Lapko (with
+A.~Khodulev).  The \textsf{T2} bundle and \textsf{ruhyphen} package
+were written by Werner Lemberg and Vladimir Volovich (except that the
+concrete hyphenation patterns which are part of \textsf{ruhyphen} came
+from individual authors).  The support for the Ukrainian language was
+prepared by Andrij Shvaika.
+  
+
+\section{Installation}
+
+The \textsf{fontenc} and \textsf{inputenc} packages are installed
+automatically in every base \LaTeX{} distribution.
+
+All the necessary extra files to use with these packages for Cyrillic
+are in the \textsf{cyrillic} bundle, which at present contains the
+following: four font encoding definition files (|t2aenc.def|,
+|t2benc.def|, |t2cenc.def|, |x2enc.def|); several input encoding
+definition files (all the other |*.def| files), and font definition
+files (|*.fd|).
+The installation of these is described here.
+
+\subsection{Fonts}
+
+The default font families in \LaTeX{} are the Computer Modern
+families, namely the CM~fonts (|OT1|~encoded) and the EC~fonts
+(|T1|~encoded).  The LH~fonts, which are now available, provide
+Computer Modern fonts for all Cyrillic font encodings.  They are
+designed to be compatible with the EC~fonts, and they provide the same
+font shapes and sizes; they are available at |CTAN:fonts/cyrillic/lh|
+(the latest version is 3.20).  The installation instructions for the
+fonts are in the file |INSTALL| in the font distribution.
+
+Other fonts, including Type~1 fonts, can also be used, provided that
+their encoding (for \TeX{}) is \mbox{|T2|-compatible}.  Some
+ready-to-use packages supporting such fonts are also available, \eg at
+\URL{ftp://ftp.vsu.ru/pub/tex} (they should soon be on \ctan).  Currently,
+you will find two packages there: \textsf{PsCyr}, which contains some
+freely distributable Cyrillic Type~1 fonts with support for \LaTeX{};
+and \textsf{c1fonts}, which contains virtual fonts similar to the
+\textsf{AE}~fonts package using the BlueSky and BaKoMa fonts
+available from \ctan{} (see the |README| file in that package for
+detailed information).  Further font packages are expected soon.
+
+\subsection{Hyphenation patterns}
+
+You can find a collection of hyphenation patterns for the Russian
+language in the \textsf{ruhyphen} package at
+|CTAN:language/hyphenation/ruhyphen|.  These patterns support the
+|T2*|~encodings, as well as other popular font encodings used for
+Russian typesetting (including the Omega internal encoding).
+Patterns for other Cyrillic languages should be adapted to work with
+the |T2*|~encodings.
+
+\subsection{\babel{} support for Russian and Ukrainian}
+\label{bblrus}
+
+Version~3.6k of \babel{} includes support for the |T2*|~encodings and
+for typesetting both Russian and Ukrainian texts using the Cyrillic
+letters.  The temporary fontencoding |LWN|, which was used in earlier
+releases of \babel{}, will be withdrawn in the near future and replaced
+by the |OT2| encoding.
+
+\subsection{Getting pre-built packages}
+ 
+Many of the major \TeX{} distributions, such as te\TeX{}, fp\TeX{} and
+\TeX{}live, contain (or soon will) everything that is needed,
+including the LH~fonts, \textsf{ruhyphen} and the latest version of
+\babel{}.  We hope that all \TeX{} distributions will soon include all
+of these, so that the chances are that you will not need to install
+this by yourself (but it is not difficult).
+
+If you are using em\TeX, Mik\TeX, or fp\TeX, you
+can download the \textsf{ruemtex} package from
+\URL{ftp://ftp.vsu.ru/pub/tex}.
+
+\section{Usage}
+
+Support for Cyrillic is based on these standard \LaTeX{} mechanisms:
+the \textsf{fontenc} and \textsf{inputenc} packages (and on \babel{}).
+Thus the basic principles for its use are similar to those for other
+European languages: you simply add, to your document preamble, lines
+like the following.
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+\usepackage[T2A]{fontenc}
+\usepackage[koi8-r]{inputenc}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Here you can put any desired input encoding instead of
+\mbox{\texttt{koi8-r}}: for example, it would be \texttt{cp866} if you are
+using a MS-DOS text editor with this Cyrillic code page to prepare your
+documents, or \texttt{cp1251} if you are a MS~Windows user with Cyrillic
+support.  A full list of the available Cyrillic encodings can be found in
+Section~\ref{inputencs} and in the file |cyinpenc.dtx|.
+
+Documents are, naturally, not restricted to a single font encoding;
+this is essential for multi-lingual journals or documents.  Such
+changes can be made by using the |\fontencoding| command as part of a
+font-change.  However, it is best to access these font encodings via a
+higher-level interface.
+
+Since such changes are often closely related to other
+language-dependent settings, it is often sensible to use the \babel{}
+system, which provides further useful `localisation' and standardised
+multi-lingual interfaces (for further details, see
+Section~\ref{bblrus}). Then you can use lines like the following in
+your document:
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+\usepackage[koi8-r]{inputenc}
+\usepackage[russian]{babel}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+This will automatically choose the default font encoding for Russian,
+which is |T2A|, if available.  Documentation of the complete set of
+font-encoding selection rules can be found in |cyrillic.dtx| which is
+part of |rusbabel|.
+
+These \LaTeX{} interfaces are very convenient because they make your
+documents completely portable, being based solely on standard \TeX{}
+features.  This will mean that your documents can be processed on any
+\TeX{} system without any need for re-encoding to the `native'
+encoding used on each platform; this is because the encoding of the
+document is specified in the document itself.
+
+Moreover, if necessary, more than one input encoding can be used
+within a document; this could be useful if, for example, you need to
+combine articles prepared by authors on different machines.  Each part
+of the document is then identified by a |\inputencoding| command,
+which can therefore only be used between paragraphs.
+
+Please note that you must always use the two standard \LaTeX{}
+commands, |\MakeUppercase| and |\MakeLowercase| to produce uppercase
+or lowercase text in your documents.  This is because |\uppercase| and
+|\lowercase| will not work at all for Cyrillic (note that these latter
+two commands are not, and never have been, available for use directly
+in \LaTeX{} documents).
+
+
+\section{Font encodings for Cyrillic languages}
+\label{fontencs}
+
+The Cyrillic font encodings support the following languages.  Note
+that some languages can be properly typeset with more than one
+encoding.
+
+\begin{itemize}
+\raggedright
+\item[|T2A|:]
+  Abaza, Avar, Agul, Adyghei, Azerbaijani, Altai, Balkar, Bashkir,
+  Bulgarian, Buryat, Byelorussian, Gagauz, Dargin, Dungan, Ingush,
+  Kabardino-Cherkess, Kazakh, Kalmyk, Karakalpak, Karachaevskii,
+  Karelian, Kirghiz, Komi-Zyrian, Komi-Permyak, Kumyk, Lak, Lezghin,
+  Macedonian, Mari-Mountain, Mari-Valley, Moldavian, Mongolian,
+  Mordvin-Moksha, Mordvin-Erzya, Nogai, Oroch, Osetin, Russian, Rutul,
+  Serbian, Tabasaran, Tadzhik, Tatar, Tati, Teleut, Tofalar, Tuva,
+  Turkmen, Udmurt, Uzbek, Ukrainian, Hanty-Obskii, Hanty-Surgut,
+  Gipsi, Chechen, Chuvash, Crimean-Tatar.
+\item[|T2B|:]
+  Abaza, Avar, Agul, Adyghei, Aleut, Altai, Balkar, Byelorussian,
+  Bulgarian, Buryat, Gagauz, Dargin, Dolgan, Dungan, Ingush, Itelmen,
+  Kabardino-Cherkess, Kalmyk, Karakalpak, Karachaevskii, Karelian,
+  Ketskii, Kirghiz, Komi-Zyrian, Komi-Permyak, Koryak, Kumyk, Kurdian,
+  Lak, Lezghin, Mansi, Mari-Valley, Moldavian, Mongolian,
+  Mordvin-Moksha, Mordvin-Erzya, Nanai, Nganasan, Negidal, Nenets,
+  Nivh, Nogai, Oroch, Russian, Rutul, Selkup, Tabasaran, Tadzhik,
+  Tatar, Tati, Teleut, Tofalar, Tuva, Turkmen, Udyghei, Uigur, Ulch,
+  Khakass, Hanty-Vahovskii, Hanty-Kazymskii, Hanty-Obskii,
+  Hanty-Surgut, Hanty-Shurysharskii, Gipsi, Chechen, Chukcha, Shor,
+  Evenk, Even, Enets, Eskimo, Yukagir, Crimean Tatar, Yakut.
+\item[|T2C|:]
+  Abkhazian, Bulgarian, Gagauz, Karelian, Komi-Zyrian, Komi-Permyak,
+  Kumyk, Mansi, Moldavian, Mordvin-Moksha, Mordvin-Erzya, Nanai,
+  Orok (Uilta), Negidal, Nogai, Oroch, Russian, Saam, Old-Bulgarian,
+  Old-Russian, Tati, Teleut, Hanty-Obskii, Hanty-Surgut, Evenk,
+  Crimean Tatar.
+\end{itemize}
+
+The |X2|~encoding was designed to support all the above languages.
+Its name does not start with |T| because, for example, it contains no
+Latin letters (it is purely a Cyrillic glyph container); it therefore
+cannot be used in mixed-script documents along with the other |T*|
+encodings.  Please consult Section~6.4 \textit{Naming conventions} of
+the file |fntguide.tex| in the base \LaTeX{} distribution for details
+of the differences between \LaTeX{} font encodings and how they are
+named.
+
+There are two other \LaTeX{} Cyrillic font encodings, |OT2| and |LCY|,
+that are not included in the base \LaTeX{} distribution.  The first is
+a \mbox{7-bit} encoding (hence the |O|) developed by the AMS; it is
+useful for typesetting relatively small fragments of text in Cyrillic,
+using a Latin transliteration scheme.  The other, |LCY|, is an
+\mbox{8-bit} Cyrillic encoding which is not compatible with the
+requirements for \LaTeX{} |T*|~encodings (hence the |L|); thus it is not
+suitable for typesetting multi-lingual documents, but it can be used in
+Plain \TeX{}-based macro packages because it is an extension of |OT1|.
+These two encodings are supported by \babel{} and by \textsf{ot2cyr}.
+
+
+\section{Input encodings}
+\label{inputencs}
+
+Several Cyrillic code-pages are widely used.  Currently, \LaTeX{}
+contains support for 20~Cyrillic input encodings (some of which are
+variants of each other).
+
+\begin{itemize}
+
+\item |cp855| --- the standard \mbox{MS-DOS} Cyrillic code-page.
+
+\item |cp866| --- the standard \mbox{MS-DOS} Russian code-page.  
+  Several code-pages very similar to this are also supported
+  (the differences are all in the range 242--254).
+  \begin{itemize}
+  \item |cp866av| -- the `Cyrillic Alternative' code-page (an
+    alternative variant of cp866);
+  \item |cp866mav| --  the `Modified Alternative Variant'; 
+  \item |cp866nav| --  the `New Alternative Variant'; 
+  \item |cp866tat| --  an experimental Tatarian code-page.    
+  \end{itemize}
+
+\item |cp1251| --- the standard MS Windows Cyrillic code-page.
+
+\item \mbox{\texttt{koi8-r}} --- a standard Cyrillic code-page widely
+  used in UNIX-like systems for Russian language support that is
+  specified in RFC~1489.  The situation with \mbox{\texttt{koi8-r}} is
+  somewhat similar to that for |cp866|: there are several similar
+  code-pages which coincide for all Russian letters but add some other
+  Cyrillic letters. The following are supported:
+  \begin{itemize}
+  \item \mbox{\texttt{koi8-u}}  -- for Ukrainian; 
+  \item \mbox{\texttt{koi8-ru}} -- this is described in a draft RFC
+    document specifying a widely used character set for mail and news
+    exchange in the Ukrainian internet community, as well as for
+    presenting WWW information resources in the Ukrainian language;
+  \item |isoir111| -- the \mbox{ISO-IR-111 ECMA} Cyrillic Code Page.
+  \end{itemize}
+
+\item |iso88595| --- the \mbox{ISO 8859-5} Cyrillic code-page (also called
+  \mbox{ISO-IR-144}).
+  
+\item |maccyr| --- the Apple Macintosh Cyrillic code-page (also known
+  as Microsoft cp10007) and |macukr|, the Apple Macintosh Ukrainian
+  code-page, very similar to the Cyrillic code-page.
+
+\item The Mongolian code-pages: |ctt| |dbk| |mnk| |mos| |ncc| |mls|.
+  These code-pages were taken from Oliver Corff's `Mon\TeX' package
+  (available at |CTAN:language/mongolian/montex|).  Since the |T2*|
+  encodings support the Mongolian Cyrillic script, it is convenient to
+  have support for Mongolian input encodings as well.  Pointers to
+  documentation for these code-pages will be much appreciated.
+
+\end{itemize}
+
+
+\section{Reporting bugs}
+
+In case you find a bug and want to report it, please follow the
+guidelines given in the file |bugs.txt| in the base \LaTeX{}
+distributions.  Note that there is a category specifically for
+reporting any bugs that occur only when using Cyrillic fonts or
+support packages.
+
+
+\section{Miscellanea in the \textsf{T2} bundle}
+\label{t2m}
+
+The \textsf{T2}~bundle at |CTAN:macros/latex/contrib/supported/t2|
+contains some other useful files, including support for Plain
+\TeX{}-based macro packages, support for Bib\TeX{} and MakeIndex (see
+also the \textsf{xindy} program and package---highly recommended for
+making indices with Cyrillic), support for the \textsf{fontinst}
+package, mapping tables relating these Cyrillic font encodings (and
+input encodings) to the Unicode character names and slots (these are
+in the subdirectory |enc-maps|), and more!
+
+To produce documented source listings of the \textsf{T2}~package, run
+\LaTeX{} on the |*.dtx| and |*.fdd| files therein.
+
+When typesetting Cyrillic texts, there is a tradition of using
+Cyrillic letters (in some situations) within math formul\ae, in
+exactly the same way as most of the world uses Latin letters.
+By default this does not work, because symbols declared with
+|\DeclareTextSymbol| may not be used in math.
+
+If you need within math to `transparently' typeset glyphs declared in
+font encoding definition files, then you could try using the
+experimental \textsf{mathtext} package, which is also in the
+\textsf{T2}~bundle.  Note that this package uses up at least one
+additional math alphabet per font encoding.  For this and other
+reasons, The \LaTeX3 Project Team considers that this experimental
+extension to \LaTeX{}'s glyph-handling mechanisms should be used with
+caution; but please try it out and send us your opinions and ideas.
+Note that it is not included in the core of \LaTeX{} because both the
+coding and the interfaces are likely to change at some point in the
+future.
+
+Finally, here are some pointers to further information:
+
+\begin{quote}
+  \URL{http://www.cemi.rssi.ru/cyrtug}\\
+  \URL{http://xtalk.price.ru/tex}
+\end{quote}
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/doc.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/doc.dtx
index cb658e0c800..582fac5ad33 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/doc.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/doc.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 % \iffalse meta-comment
 %
-% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006
 % The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 % in this file. 
 % 
@@ -8,12 +8,12 @@
 % -------------------------------------------
 % 
 % It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
 % of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 % The latest version of this license is in
 %    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
 % 
 % This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
 % 
@@ -35,7 +35,7 @@
 %<+package|shortvrb>\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1994/12/01]
 %<+package> \ProvidesPackage{doc}
 %<+shortvrb>\ProvidesPackage{shortvrb}
-%<+package|shortvrb>  [2004/02/09 v2.1b
+%<+package|shortvrb>  [2006/02/02 v2.1d
 %<+package|shortvrb>   Standard LaTeX documentation package (FMi)]
 %\catcode`\<=12
 %
@@ -959,6 +959,8 @@
 % \textsf{makeindex} program directly (on our MicroVAX) but the final
 % result was worth the trouble.}
 %
+% \changes{v2.1d}{2006/02/02}{Corrected description of \cs{changes}
+% macro.}
 % \DescribeMacro\changes
 % To maintain a change history within the file, the |\changes|
 % command may be placed amongst the description part of the changed
@@ -969,15 +971,19 @@
 % \end{quote}
 % The changes may be used to produce an auxiliary file (\LaTeX's
 % |\glossary| mechanism is used for this) which may be printed
-% after suitable formatting. The |\changes| macro encloses the
-% \meta{date} in parentheses and appends the \meta{text} to form the
+% after suitable formatting. The |\changes| macro generates the
 % printed entry in such a change history; because old
 % versions\footnote{Before 2.6.} of the \textsf{makeindex}
 % program limit such fields to 64 characters, care should be taken
-% not to exceed this limit when describing the change.  When
+% not to exceed this limit when describing the change. The actual
+% entry consists of the \meta{version}, the |\actualchar|, the current
+% macro name, a colon, the |\levelchar|, and, finally, the \meta{text}.
+% The result is a glossaryentry for the \meta{version}, with the name of
+% the current macro as subitem.  Outside the |macro| environment, the
+% text |\generalname| is used instead of the macro name.  When
 % referring to macros in change descriptions it is conventional to use
-% "`"\meta{macroname} rather than attempting to format it properly and
-% using up valuable characters in the entry with old \textsf{makeindex}
+% |\cs{|\meta{macroname}|}| rather than attempting to format it properly
+% and using up valuable characters in the entry with old \textsf{makeindex}
 % versions.
 %
 % \changes{v1.7a}{1992/02/26}{Description of \cs{RecordChanges} etc. 
@@ -3316,7 +3322,7 @@
 %    by using \cs{special@index} not \cs{index} (PR/2928).}
 % \changes{v2.0e}{1998/12/28}{Use \cs{string}, not \cs{protect} in argument to
 %             \cs{special@index}.}
-% \changes{v2.1b}{2004/02/09}{environment names incorrectly sorted in
+% \changes{v2.1c}{2004/07/23}{environment names incorrectly sorted in
 %           index (pr/3615)}
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \def\SpecialMainEnvIndex#1{\@bsphack\special@index{%
@@ -3363,7 +3369,7 @@
 % \changes{v2.1b}{2004/02/09}{environment names incorrectly sorted in
 %           index (pr/3615)}
 %    \begin{macrocode}
-    \index{environments:#1\actualchar\levelchar{\protect\ttfamily#1}\encapchar 
+    \index{environments:\levelchar#1\actualchar{\protect\ttfamily#1}\encapchar 
            usage}\@esphack}
 %    \end{macrocode}
 %    Because both entries correspond to `descriptions' of the
@@ -3796,7 +3802,7 @@
 % To provide a change history log, the |\changes| command has
 % been introduced.  This takes three arguments, respectively, the
 % version number of the file, the date of the change, and some detail
-% regarding what change has been made.  The first of these arguments
+% regarding what change has been made.  The second of these arguments
 % is otherwise ignored, but the others are written out and may be used
 % to generate a history of changes, to be printed at the end of the
 % document.  However, note that older versions of Chen's standard
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/docstrip.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/docstrip.dtx
index 4f6c7b61bfb..bf5f49ecf4e 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/docstrip.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/docstrip.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 % \iffalse meta-comment
 %
-% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006
 % The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 % in this file. 
 % 
@@ -8,12 +8,12 @@
 % -------------------------------------------
 % 
 % It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
 % of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 % The latest version of this license is in
 %    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
 % 
 % This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
 % 
@@ -29,10 +29,10 @@
 \catcode`\{=1
 \catcode`\}=2
 \def\filename{docstrip.dtx}
-\def\fileversion{2.5c}
-\def\filedate{2003/09/18}
+\def\fileversion{2.5d}
+\def\filedate{2005/07/29}
 \def\docdate {1999/03/31}
-% \CheckSum{2436}
+% \CheckSum{2439}
 %% \CharacterTable
 %%  {Upper-case    \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
 %%   Lower-case    \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
@@ -1875,6 +1875,16 @@ Z
 \iden{\def\@xifnch} {\futurelet\reserved@c\@ifnch}
 %    \end{macrocode}
 % \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\kernel@ifnextchar}
+%   \changes{v2.5d}{2005/07/29}{Added macro} 
+%   The 2003/12/01 release of \LaTeX\ incorporated this macro to avoid
+%   problems with \texttt{amsmath} but this also means that we have to
+%   perform the same trick here when people use \LaTeX\ on a
+%   installation file containing |\ProvidesFile|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\kernel@ifnextchar\@ifnextchar
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
 %
 %
 % \subsection{The evaluation of boolean expressions}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/docstrip.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/docstrip.ins
index 90239d90df0..b6ce9689e52 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/docstrip.ins
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/docstrip.ins
@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
 %% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
 %% LaTeX or TeX.
 %%
-%% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+%% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005
 %% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 %% in this file. 
 %% 
@@ -11,12 +11,12 @@
 %% -------------------------------------------
 %% 
 %% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3b
 %% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 %% The latest version of this license is in
 %%    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%% and version 1.3b or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+%% version 2005/12/01 or later.
 %% 
 %% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
 %% 
@@ -44,7 +44,7 @@
 
 This is a generated file.
 
-Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006
 The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 in this file. 
 
@@ -52,12 +52,12 @@ This file was generated from file(s) of the LaTeX base system.
 --------------------------------------------------------------
 
 It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
 of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 The latest version of this license is in
    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
+and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+version 2005/12/01 or later.
 
 This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
 
@@ -89,16 +89,17 @@ extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
          }
 
 
+\generate{\file{ltxdoc.cls}{\from{ltxdoc.dtx}{class}}
+         }
+
 \generate{\file{doc.sty}{\from{doc.dtx}{package}}
           \file{shortvrb.sty}{\from{doc.dtx}{shortvrb}}
           \usepostamble\istpost
+          \usedir{makeindex/base}
           \file{gind.ist}{\from{doc.dtx}{gind}}
           \file{gglo.ist}{\from{doc.dtx}{gglo}}
          }
 
-\generate{\file{ltxdoc.cls}{\from{ltxdoc.dtx}{class}}
-         }
-
 \ifToplevel{
 \Msg{***********************************************************}
 \Msg{*}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ec.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ec.ins
index 58235d5d6fc..0d06c5a8734 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ec.ins
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ec.ins
@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
 %% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
 %% LaTeX or TeX.
 %%
-%% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+%% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005
 %% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 %% in this file. 
 %% 
@@ -11,12 +11,12 @@
 %% -------------------------------------------
 %% 
 %% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3b
 %% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 %% The latest version of this license is in
 %%    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%% and version 1.3b or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+%% version 2005/12/01 or later.
 %% 
 %% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
 %% 
@@ -40,7 +40,7 @@
 
 This is a generated file.
 
-Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005
 The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 in this file. 
 
@@ -48,12 +48,12 @@ This file was generated from file(s) of the LaTeX base system.
 --------------------------------------------------------------
 
 It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
 of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 The latest version of this license is in
    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
+and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+version 2005/12/01 or later.
 
 This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the LaTeX
 base system. You may however distribute the LaTeX base system without
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/encguide.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/encguide.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..32fc15807ec
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/encguide.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,1406 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file. 
+% 
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+% 
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+%    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
+% 
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+% 
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+% 
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution 
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with 
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+% 
+% \fi
+% $Id: encguide.tex,v 13.13 2006/01/18 23:29:23 robin Exp $
+%
+
+ 
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1995/12/01]
+ 
+\documentclass{ltxguide}[1994/11/20]
+ 
+\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+\IfFileExists{lmodern.sty}{\usepackage{lmodern}}{}
+\usepackage{textcomp}
+\usepackage{url}
+\usepackage{mflogo}
+
+\addtolength\textheight{6\baselineskip}
+\addtolength\topmargin{-2\baselineskip}
+
+
+\newcommand\ttverb[1]{\texttt{\string#1}}
+
+
+% for encodings
+\providecommand{\Enc}[1]{\texttt{#1}}
+
+% for packages
+\providecommand{\Pkg}[1]{%
+  \textsf{#1}}
+
+% for files
+\providecommand{\File}[1]{%
+  \texttt{#1}}
+
+% let's have meta values too
+\providecommand{\meta}[1]{%
+  \ensuremath{\langle}\emph{#1}\ensuremath{\rangle}}
+
+\usepackage{tabularx}
+
+% eine Umgebung zur Darstellung von Kodierungen
+%
+% Argumente:
+%  #1: Name in LaTeX (z.B. OT1)
+%  #2: Name der Kodierung (z.B. TeX text)
+%  #3: Name des Autors (z.B. Don Knuth)
+%  #4: Bereich der benützten Glyphindizes
+%  #5: variable Positionen
+%  #6: Beispielzeichensatz
+%  #7: Referenz
+%
+% XXX add code to handle more than a single font example (e.g., larm1000,
+% lbrm1000, and lcrm1000).
+%
+\newenvironment{encodinginfo}[7]%
+  {\noindent
+   \begin{tabularx}{\linewidth}{@{}l>{\raggedright\let\\\tabularnewline}X}%
+     \LaTeX{} name:          & \texttt{#1}\\%
+     Public name:          & #2\\%
+     Author:                   & #3\\%
+     Glyph slots used: & #4\\%
+     Variable slots:     & #5\\%
+     Font example:     & \def\@tempa{#6}\ifx\@tempa\@empty---%
+                            \else\texttt{#6}\referenceftable{#6}\fi\\%
+     Further reference:                & #7%
+   \end{tabularx}%
+   \par\nobreak
+   \vspace*{3pt}%
+   \quote
+  }%
+  {\endquote
+   \vspace{6pt}}
+
+\makeatletter
+\def\referenceftable#1{
+  \@ifundefined{r@fonttable:#1}%
+  \relax
+  {;\space encoding table on page~\pageref{fonttable:#1}}%
+}
+
+% font table macros mainly lifted from manmac.tex
+\def\oct#1{\hbox{\rm\'{}\kern-.2em\it#1\/\kern.05em}}
+\def\hex#1{\hbox{\rm\H{}\tt#1}}
+
+\def\oddline#1{\cr\noalign{\nointerlineskip}
+  \multispan{19}\hrulefill&
+  \setbox0=\hbox{\lower 2.3pt\hbox{\hex{#1x}}}\smash{\box0}\cr
+  \noalign{\nointerlineskip}}
+\def\evenline{\cr\noalign{\hrule}}
+\def\chartstrut{\lower4.5pt\vbox to14pt{}}
+\def\beginchart#1#2{$$\global\count@=0 #1
+  \halign to\hsize\bgroup
+    \chartstrut##\tabskip0pt plus10pt&
+    &\hfil##\hfil&\vrule##\cr
+    \lower6.5pt\null
+  &#2&&\oct0&&\oct1&&\oct2&&\oct3&&\oct4&&\oct5&&\oct6&&\oct7&\evenline}
+\def\endchart{\raise11.5pt\null&&&\hex 8&&\hex 9&&\hex A&&\hex B&
+  &\hex C&&\hex D&&\hex E&&\hex F&\cr\egroup$$}
+\def\:{\setbox0=\hbox{\noboundary\char\count@\noboundary}%
+  \ifdim\ht0>7.5pt\reposition
+  \else\ifdim\dp0>2.5pt\reposition\fi\fi
+  \box0\global\advance\count@ by1 }
+\def\reposition{\setbox0=\hbox{$\vcenter{\kern2pt\box0\kern2pt}$}}
+\def\normalchart{%
+  &\oct{00x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline0
+  &\oct{01x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline
+  &\oct{02x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline1
+  &\oct{03x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline
+  &\oct{04x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline2
+  &\oct{05x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline
+  &\oct{06x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline3
+  &\oct{07x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline
+  &\oct{10x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline4
+  &\oct{11x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline
+  &\oct{12x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline5
+  &\oct{13x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline
+  &\oct{14x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline6
+  &\oct{15x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline
+  &\oct{16x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline7
+  &\oct{17x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline
+  \top}
+
+\def\notophalf{}
+\def\tophalf{%
+%\noalign{\vskip 5pt\hrule}
+  &\oct{20x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline8
+  &\oct{21x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline
+  &\oct{22x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline9
+  &\oct{23x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline
+  &\oct{24x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline A
+  &\oct{25x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline
+  &\oct{26x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline B
+  &\oct{27x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline
+  &\oct{30x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline C
+  &\oct{31x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline
+  &\oct{32x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline D
+  &\oct{33x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline
+  &\oct{34x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline E
+  &\oct{35x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline
+  &\oct{36x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline F
+  &\oct{37x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline}
+
+\def\ftable#1#2{%
+     \batchmode
+     \font\X=#1%
+     \errorstopmode
+     \ifx\X\nullfont
+       \@warning{Font #1 not found, table omitted}
+     \else
+       \count@="80
+       \setbox0=\hbox{\X
+        \loop\char\count@\advance\count@ by1 \ifnum\count@<"100 
+        \repeat}%
+  \ifdim\wd0>0pt \let\top\tophalf\else\let\top\notophalf\fi
+     \beginchart\X{\hfill\llap{\textbf{#1, \large#2}\label{fonttable:#1}}}\normalchart
+     \endchart\par\vfill
+    \fi}
+\makeatother
+
+
+\setcounter{tocdepth}{3}
+
+\title{\LaTeX{} font encodings}
+ 
+\author{Frank Mittelbach \and Robin
+   Fairbairns \and Werner Lemberg \and \LaTeX3 Project Team.}
+ 
+\date{\copyright~Copyright 1995--1997,  2005, 2006 \\[5pt] 6 January 2006}
+ 
+\begin{document}
+ 
+\maketitle
+ 
+\tableofcontents
+ 
+\section{Introduction}
+
+This document explains the ideas that underpin \LaTeX{} font
+encodings and the constraints that apply when defining a new encoding; it
+also lists the encodings that have already been defined.
+
+\subsection{Encodings in \TeX{}}
+
+\TeX{} (the program) implicitly recognises three sorts of encoding,
+and all are (in a sense) discussed in the \TeX{}book~\cite{A-W:DKn86}:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item[1.] The input encoding, which specifies the meanings of characters
+  in files presented to \TeX{} for processing.  The \TeX{}book
+  suggests that `your version of \TeX{} will recognise the characters
+  you type on your keyboard' (\TeX{} the program has provision for
+  static translations of input characters).
+\end{itemize}
+Such direct use of \TeX{}'s facilities is not the way modern
+\LaTeX{} (or indeed any other \TeX{} macro package) is likely to deal
+with input encodings.   This document does not address the topic of
+input encodings; the interested reader should examine the \LaTeX{}
+base package \Pkg{inputenc} \cite[sec.~7.5.2, p.~357]{A-W:MG2004}.
+\begin{itemize}
+\item[2.] The token stream that \TeX{} processes internally.  This stream
+  of \TeX{}'s consciousness is discussed in great detail in the
+  \TeX{}book.
+\end{itemize}
+Again, this document does not address the topic.  \LaTeX's internal
+character representation (\textsc{licr}) is well discussed in
+\cite[sec.~7.11.2, p.~442]{A-W:MG2004}.
+\begin{itemize}
+\item[3.] The font encoding---i.e., the mapping of character codes to
+  glyphs in the fonts that are used to typeset \TeX{}'s output.
+  Again, a set of font encodings is enumerated in the \TeX{}book, but
+  that set has proved inadequate to the needs of modern multilingual
+  use of \LaTeX.
+\end{itemize}
+This document explains \emph{why} Knuth's original set of encodings is
+inadequate to modern conditions, and discusses the issues that
+surround the design and definition of new font encodings.
+
+Font encodings are important for more than their r\^{o}le in mapping the
+glyphs of the fonts to be used for typesetting: their glyph tables are
+also the context in which \TeX{}'s hyphenation algorithm operates.
+There are constraints imposed by \TeX{} that affect the way in which
+new font encodings, for use in a multi-lingual environment, may be
+structured (see section~\ref{sec:restrictions} for details).
+
+\subsection{The history of \TeX{} font encodings}
+
+Little attention was paid to font encodings prior to the arrival of
+\TeX{}\,3.  Up to that time, one used Donald Knuth's fonts (the
+Computer Modern family, using the encodings we now refer to as \Enc{OT1} and
+the \Enc{OM} series), or one was on one's own.
+
+The Computer Modern text encoding raises problems in unmodified
+\TeX{}, because hyphenation cannot break words containing
+\verb"\accent" commands.  Even in those Western European languages for
+which the \Enc{OT1} encoding has symbols for the necessary
+\verb"\accent"-based diacritics, this shortcoming ruins typesetting of
+running text. 
+
+With the advent of \TeX{}\,3, with its ability to switch between
+hyphenation pattern sets, it was clear that the situation could not
+continue.  Thus a group at the TUG Annual General Meeting in Cork,
+Ireland, specified a uniform encoding for 256-glyph fonts, that
+contains accented letters and non-\textsc{ascii} letters necessary to
+express most Western European languages (and some Eastern European ones)
+without recourse to the \verb"\accent" command.
+
+This ``Cork'' encoding has since been realised in a series of fonts
+designed with Metafont, in at least one font series that is available
+both in Adobe Type 1 format and in OpenType format, % viz., Latin Modern
+and in a number of virtual-font mappings of other font series.
+
+Since the time of the Cork meeting, much effort has been devoted to
+the design of encodings for text fonts to use with \TeX{}, and the
+Cork encoding influenced the design of many such encodings.
+
+Encodings for mathematical fonts have, in contrast, changed little
+since Knuth's contributions.  A TUG Technical Working Group was
+established at the Cork meeting, whose aim was to define a set of
+256-glyph encodings to regularise and extend Knuth's originals, using
+ideas from several other fonts that had appeared since, and from the
+known needs of researchers in mathematics and the mathematical sciences.
+
+Independently, a first proposal (the so-called \emph{Aston proposal}) was worked
+out by Justin Ziegler together with Frank Mittelbach and other members of the
+\LaTeX3 project team~\cite{ziegler}. A first implementation of
+this propsal was realized by Matthias Clasen und Ulrik
+Vieth~\cite{clasen,clasen-vieth}.
+
+However, the slow progress of these Mathematical encodings has been
+overtaken by the addition (in the last decade or so) of a large number
+of mathematical symbols to Unicode~\cite{beeton}; one can expect
+further changes so that new public mathematical font encodings will
+most likely be delayed still further.
+
+
+
+\subsection{Further information}
+ 
+For a general introduction to \LaTeX, including the new features of
+\LaTeXe, you should read \emph{\LaTeXbook},
+Leslie Lamport, Addison Wesley, 2nd~ed, 1994.
+ 
+A more detailed description of the new features of \LaTeX, including an
+overview of more than 200 packages and nearly 1000 ready to run examples, is
+to be found in \emph{\LaTeXcomp{} second edition} by Frank Mittelbach and
+Michel Goossens~\cite{A-W:MG2004}.
+
+The \LaTeX{} project sponsored a report on Mathematical % spelt out in full
+font encodings, which
+is worth reading for its insight into the problems of defining the way
+in which math is used: see~\cite{ziegler,clasen,clasen-vieth}.
+ 
+The \LaTeX{} font selection scheme is based on \TeX, which is described
+by its developer in \emph{The \TeX book}, Donald E.~Knuth, Addison
+Wesley, 1986, revised in 1991 to include the features of \TeX~3.
+ 
+For more information about \TeX{} and \LaTeX, please contact your local
+\TeX{} Users Group, or the international \TeX{} Users Group
+(\url{http://www.tug.org}).
+
+
+
+\section{Existing font encodings}
+
+This section lists the encodings currently assigned; for each
+encoding, we list the registered (\LaTeX{}) name, the assigned purpose
+of the encoding, and the author.  Further details may list the code
+positions used in the encoding, the \emph{variable slots} (see below),
+an example font (for which a listing will be provided later in the
+document if the relevant fonts are present), and a source for further
+reference.
+
+While the characteristic feature of an encoding is that each font
+encoded according to the encoding should have the same glyph set,
+there are some encodings (notably \Enc{OT1} and its descendants) in
+which a few glyph code slots differ in their contents in different
+fonts.
+
+\subsection{Naming conventions}
+
+Names for encoding schemes are strings of up to three letters (all
+upper case) plus digits.
+
+The \LaTeX3 project reserves the use of encoding names starting with the
+following letters: |T| (standard 256-long text encodings), |TS|
+(symbols that are designed to extend a corresponding |T| encoding),
+|X| (text encodings that do not conform to the strict requirements for
+|T| encodings), |M| (standard 256-long mathematical encodings), |S| (other
+symbol encodings), |A| (other special applications), |OT| (standard
+128-long text encodings), and |OM| (standard 128-long mathematical encodings).
+
+Please do not use the above starting letters for non-portable
+encodings.  If new standard encodings emerge then we shall add them in
+a later release of \LaTeX.
+
+Encoding schemes which are local to a site or a system should start
+with |L|, experimental encodings intended for wide distribution will
+start with |E|, whilst |U| is for Unknown or Unclassified encodings.
+
+\begin{quote}
+  \itshape We recommend that new encoding names should not be
+  introduced unless careful consideration and discussion in the user
+  community has confirmed the need for the encoding. If encodings have to
+  change from font to font, a number of problems arise, so it is best to
+  develop encodings that can be used with a large number of fonts in parallel.
+  This allows documents to be typeset using different fonts without problems.
+  
+  The \Enc{TS1} encoding is a good example of a \emph{bad} encoding (even
+  though it was developed with the best intentions) as a huge number of fonts
+  can only implement parts of it. Similarly, the fact that the few sets of
+  available mathematical fonts (beside Computer Modern Math) nearly
+  all implement slightly different encodings is a huge source of
+  problems. Don't add to this if possible!
+\end{quote}
+
+ 
+\subsection{128$^+$ glyph encodings (text)}
+
+The `OT' series of font encodings start with Donald Knuth's original
+text encoding, that used for the text fonts in the earliest releases
+of \TeX{} itself.  The `O' of the encoding designator may be taken as
+signifying `original', or just `old'.
+
+\begin{encodinginfo}{OT1}
+        {\TeX{} text}
+        {Donald Ervin Knuth}
+        {0x00--0x7F}
+        {0x0B--0x0F, 0x24, 0x3C, 0x3E, 0x5C, 0x7B--0x7D}
+% {0X--'177}
+% {'13--'17, '44, '74, '76, '134, '173--'175}
+        {cmr10}
+        {\cite[p.427]{A-W:DKn86}}
+
+  Donald Knuth designed his font encoding (and hence his fonts) in a
+  very different environment from that which now pervades the \TeX{}
+  world: his (mainframe) computer had very little memory, there was
+  little experience in (or demand for) for multilingual technical
+  typesetting, and as a result it was appropriate to sacrifice
+  uniformity for efficiency.
+
+  Thus Knuth's original fonts differ slightly in some encoded slots:
+  for example, the glyphs \texttt{\string<}, \texttt{\string>},
+  \verb=\=, \verb={=, and \verb=}= are only available in the
+  typewriter fonts and the \textdollar{} and \textsterling{} signs
+  share the same position (in different font shapes).
+  
+  This means that direct selection of these slots can produce
+  unpredictable results, e.g., typing \texttt{\string<} or
+  \verb=\symbol{'74}= in a document can yield `\textquestiondown'.
+\end{encodinginfo}
+
+
+\begin{encodinginfo}{OT2}
+        {UW cyrillic encoding}
+        {University of Washington}
+        {0x00--0x7F}
+        {---}
+        {wnr10}
+        {\cite{Beeton:TB6-3-124}}
+  Support for this encoding is available in the Cyrillic bundle although for
+  all practical purposes it is better to use one of the \Enc{T2} encodings.
+\end{encodinginfo}
+
+
+\begin{encodinginfo}{OT3}
+        {UW IPA encoding}
+        {University of Washington}
+        {0x00--0x7f}
+        {---}
+        {wsuipa10}
+        {\cite[p.149]{CorkGW:91}}
+  The \Enc{OT3} encoding was never really used with \LaTeXe{}
+  following the introduction of the TIPA system which offers much
+  better support for IPA. In particular, no \File{ot3enc.def}
+  file was ever produced. 
+\end{encodinginfo}
+
+
+\begin{encodinginfo}{OT4}
+        {Polish text encoding}
+        {B.~Jackowski and M.~Ry\'cko} %% ?  Marcin Woli\'nski
+  {0x00--0x7F, 0x81, 0x82, 0x86, 0x8A, 0x8B, 0x91, 0x99, 0x9B, 0xA1,
+   0xA2, 0xA6, 0xAA, 0xAB, 0xAE, 0xAF, 0xB1, 0xB9, 0xBB, 0xD3, 0xF3,
+   0xFF}
+  {0x0B--0x0F, 0x24, 0x3C, 0x3E, 0x5C, 0x7B--0x7D}
+        {plr10}
+        {---}
+
+   While Knuth included the means of typesetting the `lost L' (\L) in
+  his \Enc{OT1} encoding, he omitted the ogonek (\,\,\k{}), a diacritic
+  mark that is also needed in Polish text; hence the appearance, well
+  before the \Enc{T1} encoding, of fonts using this encoding.
+\end{encodinginfo}
+
+\begin{encodinginfo}{OT5}
+        {Not currently allocated}
+        {---}
+        {---}
+        {---}
+        {}
+        {---}
+
+\end{encodinginfo}
+
+      
+
+\begin{encodinginfo}{OT6}
+        {Armenian text encoding}
+        {Serguei Dachian}
+        {0x03--0x0F, 0x13--0x7F}
+        {---}
+        {artmr10}
+        {---}
+
+  This encoding was allocated to permit use of Dachian's
+  Armenian fonts in a standard \LaTeX{} environment.
+\end{encodinginfo}
+
+
+
+\subsection{256 glyph encodings (text)}
+
+\begin{encodinginfo}{T1}
+        {Cork encoding}
+        {Euro \TeX{} conference at Cork}
+        {0x00--0xFF}
+        {---}
+        {ecrm1000}
+        {\cite[p.514]{tub:MFe90}, \cite[p.99]{Knappen:TB17-2-96}}
+
+  The Cork encoding was developed so that advantage could be taken of
+  the (then) new facilities of \TeX{}\,3, allowing hyphenation of
+  most Western European (and some Eastern European) languages in an
+  unmodified version of \TeX{}.
+
+  The encoding was developed in the absence of any extant effort at
+  font design, but instances written in Metafont (the `EC' fonts), and
+  more recently Adobe Type 1 instances of the same fonts have become
+  available.
+
+  Substantial (but incomplete) instances have also been developed,
+  which use virtual fonts.  These latter instances map either Knuth's
+  original (OT1-encoded) fonts, or commercial fonts that contain the
+  Adobe `standard' set of 224 glyphs.
+\end{encodinginfo}
+
+\begin{encodinginfo}
+  {T2A, T2B, T2C}
+  {Cyrillic encodings}
+  {The CyrTUG font team}
+  {0x00--0xFF}
+  {--- (within each encoding)}
+  {larm1000}
+  {\cite{Berdnikov:eurotex-98}}
+  
+  There are too many glyphs in the full Cyrillic complement of
+  languages for all of them to be covered by a single
+  \LaTeX{}-compliant encoding (the lower half of each
+  \Enc{T2}~encoding is identical to that of \Enc{T1}, in order that
+  each should be a conforming \LaTeX{} encoding~--- see
+  section~\ref{sec:restrictions}).  The approach taken is
+  therefore to develop a single encoding, \Enc{X2} (see \ref{sec:extendedenc})
+  which contains all the glyphs needed for the full set of
+  languages, and then to derive the three \LaTeX{}-complaint
+  \Enc{T2}-family encodings using the \Enc{X2} set together with that of
+  \Enc{T1}.
+
+\end{encodinginfo}
+
+
+
+\begin{encodinginfo}{T3}
+        {IPA encoding}
+        {FUKUI Rei, University of Tokyo}
+        {0x00--0xFF}
+        {---}
+        {tipa10}
+        {\cite[p.102]{Rei:TB17-2-102}}
+
+
+    The \Enc{T3} encoding (and associated macros) provides the glyphs required
+  in phonetic description according to current International Phonetic
+  Association recommendations \cite{ipa}.
+  
+  The \Enc{T3} encoding does \emph{not fulfil} the requirements for \Enc{T}
+  encodings---the name is a historical accident. The correct name would be
+  \Enc{X3}, but due to the fact that this font family has been used under its
+  current encoding name for a long time, the name will not change for
+  compatibility reasons.
+
+\end{encodinginfo}
+
+
+
+\begin{encodinginfo}{T4}
+        {African Latin (fc)}              % public name
+        {J\"org Knappen}              % author name
+        {0x00--0xFF}              % range(s) of slots used for glyphs
+        {0x24}         % range(s) of slots with variable glyphs if any
+        {fcr10}              % name of an example font
+        {\cite{tub:JKn93}} 
+
+The African Latin fonts contain in their lower half (0--127) the same
+characters as the European Latin (T1-encoded) Fonts, while in their
+upper half (128--255) they
+contain letters and symbols for African languages that use extended
+Latin alphabets. 
+Due to lack of space, J\"org had to play the unfortunate trick of
+assigning \verb=\textdollar= and \verb=\textsterling= 
+the same position; users should take these characters
+from the text companion font, if they are needed.  Instead of defining
+a lot of new control sequences for the single letters, there are three
+accent-like control sequences with general purpose:
+\verb=\m= (Modified-1),
+\verb=\M= (Modified-2) and
+\verb=\B= (Barred).
+Most standard \LaTeX{} encoding-dependent commands 
+work.  However, the Icelandic special letters are not available and `best
+replacements' for \verb=\Th=, \verb=\th=, and \verb=\dh= 
+are used (barred T and d resp.).
+\end{encodinginfo}
+
+
+\begin{encodinginfo}{T5}
+        {Vietnamese encoding}
+        {Werner Lemberg and
+         Vladimir Volovich}
+        {0x00--0xFF}
+        {---}
+        {vnr10}
+        {\cite{vnr}}
+
+  The \Enc{T5} encoding was developed for Vietnamese. Again, this encoding
+  \emph{does not} conform to the requirements for a \Enc{T}-encoding
+  because its large number of accented letters prevent the \verb=\lccode= and
+  \verb=\uccode= mapping requirements for \Enc{T} encodings from being
+  fulfilled.  However, since the Vietnamese language does not
+  use word division in typesetting so that this requirement is
+  actually not important for this particular language.
+  Since every glyph used in Vietnamese text is internally
+  represented as \textsc{licr} macros, the commands  \verb=\MakeUppercase= and
+  \verb=\MakeLowercase= still work as expected (as they change the case of the
+  \textsc{ascii} characters in \textsc{licr} definitions).
+
+\end{encodinginfo}
+
+\begin{encodinginfo}
+  {T6}
+  {Armenian}
+  {---}
+  {---}
+  {---}
+  {}
+  {---}
+
+    This encoding is reserved to permit future expansion of Armenian
+  \TeX{} to use 256-character (hyphenatable) fonts.
+\end{encodinginfo}
+
+\begin{encodinginfo}{T7}
+        {Greek encoding}
+   {---}
+   {---}
+   {---}
+   {}
+   {---}
+
+The name is already reserved for a 256 glyph greek encoding. The encoding
+itself hasn't been defined so far.
+
+\end{encodinginfo}
+
+
+
+\subsection{256$^-$ glyph encodings (text symbols)}
+
+\begin{encodinginfo}{TS1}
+        {Text Companion encoding (Cork)}
+        {J\"org Knappen}
+  {0x00--0x0D, 0x12, 0x15, 0x16, 0x18--0x1D, 0x20, 0x24, 0x27, 0x2A,
+   0x2C--0x3A, 0x3C--0x3E, 0x4D, 0x4F, 0x57, 0x5B, 0x5D--0x60,
+   0x62--0x64, 0x6C--0x6E, 0x7E--0xBF, 0xD6, 0xF6}
+  {---}
+        {tcrm1000}
+        {\cite{Knappen:TB17-2-96}}
+
+   The text symbol encoding offers access to symbolic glyphs that are
+  commonly used in text (for a variety of reasons), and whose style
+  should vary with the text that surrounds them.
+
+  Unfortunately, the \Enc{TS1} encoding was developed without
+  reference to the glyphs available in existing commercial fonts.
+  As a result, only font families
+  explicitly developed for \TeX{} (i.e., typically originating with
+  \MF{}) actually contain all glyphs required by the \Enc{TS1}
+  encoding.  Most other font families (whether free or commercial)
+  often only provide half of the set%
+%%
+%% don't show the comment if the tables are not generated
+%%
+\expandafter\ifx\csname r@fonttable:tcrm1000\endcsname\relax
+\else
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname r@fonttable:ptmr8c\endcsname\relax
+  \else
+    \space (compare the two tables for \Enc{TS1} on 
+     pages~\pageref{fonttable:tcrm1000} 
+     and~\pageref{fonttable:ptmr8c})%
+  \fi
+\fi.
+  To improve this situation somewhat, NFSS provides a way to define encoding
+  subsets on a per family basis in the \Pkg{textcomp} package (which
+  package offers support for the \Enc{TS1} encoding).
+\end{encodinginfo}
+
+
+\begin{encodinginfo}{TS3}
+        {IPA symbol encoding}
+        {FUKUI Rei, University of Tokyo}
+        {0x00--0x0A, 0x20--0x49, 0x50--0x56, 0x70--0x7B}
+        {---}
+        {tipx10}
+        {\cite{Rei:TB17-2-102}}
+
+  The \Enc{TS3} encoding (together with the \Enc{T3} encoding) provides the
+  glyphs for typesetting phonetic transcriptions following the
+  guidelines of the International Phonetic Association \cite{ipa}.  Support
+  is offered through the \Pkg{tipa} package.
+\end{encodinginfo}
+
+
+
+
+\subsection{256 glyph encodings (text extended)}
+\label{sec:extendedenc}
+
+\begin{encodinginfo}
+  {X2}
+  {Cyrillic glyph container}
+  {The CyrTUG font team}
+  {0x00--0xFF}
+  {---}
+  {rxrm1000}
+  {\cite{Berdnikov:eurotex-98}}
+
+  This encoding specifies the glyph container for Cyrillic characters,
+  which is used in specifying the \Enc{T2A}, \Enc{T2B} and \Enc{T2C} encodings.
+\end{encodinginfo}
+
+
+
+
+\subsection{128$^+$ glyph encodings (mathematics)}
+
+
+\begin{encodinginfo}{OML}
+        {\TeX{} math italic}
+        {Donald Ervin Knuth}
+        {0x00--0x7F}
+        {---}
+        {cmmi10}
+        {\cite[p.430]{A-W:DKn86}}
+
+  The \Enc{OML} encoding contains italic Latin and Greek letters for
+  use in mathematical formulas (typically used for variables) together
+  with some symbols.
+
+\end{encodinginfo}
+
+\begin{encodinginfo}{OMS}
+        {\TeX{} math symbol}
+        {Donald Ervin Knuth}
+        {0x00--0x7F}
+        {---}
+        {cmsy10}
+        {\cite[p.431]{A-W:DKn86}}
+  
+  The  \Enc{OMS} encoding contains basic mathematical symbols,
+  together with an uppercase ``calligraphic'' Latin alphabet.
+\end{encodinginfo}
+
+
+\begin{encodinginfo}{OMX}
+        {\TeX{} math extension}
+        {Donald Ervin Knuth}
+        {0x00--0x7F}
+        {---}
+        {cmex10}
+        {\cite[p.432]{A-W:DKn86}}
+
+  \Enc{OMS} encodes mathematical symbols with variable sizes, such as
+  the $\sum$ sign, which changes its size if used in displayed
+  formulas, and the construction parts for
+  brackets, braces and radicals, etc., which can stretch to accommodate
+  the thing they're enclosing.
+
+\end{encodinginfo}
+
+
+
+
+\subsection{256 glyph encodings (mathematics)}
+
+So far there are no 256 glyph mathematical encodings. A proposal is
+given in \cite{ziegler}.
+
+
+\subsection{Other encodings}
+
+\begin{encodinginfo}
+  {C..}
+  {CJK encodings}
+  {Werner Lemberg}
+  {0x00--0xFF}
+  {---}
+  {} % no font, of course
+  {\cite{CJK}}
+
+  The \Pkg{CJK} package defines a number of encodings which access Chinese,
+  Japanese and Korean fonts.
+
+\end{encodinginfo}
+
+\begin{encodinginfo}
+  {E..}
+  {Experimental encodings}
+  {---}
+  {0x00--0xFF}
+  {all}
+  {}
+  {\cite[p.416]{A-W:MG2004}}
+  
+  As the name indicates, encodings starting with the letter \Enc{E} are
+  intended for experimental encodings, that are still likely to change.
+\end{encodinginfo}
+
+\begin{encodinginfo}{L..}
+        {Local encoding (site dependent)}
+        {---}
+        {0x00--0xFF}
+        {all}
+        {}
+        {\cite[p.416]{A-W:MG2004}}
+        
+        `Local' encodings provide the means to develop representation
+        techniques that are suited to a particular \TeX{} environment.  While
+        the developer has freedom to specify their encoding as he or she
+        pleases, there is a strong incentive to obey the \LaTeX{} rules for
+        encodings, since it will otherwise be difficult to compose text using
+        the encoding.
+  
+        At least it was the intention that \Enc{L..} encodings are local and
+        site dependent. However, a number of such encodings became generally
+        used without ever getting a different name allocated.
+
+\end{encodinginfo}
+
+
+
+\begin{encodinginfo}{LY1}
+        {Y\&Y 256 glyph encoding}
+        {Berthold Horn}
+        {0x00--0x08, 0x0C, 0x10, 0x12--0xFF}
+        {\emph{believed none}}
+        {ptmr8y}
+        {\cite[p.416]{A-W:MG2004}}
+        
+        This is an alternative to the \Enc{T1} encoding developed by Y\&Y and
+        used in their commerical \TeX{} implementation.
+
+\end{encodinginfo}
+
+
+\begin{encodinginfo}{LV1}
+        {MicroPress encoding}
+        {Michael Vulis}
+        {\emph{unknown}}
+        {\emph{unknown}}
+        {}
+        {\cite[p.416]{A-W:MG2004}}
+
+        This is an encoding developed by MicroPress and used for some of their
+        fonts.
+
+\end{encodinginfo}
+
+
+\begin{encodinginfo}{LGR}
+        {Greek 256 glyph encoding}
+        {\emph{unknown}}
+        {0x00--0xFF}
+        {\emph{believed none}}
+        {grmn1000}
+        {\cite[p.575]{A-W:MG2004}}
+        
+        Currently the main encoding in use for the Greek language.
+
+        This encoding doesn't conform to the restrictions for
+        \Enc{T}-encodings described in section~\ref{sec:restrictions} on
+        page~\pageref{sec:restrictions} as it doesn't have \textsc{ascii}
+        glyphs at all.
+
+\end{encodinginfo}
+
+
+\begin{encodinginfo}
+  {PD1}
+  {PDF DocEncoding}
+  {Adobe}
+  {0x08--0x0A, 0x0C, 0x0D, 0x18--0x7E, 0x80--0x9E, 0xA0--0xAE, 0xB0--0xFF}
+  {---}
+  {}
+  {\cite{Adobe:PDF-1.6}, \cite{hyperref}}
+  
+  The \Enc{PD1} encoding is a virtual encoding with 256 glyphs needed to
+  produce bookmarks and similar text in PDF document generated with pdf\LaTeX.
+  The encoding is ``virtual'' because by design there are no \TeX{}
+  fonts that cover \Enc{PD1}. Details can be found in appendix D.1
+  of~\cite{Adobe:PDF-1.6}.
+\end{encodinginfo}
+
+\begin{encodinginfo}
+  {PU}
+  {PDF Unicode Encoding}
+  {Adobe}
+  {---}
+  {---}
+  {}
+  {\cite{Adobe:PDF-1.6}, \cite{hyperref}}
+  
+  Another virtual encoding (with more than 600 characters) for
+  Unicode-encoded bookmarks in PDF documents.
+\end{encodinginfo}
+
+\begin{encodinginfo}{U}
+        {Unknown encoding}
+        {---}
+        {potentially 0x00-0xFF}
+        {all}
+        {wasy10}
+        {\cite[p.416]{A-W:MG2004}}
+
+  This encoding should be used for fonts that resist classification,
+  e.g., when it is clear that there will never be more than one font
+  using the same encoding.
+
+\end{encodinginfo}
+
+
+
+\section{Restrictions} 
+\label{sec:restrictions}
+
+
+\subsection{Required glyphs for general text encodings}
+
+Encodings that are supposed to be used with \LaTeX{} for `general
+purpose text fonts' need to have certain fixed glyphs in certain
+encoding slots.  A `general purpose text font' is one intended for
+arbitrary natural language text and not just within special
+environments (such as the phonetic alphabet) or just for typesetting
+individual symbols (e.g., the text companion font with encoding
+\Enc{TS1}).
+
+This is the case for the following glyphs that have to be in their
+\textsc{ascii} positions for general purpose text encodings:
+\begin{center}
+\begin{tabular}[t]{cc}
+  Glyph & Position \\ \hline
+  !     & \number`\!    \\
+  '     & \number`\'    \\
+  (     & \number`\(    \\
+  )     & \number`\)    \\
+  \relax*       & \number`\*    \\
+  +     & \number`\+    \\
+  ,     & \number`\,    \\
+  -     & \number`\-    \\
+  .     & \number`\.    \\
+  /     & \number`\/    \\
+  0 \ldots\ 9   & \number`\0\ to \number`\9     \\
+  \end{tabular}
+  \quad
+  \begin{tabular}[t]{cc}
+  Glyph & Position \\ \hline
+  :     & \number`\:    \\
+  ;     & \number`\;    \\
+  =     & \number`\=    \\
+  ?     & \number`\?    \\
+  @     & \number`\@    \\
+  A \ldots\ Z   & \number`\A\ to \number`\Z     \\
+  \relax[       & \number`\[    \\
+  ]     & \number`\]    \\
+  `     & \number`\`    \\
+  a \ldots\ z   & \number`\a\ to \number`\z     \\
+\end{tabular}
+\quad
+\begin{tabular}[t]{cc}
+Glyph\footnotemark      & Position \\ \hline
+<       & \number`\<    \\
+>       & \number`\>    \\
+\string|        & \number`\|    \\
+\end{tabular}\footnotetext{The requirement for these three glyphs is
+  violated in the Latin alphabet \Enc{OT} encodings.}
+\end{center}
+In addition the following glyphs have to be present
+somewhere\footnote{The position in this case is not important as they
+are generated from ligature programs.} in the encoding together with
+corresponding ligature programs to generate them:
+\begin{center}
+\begin{tabular}[t]{cc}
+Glyph   & Ligature program \\ \hline
+ ``     & \texttt{`\/`} \\
+ ''     & \texttt{'\/'} \\
+ --     & \texttt{-\/-} \\
+ ---    & \texttt{-\/-\/-} \\
+\end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+
+This is $33 + 2 * 26 = 85$ positions ``required'', which leaves 171
+positions free.
+
+If there are free slots available then adding all or some of the
+diacritics would be the best way to fill them.
+
+If there are insufficient slots for the characters needed, a possible
+technique is to create a subsidiary encoding, and to move non-letter
+characters to it.  Since only ``letters'' take part in the hyphenation
+algorithm, this technique doesn't affect the appearance of the typeset
+result.
+
+\subsection{The constraints on upper/lower case tables}
+
+Due to some technical restrictions of \TeX{} related to hyphenation it
+is not possible in \LaTeX{} to use more than one \verb=\lccode= or
+\verb=\uccode= table. Therefore all encodings need to share these two
+tables which are defined to be those of the \Enc{T1} encoding.
+
+The \Enc{T1} encoding has some nasty peculiarities which make certain slot
+positions more or less unusable for other encodings if this
+restriction is to be obeyed. This is unfortunate but since \Enc{T1} is well
+established and the basis for a large number of languages it seemed
+better to live with this situation instead of trying to replace \Enc{T1} with a
+slightly better standard (with the result that for a long time
+different \LaTeX{} installations would not be able to communicate with
+each other because of incompatible font sets).
+
+The positions that are problematic are as follows.
+\begin{center}
+\begin{tabular}{lp{.8\linewidth}}
+25 (\char 25) & uppercase maps strangely (same as for 105, \char 105)\\
+26 (\char 26) & uppercase maps strangely (same as for 106, \char 106)\\
+27 (\char 27) & lowercase maps to itself which makes this slot subject
+                to hyphenation (used to support \Enc{OT1} encoding) \\
+157 (\char 157) & lowercase maps strangely (same as for 73, \char 73) \\
+158 (\char 158) & uppercase maps strangely (same as for 240, \char 240) \\
+\end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+One way to use such slots is to fill them with ligature glyphs as
+\TeX{} will not consult these tables for glyphs constructed through
+ligatures programs but instead uses the entries for the individual
+glyphs used to produce the ligature.
+
+A complete listing of the uppercase/lowercase mapping tables is to be
+found in section~\ref{sec:uclc-tab} (page \pageref{sec:uclc-tab}).
+
+\newcount\temp \newcount\tempL \newcount\tempU
+
+\def\nextstep{\global\tempL=\lccode\temp
+              \global\tempU=\uccode\temp
+              \lctablenumbersize\the\temp &
+              \the\tempL&
+              \the\tempU&\printlowerupper{\the\temp}{\the\tempL}{\the\tempU}\\
+               \global\advance\temp by 1
+               \stepprint}
+
+\def\printlowerupper#1#2#3{\char#1\relax
+   (\ifnum#2=0\relax--\else\char#2\fi
+   /\ifnum#3=0\relax--\else\char#3\fi)}
+
+\def\stepprint{\relax\ifnum\temp<\endval
+                    \let\next=\nextstep
+               \else
+                     \let\next=\relax
+               \fi
+               \next}
+
+\def\dolctable#1#2{{\temp=#1\relax
+\def\endval{#2}%
+\setlength\tabcolsep{1.5pt}%
+\begin{tabular}[t]{@{}cccc@{}}
+pos&lc&uc&glyphs\\\hline
+\stepprint
+\end{tabular}}}
+
+\iffalse
+\begin{center}
+\tiny\let\lctablenumbersize\tiny
+\mbox{\dolctable{0}{52}\vrule
+\dolctable{52}{104}\vrule
+\dolctable{104}{156}\vrule
+\dolctable{156}{208}\vrule
+\dolctable{208}{256}}
+\end{center}
+\fi
+
+\iffalse
+\begin{center}\tiny
+\mbox{\dolctable{0}{65}\vrule
+\dolctable{65}{128}\vrule
+\dolctable{128}{193}\vrule
+\dolctable{193}{256}}
+\end{center}
+\fi
+
+
+
+\section{Encoding specific commands}
+
+An encoding specific command is one that generates a glyph (or
+glyphs), to produce a graphic effect that may be implemented
+differently in different encodings.  The encoding specific command
+automatically changes its implementation when the encoding changes in
+the course of the document.  Encoding specific commands figure in
+\LaTeX's internal character representation (\textsc{licr}) and are also
+discussed in \cite[sec.~7.11.2, p.~442]{A-W:MG2004}.
+
+The following table only covers the encoding specific commands from
+the \Enc{OT1} and \Enc{T1} encodings. Other encodings may specify
+additional encoding specific commands.  In the table, the first 15
+commands are `accent-like' and need as an argument the character to be
+accented.  For example, |\v{c}| is the \textsc{licr} for `\v{c}'.
+
+\begin{tabbing}
+\ttverb\textvisiblespace\quad\=bbbbbbbbbbbbbb\=b'b'\=ccccccccccc\kill
+\ttverb\`{}               \>OT1,T1\>   \a`{}\> (grave)      \\
+\ttverb\'{}               \>OT1,T1\>   \a'{}\> (acute)      \\
+\ttverb\^{}               \>OT1,T1\>   \^{}\>  (circumflex) \\
+\ttverb\~{}               \>OT1,T1\>   \~{}\>  (tilde)      \\
+\ttverb\"{}               \>OT1,T1\>   \"{}\>  (umlaut)     \\
+\ttverb\H{}               \>OT1,T1\>   \H{}\>  (Hungarian umlaut) \\
+\ttverb\r{}               \>OT1,T1\>   \r{}\>  (ring)       \\
+\ttverb\v{}               \>OT1,T1\>   \v{}\>  (ha\v{c}ek)  \\
+\ttverb\u{}               \>OT1,T1\>   \u{}\>  (breve)      \\
+\ttverb\t{}               \>OT1,T1\>   \t{}\>  (tie)        \\
+\ttverb\={}               \>OT1,T1\>   \a={}\> (macron)     \\
+\ttverb\.{}               \>OT1,T1\>   \.{}\>  (dot)        \\
+\ttverb\b{}               \>OT1,T1\>   \b{}\>  (underbar)   \\
+\ttverb\c{}               \>OT1,T1\>   \c{}\>  (cedilla)    \\
+\ttverb\d{}               \>OT1,T1\>   \d{}\>  (dot under)  \\
+\ttverb\k{}               \>T1    \>   \k{}\>  (ogonek)     \\
+% \ttverb\AA              \>OT1,T1\>   \AA \>               \\ % no longer
+\ttverb\AE                \>OT1,T1\>   \AE \>               \\
+\ttverb\DH                \>T1    \>   \DH \>               \\
+\ttverb\DJ                \>T1    \>   \DJ \>               \\
+\ttverb\L                 \>OT1,T1\>   \L  \>               \\
+\ttverb\NG                \>T1    \>   \NG \>               \\
+\ttverb\OE                \>OT1,T1\>   \OE \>               \\
+\ttverb\O                 \>OT1,T1\>   \O  \>               \\
+\ttverb\SS                \>OT1,T1\>   \SS \>               \\
+\ttverb\TH                \>T1    \>   \TH \>               \\
+% \ttverb\aa              \>OT1,T1\>   \aa \>               \\ no-longer
+\ttverb\ae                \>OT1,T1\>   \ae \>               \\
+\ttverb\dh                \>T1    \>   \dh \>               \\
+\ttverb\dj                \>T1    \>   \dj \>               \\
+\ttverb\guillemotleft     \>T1    \>   \guillemotleft  \> (guillemet) \\
+\ttverb\guillemotright    \>T1    \>   \guillemotright \> (guillemet) \\
+\ttverb\guilsinglleft     \>T1    \>   \guilsinglleft  \> (guillemet) \\
+\ttverb\guilsinglright    \>T1    \>   \guilsinglright \> (guillemet) \\
+\ttverb\i                 \>OT1,T1\>   \i  \>               \\
+\ttverb\j                 \>OT1,T1\>   \j  \>               \\
+\ttverb\l                 \>OT1,T1\>   \l  \>               \\
+\ttverb\ng                \>T1    \>   \ng \>               \\
+\ttverb\oe                \>OT1,T1\>   \oe \>               \\
+\ttverb\o                 \>OT1,T1\>   \o  \>               \\
+\ttverb\quotedblbase      \>T1    \>   \quotedblbase   \>   \\
+\ttverb\quotesinglbase    \>T1    \>   \quotesinglbase \>   \\
+\ttverb\ss                \>OT1,T1\>   \ss \>               \\
+\ttverb\textasciicircum   \>OT1,T1\>   \textasciicircum \>  \\
+\ttverb\textasciitilde    \>OT1,T1\>   \textasciitilde  \>  \\
+\ttverb\textbackslash     \>OT1,T1\>   \textbackslash   \>  \\
+\ttverb\textbar           \>OT1,T1\>   \textbar         \>  \\
+\ttverb\textbraceleft     \>OT1,T1\>   \textbraceleft   \>  \\
+\ttverb\textbraceright    \>OT1,T1\>   \textbraceright  \>  \\
+\ttverb\textcompwordmark  \>OT1,T1\>   \textcompwordmark\> (invisible) \\
+\ttverb\textdollar        \>OT1,T1\>   \textdollar      \>  \\
+\ttverb\textemdash        \>OT1,T1\>   \textemdash      \>  \\
+\ttverb\textendash        \>OT1,T1\>   \textendash      \>  \\
+\ttverb\textexclamdown    \>OT1,T1\>   \textexclamdown  \>  \\
+\ttverb\textgreater       \>OT1,T1\>   \textgreater     \>  \\
+\ttverb\textless          \>OT1,T1\>   \textless        \>  \\
+\ttverb\textquestiondown  \>OT1,T1\>   \textquestiondown\>  \\
+\ttverb\textquotedbl      \>T1    \>   \textquotedbl    \>  \\
+\ttverb\textquotedblleft  \>OT1,T1\>   \textquotedblleft\>  \\
+\ttverb\textquotedblright \>OT1,T1\>   \textquotedblright\> \\
+\ttverb\textquoteleft     \>OT1,T1\>   \textquoteleft   \>  \\
+\ttverb\textquoteright    \>OT1,T1\>   \textquoteright  \>  \\
+\ttverb\textregistered    \>OT1,T1\>   \textregistered  \>  \\
+\ttverb\textsection       \>OT1,T1\>   \textsection     \>  \\
+\ttverb\textsterling      \>OT1,T1\>   \textsterling    \>  \\
+\ttverb\texttrademark     \>OT1,T1\>   \texttrademark   \>  \\
+\ttverb\textunderscore    \>OT1,T1\>   \textunderscore  \>  \\
+\ttverb\textvisiblespace  \>OT1,T1\>   \textvisiblespace\>  \\
+\ttverb\th                \>T1    \>   \th              \>
+\end{tabbing}                        
+
+
+
+
+\begin{thebibliography}{99}
+\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\numberline{\relax}\refname}
+ 
+
+\bibitem{Adobe:PDF-1.6} \emph{\textsc{PDF} reference}:
+    Adobe portable document format version~1.6.  Adobe Systems
+    Incorporated, 2005. % why \textsuperscript{3}?
+  \url{http://partners.adobe.com/public/developer/en/pdf/PDFReference16.pdf}.
+
+\bibitem{Beeton:TB6-3-124} Barbara Beeton:
+  \emph{Mathematical symbols and cyrillic fonts ready for
+      distribution}.  In: TUGBoat, 6\#3), 1985.
+  \url{http://tug.org/TUGboat/Articles/tb06-3/tb13beetcyr.pdf}.
+
+\bibitem{beeton} Barbara Beeton: \emph{Unicode
+      and math, a combination whose time has come -- Finally!}.  In:
+  TUGBoat, 21\#3, 2000.
+  \url{http://www.tug.org/TUGboat/Articles/tb21-3/tb68beet.pdf}.
+
+
+\bibitem{Berdnikov:eurotex-98} A.\@ Berdnikov, O.\@
+  Lapko, M.\@ Kolodin, A.\@ Janishevsky and
+  A.\@ Burykin: \emph{The Encoding Paradigm in
+      \LaTeXe{} and the Projected X2 Encoding for Cyrillic Texts}.
+  Euro\TeX~98.
+  \url{http://www.gutenberg.eu.org/pub/GUTenberg/publicationsPDF/28-29-berdnikova.pdf}.
+
+\bibitem{CJK} \emph{The \Pkg{CJK} package}:
+  \url{http://cjk.ffii.org}.
+
+\bibitem{clasen} Matthias Clasen: \emph{A new
+      implementation of \LaTeX{} math}, 1997-98.
+  \url{http://www.tug.org/twg/mfg/papers/current/newmath.ps.gz}.
+
+\bibitem{clasen-vieth} Matthias Clasen and Ulrik
+  Vieth: \emph{Towards a new Math Font Encoding
+      for (La)\TeX}.  March 1998,
+  \url{http://www.tug.org/twg/mfg/papers/current/mfg-euro-all.ps.gz}.
+
+\bibitem{CorkGW:91}
+Dean Guenther and Janene Winter.
+\newblock An international phonetic alphabet.
+\newblock In Guenther \cite{proc:MGu91}, pages 149--156.
+\newblock Published as {TUG}boat 12\#1.
+
+\bibitem{proc:MGu91}
+Mary Guenther, editor.
+\newblock {\em {\TeX} 90 Conference Proceedings}, March 1991.
+\newblock Published as {TUG}boat 12\#1.
+
+\bibitem{tub:MFe90}
+Michael~J. Ferguson.
+\newblock Report on multilingual activities.
+\newblock {\em {TUG}boat}, 11(4):514--516, 1990.
+
+\bibitem{fontinst} \emph{The \Pkg{fontinst} package}:
+  \textlangle CTAN\textrangle\url{/fonts/utilities/fontinst}.
+
+\bibitem{Rei:TB17-2-102} Fukui Rei:
+  \emph{\textsl{TIPA}: A system for processing phonetic
+      symbols in \LaTeX}.  In: TUGBoat, 17\#, 1996.
+  \url{http://www.tug.org/TUGboat/Articles/tb17-2/tb51rei.pdf}.
+
+\bibitem{hyperref} \emph{The \Pkg{hyperref} package}:
+  \url{http://www.tug.org/applications/hyperref}.
+
+\bibitem{tub:JKn93}
+J\"org Knappen.
+\newblock Fonts for Africa: The fc Fonts. 
+\newblock {\em {TUG}boat}, 14(2):104, 1993.
+ 
+\bibitem{Knappen:TB17-2-96} J\"org Knappen:
+  \emph{The \Pkg{dc} fonts~1.3: Move towards stability
+      and completeness}.  In: TUGBoat 17\#2, 1996.
+  \url{http://www.tug.org/TUGboat/Articles/tb17-2/tb51knap.pdf}.
+
+\bibitem{A-W:DKn86}
+Donald~E. Knuth.
+\newblock {\em The {\TeX}book}.
+\newblock Volume~A of {\em Computers \& {T}ypesetting\/}, 
+  May 1989.
+\newblock Eight printing.
+
+\bibitem{vnr} \emph{The \Pkg{vnr} font family}, developed by
+   the author of pdf\TeX, {H\`an Th\^e\protect\llap{\raise 0.5ex\hbox{\'{\relax}}} Th\`anh}.
+   \url{http://vntex.org/download/vntex}.
+
+ \bibitem{ipa} Home page of the International Phonetic Association.
+   \url{http://www.arts.gla.ac.uk/IPA/ipa.html}
+
+\bibitem{A-W:LLa94}
+Leslie Lamport.
+\newblock {\em {\LaTeX:} A Document Preparation System}.
+\newblock Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, second edition, 1994.
+
+\bibitem{LH-Fonts} \emph{The \Pkg{lh}-Fonts for Cyrillic}:
+  \textlangle CTAN\textrangle\url{/fonts/cyrillic/lh}.
+
+\bibitem{A-W:MG2004}
+Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens.
+\newblock {\em The {\LaTeX} Companion second edition}.
+\newblock With Johannes Braams, David Carlisle, and Chris Rowley.
+\newblock Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, 2004.
+
+\bibitem{Unicode} \emph{The Unicode Standard}.
+  \url{http://unicode.org}.
+
+\bibitem{ziegler} Justin Ziegler, \emph{Technical
+    Report on Math Font Encodings}, June 1994, 
+  \url{http://www.tug.org/twg/mfg/papers/ltx3pub/l3d007.ps.gz}.
+
+\end{thebibliography}
+
+\clearpage\appendix
+\begin{center}
+  \Large\bfseries Appendices
+\end{center}
+
+\section{Example code tables}
+
+This appendix contains a table of each font mentioned as an ``example''
+font above, providing that the font was available when the document
+was processed with \LaTeX{}.  (\LaTeX{} generates a warning message
+for each font it fails to find.)
+
+\subsection{Text encodings}
+
+\ftable{cmr10}{OT1}
+
+\ftable{wnr10}{OT2}
+
+\ftable{wsuipa10}{OT3}
+
+\ftable{plr10}{OT4}
+
+\ftable{artmr10}{OT6}
+
+\ftable{ecrm1000}{T1}
+
+\ftable{larm1000}{T2A}
+
+\ftable{lbrm1000}{T2B}
+
+\ftable{lcrm1000}{T2C}
+
+\ftable{tipa10}{T3}
+
+\ftable{fcr10}{T4}
+
+\ftable{vnr10}{T5}
+
+
+\subsection{Text symbol encodings}
+
+The full table for \Enc{TS1} as provided by European Computer Modern family:
+\ftable{tcrm1000}{TS1}
+
+\pagebreak
+
+In contrast typical PostScript fonts usually have incomplete implementations
+of \Enc{TS1} sometimes missing more than half of the glyphs:
+
+\ftable{ptmr8c}{TS1}
+
+\ftable{tipx10}{TS3}
+
+
+
+\subsection{Extended text encodings}
+
+\ftable{rxrm1000}{X2}
+
+
+\subsection{Mathematical encodings}
+
+\ftable{cmmi10}{OML}
+
+\ftable{cmsy10}{OMS}
+
+\ftable{cmex10}{OMX}
+
+
+\subsection{Other encodings}
+
+\ftable{ptmr8y}{LY1}
+
+%%\ftable{????}{LV1}
+
+\ftable{grmn1000}{LGR}
+
+\ftable{wasy10}{U}
+\ftable{logo10}{U}
+
+\clearpage
+\section{Uppercase and lowercase tables}
+\label{sec:uclc-tab}
+
+The following two sets of tables list the \verb"\uppercase" and
+\verb"\lowercase" values for each position in the \LaTeX{} standard
+256-character tables.
+
+Each row of each table lists:
+\begin{quote}
+  \begin{tabular}{lp{0.7\textwidth}}
+    pos & The position in the table (0-255) \\
+    lc  & The value in the \verb"\lowercase" table at the position \\
+        & (note that value 0 here means that \verb"\lowercase" is
+          ineffective for this character, and hyphenation does not apply
+          to it) \\
+    uc  & The value in the \verb"\uppercase" table at the position \\
+        & (note that value 0 here means that \verb"\uppercase" is
+          ineffective for this character) \\
+    glyphs & The glyphs specified for the T1 encoding for this
+             position, laid out as \meta{glyph}\textbf{(}\meta{lowercase
+             glyph}\textbf{/}\meta{uppercase glyph}\textbf{)}
+  \end{tabular}
+\end{quote}
+
+\begin{center}
+  \let\lctablenumbersize\footnotesize
+  \makebox[\textwidth]{\hss
+    \dolctable{0}{32}\quad\dolctable{32}{64}\quad
+    \dolctable{64}{96}\quad\dolctable{96}{128}%
+  \hss}
+
+  \makebox[\textwidth]{\hss
+    \dolctable{128}{160}\quad\dolctable{160}{192}\quad
+    \dolctable{192}{224}\quad\dolctable{224}{256}%
+  \hss}
+\end{center}
+\end{document}
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/exscale.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/exscale.dtx
index 8728a43a87d..ade70f86e67 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/exscale.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/exscale.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 % \iffalse meta-comment
 %
-% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006
 % The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 % in this file. 
 % 
@@ -8,12 +8,12 @@
 % -------------------------------------------
 % 
 % It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
 % of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 % The latest version of this license is in
 %    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
 % 
 % This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
 % 
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/exscale.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/exscale.ins
index 04ac8b87ec3..1696c55f2d5 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/exscale.ins
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/exscale.ins
@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
 %% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
 %% LaTeX or TeX.
 %%
-%% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+%% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005
 %% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 %% in this file. 
 %% 
@@ -11,12 +11,12 @@
 %% -------------------------------------------
 %% 
 %% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3b
 %% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 %% The latest version of this license is in
 %%    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%% and version 1.3b or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+%% version 2005/12/01 or later.
 %% 
 %% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
 %% 
@@ -40,7 +40,7 @@
 
 This is a generated file.
 
-Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006
 The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 in this file. 
 
@@ -48,12 +48,12 @@ This file was generated from file(s) of the LaTeX base system.
 --------------------------------------------------------------
 
 It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
 of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 The latest version of this license is in
    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
+and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+version 2005/12/01 or later.
 
 This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
 
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/fixltx2e.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/fixltx2e.dtx
index a55e295fcac..8c9a12996f0 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/fixltx2e.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/fixltx2e.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 % \iffalse meta-comment
 %
-% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006
 % The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 % in this file. 
 % 
@@ -8,12 +8,12 @@
 % -------------------------------------------
 % 
 % It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
 % of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 % The latest version of this license is in
 %    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
 % 
 % This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
 % 
@@ -38,7 +38,7 @@
 %<driver>\ProvidesFile{fixltx2e.drv}
 % \fi
 %         \ProvidesFile{fixltx2e.dtx}
-          [2004/02/13 v1.1h fixes to LaTeX]
+          [2006/03/24 v1.1n fixes to LaTeX]
 %
 % \iffalse
 %<*driver>
@@ -54,7 +54,7 @@
 %</driver>
 % \fi
 %
-% \CheckSum{896}
+% \CheckSum{1077}
 %
 %% \CharacterTable
 %%  {Upper-case    \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
@@ -426,7 +426,7 @@
 %\end{verbatim}
 %
 %
-% \subsection{No hyphenation in first word after float environment(pr/3498)}
+% \subsection{No hyphenation in first word after float environment (pr/3498)}
 %
 %\begin{verbatim}
 % >Number:         3498
@@ -579,6 +579,147 @@
 % The packages \Lpack{type1cm} and \Lpack{type1ec} must not be loaded
 % additionally; they enable only continuous scaling.  
 %
+%
+%
+% \section{Fixes added for 2005/12/01}
+%
+% \subsection{\texttt{\textbackslash textsubscript} not defined in  
+%    latex.ltx (pr/3492)}
+%
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% >Number:         3492
+% >Category:       latex
+% >Synopsis:       \textsubscript not defined in latex.ltx
+% >Arrival-Date:   Tue Jan 14 23:01:00 CET 2003
+% >Originator:     tgakic@chem.tue.nl  (Ionel Mugurel Ciobica)
+%
+% I use \textsubscript much more often than \textsuperscript, and
+% \textsubscript it is not defined in latex.ltx. Could you please
+% consider including the definition of \textsubscript in the latex.ltx
+% for the next versions of LaTeX.    Thank you.
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+% \subsection{\texttt{\textbackslash DeclareMathSizes} only take pts.
+%     (pr/3693)}
+%
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% >Number:         3693
+% >Category:       latex
+% >Synopsis:       \DeclareMathSizes only take pts.
+% >Arrival-Date:   Fri Jun 11 16:21:00 CEST 2004
+% >Originator:     moho01ab@student.cbs.dk  (Morten Hoegholm)
+%
+% The last three arguments of \@DeclareMathSizes cannot take a dimension 
+% as argument, making it inconsistent with the rest of the font changing 
+% commands and itself, as the second argument can take a dimension 
+% specification. 
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+% \subsection{\texttt{\textbackslash addpenalty} ruins flush-bottom (pr/3073)}
+%
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% >Number:         3073
+% >Category:       latex
+% >Synopsis:       \addpenalty ruins flush-bottom
+% >Arrival-Date:   20 Oct 2005 14:46:35 -0700
+% >Originator:     asnd@triumf.ca (Donald Arseneau)
+% >Description:
+%  The (revised) definition of \addpenalty has been 
+%  incorporated into fixltx2e, but now Plamen Tanovski has found a
+%  problem:  since the \vskip is increased by the previous depth,
+%  consecutive \addpenalty and \addvspace commands keep enlarging
+%  the \vskip.
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+% \subsection{\texttt{\textbackslash footnotemark[x]} crashes with fixltx2e.sty 
+%    (pr/3752)}
+%
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% >Number:         3752
+% >Category:       tools
+% >Synopsis:       feature \footnotemark[x] crashes with fixltx2e.sty
+% >Arrival-Date:   Fri Dec 17 10:11:00 +0100 2004
+% >Originator:     stefan.pofahl@zsw-bw.de (Stefan Pofahl)
+%
+%  If I use /fnsymbol together with fixltx2e.sty I can not use
+%  optinal parameter [num]
+%  \footnotemark[1] is not showing the mark number 1 but
+%  the mark \value{footnote}.
+%\end{verbatim}
+% This bug was related to pr/3400, where |\@fnsymbol| was made robust.
+%
+% \subsubsection{Notes on the implementation strategy}
+%
+% Pr/3400 made |\@fnsymbol| decide between text-mode and math-mode,
+% which requires a certain level of robustness somewhere as the
+% decision between text and math must be made at typesetting time and
+% not when inside |\protected@edef| or similar commands. One way of
+% dealing with this is to make sure the value seen by |\@fnsymbol| is
+% a fully expanded number, which could be handled by code such as
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \def\fnsymbol#1{\expandafter\@fnsymbol
+%   \expandafter{\the\csname c@#1\endcsname}}
+% \end{verbatim}
+% This would be a good solution if everybody used the high level
+% commands only by writing code like |\fnsymbol{footnote}|. Unfortunately
+% many classes (including the standard classes) and packages use the
+% internal forms directly as in |\@fnsymbol\c@footnote| so the easy
+% solution of changing |\fnsymbol| would break code that had worked for
+% the past 20~years.
+%
+% Therefore the implementation here makes |\@fnsymbol| itself a
+% non-robust command again and instead uses a new robust command
+% \DescribeMacro{\TextOrMath}|\TextOrMath|, which will take care of
+% typesetting either the math or the text symbol. In order to do so,
+% we face an age old problem and unsolvable problem in \TeX: A
+% reliable test for math mode that doesn't destroy
+% kerning. Fortunately this problem can be solved when using e\TeX\ so
+% if you use this as engine for your \LaTeX\ format, as recommended by
+% the \LaTeX3 Project, you will get a fully functioning |\TextOrMath|
+% command with no side effects. If you use regular \TeX\ as engine for
+% your \LaTeX\ format then we have to choose between the lesser of two
+% evils: 1)~breaking ligatures and preventing kerning or 2)~face the
+% risk of choosing text-mode at the beginning of an alignment cell,
+% which was suppodes to be math-mode. We have decided upon 1) as is
+% costumary for regular robust commands in \LaTeX.
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Fewer fragile commands}
+%
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% >Number:         3816
+% >Category:       latex
+% >Synopsis:       Argument of \@sect has an extra }.
+% >Arrival-Date:   Sat Oct 22 23:11:01 +0200 2005
+% >Originator:     susi@uriah.heep.sax.de (Susanne Wunsch)
+%
+% Use of a \raisebox in \section{} produces the error message
+% mentioned in the subject.
+% 
+% PR latex/1738 descriped a similar problem, which has been solved
+% 10 years ago. Protecting the \raisebox with \protect solved my
+% problem as well, but wouldn't it make sense to have a similar fix
+% as in the PR?
+% 
+% It is particulary confusing, that an unprotected \raisebox in a
+% \section*-environment works fine, while in a \section-environment
+% produces error.
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+% While not technically a bug, in this day and age there are few
+% reasons why commands taking optional arguments should not be robust.
+%
+% \subsubsection{Notes on the implementation strategy}
+%
+% Rather than changing the kernel macros to be robust, we have decided
+% to add the macro \DescribeMacro{\MakeRobust}|\MakeRobust| in
+% \Lpack{fixltx2e} so that users can easily turn fragile macros into
+% robust ones. A macro |\foo| is made robust by doing the simple
+% |\MakeRobust{\foo}|. \Lpack{fixltx2e} makes the following kernel
+% macros robust: |\(|, |\)|, |\[|, |\]|, |\makebox|, |\savebox|,
+% |\framebox|, |\parbox|, |\rule| and |\raisebox|.
+%
+%
 % \StopEventually{}
 %
 % \section{Implementation}
@@ -1077,7 +1218,11 @@
 % (pr/3073)}
 %
 % \begin{macro}{\addpenalty}
-%    Fix provided by Donald (though the original fix was not good enough).
+%   Fix provided by Donald (though the original fix was not good
+%   enough).  In 2005 Plamen Tanovski discovered that this fix wasn't
+%   good enough either as the \cs{vskip} kept getting bigger if
+%   several \cs{addpenalty} commands followed each other. Donald
+%   kindly send a new fix.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \def\addpenalty#1{%
   \ifvmode
@@ -1089,8 +1234,16 @@
           \penalty#1\relax
         \else
           \@tempskipb\lastskip
-          \advance \@tempskipb
-               \ifdim\prevdepth>\maxdepth\maxdepth\else
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \changes{v1.1l}{2005/11/10}{Add the correct \cs{vskip}} 
+%    We have to make sure the final \cs{vskip} seen by \TeX\ is the
+%    correct one, namely \cs{@tempskipb}. However we may have to
+%    adjust for \cs{prevdepth} when placing the penalty but that
+%    should not affect the skip we pass on to \TeX.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+          \begingroup
+            \advance \@tempskipb
+              \ifdim\prevdepth>\maxdepth\maxdepth\else
 %    \end{macrocode}
 %    If |\prevdepth| is -1000pt due to |\nointerlineskip| we better
 %    not add it!
@@ -1099,9 +1252,12 @@
 %    \begin{macrocode}
                  \ifdim \prevdepth = -\@m\p@ \z@ \else \prevdepth \fi
                \fi
+             \vskip -\@tempskipb
+             \penalty#1%
+             \vskip\@tempskipb
+          \endgroup
           \vskip -\@tempskipb
-          \penalty#1%
-          \vskip\@tempskipb
+          \vskip \@tempskipb
         \fi
       \fi
     \fi
@@ -1115,25 +1271,86 @@
 %
 % \subsection{\texttt{\textbackslash fnsymbol} should use text symbols 
 %    if possible (pr/3400)}
-%
+%  \begin{macro}{\@fnsymbol}
+%
+%    This macro is another example of an ever recurring problem in
+%    \TeX: Determining if something is text-mode or math-mode. It is
+%    imperative for the decision between text and math to be delayed
+%    until the actual typesetting is done as the code in question may
+%    go through an |\edef| or |\write| where an |\ifmmode| test would
+%    be executed prematurely. Hence in the implementation below,
+%    |\@fnsymbol| is not robust in itself but the parts doing the
+%    actual typesetting are.
+%
+%    In the case of |\@fnsymbol| we make use of the robust command
+%    |\TextOrMath| which takes two arguments and typesets the first if
+%    in text-mode and the second if in math-mode. Note that in order
+%    for this command to make the correct decision, it must insert a
+%    |\relax| token if run under regular \TeX, which ruins any kerning
+%    between the preceding characters and whatever awaits
+%    typesetting. If you use e\TeX\ as engine for \LaTeX\ (as
+%    recommended) this unfortunate side effect is not present.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@fnsymbol#1{%
+   \ifcase#1\or \TextOrMath\textasteriskcentered *\or
+   \TextOrMath \textdagger \dagger\or
+   \TextOrMath \textdaggerdbl \ddagger \or
+   \TextOrMath \textsection  \mathsection\or
+   \TextOrMath \textparagraph \mathparagraph\or
+   \TextOrMath \textbardbl \|\or
+   \TextOrMath {\textasteriskcentered\textasteriskcentered}{**}\or
+   \TextOrMath {\textdagger\textdagger}{\dagger\dagger}\or
+   \TextOrMath {\textdaggerdbl\textdaggerdbl}{\ddagger\ddagger}\else
+   \@ctrerr \fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \end{macro}
+%  \begin{macro}{\TextOrMath}
+%    \changes{v1.1m}{2006/01/08}{Add command to solve robustness
+%      issues (pr/3752)}
+%    When using regular \TeX, we make this command robust so that it
+%    always selects the correct branch in an |\ifmmode| switch with
+%    the usual disadvantage of ruining kerning. For the application we
+%    use it for here that shouldn't matter. The alternative would be
+%    to mimic |\IeC| from \textsf{inputenc} but then it wil have the
+%    disadvantage of choosing the wrong branch if appearing at the
+%    beginning of an alignment cell. However, users of e\TeX\ will be
+%    pleasantly surprised to get the best of both worlds and no bad
+%    side effects.
+% 
+%    First some code for checking if we are running e\TeX\ but making
+%    sure not to permanently turn |\eTeXversion| into |\relax|.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareRobustCommand{\@fnsymbol}[1]{%
-  \ifmmode
-     \ifcase#1\or *\or\dagger\or \ddagger\or
-     \mathsection\or \mathparagraph\or \|\or **\or 
-     \dagger\dagger
-      \or \ddagger\ddagger \else\@ctrerr\fi
-  \else
-     \ifcase#1\or \textasteriskcentered\or \textdagger\or 
-     \textdaggerdbl\or \textsection\or \textparagraph\or 
-     \textbardbl\or \textasteriskcentered\textasteriskcentered\or
-     \textdagger\textdagger\or \textdaggerdbl\textdaggerdbl
-     \else\@ctrerr\fi
-  \fi}
+\begingroup\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\endgroup
+\expandafter\ifx\csname eTeXversion\endcsname\relax 
 %    \end{macrocode}
+% In case of ordinary \TeX\ we define |\TextOrMath| as a robust
+% command but make sure it always grabs its arguments. If we didn't do
+% this it might very well gobble spaces in the input stream.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\TextOrMath{%
+  \ifmmode  \expandafter\@secondoftwo
+  \else     \expandafter\@firstoftwo  \fi}
+\protected@edef\TextOrMath#1#2{\TextOrMath{#1}{#2}}
+\else
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% For e\TeX\ the situation is similar. The robust macro is a hidden
+% one so that we again avoid problems of gobbling spaces in the input.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\protected\expandafter\def\csname TextOrMath\space\endcsname{%
+  \ifmmode  \expandafter\@secondoftwo
+  \else     \expandafter\@firstoftwo  \fi}
+\edef\TextOrMath#1#2{%
+  \expandafter\noexpand\csname TextOrMath\space\endcsname
+  {#1}{#2}}
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \end{macro}
 %
 % \subsection{No hyphenation in first word after float environment(pr/3498)}
 %
+%  \begin{macro}{\@esphack}
+%  \begin{macro}{\@Esphack}
 %    Fix suggested by Donald Arseneau.
 % \changes{v1.1g}{2003/09/19}{Fix for \cs{@esphack} (pr/3498)}
 % \changes{v1.1h}{2004/02/13}{Fix for \cs{@Esphack} (pr/3498)}
@@ -1161,11 +1378,13 @@
     \fi
    \fi}
 %    \end{macrocode}
-%
+%  \end{macro}
+%  \end{macro}
 %
 % \subsection{Allowing \texttt{\textbackslash emph} to produce small
 %             caps, etc}
-%
+%  \begin{macro}{\em}
+%  \begin{macro}{\eminnershape}
 % \changes{v1.1g}{2003/09/19}{Allow \cs{emph} to produce small caps}
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \DeclareRobustCommand\em
@@ -1173,6 +1392,108 @@
                        \eminnershape \else \itshape \fi}
 \def\eminnershape{\upshape}
 %    \end{macrocode}
+%  \end{macro}
+%  \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{\texttt{\textbackslash textsubscript} not defined in  
+%    latex.ltx (pr/3492)}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\textsubscript}
+% \changes{v1.1j}{2005/07/13}{Add \cs{textsubscript}}
+% \changes{v1.1k}{2005/09/29}{Fixed blank lines}
+% This macro is almost identical to \cs{textsuperscript} from the
+% kernel.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand*\textsubscript[1]{%
+  \@textsubscript{\selectfont#1}}
+\def\@textsubscript#1{%
+  {\m@th\ensuremath{_{\mbox{\fontsize\sf@size\z@#1}}}}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{\texttt{\textbackslash DeclareMathSizes} only take pts.
+%     (pr/3693)}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@DeclareMathSizes} 
+% \changes{v1.1k}{2005/09/29}{Fixed blank lines}
+% This fix given by Michael J. Downes on comp.text.tex on 2002/10/17
+%  allows the user to have settings such as
+% \verb=\DeclareMathSizes{9.5dd}{9.5dd}{7.4dd}{6.6dd}=.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@DeclareMathSizes #1#2#3#4#5{%
+  \@defaultunits\dimen@ #2pt\relax\@nnil
+  \if $#3$%
+    \expandafter\let\csname S@\strip@pt\dimen@\endcsname\math@fontsfalse
+  \else
+    \@defaultunits\dimen@ii #3pt\relax\@nnil
+    \@defaultunits\@tempdima #4pt\relax\@nnil
+    \@defaultunits\@tempdimb #5pt\relax\@nnil
+    \toks@{#1}%
+    \expandafter\xdef\csname S@\strip@pt\dimen@\endcsname{%
+      \gdef\noexpand\tf@size{\strip@pt\dimen@ii}%
+      \gdef\noexpand\sf@size{\strip@pt\@tempdima}%
+      \gdef\noexpand\ssf@size{\strip@pt\@tempdimb}%
+      \the\toks@
+    }%
+  \fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Fewer fragile macros}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\MakeRobust} 
+% \changes{v1.1n}{2006/03/24}{Added macro} 
+%
+% The macro firstly checks if the controls sequence in question exists
+% at all.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\providecommand*\MakeRobust[1]{%
+  \@ifundefined{\expandafter\@gobble\string#1}{%
+    \@latex@error{The control sequence `\string#1' is undefined!%
+      \MessageBreak There is nothing here to make robust}%
+    \@eha
+  }%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Then we check if the macro is already robust. We do this by testing
+% if the internal name for a robust macro is defined, namely
+% \verb*=\foo =. If it is already defined do nothing, otherwise set
+% \verb*=\foo = equal to \verb*=\foo= and redefine \verb*=\foo= so
+% that it acts like a macro defined with \verb=\DeclareRobustCommand=.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  {% 
+    \@ifundefined{\expandafter\@gobble\string#1\space}%
+    {% 
+      \expandafter\let\csname
+      \expandafter\@gobble\string#1\space\endcsname=#1%
+      \edef\reserved@a{\string#1}%
+      \def\reserved@b{#1}%
+      \edef\reserved@b{\expandafter\strip@prefix\meaning\reserved@b}%
+      \edef#1{%
+        \ifx\reserved@a\reserved@b
+          \noexpand\x@protect\noexpand#1%
+        \fi
+        \noexpand\protect\expandafter\noexpand
+        \csname\expandafter\@gobble\string#1\space\endcsname}%
+    }%
+    {\@latex@info{The control sequence `\string#1' is already robust}}%
+   }%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% Here we make some kernel macros robust.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\MakeRobust\(
+\MakeRobust\) 
+\MakeRobust\[ 
+\MakeRobust\]
+\MakeRobust\makebox 
+\MakeRobust\savebox 
+\MakeRobust\framebox 
+\MakeRobust\parbox 
+\MakeRobust\rule
+\MakeRobust\raisebox
+%    \end{macrocode}
 %
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 %</fixltx2e>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/fixltx2e.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/fixltx2e.ins
index 5249b421a9b..f14de28fc7b 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/fixltx2e.ins
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/fixltx2e.ins
@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
 %% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
 %% LaTeX or TeX.
 %%
-%% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+%% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005
 %% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 %% in this file. 
 %% 
@@ -11,12 +11,12 @@
 %% -------------------------------------------
 %% 
 %% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3b
 %% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 %% The latest version of this license is in
 %%    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%% and version 1.3b or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+%% version 2005/12/01 or later.
 %% 
 %% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
 %% 
@@ -40,7 +40,7 @@
 
 This is a generated file.
 
-Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006
 The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 in this file. 
 
@@ -48,12 +48,12 @@ This file was generated from file(s) of the LaTeX base system.
 --------------------------------------------------------------
 
 It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
 of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 The latest version of this license is in
    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
+and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+version 2005/12/01 or later.
 
 This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
 
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/fntguide.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/fntguide.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..df4c3346114
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/fntguide.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,1830 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file. 
+% 
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+% 
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+%    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
+% 
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+% 
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+% 
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution 
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with 
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+% 
+% \fi
+% Filename: fntguide.tex
+ 
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1995/12/01]
+ 
+\documentclass{ltxguide}[1995/11/28]
+ 
+\title{\LaTeXe{} font selection}
+ 
+\author{\copyright~Copyright 1995--2005, \LaTeX3 Project Team.\\
+   All rights reserved.}
+ 
+\date{27 November 2005}
+ 
+\begin{document}
+ 
+\maketitle
+ 
+\tableofcontents
+ 
+\section{Introduction}
+ 
+This document describes the new font selection features of the \LaTeX{}
+Document Preparation System.  It is intended for package writers who
+want to write font-loading packages similar to |times| or |latexsym|.
+
+This document is only a brief introduction to the new facilities and
+is intended for package writers who are familiar with \TeX{} fonts and
+\LaTeX{} packages.  It is \emph{neither} a user-guide \emph{nor} a
+reference manual for fonts in \LaTeXe.
+ 
+\subsection{\LaTeXe~fonts}
+ 
+The most important difference between \LaTeX~2.09 and \LaTeXe{} is the
+way that fonts are selected.  In \LaTeX~2.09, the Computer Modern fonts
+were built into the \LaTeX~format, and so customizing \LaTeX{} to use
+other fonts was a major effort.
+ 
+In \LaTeXe, very few fonts are built into the format, and there are
+commands to load new text and math fonts.  Packages such as |times| or
+|latexsym| allow authors to access these fonts.
+This document describes how to write similar font-loading packages.
+ 
+The \LaTeXe{} font selection system was first released as the `New Font
+Selection Scheme' (NFSS) in 1989, and then in release~2 in 1993.
+\LaTeXe{} includes NFSS release~2 as standard.
+ 
+\subsection{Overview}
+ 
+This document contains an overview of the new font commands
+of \LaTeX.
+ 
+\begin{description}
+ 
+\item[Section~\ref{Sec:text}] describes the commands for selecting fonts
+   in classes and packages.  It lists the five \LaTeX{} font
+   attributes, and lists the commands for selecting fonts.  It also
+   describes how to customize the author commands such as |\textrm| and
+   |\textit| to suit your document design.
+ 
+\item[Section~\ref{Sec:math}] explains the commands for controlling
+   \LaTeX{} math fonts.  It describes how to specify new math fonts and
+   new math symbols.
+ 
+\item[Section~\ref{Sec:install}] explains how to install new fonts into
+   \LaTeX.  It shows how \LaTeX{} font attributes are turned into \TeX{}
+   font names, and how to specify your own fonts using font definition
+   files.
+ 
+\item[Section~\ref{Sec:encode}] discusses text font encodings.
+   It describes how to declare a new encoding and how to define
+   commands, such as |\AE| or |\"|, which have different definitions in
+   different encodings, depending on whether ligatures, etc.\ are
+   available in the encoding.
+ 
+\item[Section~\ref{Sec:misc}] covers font miscellanea.  It describes how
+   \LaTeX{} performs font substitution, how to customize fonts that are
+   preloaded in the \LaTeX{} format, and the naming conventions used in
+   \LaTeX{} font selection.
+ 
+\end{description}
+ 
+\subsection{Further information}
+ 
+For a general introduction to \LaTeX, including the new features of
+\LaTeXe, you should read \emph{\LaTeXbook},
+Leslie Lamport, Addison Wesley, 2nd~ed, 1994.
+ 
+A more detailed description of the \LaTeX{} font selection scheme is to
+be found in \emph{\LaTeXcomp}, 2nd~ed, by Mittelbach and Goossens, Addison
+Wesley, 2004.
+ 
+The \LaTeX{} font selection scheme is based on \TeX, which is described
+by its developer in \emph{The \TeX book}, Donald E.~Knuth, Addison
+Wesley, 1986, revised in 1991 to include the features of \TeX~3.
+ 
+Sebastian Rahtz's |psnfss| software contains the software for using a
+large number of Type~1 fonts (including the Adobe Laser Writer 35 and
+the Monotype CD-ROM fonts) in \LaTeX.  It should be available from the
+same source as your copy of \LaTeX.
+ 
+The |psnfss| software uses fonts generated by Alan Jeffrey's
+|fontinst| software.  This can convert fonts from Adobe Font Metric
+format into a format readable by \LaTeX, including the generation of
+the font definition files described in Section~\ref{Sec:install}.  The
+|fontinst| software should be available from the same source as your
+copy of \LaTeX.
+ 
+Whenever practical, \LaTeX{} uses the font naming scheme called
+`fontname'; this was described in \emph{Filenames for fonts},%
+\footnote{An up-to-date electronic version
+of this document can be found on any CTAN server, in the directory
+\texttt{info/fontname}.}
+\emph{TUGboat}~11(4),~1990.
+
+The class-writer's guide \emph{\clsguide} describes
+the new \LaTeX{} features for writers of document classes and packages
+and is kept in |clsguide.tex|. Configuring
+\LaTeX{} is covered by the guide \emph{\cfgguide} in
+\texttt{cfgguide.tex} whilst the philosophy behind our policy on 
+modifying \LaTeX{} is described in \emph{\modguide} in
+\texttt{modguide.tex}.
+ 
+The documented source code (from the files used to produce
+the kernel format via |latex.ltx|) is now available as
+\emph{The \LaTeXe\ Sources}.
+This very large document also includes an index of \LaTeX{}
+commands.  It can be typeset from the \LaTeX{} file |source2e.tex|
+in the |base| directory; this uses the class file |ltxdoc.cls|.
+
+For more information about \TeX{} and \LaTeX{}, please contact your
+local \TeX{} Users Group, or the international \TeX{} Users Group.
+Addresses and other details can be found at:
+\begin{quote}\small\label{addrs}
+    \texttt{http://www.tug.org/lugs.html}
+\end{quote}
+
+
+\section{Text fonts}
+\label{Sec:text}
+ 
+This section describes the commands available to class and package
+writers for specifying and selecting fonts.
+ 
+\subsection{Text font attributes}
+ 
+Every text font in \LaTeX{} has five \emph{attributes}:
+\begin{description}
+ 
+\item[encoding] This specifies the order that characters appear in the
+   font.  The two most common text encodings used in \LaTeX{} are
+   Knuth's `\TeX{} text' encoding, and the `\TeX{} text extended'
+   encoding developed by the \TeX{} Users Group members during a \TeX{}
+   Conference at Cork in~1990 (hence its informal name `Cork encoding').
+ 
+\item[family] The name for a collection of fonts, usually grouped under
+   a common name by the font foundry.  For example, `Adobe Times', `ITC
+   Garamond', and Knuth's `Computer Modern Roman' are all font families.
+ 
+\item[series] How heavy or expanded a font is.  For example, `medium
+   weight', `narrow' and `bold extended' are all series.
+ 
+\item[shape] The form of the letters within a font family.  For
+   example, `italic', `oblique' and `upright' (sometimes called
+   `roman') are all font shapes.
+ 
+\item[size] The design size of the font, for example `10pt'. If no
+   dimension is specified, `pt' is assumed.
+ 
+\end{description}
+The possible values for these attributes are given short acronyms by
+\LaTeX.  The most common values for the font encoding are:
+\begin{center}
+\begin{minipage}{.7\linewidth}
+   \begin{tabular}{rl}
+      |OT1|   & \TeX{} text  \\
+      |T1|    & \TeX{} extended text \\
+      |OML|   & \TeX{} math italic \\
+      |OMS|   & \TeX{} math symbols \\
+      |OMX|   & \TeX{} math large symbols \\
+      |U|     & Unknown \\
+      |L<xx>| & A local encoding
+   \end{tabular}
+\end{minipage}
+\end{center}
+The `local' encodings are intended for font encodings which are only
+locally available, for example a font containing an organisation's
+logo in various sizes.
+ 
+There are far too many font families to list them all, but some common
+ones are:
+\begin{center}
+\begin{minipage}{.7\linewidth}
+   \begin{tabular}{rl}
+      |cmr|  & Computer Modern Roman \\
+      |cmss| & Computer Modern Sans \\
+      |cmtt| & Computer Modern Typewriter \\
+      |cmm|  & Computer Modern Math Italic \\
+      |cmsy| & Computer Modern Math Symbols \\
+      |cmex| & Computer Modern Math Extensions \\
+      |ptm|  & Adobe Times \\
+      |phv|  & Adobe Helvetica \\
+      |pcr|  & Adobe Courier
+   \end{tabular}
+\end{minipage}
+\end{center}
+The most common values for the font series are:
+\begin{center}
+\begin{minipage}{.7\linewidth}
+   \begin{tabular}{rl}
+      |m|    & Medium  \\
+      |b|    & Bold  \\
+      |bx|   & Bold extended \\
+      |sb|   & Semi-bold \\
+      |c|    & Condensed
+   \end{tabular}
+\end{minipage}
+\end{center}
+The most common values for the font shape are:
+\begin{center}
+\begin{minipage}{.7\linewidth}
+   \begin{tabular}{rl}
+      |n|    & Normal (that is `upright' or `roman') \\
+      |it|   & Italic \\
+      |sl|   & Slanted (or `oblique') \\
+      |sc|   & Caps and small caps
+   \end{tabular}
+\end{minipage}
+\end{center}
+The font size is specified as a dimension, for example |10pt| or
+|1.5in| or |3mm|; if no unit is specified, |pt| is assumed.  These five
+parameters specify every \LaTeX{} font, for example:
+\begin{center}
+   \begin{tabular}{@{}r@{\,}l@{\,}c@{\,}c@{\,}cc@{}r@{}}
+      \multicolumn{5}{@{}c}{\emph{\LaTeX{} specification}} &
+      \emph{Font} &
+      \emph{\TeX{} font name} \\
+      |OT1| & |cmr| & |m| & |n| & |10| &
+      Computer Modern Roman 10 point &
+      |cmr10| \\
+      |OT1| & |cmss| & |m| & |sl| & |1pc| &
+      Computer Modern Sans Oblique 1 pica &
+      |cmssi12| \\
+      |OML| & |cmm| & |m| & |it| & |10pt| &
+      Computer Modern Math Italic 10 point &
+      |cmmi10| \\
+      |T1| & |ptm| & |b| & |it| & |1in| &
+      Adobe Times Bold Italic 1 inch &
+      |ptmb8t at 1in|
+   \end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+These five parameters are displayed whenever \LaTeX{} gives an overfull
+box warning, for example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   Overfull \hbox (3.80855pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 314--318
+   []\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 Normally [] and [] will be iden-ti-cal,
+\end{verbatim}
+The author commands for fonts set the five attributes:
+\begin{center}
+   \begin{tabular}{rcl}
+      \emph{Author command} &
+      \emph{Attribute} &
+      \emph{Value in} |article| \emph{class} \\
+      |\textrm{..}| or |\rmfamily|    & family & |cmr| \\
+      |\textsf{..}| or |\sffamily|    & family & |cmss| \\
+      |\texttt{..}| or |\ttfamily|    & family & |cmtt| \\
+      |\textmd{..}| or |\mdseries|    & series & |m| \\
+      |\textbf{..}| or |\bfseries|    & series & |bx| \\
+      |\textup{..}| or |\upshape|     & shape  & |n| \\
+      |\textit{..}| or |\itshape|     & shape  & |it| \\
+      |\textsl{..}| or |\slshape|     & shape  & |sl| \\
+      |\textsc{..}| or |\scshape|     & shape  & |sc| \\
+      |\tiny|         & size   & |5pt| \\
+      |\scriptsize|   & size   & |7pt| \\
+      |\footnotesize| & size   & |8pt| \\
+      |\small|        & size   & |9pt| \\
+      |\normalsize|   & size   & |10pt| \\
+      |\large|        & size   & |12pt| \\
+      |\Large|        & size   & |14.4pt| \\
+      |\LARGE|        & size   & |17.28pt| \\
+      |\huge|         & size   & |20.74pt| \\
+      |\Huge|         & size   & |24.88pt|
+   \end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+The values used by these commands are determined by the document class,
+using the parameters defined in Section~\ref{Sec:text.param}.
+ 
+Note that there are no author commands for selecting new encodings.
+These should be provided by packages, such as the |fontenc| package.
+ 
+This section does not explain how \LaTeX{} font specifications are
+turned into \TeX{} font names.  This is described in
+Section~\ref{Sec:install}.
+ 
+\subsection{Selection commands}
+ 
+The low-level commands used to select a text font are as follows.
+ 
+\begin{decl}
+|\fontencoding| \arg{encoding} \\
+|\fontfamily|  \arg{family}\\
+|\fontseries| \arg{series}\\
+|\fontshape| \arg{shape}\\
+|\fontsize| \arg{size} \arg{baselineskip}\\
+|\linespread| \arg{factor}
+\end{decl}
+ 
+\NEWdescription{1998/12/01}
+Each of the commands starting with |\font...| sets one of the font
+attributes; |\fontsize| also sets |\baselineskip|. The |\linespread|
+command prepares to multiply the current (or newly defined)
+|\baselineskip| with \m{factor} (e.g., spreads the lines apart for
+values greater one).
+
+The actual font in use is not altered by these commands, but the
+current attributes are used to determine which font and baseline skip
+to use after the next |\selectfont| command.
+ 
+
+\begin{decl}
+|\selectfont|
+\end{decl}
+Selects a text font, based on the current values of the font attributes.
+ 
+\emph{Warning}: There \emph{must} be a |\selectfont| command
+immediately after any settings of the font parameters by (some of)
+the six commands above, before any following text.
+For example, it is legal to say:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \fontfamily{ptm}\fontseries{b}\selectfont Some text.
+\end{verbatim}
+but it is \emph{not} legal to say:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \fontfamily{ptm} Some \fontseries{b}\selectfont text.
+\end{verbatim}
+You may get unexpected results if you put text between a
+|\font<parameter>| command (or |\linespread|) and a |\selectfont|.
+ 
+\begin{decl}
+|\usefont| \arg{encoding} \arg{family} \arg{series} \arg{shape}
+\end{decl}
+A short hand for the equivalent |\font...| commands followed by a
+call to |\selectfont|.
+ 
+ 
+\subsection{Internals}
+ 
+The current values of the font attributes are held in internal macros.
+ 
+\begin{decl}
+      |\f@encoding| \\
+      |\f@family|  \\
+      |\f@series|  \\
+      |\f@shape|  \\
+      |\f@size|    \\
+      |\f@baselineskip| \\
+      |\tf@size|  \\
+      |\sf@size|  \\
+      |\ssf@size|
+\end{decl}
+ 
+These hold the current values of the encoding, the family, the series,
+the shape, the size, the baseline skip, the main math size, the
+`script' math size and the `scriptscript' math size. The last three
+are accessible only within a formula; outside of math they may contain
+arbitrary values.
+ 
+For example, to set the size to 12 without
+changing the baseline skip:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \fontsize{12}{\f@baselineskip}
+\end{verbatim}
+However, you should \emph{never} alter the values of the internal
+commands directly; they must only be modified using the low-level
+commands like |\fontfamily|, |\fontseries|, etc. If you disobey this
+warning you might produce code that loops.
+ 
+\subsection{Parameters for author commands}
+\label{Sec:text.param}
+ 
+The parameter values set by author commands such as |\textrm| and
+|\rmfamily|, etc.\ are not hard-wired into \LaTeX; instead these
+commands use the values of a number of parameters set by the document
+class and packages.  For example, |\rmdefault| is the name of the
+default family selected by |\textrm| and |\rmfamily|. Thus to set a
+document in Adobe Times, Helvetica and Courier, the document designer
+specifies:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \renewcommand{\rmdefault}{ptm}
+   \renewcommand{\sfdefault}{phv}
+   \renewcommand{\ttdefault}{pcr}
+\end{verbatim}
+ 
+\begin{decl}
+ |\encodingdefault| \\
+ |\familydefault|   \\
+ |\seriesdefault|   \\
+ |\shapedefault|
+\end{decl}
+The encoding, family, series and shape of the main body font.  By
+default these are |OT1|, |\rmdefault|, |m| and |n|.  Note that since
+the default family is |\rmdefault|, this means that changing
+|\rmdefault| will change the main body font of the document.
+ 
+\begin{decl}
+ |\rmdefault|  \\
+ |\sfdefault| \\
+ |\ttdefault|
+\end{decl}
+The families selected by |\textrm|, |\rmfamily|, |\textsf|,
+|\sffamily|, |\texttt| and |\ttfamily|.  By default these are |cmr|,
+|cmss| and |cmtt|.
+ 
+\begin{decl}
+ |\bfdefault| \\
+ |\mddefault|
+\end{decl}
+The series selected by |\textbf|, |\bfseries|, |\textmd| and
+|\mdseries|.  By default these are |bx| and |m|.
+These values are suitable for the default families used. If other
+fonts are used as standard document fonts (for example, certain
+PostScript fonts) it might be necessary to adjust the value of
+|\bfdefault| to |b| since only a few such families have a `bold
+extended' series.  An alternative (taken for the fonts provided by
+|psnfss|) is to define silent substitutions from |bx| series to |b|
+series with special |\DeclareFontShape| declarations and the |ssub|
+size function, see Section~\ref{sec:sizefunct}.
+ 
+ 
+\begin{decl}
+ |\itdefault| \\
+ |\sldefault| \\
+ |\scdefault| \\
+ |\updefault|
+\end{decl}
+The shapes selected by |\textit|, |\itshape|, |\textsl|, |\slshape|,
+|\textsc|, |\scshape|, |\textup| and |\upshape|.  By default these are
+|it|, |sl|, |sc| and |n|.
+ 
+Note that there are no parameters for the size commands.  These should
+be defined directly in class files, for example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \renewcommand{\normalsize}{\fontsize{10}{12}\selectfont}
+\end{verbatim}
+More elaborate examples (setting additional parameters when the text
+size is changed) can be found in |classes.dtx| the source
+documentation for the classes |article|, |report|, and |book|.
+ 
+ 
+\subsection{Special font declaration commands}
+ 
+\begin{decl}
+|\DeclareFixedFont| \arg{cmd} \arg{encoding} \arg{family} \arg{series}
+                    \arg{shape} \arg{size}
+\end{decl}
+ 
+Declares command \m{cmd} to be a font switch which selects the font
+that is specified by the attributes \m{encoding}, \m{family},
+\m{series}, \m{shape}, and \m{size}.
+ 
+The font is selected without any adjustments to baselineskip and other
+surrounding conditions.
+ 
+This example makes |{\picturechar .}| select a small dot very quickly:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \DeclareFixedFont{\picturechar}{OT1}{cmr}{m}{n}{5}
+\end{verbatim}
+ 
+ 
+\begin{decl}
+|\DeclareTextFontCommand| \arg{cmd} \arg{font-switches}
+\end{decl}
+ 
+Declares command \m{cmd} to be a font command with one argument.
+The current font attributes are locally modified by \m{font-switches}
+and then the argument of \m{cmd} is typeset in the resulting new font.
+ 
+Commands defined by |\DeclareTextFontCommand| automatically take care
+of any necessary italic correction (on either side).
+ 
+The following example shows how |\textrm| is defined by the kernel.
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \DeclareTextFontCommand{\textrm}{\rmfamily}
+\end{verbatim}
+ 
+To define a command that always typeset its argument in the italic
+shape of the main document font you could declare:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \DeclareTextFontCommand{\normalit}{\normalfont\itshape}
+\end{verbatim}
+ 
+This declaration can be used to change the meaning of a command; if
+\m{cmd} is already defined, a log that it has been redefined
+is put in the transcript file.
+ 
+\begin{decl}
+|\DeclareOldFontCommand| \arg{cmd} \arg{text-switch}
+                                   \arg{math-switch}
+\end{decl}
+ 
+Declares command \m{cmd} to be a font switch (i.e.~used with the
+syntax |{<cmd>...}|) having the definition \m{text-switch}
+when used in text and the definition \m{math-switch} when used in a
+formula.
+Math alphabet commands, like |\mathit|, when used within \m{math-switch}
+should not have an argument.  Their use in this argument causes their
+semantics to change so that they here act as a font switch, as
+required by the usage of the \m{cmd}.
+ 
+This declaration is useful for setting up commands like |\rm| to behave
+as they did in \LaTeX~2.09. We strongly urge you \emph{not} to misuse
+this declaration to invent new font commands.
+ 
+The following example defines |\it| to produce the italic shape of the
+main document font if used in text and to switch to the font that would
+normally be produced by the math alphabet |\mathit| if used in a
+formula.
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \DeclareOldFontCommand{\it}{\normalfont\itshape}{\mathit}
+\end{verbatim}
+ 
+This declaration can be used to change the meaning of a command; if
+\m{cmd} is already defined, a log that it has been redefined
+is put in the transcript file.
+ 
+ 
+\section{Math fonts}
+\label{Sec:math}
+ 
+This section describes the commands available to class and package
+writers for specifying math fonts and math commands.
+ 
+\subsection{Math font attributes}
+ 
+The selection of fonts within math mode is quite different to that of
+text fonts.
+ 
+Some math fonts are selected explicitly by one-argument commands such
+as |\mathsf{max}| or |\mathbf{vec}|; such fonts are called \emph{math
+alphabets}.  These math alphabet commands affect only the font used
+for letters and symbols of type |\mathalpha| (see
+Section~\ref{Sec:math.commands}); other symbols within the argument
+will be left unchanged.  The predefined math alphabets are:
+\begin{center}
+   \begin{tabular}{ccc}
+      \emph{Alphabet} & \emph{Description} & \emph{Example} \\
+      |\mathnormal|   & default      & $abcXYZ$ \\
+      |\mathrm|       & roman        & $\mathrm{abcXYZ}$ \\
+      |\mathbf|       & bold roman   & $\mathbf{abcXYZ}$ \\
+      |\mathsf|       & sans serif   & $\mathsf{abcXYZ}$ \\
+      |\mathit|       & text italic  & $\mathit{abcXYZ}$ \\
+      |\mathtt|       & typewriter   & $\mathtt{abcXYZ}$ \\
+      |\mathcal|      & calligraphic & $\mathcal{XYZ}$
+   \end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+Other math fonts are selected implicitly by \TeX{} for symbols, with
+commands such as |\oplus| (producing $\oplus$) or with straight
+characters like |>>| or |+|.  Fonts containing such math symbols are
+called \emph{math symbol fonts}.  The predefined math symbol fonts
+are:
+\begin{center}
+   \begin{tabular}{ccc}
+  \emph{Symbol font} & \emph{Description}         & \emph{Example} \\
+      |operators|    & symbols from |\mathrm|     & $[\;+\;]$ \\
+      |letters|      & symbols from |\mathnormal| & $<<\star>>$ \\
+      |symbols|      & most \LaTeX{} symbols      & $\leq*\geq$ \\
+      |largesymbols| & large symbols              & $\sum\prod\int$
+   \end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+Some math fonts are both \emph{math alphabets} and \emph{math symbol
+fonts}, for example |\mathrm| and |operators| are the same font, and
+|\mathnormal| and |letters| are the same font.
+ 
+Math fonts in \LaTeX{} have the same five attributes as text fonts:
+encoding, family, series, shape and size.  However, there are no
+commands that allow the attributes to be individually changed.
+Instead, the conversion from math fonts to these five attributes is
+controlled by the \emph{math version}.  For example, the |normal| math
+version maps:
+\begin{center}
+   \begin{tabular}{rlc@{ }c@{ }c@{ }c}
+      \multicolumn{2}{c}{\emph{Math font}} &
+      \multicolumn{4}{c}{\emph{External font}} \\
+      \emph{Alphabets} & \emph{Symbol fonts} &
+      \multicolumn{4}{c}{\emph{Attributes}} \\
+      |\mathnormal| & |letters|      & |OML| & |cmm|  & |m|  & |it| \\
+      |\mathrm|     & |operators|    & |OT1| & |cmr|  & |m|  & |n|  \\
+      |\mathcal|    & |symbols|      & |OMS| & |cmsy| & |m|  & |n|  \\
+                    & |largesymbols| & |OMX| & |cmex| & |m|  & |n|  \\
+      |\mathbf|     &                & |OT1| & |cmr|  & |bx| & |n|  \\
+      |\mathsf|     &                & |OT1| & |cmss| & |m|  & |n|  \\
+      |\mathit|     &                & |OT1| & |cmr|  & |m|  & |it| \\
+      |\mathtt|     &                & |OT1| & |cmtt| & |m|  & |n|
+   \end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+The |bold| math version is similar except that it contains bold fonts.
+The command |\boldmath| selects the |bold| math version.
+ 
+Math versions can only be changed outside of math mode.
+ 
+The two predefined math versions are:
+\begin{center}
+   \begin{tabular}{rl}
+      |normal| & the default math version \\
+      |bold|   & the bold math version
+   \end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+Packages may define new math alphabets, math symbol fonts, and math
+versions.  This section describes the commands for writing such
+packages.
+ 
+\subsection{Selection commands}
+ 
+There are no commands for selecting symbol fonts.  Instead, these are
+selected indirectly through symbol commands like |\oplus|.
+Section~\ref{Sec:math.commands} explains how to define symbol commands.
+ 
+\begin{decl}
+      |\mathnormal{<math>}|\\
+      |\mathcal{<math>}|\\
+      |\mathrm{<math>}|\\
+      |\mathbf{<math>}|\\
+      |\mathsf{<math>}|\\
+      |\mathit{<math>}|\\
+      |\mathtt{<math>}|
+\end{decl}
+Each math alphabet is a command which can only be used inside math
+mode.  For example, |$x + \mathsf{y} + \mathcal{Z}$| produces $x +
+\mathsf{y} + \mathcal{Z}$.
+ 
+\begin{decl}
+|\mathversion{<version>}|
+\end{decl}
+This command selects a math version; it can only be used outside math
+mode.  For example, |\boldmath| is defined to be |\mathversion{bold}|.
+ 
+\subsection{Declaring math versions}
+ 
+\begin{decl}
+|\DeclareMathVersion| \arg{version}
+\end{decl}
+ 
+Defines \m{version} to be a math version.
+ 
+The newly declared version is initialised with the defaults for all
+symbol fonts and math alphabets declared so far (see the commands
+|\DeclareSymbolFont| and |\DeclareMathAlphabet|).
+ 
+If used on an already existing version, an information message is
+written to the transcript file and all previous |\SetSymbolFont| or
+|\SetMathAlphabet| declarations for this version are overwritten by
+the math alphabet and symbol font defaults, i.e.~one ends up with a
+virgin math version.
+ 
+Example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \DeclareMathVersion{normal}
+\end{verbatim}
+ 
+ 
+\subsection{Declaring math alphabets}
+
+\begin{decl}
+|\DeclareMathAlphabet| \arg{math-alph} \arg{encoding} \arg{family}
+                       \arg{series} \arg{shape}
+\end{decl}
+ 
+\NEWdescription{1997/12/01}
+If this is the first declaration for \m{math-alph} then a new math
+alphabet with this as its command name is created.
+ 
+The arguments \m{encoding} \m{family} \m{series} \m{shape} are used to
+set, or reset, the default values for this math alphabet in all math
+versions; if required, these must be further reset later for a
+particular math version by a |\SetMathAlphabet| command.
+
+If \m{shape} is empty then this \m{math-alph} is declared to be invalid
+in all versions, unless it is set by a later |\SetMathAlphabet|
+command for a particular math version.
+
+Checks that the command \m{math-alph} is either already a math
+alphabet command or is undefined; and that \m{encoding} is a known
+encoding scheme, i.e., has been previously declared.
+ 
+
+In these examples, |\foo| is defined for all math versions but |\baz|,
+by default, is defined nowhere.
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \DeclareMathAlphabet{\foo}{OT1}{cmtt}{m}{n}
+   \DeclareMathAlphabet{\baz}{OT1}{}{}{}
+\end{verbatim}
+ 
+ 
+\begin{decl}
+|\SetMathAlphabet| \arg{math-alph} \arg{version}\\
+        \null\hfill\arg{encoding} \arg{family} \arg{series} \arg{shape}
+\end{decl}
+ 
+Changes, or sets, the font for the math alphabet \m{math-alph} in math
+version \m{version} to \m{encoding}\m{family}\m{series}\m{shape}.
+ 
+Checks that \m{math-alph} has been declared as a math alphabet, 
+\m{version} is a known math version and \m{encoding} is a known
+encoding scheme.
+ 
+
+This example defines |\baz| for the `normal' math version only:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \SetMathAlphabet{\baz}{normal}{OT1}{cmss}{m}{n}
+\end{verbatim}
+ 
+Note that this declaration is not used for all math alphabets:
+Section~\ref{sec:symalph} describes |\DeclareSymbolFontAlphabet|,
+which is used to set up math alphabets contained in fonts which have
+been declared as symbol fonts.
+ 
+ 
+\subsection{Declaring symbol fonts}
+\label{sec:symalph}
+ 
+\begin{decl}
+|\DeclareSymbolFont| \arg{sym-font} \arg{encoding} \arg{family}
+                     \arg{series} \arg{shape}
+\end{decl}
+ 
+\NEWdescription{1997/12/01}
+If this is the first declaration for \m{sym-font} then a new
+symbol font with this name is created (i.e.~this identifier is assigned
+to a new \TeX{} math group).
+ 
+The arguments \m{encoding} \m{family} \m{series} \m{shape} are used to
+set, or reset. the default values for this symbol font in \emph{all}
+math versions; if required, these must be further reset later for
+a particular math version by a |\SetSymbolFont| command.
+ 
+Checks that \m{encoding} is a declared encoding scheme.
+ 
+ 
+For example, the following sets up the first four standard math symbol
+fonts:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \DeclareSymbolFont{operators}{OT1}{cmr}{m}{n}
+   \DeclareSymbolFont{letters}{OML}{cmm}{m}{it}
+   \DeclareSymbolFont{symbols}{OMS}{cmsy}{m}{n}
+   \DeclareSymbolFont{largesymbols}{OMX}{cmex}{m}{n}
+\end{verbatim}
+ 
+ 
+\begin{decl}
+|\SetSymbolFont| \arg{sym-font} \arg{version}\\
+     \null\hfill \arg{encoding} \arg{family} \arg{series} \arg{shape}
+\end{decl}
+ 
+Changes the symbol font \m{sym-font} for math version \m{version}
+to \m{encoding} \m{family} \m{series} \m{shape}.
+ 
+Checks that \m{sym-font} has been declared as a symbol font,  
+\m{version} is a known math version and \m{encoding} is a
+declared encoding scheme.
+ 
+
+For example, the following come from the set up of the `bold'
+math version:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \SetSymbolFont{operators}{bold}{OT1}{cmr}{bx}{n}
+   \SetSymbolFont{letters}{bold}{OML}{cmm}{b}{it}
+\end{verbatim}
+ 
+ 
+\begin{decl}
+|\DeclareSymbolFontAlphabet| \arg{math-alph} \arg{sym-font}
+\end{decl}
+ 
+\NEWdescription{1997/12/01}
+Allows the previously declared symbol font \m{sym-font} to be the
+math alphabet with command \m{math-alph} in \emph{all} math versions.
+ 
+Checks that the command \m{math-alph} is either already a math alphabet
+command or is undefined; and that \m{sym-font} is a symbol font.
+ 
+
+Example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \DeclareSymbolFontAlphabet{\mathrm}{operators}
+   \DeclareSymbolFontAlphabet{\mathcal}{symbols}
+\end{verbatim}
+ 
+This declaration should be used in preference to
+|\DeclareMathAlphabet| and |\SetMathAlphabet| when a math alphabet is
+the same as a symbol font; this is because it makes better use of the
+limited number (only 16) of \TeX's math groups.
+ 
+\NEWdescription{1997/12/01}
+Note that, whereas a \TeX{} math group is allocated to each symbol font
+when it is first declared, a math alphabet uses a \TeX{} math group
+only when its command is used within a math formula.
+
+
+\subsection{Declaring math symbols}
+\label{Sec:math.commands}
+ 
+\begin{decl}
+|\DeclareMathSymbol| \arg{symbol} \arg{type} \arg{sym-font}
+                     \arg{slot}
+\end{decl}
+ 
+The \m{symbol} can be either a single character such as `|>>|', or a
+macro name, such as |\sum|.
+ 
+Defines the \m{symbol} to be a math symbol of type
+\m{type} in slot \m{slot} of symbol font \m{sym-font}. The
+\m{type} can be given as a number or as a command:
+\begin{center}
+   \begin{tabular}{ccc}
+      \emph{Type} & \emph{Meaning} & \emph{Example} \\
+      |0| or |\mathord  | & Ordinary           & $\alpha$ \\
+      |1| or |\mathop   | & Large operator     & $\sum$ \\
+      |2| or |\mathbin  | & Binary operation   & $\times$ \\
+      |3| or |\mathrel  | & Relation           & $\leq$ \\
+      |4| or |\mathopen | & Opening            & $\langle$ \\
+      |5| or |\mathclose| & Closing            & $\rangle$ \\
+      |6| or |\mathpunct| & Punctuation        & $;$ \\
+      |7| or |\mathalpha| & Alphabet character & $A$
+   \end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+Only symbols of type |\mathalpha| will be affected by math alphabet
+commands: within the argument of a math alphabet command they will
+produce the character in slot \m{slot} of that math alphabet's font.
+Symbols of other types will always produce the same symbol
+(within one math version).
+ 
+|\DeclareMathSymbol| allows a macro \m{symbol} to be redefined only if
+it was previously defined to be a math symbol.  It also checks that
+the \m{sym-font} is a declared symbol font.
+ 
+Example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \DeclareMathSymbol{\alpha}{0}{letters}{"0B}
+   \DeclareMathSymbol{\lessdot}{\mathbin}{AMSb}{"0C}
+   \DeclareMathSymbol{\alphld}{\mathalpha}{AMSb}{"0C}
+\end{verbatim}
+ 
+\begin{decl}
+ |\DeclareMathDelimiter| \arg{cmd}   \arg{type}
+               \arg{sym-font-1} \arg{slot-1}\\
+  \null\hfill  \arg{sym-font-2} \arg{slot-2}
+\end{decl}
+Defines \m{cmd} to be a math delimiter where the small variant is in
+slot \m{slot-1} of symbol font \m{sym-font-1} and the large
+variant is in slot \m{slot-2} of symbol font \m{sym-font-2}.
+Both symbol fonts must have been declared previously.
+ 
+Checks that \m{sym-font-i} are both declared symbol fonts.
+ 
+If \TeX{} is not looking for a delimiter, \m{cmd} is treated just as
+if it had been defined with |\DeclareMathSymbol| using
+\m{type}, \m{sym-font-1} and \m{slot-1}.  In other words, if a
+command is defined as a delimiter then this automatically defines it
+as a math symbol.
+
+\NEWdescription{1998/06/01}
+In case \m{cmd} is a single character such as `|[|', the same syntax is
+used.  Previously the \arg{type} argument was not present (and thus the
+corresponding math symbol declaration had to be provided seperately).
+ 
+Example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \DeclareMathDelimiter{\langle}{\mathopen}{symbols}{"68}
+                                            {largesymbols}{"0A}
+   \DeclareMathDelimiter{(}      {\mathopen}{operators}{"28}
+                                            {largesymbols}{"00}
+\end{verbatim}
+ 
+ 
+\begin{decl}
+|\DeclareMathAccent| \arg{cmd} \arg{type} \arg{sym-font} \arg{slot}
+\end{decl}
+ 
+Defines \m{cmd} to act as a math accent.
+ 
+The accent character comes from slot \m{slot} in
+\m{sym-font}. The \m{type} can be either
+|\mathord| or |\mathalpha|; in the latter case the accent character
+changes font when used in a math alphabet.
+ 
+Example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \DeclareMathAccent{\acute}{\mathalpha}{operators}{"13}
+   \DeclareMathAccent{\vec}{\mathord}{letters}{"7E}
+\end{verbatim}
+ 
+ 
+\begin{decl}
+|\DeclareMathRadical| \arg{cmd}
+                    \arg{sym-font-1} \arg{slot-1}\\
+       \null\hfill  \arg{sym-font-2} \arg{slot-2}
+\end{decl}
+ 
+Defines \m{cmd} to be a radical where the small variant is in
+slot \m{slot-1} of symbol font \m{sym-font-1} and the
+large variant is in slot \m{slot-2} of symbol font
+\m{sym-font-2}.  Both symbol fonts must have been declared
+previously.
+ 
+Example (probably the only use for it!):
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \DeclareMathRadical{\sqrt}{symbols}{"70}{largesymbols}{"70}
+\end{verbatim}
+ 
+\subsection{Declaring math sizes}
+ 
+\begin{decl}
+|\DeclareMathSizes| \arg{t-size} \arg{mt-size} \arg{s-size}
+                    \arg{ss-size}
+\end{decl}
+ 
+Declares that \m{mt-size} is the (main) math text size, \m{s-size} is
+the `script' size and \m{ss-size} the `scriptscript' size to be used
+in math, when \m{t-size} is the current text size. For text sizes for
+which no such declaration is given the `script' and `scriptscript'
+size will be calculated and then fonts are loaded for the calculated
+sizes or the best approximation (this may result in a warning
+message).
+ 
+Normally, \m{t-size} and \m{mt-size} will be identical; however, if,
+for example, PostScript text fonts are mixed with bit-map math fonts
+then you may not have available a \m{mt-size} for every \m{t-size}.
+ 
+Example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \DeclareMathSizes{13.82}{14.4}{10}{7}
+\end{verbatim}
+ 
+\section{Font installation}
+\label{Sec:install}
+ 
+This section explains how \LaTeX's font attributes are turned into
+\TeX{} font specifications.
+ 
+\subsection{Font definition files}
+ 
+\NEWdescription{1997/12/01}
+The description of how \LaTeX{} font attributes are turned into \TeX{}
+fonts is usually kept in a \emph{font definition file} (|.fd|).  The
+file for family \m{family} in encoding \m{ENC} must be
+called |<enc><family>.fd|: for example, |ot1cmr.fd| for Computer
+Modern Roman with encoding |OT1| or |t1ptm.fd| for Adobe Times with
+encoding |T1|.  Note that encoding names are converted to lowercase
+when used as part of file names.
+ 
+Whenever \LaTeX{} encounters an encoding/family combination that it
+does not know (e.g.~if the document designer says
+|\fontfamily{ptm}\selectfont|) then \LaTeX{} attempts to load the
+appropriate |.fd| file.  ``Not known'' means: there was no
+|\DeclareFontFamily| declaration issued for this encoding/family
+combination.  If the |.fd| file could not be found, a warning is
+issued and font substitutions are made.
+ 
+The declarations in the font definition file are responsible for
+telling \LaTeX{} how to load fonts for that encoding/family
+combination.  
+ 
+\subsection{Font definition file commands}
+ 
+\emph{Note}: A font definition file should contain only commands
+from this subsection.
+
+Note that these commands can also be used outside a font definition
+file: they can be put in package or class files, or even in the
+preamble of a document.
+ 
+\begin{decl}
+   |\ProvidesFile{<file-name>}[<release-info>]|
+\end{decl}
+The file should announce itself with a |\ProvidesFile| command,
+as described in \emph{\clsguide}.  For example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \ProvidesFile{t1ptm.fd}[1994/06/01 Adobe Times font definitions]
+\end{verbatim}
+ 
+Spaces within the arguments specific to font definition files are
+ignored to avoid surplus spaces in the document. If a real space is
+necessary use |\space|.  
+\NEWdescription{2004/02/10}However, note that this is only true if the
+declaration is made at top level! If used within the definition of
+another command, within |\AtBeginDocument|, option code or in similar
+places, then spaces within the argument will remain and may result in
+incorrect table entries.
+
+\begin{decl}
+|\DeclareFontFamily| \arg{encoding} \arg{family} \arg{loading-settings}
+\end{decl}
+ 
+Declares a font family \m{family} to be available in encoding scheme
+\m{encoding}.
+ 
+The \m{loading-settings} are executed immediately after loading any
+font with this encoding and family.
+ 
+Checks that \m{encoding} was previously declared.
+ 
+This example refers to the Computer Modern Typewriter font family in
+the Cork encoding:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \DeclareFontFamily{T1}{cmtt}{\hyphenchar\font=-1}
+\end{verbatim}
+ 
+Each |.fd| file should contain exactly one |\DeclareFontFamily|
+command, and it should be for the appropriate encoding/family
+combination.
+ 
+\begin{decl}
+|\DeclareFontShape| \arg{encoding} \arg{family} \arg{series}
+                    \arg{shape}\\
+        \null\hfill \arg{loading-info} \arg{loading-settings}
+\end{decl}
+ 
+Declares a font shape combination; here \m{loading-info} contains the
+information that combines sizes with external fonts. The syntax is
+complex and is described in Section~\ref{sec:loadinfo} below.
+ 
+The \m{loading-settings} are executed after loading any font with this
+font shape.  They are executed immediately after the
+`loading-settings' which were declared by |\DeclareFontFamily| and so
+they can be used to overwrite the settings made at the family level.
+ 
+Checks that the combination \m{encoding}\m{family} was previously
+declared via |\DeclareFontFamily|.
+ 
+Example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmr}{m}{sl}{%
+             <<5-8>> sub * cmr/m/n
+             <<8>> cmsl8
+             <<9>> cmsl9
+             <<10>> <<10.95>> cmsl10
+             <<12>> <<14.4>> <<17.28>> <<20.74>> <<24.88>> cmsl12
+             }{}
+\end{verbatim}
+The file can contain any number of |\DeclareFontShape| commands,
+which should be for the appropriate \m{encoding} and \m{family}.
+ 
+\NEWfeature{1996/06/01}
+The font family declarations for the |OT1|-encoded fonts now all
+contain:
+\begin{verbatim}
+  \hyphenchar\font=`\-
+\end{verbatim}
+This enables the use of an alternative |\hyphenchar| in other encodings
+whilst maintaining the correct value for all fonts.
+
+\subsection{Font file loading information}
+\label{sec:loadinfo}
+ 
+The information which tells \LaTeX{} exactly which font ({\tt .tfm})
+files to load is contained in the \m{loading-info} part of a
+|\DeclareFontShape| declaration. This part consists of one or more
+\m{fontshape-decl}s, each of which has the following form:
+ 
+\begin{center}
+\begin{tabular}{r@{ $::=$ }l}
+ \m{fontshape-decl} &  \m{size-infos} \m{font-info} \\
+ \m{size-infos}     &  \m{size-infos} \m{size-info} $\mid$
+                       \m{size-info} \\
+ \m{size-info}      & ``|<<|''  \m{number-or-range} ``|>>|'' \\
+ \m{font-info}      & $[$ \m{size-function} ``|*|''  $]$
+                      $[$ ``|[|'' \m{optarg} ``|]|'' $]$ \m{fontarg} \\
+\end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+The \m{number-or-range} denotes the size or size-range
+for which this entry applies.
+ 
+If it contains a hyphen it is a
+range: lower bound on the left (if missing, zero implied), upper bound
+on the right (if missing, $\infty$ implied). For ranges, the
+upper bound is \emph{not} included in the range and the lower bound is.
+ 
+Examples:
+\begin{center}
+\begin{tabular}{lll}
+   |<<10>>|     &  simple size& 10pt only\\
+   |<<-8>>|     &  range& all sizes less than 8pt\\
+   |<<8-14.4>>| &  range& all sizes greater than or equal to 8pt\\
+              &       & \ but less than 14.4pt\\
+   |<<14.4->>|  &  range& all sizes greater than or equal 14.4pt
+\end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+If more than one \m{size-info} entry follows without any
+intervening \m{font-info}, they all share the next \m{font-info}.
+ 
+The \m{size-function}, if present, handles the use of \m{font-info}.
+If not present, the `empty' \m{size-function} is assumed.
+ 
+All the \m{size-info}s are inspected in the order in which they appear
+in the font shape declaration. If a \m{size-info} matches the
+requested size, its \m{size-function} is executed. If |\external@font|
+is non-empty afterwards this process stops, otherwise the next
+\m{size-info} is inspected. (See also |\DeclareSizeFunction|.)
+ 
+If this process does not lead to a non-empty |\external@font|,
+\LaTeX{} tries the nearest simple size. If the entry contains only
+ranges an error is returned.
+ 
+ 
+\subsection{Size functions}
+\label{sec:sizefunct}
+ 
+ 
+\LaTeX{} provides the following size functions, whose `inputs' are
+\m{fontarg} and \m{optarg} (when present).
+ 
+\begin{description}
+\item[`' (empty)]
+Load the external font \m{fontarg} at the user-requested size. If
+\m{optarg} is present, it is used as the scale-factor.
+ 
+\item[s]
+Like the empty function but without terminal warnings, only
+loggings.
+ 
+\item[gen]
+Generates the external font from \m{fontarg} followed by
+the user-requested size, e.g.~|<<8>> <<9>> <<10>> gen * cmtt|
+ 
+\item[sgen]
+Like the `gen' function but without terminal warnings, only loggings.
+
+\item[genb]
+\NEWfeature{1995/12/01}
+Generates the external font from \m{fontarg} followed by
+the user-requested size, using the conventions of the `ec' fonts.
+e.g.~|<<10.98>> genb * dctt| produces |dctt1098|.
+ 
+\item[sgenb]
+\NEWfeature{1995/12/01}
+Like the `genb' function but without terminal warnings, only loggings.
+ 
+\item[sub]
+Tries to load a font from a different font shape declaration given by
+\m{fontarg} in the form \m{family}|/|\m{series}|/|\m{shape}.
+ 
+\item[ssub]
+Silent variant of `sub', only loggings.
+ 
+\item[subf]
+Like the empty function but issues a warning that it has to substitute
+the external font \m{fontarg} because the desired font shape was not
+available in the requested size.
+ 
+\item[ssubf]
+Silent variant of `subf', only loggings.
+ 
+\item[fixed]
+Load font \m{fontarg} as is, disregarding the user-requested size.
+If present, \m{optarg} gives the ``at \ldots pt'' size to be used.
+ 
+\item[sfixed]
+Silent variant of `fixed', only loggings.
+ 
+\end{description}
+ 
+Examples for the use of most of the above size functions can be found
+in the file |cmfonts.fdd|---the source for the standard |.fd| files
+describing the Computer Modern fonts by Donald Knuth.
+ 
+ 
+\begin{decl}
+|\DeclareSizeFunction| \arg{name} \arg{code}
+\end{decl}
+ 
+Declares a size-function \m{name} for use in |\DeclareFontShape|
+commands.  The interface is still under development but there should be
+no real need to a define new size functions.
+ 
+The \m{code} is executed when the size or size-range in
+|\DeclareFontShape| matches the user-requested size.
+ 
+The arguments of the size-function are automatically parsed and placed
+into |\mandatory@arg| and |\optional@arg| for use in \m{code}. Also
+available, of course, is |\f@size|, which is the user-requested size.
+ 
+To signal success \m{code} must define the command |\external@font|
+to contain the external name and any scaling options (if present) for
+the font to be loaded.
+ 
+This example sets up the `empty' size function (simplified):
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \DeclareSizeFunction{}
+           {\edef\external@font{\mandatory@arg\space at\f@size}
+\end{verbatim}
+ 
+ 
+\section{Encodings}
+\label{Sec:encode}
+ 
+This section explains how to declare and use new font encodings and
+how to declare commands for use with particular encodings.
+ 
+\subsection{The \textsf{fontenc} package}
+ 
+Users can select new font encodings using the |fontenc| package.  The
+|fontenc| package has options for encodings; the last option becomes
+the default encoding.  For example, to use the |OT2| (Washington
+University Cyrillic encoding) and |T1| encodings, with |T1| as the
+default, an author types:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \usepackage[OT2,T1]{fontenc}
+\end{verbatim}
+ 
+\NEWdescription{1997/12/01}
+For each font encoding \m{ENC} given as an option, this package loads
+the \emph{encoding definition} (|<enc>enc.def|, with an all
+lower-case name) file; it also sets |\encodingdefault| to be the last
+encoding in the option list.
+ 
+The declarations in the encoding definition file |<enc>enc.def| for
+encoding \m{ENC} are responsible for declaring this encoding and
+telling \LaTeX{} how to produce characters in this encoding; this file
+should contain nothing else (see Section~\ref{Sec:encode.def}.
+
+The standard \LaTeX{} format declares the |OT1| and |T1| text
+encodings by inputting the files |ot1enc.def| and |t1enc.def|; it also
+sets up various defaults which require that |OT1|-encoded fonts are
+available.
+Other encoding set-ups might be added to the distribution at a
+later stage.
+ 
+Thus the example above loads the files |ot2enc.def| and |t1enc.def|
+and sets |\encodingdefault| to |T1|.
+
+\emph{Warning}: If you wish to use |T1|-encoded fonts other than the `cmr'
+family then you may need to load the package (e.g.~\texttt{times})
+that selects the fonts \emph{before} loading \texttt{fontenc} (this
+prevents the system from attempting to load any |T1|-encoded fonts from
+the `cmr' family).
+
+\subsection{Encoding definition file commands}
+\label{Sec:encode.def}
+ 
+\emph{Note}: An encoding definition file should contain only commands
+from this subsection.
+
+\NEWdescription{1997/12/01}
+As with the font definition file commands, it is also possible
+(although normally not necessary) to use these declarations directly
+within a class or package file.
+
+\emph{Warning}: Some aspects of the contents of font definition files
+are still under development.  Therefore, the current versions of the
+files |ot1enc.def| and |t1enc.def| are temporary versions and should
+not be used as models for producing further such files.  For further
+information you should read the documentation in |ltoutenc.dtx|.
+ 
+\begin{decl}
+   |\ProvidesFile{<file-name>}[<release-info>]|
+\end{decl}
+The file should announce itself with a |\ProvidesFile|
+command, described in \emph{\clsguide}.  For example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \ProvidesFile{ot2enc.def}
+                [1994/06/01 Washington University Cyrillic encoding]
+\end{verbatim}
+ 
+ 
+\begin{decl}
+|\DeclareFontEncoding| \arg{encoding} \arg{text-settings}
+                       \arg{math-settings}
+\end{decl}
+ 
+Declares a new encoding scheme \m{encoding}.
+ 
+The \m{text-settings} are
+declarations which are executed every time |\selectfont| changes the
+encoding to be \m{encoding}.
+ 
+The \m{math-settings} are similar but are for math alphabets. They
+are executed whenever a math alphabet with this encoding is
+called.
+ 
+\NEWfeature{1998/12/01}
+It also saves the value of \m{encoding} in the macro
+|\LastDeclaredEncoding|.
+ 
+Example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \DeclareFontEncoding{OT1}{}{}
+\end{verbatim}
+ 
+Some author commands need to change their definition depending on
+which encoding is currently in use.  For example, in the |OT1|
+encoding, the letter `\AE' is in slot |"1D|, whereas in the |T1|
+encoding it is in slot |"C6|.  So the definition of |\AE| has to
+change depending on whether the current encoding is |OT1| or |T1|.
+The following commands allow this to happen.
+ 
+\begin{decl}
+   |\DeclareTextCommand| \arg{cmd} \arg{encoding}
+   \oarg{num} \oarg{default} \arg{definition}
+\end{decl}
+This command is like |\newcommand|, except that it defines a
+command which is specific to one encoding.  For example, the
+definition of |\k| in the |T1| encoding is:
+\begin{verbatim}
+  \DeclareTextCommand{\k}{T1}[1]
+     {\oalign{\null#1\crcr\hidewidth\char12}}
+\end{verbatim}
+|\DeclareTextCommand| takes the same optional arguments as
+|\newcommand|.
+ 
+The resulting command is
+robust, even if the code in \m{definition} is fragile.
+ 
+It does not produce an error if the command has already
+been defined but logs the redefinition in the transcript file.
+ 
+\begin{decl}[1994/12/01]
+   |\ProvideTextCommand| \arg{cmd} \arg{encoding}
+   \oarg{num} \oarg{default} \arg{definition}
+\end{decl}
+This command is the same as |\DeclareTextCommand|, except that
+if \m{cmd} is already defined in encoding \m{encoding}, then the
+definition is ignored.
+ 
+\begin{decl}
+   |\DeclareTextSymbol| \arg{cmd} \arg{encoding} \arg{slot}
+\end{decl}
+This command defines a text symbol with slot \m{slot} in the
+encoding.  For example, the definition of |\ss| in the |OT1| encoding
+is:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \DeclareTextSymbol{\ss}{OT1}{25}
+\end{verbatim}
+It does not produce an error if the command has already
+been defined but logs the redefinition in the transcript file.
+ 
+\begin{decl}
+   |\DeclareTextAccent| \arg{cmd} \arg{encoding} \arg{slot}
+\end{decl}
+This command declares a text accent, with the accent taken from slot
+\m{slot} in the encoding.  For example, the definition of |\"| in
+the |OT1| encoding is:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \DeclareTextAccent{\"}{OT1}{127}
+\end{verbatim}
+It does not produce an error if the command has already
+been defined but logs the redefinition in the transcript file.
+ 
+\begin{decl}
+   |\DeclareTextComposite| \arg{cmd} \arg{encoding} \arg{letter}
+                           \arg{slot}
+\end{decl}
+This command declares that the composite letter formed from applying
+\m{cmd} to \m{letter} is defined to be simply slot \m{slot} in the
+encoding.   The \m{letter} should be a single letter (such as |a|) or
+a single command (such as |\i|).
+ 
+ 
+For example, the definition of |\'{a}|
+in the |T1| encoding could be declared like this:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \DeclareTextComposite{\'}{T1}{a}{225}
+\end{verbatim}
+ 
+The \m{cmd} will normally have been previously declared
+for this encoding, either by using
+|\DeclareTextAccent|, or as a one-argument |\DeclareTextCommand|.
+ 
+\begin{decl}[1994/12/01]
+   |\DeclareTextCompositeCommand| \arg{cmd} \arg{encoding} \arg{letter}
+                           \arg{definition}
+\end{decl}
+This is a more general form of |\DeclareTextComposite|, which allows
+for an arbitrary \m{definition}, not just a \m{slot}.  The main use
+for this is to allow accents on |i| to act like accents on |\i|, for
+example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\'}{OT1}{i}{\'\i}
+\end{verbatim}
+It has the same restrictions as |\DeclareTextComposite|.
+
+
+\begin{decl}[1998/12/01]
+   |\LastDeclaredEncoding|
+\end{decl}
+This holds the name of the last encoding declared via
+|\DeclareFontEncoding| (this should also be the currently most
+efficient encoding).  It can be used in the \m{encoding} argument
+of the above declarations in place of explicitly mentioning the
+encoding, e.g.
+\begin{verbatim}
+  \DeclareFontEncoding{T1}{}{}
+  \DeclareTextAccent{\`}{\LastDeclaredEncoding}{0}
+  \DeclareTextAccent{\'}{\LastDeclaredEncoding}{1}
+\end{verbatim}
+This can be useful in cases where encoding files sharing common code
+are generated from one source.  
+
+
+\subsection{Default definitions}
+ 
+\NEWdescription{1997/12/01}
+The declarations used in encoding definition files define
+encoding-specific commands but they do not allow those commands to be
+used without explicitly changing the encoding.  For some commands,
+such as symbols, this is not enough.  For example, the~|OMS| encoding
+contains the symbol~`\S', but we need to be able to use the
+command~|\S| whatever the current encoding may be, without explicitly
+selecting the encoding~|OMS|.
+   
+\NEWdescription{1997/12/01}
+To allow this, \LaTeX{} has commands that declare default definitions
+for commands; these defaults are used when the command is not defined
+in the current encoding.  For example, the default encoding for~|\S|
+is~|OMS|, and so in an encoding (such as |OT1|) which does not
+contain~|\S|, the~|OMS| encoding is selected in order to access this
+glyph.  But in an encoding (such as~|T1|) which does contain~|\S|, the
+glyph in that encoding is used.  The standard \LaTeXe{} format sets
+up several such defaults using the following encodings: |OT1|,~|OMS|
+and~|OML|.
+
+\emph{Warning}: These commands should \emph{not} occur in encoding
+definition files, since those files should declare only commands for use
+when that encoding has been selected.  They should instead be placed
+in packages; they must, of course, always refer to encodings that are
+known to be available.
+ 
+\begin{decl}[1994/12/01]
+   |\DeclareTextCommandDefault| \arg{cmd} \arg{definition}
+\end{decl}
+This command allows an encoding-specific command to be given a default 
+definition.  For example, the default definition for |\copyright| is 
+defined be be a circled `c' with:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \DeclareTextCommandDefault{\copyright}{\textcircled{c}}
+\end{verbatim}
+\begin{decl}[1994/12/01]
+   |\DeclareTextAccentDefault| \arg{cmd} \arg{encoding} \\
+   |\DeclareTextSymbolDefault| \arg{cmd} \arg{encoding}
+\end{decl}
+These commands allow an encoding-specific command to be given a
+default encoding.  For example, the default encoding for |\"| and
+|\ae| is set to be |OT1| by:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \DeclareTextAccentDefault{\"}{OT1}
+   \DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\ae}{OT1}
+\end{verbatim}
+Note that |\DeclareTextAccentDefault| can be used on any one-argument
+encoding-specific command, not just those defined with
+|\DeclareTextAccent|.  Similarly, |\DeclareTextSymbolDefault| can be
+used on any encoding-specific command with no arguments, not just
+those defined with |\DeclareTextSymbol|.
+ 
+For more examples of these definitions, see |ltoutenc.dtx|.  
+ 
+\begin{decl}[1994/12/01]
+   |\ProvideTextCommandDefault| \arg{cmd} \arg{definition}
+\end{decl}
+This command is the same as |\DeclareTextCommandDefault|, except that
+if the command already has a default definition, then the definition
+is ignored.  This is useful to give `faked' definitions of symbols
+which may be given `real' definitions by other packages.  For example,
+a package might give a fake definition of |\textonequarter| by saying:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textonequarter}{$\m@th\frac14$}
+\end{verbatim}
+ 
+ \subsection{Encoding defaults}
+ 
+\begin{decl}
+|\DeclareFontEncodingDefaults| \arg{text-settings} \arg{math-settings}
+\end{decl}
+ 
+Declares \m{text-settings} and \m{math-settings} for all encoding
+schemes.  These are executed before the encoding scheme dependent ones
+are executed so that one can use the defaults for the major cases and
+overwrite them if necessary using |\DeclareFontEncoding|.
+ 
+If |\relax| is used as an argument, the current setting of this default
+is left unchanged.
+ 
+This example is used by amsfonts.sty for accent positioning; it changes
+only the math settings:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \DeclareFontEncodingDefaults{\relax}{\def\accentclass@{7}}
+\end{verbatim}
+ 
+ 
+\begin{decl}
+|\DeclareFontSubstitution|  \arg{encoding} \arg{family} \arg{series}
+                            \arg{shape}
+\end{decl}
+ 
+Declares the default values for font substitution which will be used
+when a font with encoding \m{encoding}
+should be loaded but no font can be found with the current
+attributes.
+ 
+These substitutions are local to the encoding scheme because the
+encoding scheme is never substituted!  They are tried in the order
+\m{shape} then  \m{series} and finally \m{family}.
+ 
+If no defaults are set up for an encoding, the values given by
+|\DeclareErrorFont| are used.
+ 
+The font specification for
+\m{encoding}\m{family}\m{series}\m{shape}
+must have been defined by |\DeclareFontShape|
+before the |\begin{document}| is reached.
+ 
+Example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \DeclareFontSubstitution{T1}{cmr}{m}{n}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsection{Case changing}
+\label{sec:case}
+
+\begin{decl}
+  |\MakeUppercase| \arg{text} \\
+  |\MakeLowercase| \arg{text}
+\end{decl}
+
+\NEWfeature{1995/06/01}
+\TeX{} provides the two primitives |\uppercase| and |\lowercase| for
+changing the case of text.  Unfortunately, these \TeX{} primitives do
+not change the case of characters accessed by commands like |\ae| or
+|\aa|.  To overcome this problem, \LaTeX{} provides these two commands.
+
+In the long run, we would like to use all-caps fonts rather than any
+command like |\MakeUppercase| but this is not possible at the moment
+because such fonts do not exist.
+
+For further details, see \texttt{clsguide.tex}.
+
+\NEWdescription{1999/04/23}
+In order that upper/lower-casing will work reasonably well, and in
+order to provide any correct hyphenation, \LaTeXe{} \emph{must} use,
+throughout a document, the same fixed table for changing case.  The
+table used is designed for the font encoding |T1|; this works well
+with the standard \TeX{} fonts for all Latin alphabets but will cause
+problems when using other alphabets.  As an experiment, it has now
+been extended for use with some Cyrillic encodings.
+
+
+\section{Miscellanea}
+\label{Sec:misc}
+ 
+This section covers the remaining font commands in \LaTeX{} and some
+other issues.
+ 
+\subsection{Font substitution}
+ 
+\begin{decl}
+|\DeclareErrorFont| \arg{encoding} \arg{family} \arg{series}
+                    \arg{shape} \arg{size}
+\end{decl}
+ 
+Declares \m{encoding}\m{family}\m{series}\m{shape} to be the font shape
+used in cases where the standard substitution mechanism fails
+(i.e.~would loop). For the standard mechanism see the command
+|\DeclareFontSubstitution| above.
+ 
+The font specification for
+\m{encoding}\m{family}\m{series}\m{shape}
+must have been defined by |\DeclareFontShape|
+before the |\begin{document}| is reached.
+ 
+Example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \DeclareErrorFont{OT1}{cmr}{m}{n}{10}
+\end{verbatim}
+ 
+ 
+\begin{decl}
+|\fontsubfuzz|
+\end{decl}
+ 
+This parameter is used to decide whether or not to produce a terminal
+warning if a font size substitution takes place. If the difference
+between the requested and the chosen size is less than |\fontsubfuzz|
+the warning is only written to the transcript file. The default value
+is |0.4pt|.  This can be redefined with |\renewcommand|, for example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \renewcommand{\fontsubfuzz}{0pt}   % always warn
+\end{verbatim}
+ 
+\subsection{Preloading}
+ 
+\begin{decl}
+|\DeclarePreloadSizes| \arg{encoding} \arg{family} \arg{series}
+                       \arg{shape}
+\arg{size-list}
+\end{decl}
+ 
+ 
+Specifies the fonts that should be preloaded by the format.  These
+commands should be put in a |preload.cfg| file, which is read in when
+the \LaTeX{} format is being built.
+Read |preload.dtx| for more information on how to built such a
+configuration file.
+ 
+Example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \DeclarePreloadSizes{OT1}{cmr}{m}{sl}{10,10.95,12}
+\end{verbatim}
+ 
+ 
+\subsection{Accented characters}
+
+\NEWdescription{1996/06/01}
+Accented characters in \LaTeX{} can be produced using commands such as
+|\"a| etc. The precise effect of such commands depends on the font
+encoding being used.  When using a font encoding that contains the
+accented characters as individual glyphs (such as the |T1| encoding,
+in the case of |\"a|) words that contain such accented characters can
+be automatically hyphenated.  For font encodings that do not contain
+the requested individual glyph (such as the |OT1| encoding) such a
+command invokes typesetting instructions that produce the accented
+character as a combination of character glyphs and diacritical marks
+in the font.  In most cases this involves a call to the \TeX{}
+primitive |\accent|.  Glyphs constructed as composites in this way
+inhibit hyphenation of the current word; this is one reason why the
+|T1| encoding is preferable to the original \TeX{} font encoding
+|OT1|.
+
+It is important to understand that commands like |\"a| in \LaTeXe{}
+represent just a name for a single glyph (in this case `umlaut a') and
+contain no information about how to typeset that glyph---thus it does
+\emph{not} mean `put two dots on top of the character a'.  The
+decision as to what typesetting routine to use will depend on the
+encoding of the current font and so this decision is taken at the last
+minute.  Indeed, it is possible that the same input will be typeset in
+more than one way in the same document; for example, text in section
+headings may also appear in table of contents and in running heads; and
+each of these may use a font with a different encoding.
+
+For this reason the notation |\"a| is \emph{not} equivalent to:
+\begin{verbatim}
+  \newcommand \chara {a}     \"\chara
+\end{verbatim}
+In the latter case, \LaTeX{} does not expand the macro |\chara| but
+simply compares the notation (the string |\"\chara|) to its list of
+known composite notations in the current encoding; when it fails to
+find |\"\chara| it does the best it can and invokes the typesetting
+instructions that put the umlaut accent on top of the expansion of
+|\chara|. Thus, even if the font actually contains `\"a' as an
+individual glyph, it will not be used.
+
+The low-level accent commands in \LaTeX{} are defined in such a way
+that it is possible to combine a diacritical mark from one font with a
+glyph from another font; for example, |\"\textparagraph| will produce
+\"\textparagraph.  The umlaut here
+is taken from the |OT1| encoded font |cmr10| whilst the paragraph sign
+is from the |OMS| encoded font |cmsy10|. (This example may be
+typographically silly but better ones would involve font encodings
+like |OT2| (Cyrillic) that might not be available at every
+site.)
+
+There are, however, restrictions on the font-changing commands that
+will work within the argument to such an accent command.  These are
+\TeX{}nical in the sense that they follow from the way that \TeX{}'s
+|\accent| primitive works, allowing only a special class of commands
+between the accent and the accented character.
+
+The following are examples of commands that will not work correctly as
+the accent will appear above a space: the font commands with text
+arguments (|\textbf{...}| and friends); all the font size declarations
+(|\fontsize| and |\Large|, etc.); |\usefont| and declarations that
+depend on it, such as |\normalfont|; box commands (e.g.~|\mbox{...}|).
+
+The lower-level font declarations that set the attributes family,
+series and shape (such as |\fontshape{sl}\selectfont|) will produce
+correct typesetting, as will the default declarations such as
+|\bfseries|.
+
+
+\subsection{Naming conventions}
+ 
+\begin{itemize}
+\item
+Math alphabet commands all start with |\math...|: examples are
+|\mathbf|, |\mathcal|, etc.
+ 
+\item
+The text font changing commands with arguments all start with
+|\text...|: e.g.~|\textbf| and |\textrm|.  The exception to this is
+|\emph|, since it occurs very commonly in author documents and so
+deserves a shorter name.
+ 
+\item
+Names for encoding schemes are strings of up to three letters (all
+upper case) plus digits.
+
+The \LaTeX3 project reserves the use of encodings starting with the
+following letters: |T| (standard 256-long text encodings), |TS|
+(symbols that are designed to extend a corresponding |T| encoding),
+|X| (text encodings that do not conform to the strict requirements for
+|T| encodings), |M| (standard 256-long math encodings), |S| (other
+symbol encodings), |A| (other special applications), |OT| (standard
+128-long text encodings) and |OM| (standard 128-long math encodings).
+
+Please do not use the above starting letters for non-portable
+encodings.  If new standard encodings emerge then we shall add them in
+a later release of \LaTeX.
+
+Encoding schemes which are local to a site or a system should start
+with |L|, experimental encodings intended for wide distribution will
+start with |E|, whilst |U| is for Unknown or Unclassified encodings.
+ 
+\item
+Font family names should contain up to five lower case letters.
+Where possible, these should conform to the \emph{Filenames for fonts}
+font naming scheme.
+ 
+\item
+Font series names should contain up to four lower case letters.
+ 
+\item
+Font shapes should contain up to two letters lower case.
+ 
+\item
+Names for symbol fonts are built from lower and upper case letters
+with no restriction.
+\end{itemize}
+ 
+Whenever possible, you should use the series and shape names suggested
+in \emph{\LaTeXcomp} since this will make it easier to combine new
+fonts with existing fonts.
+ 
+\NEWdescription{1994/12/01}
+   Where possible, text symbols should be named as |\text| followed by
+   the Adobe glyph name: for example |\textonequarter| or 
+   |\textsterling|.  Similarly, math symbols should be named as 
+   |\math| followed by the glyph name, for example |\mathonequarter| 
+   or |\mathsterling|.  Commands which can be used in text or math can
+   then be defined using |\ifmmode|, for example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \DeclareRobustCommand{\pounds}{%
+      \ifmmode \mathsterling \else \textsterling \fi
+   }
+\end{verbatim}
+   Note that commands defined in this way must be robust, in case they
+   get put into a section title or other moving argument.
+
+\section{If you need to know more \ldots}
+
+\NEWdescription{1996/06/01}
+The |tracefnt| package provides for tracing the actions concerned with
+loading, substituting and using fonts.
+The package accepts the following options:
+\begin{description}
+\item[errorshow]  Write all information about font changes, etc.\ but
+  only to the transcript file unless an error occurs. This means that
+  information about font substitution will not be shown on the
+  terminal.
+
+\item[warningshow]  Show all font warnings on the terminal. This
+  setting corresponds to the default behaviour when this
+  \texttt{tracefnt} package is \emph{not} used!
+
+\item[infoshow]  Show all font warnings and all font info messages
+  (that are normally only written to the transcript file) also on the
+  terminal. This is the default when this \texttt{tracefnt} package is
+  loaded.
+
+\item[debugshow]  In addition to what is shown by \texttt{infoshow},
+  show also changes of math fonts (as far as possible): beware, this
+  option can produce a large amount of output.
+
+\item[loading]  Show the names of external font files when they are
+  loaded.  This option shows only `newly loaded' fonts, not those
+  already preloaded in the format or the class file before this
+  \texttt{tracefnt} package becomes active.
+
+\item[pausing]
+  Turn all font warnings into errors so that \LaTeX{} will stop.
+\end{description}
+
+\emph{Warning}: The actions of this package can change the layout of a
+document and even, in rare cases, produce clearly wrong output, so
+it should not be used in the final formatting of `real documents'.
+
+\begin{thebibliography}{1}
+ 
+\bibitem{A-W:MG2004}
+Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens.
+\newblock {\em The {\LaTeX} Companion second edition}.
+\newblock With Johannes Braams, David Carlisle, and Chris Rowley.
+\newblock Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, 2004.
+
+\bibitem{tub:DKn89}
+Donald~E. Knuth.
+\newblock Typesetting concrete mathematics.
+\newblock {\em {TUG}boat}, 10(1):31--36, April 1989.
+ 
+\bibitem{A-W:LLa94}
+Leslie Lamport.
+\newblock {\em {\LaTeX:} A Document Preparation System}.
+\newblock Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, second edition, 1994.
+ 
+\end{thebibliography}
+ 
+\end{document}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/fontdef.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/fontdef.dtx
index 4d9f5b35cd5..df87680f7ab 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/fontdef.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/fontdef.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 % \iffalse meta-comment
 %
-% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006
 % The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 % in this file. 
 % 
@@ -8,12 +8,12 @@
 % -------------------------------------------
 % 
 % It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
 % of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 % The latest version of this license is in
 %    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
 % 
 % This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
 % 
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/format.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/format.ins
index 8d05e13d3af..a5485a3a0be 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/format.ins
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/format.ins
@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
 %% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
 %% LaTeX or TeX.
 %%
-%% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+%% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005
 %% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 %% in this file. 
 %% 
@@ -11,12 +11,12 @@
 %% -------------------------------------------
 %% 
 %% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3b
 %% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 %% The latest version of this license is in
 %%    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%% and version 1.3b or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+%% version 2005/12/01 or later.
 %% 
 %% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
 %% 
@@ -40,7 +40,7 @@
 
 This is a generated file.
 
-Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006
 The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 in this file. 
 
@@ -48,12 +48,12 @@ This file was generated from file(s) of the LaTeX base system.
 --------------------------------------------------------------
 
 It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
 of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 The latest version of this license is in
    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
+and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+version 2005/12/01 or later.
 
 This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
 
@@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
 
 This is a generated file.  
 
-Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005
 The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 in this file. 
 
@@ -82,12 +82,12 @@ This file was generated from file(s) of the LaTeX base system.
 --------------------------------------------------------------
 
 It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
 of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 The latest version of this license is in
    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
+and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+version 2005/12/01 or later.
 
 This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the LaTeX
 base system. You may however distribute the LaTeX base system without
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/graphpap.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/graphpap.dtx
index e16442017dc..4c34aaaa2aa 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/graphpap.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/graphpap.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 % \iffalse meta-comment
 %
-% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006
 % The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 % in this file. 
 % 
@@ -8,12 +8,12 @@
 % -------------------------------------------
 % 
 % It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
 % of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 % The latest version of this license is in
 %    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
 % 
 % This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
 % 
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/graphpap.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/graphpap.ins
index 93a347633e8..b48b9cf576b 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/graphpap.ins
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/graphpap.ins
@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
 %% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
 %% LaTeX or TeX.
 %%
-%% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+%% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005
 %% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 %% in this file. 
 %% 
@@ -11,12 +11,12 @@
 %% -------------------------------------------
 %% 
 %% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3b
 %% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 %% The latest version of this license is in
 %%    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%% and version 1.3b or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+%% version 2005/12/01 or later.
 %% 
 %% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
 %% 
@@ -40,7 +40,7 @@
 
 This is a generated file.
 
-Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006
 The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 in this file. 
 
@@ -48,12 +48,12 @@ This file was generated from file(s) of the LaTeX base system.
 --------------------------------------------------------------
 
 It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
 of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 The latest version of this license is in
    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
+and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+version 2005/12/01 or later.
 
 This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
 
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ifthen.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ifthen.dtx
index 18c24bd6631..4569babc8fb 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ifthen.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ifthen.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 % \iffalse meta-comment
 %
-% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006
 % The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 % in this file. 
 % 
@@ -8,12 +8,12 @@
 % -------------------------------------------
 % 
 % It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
 % of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 % The latest version of this license is in
 %    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
 % 
 % This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
 % 
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ifthen.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ifthen.ins
index 22d40efbb6c..dc0eca54690 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ifthen.ins
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ifthen.ins
@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
 %% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
 %% LaTeX or TeX.
 %%
-%% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+%% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005
 %% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 %% in this file. 
 %% 
@@ -11,12 +11,12 @@
 %% -------------------------------------------
 %% 
 %% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3b
 %% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 %% The latest version of this license is in
 %%    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%% and version 1.3b or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+%% version 2005/12/01 or later.
 %% 
 %% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
 %% 
@@ -40,7 +40,7 @@
 
 This is a generated file.
 
-Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006
 The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 in this file. 
 
@@ -48,12 +48,12 @@ This file was generated from file(s) of the LaTeX base system.
 --------------------------------------------------------------
 
 It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
 of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 The latest version of this license is in
    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
+and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+version 2005/12/01 or later.
 
 This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
 
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/inputenc.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/inputenc.dtx
index 2ebd81f6288..3fc18039b06 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/inputenc.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/inputenc.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 % \iffalse meta-comment
 %
-% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006
 % The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 % in this file. 
 % 
@@ -8,12 +8,12 @@
 % -------------------------------------------
 % 
 % It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
 % of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 % The latest version of this license is in
 %    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
 % 
 % This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
 % 
@@ -46,7 +46,7 @@
 %</driver>
 % \fi
 %
-% \CheckSum{3415}
+% \CheckSum{3463}
 %
 %% \CharacterTable
 %%  {Upper-case    \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
@@ -138,6 +138,8 @@
 %       THIS MAY CHANGE}
 % \changes{v0.95}{1997/12/20}{Updated documentation}
 % \changes{v0.97}{1998/03/05}{Spanish ords changed to text chars, pr/2579}
+% \changes{v1.1b}{2006/03/04}{Number of normalisations in the LICR 
+%                             representation (pr/3849)}
 %
 %
 % \section{Introduction}
@@ -187,6 +189,9 @@
 %       \texttt{cp1252,ansinew} the latter only used for the provides
 %       file line.} for |cp1252|).
 % \end{itemize}
+% See also the file \texttt{utf8ienc.dtx} that provides UTF8 support using the
+% \textsf{inputenc} package interface.
+%
 % Each encoding has an associated |.def| file, for example
 % |latin1.def| which defines the behaviour of each input character,
 % using the commands:
@@ -223,6 +228,31 @@
 %    See the documentation in |fntguide.tex| and |ltoutenc.dtx| for
 %    details of how to declare text commands.
 %
+% \subsection{Programmers interface}
+%
+% To better support packages that manage their own character mappings and
+% therefore have to react to input encoding changes, the following three
+% commands have been added in version 1.1a:
+%
+% \DescribeMacro\inputencodingname This command stores the name of the current
+% input encoding.
+%
+% \DescribeMacro\inpenc@prehook
+% \DescribeMacro\inpenc@posthook These two are token registers that are
+% executed whenever an |\inputencoding| change happens. The first is executed at
+% the very beginning, i.e., with |\inputencodingname| still pointing to the
+% encoding name currently in place while the second one is executed at the very
+% end, i.e., when |\inputencoding| has build a new mapping.
+%
+% Packages making use of this new features should consider including the
+% following line
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%   \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[2005/12/01]
+%\end{verbatim}
+% as these commands haven't been available in \textsf{inputenc} distributed
+% with older releases of \LaTeX{}.
+%
+
 % \StopEventually{}
 %
 % \section{Announcing the files}
@@ -252,7 +282,7 @@
 %<ansinew>  \ProvidesFile{ansinew.def}
 %<cp1252&!ansinew>  \ProvidesFile{cp1252.def}
 %<cp1250>  \ProvidesFile{cp1250.def}
-   [2004/02/05 v1.0d Input encoding file]
+   [2006/05/05 v1.1b Input encoding file]
 %<cp850>%%
 %<cp850>%% If you need a euro symbol, try cp858 instead.
 %<cp850>%%
@@ -390,6 +420,12 @@
 % 
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \def\inputencoding#1{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    We start with a hook to be executed before the encoding change
+%    happens.
+% \changes{v1.1a}{2006/02/22}{Added \cs{inpenc@prehook}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \the\inpenc@prehook
   \gdef\@inpenc@test{\global\let\@inpenc@test\relax}%
 %    \end{macrocode}
 %    Keyboard characters which don't get a definition will be mapped to
@@ -407,6 +443,13 @@
 %    |\CurrentOption| in which case a later use would return incorrect
 %    information (at best nothing).
 %
+%    For external lookup by other packages we also store the new encoding name
+%    in a user accessible macro.
+% \changes{v1.1a}{2006/02/22}{Added \cs{inputencodingname}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \edef\inputencodingname{#1}% 
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
 %    Now we make all potential input characters active.
 % \changes{v0.994}{2000/01/27}{Allow change also in horizontal mode
 %      (pr/2888)}
@@ -421,11 +464,13 @@
 %    we need to ensure that we don't get any stray spaces into the
 %    horizontal mode or else we end up with extra space in the
 %    paragraph.
-% \changes{v0.998}{2001/05/25}{suppress all spaces for horizontal mode 
+% \changes{v0.998}{2001/05/25}{Suppress all spaces for horizontal mode 
 %                              (pr/3273)}
+% \changes{v1.0f}{2004/05/06}{Really do (pr/3273)}
 %    \begin{macrocode}
   \advance\endlinechar\@M
   \xdef\saved@space@catcode{\the\catcode`\ }%
+  \catcode`\ 9\relax                      
   \input{#1.def}%
   \advance\endlinechar-\@M
   \catcode`\ \saved@space@catcode\relax
@@ -439,11 +484,30 @@
              {No characters defined\MessageBreak
               by input encoding change to `#1'\MessageBreak}%
   \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    We finish with a hook to be executed after the encoding change
+%    happens.
+% \changes{v1.1a}{2006/02/22}{Added \cs{inpenc@posthook}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \the\inpenc@posthook
 }  
 %    \end{macrocode}
 % \end{macro}
 %
 % 
+% \begin{macro}{\inpenc@prehook}
+% \changes{v1.1a}{2006/02/22}{Hook added}
+% \begin{macro}{\inpenc@posthook}
+% \changes{v1.1a}{2006/02/22}{Hook added}
+%    Two hooks to be executed before and after an encoding changes happened.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newtoks\inpenc@prehook
+\newtoks\inpenc@posthook
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% 
 % \begin{macro}{\@inpenc@undefined@}
 %    This command will assigned to any active character unless it
 %    get a proper definition by the encoding. The argument is the
@@ -542,15 +606,15 @@
 %<*cp850|cp858|cp852|cp865|cp437|cp437de|applemac|cp1252|cp1250|cp1257|next>
 \ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textdegree}{\ensuremath{{^\circ}}}
 %</cp850|cp858|cp852|cp865|cp437|cp437de|applemac|cp1252|cp1250|cp1257|next>
-%<*latin1|decmulti|latin3|latin5|cp850|cp858|cp852|cp1252|next>
+%<*latin1|decmulti|latin3|latin5|cp850|cp858|cp852|cp1252|cp1257|next>
 \ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textonehalf}{\ensuremath{\frac12}}
-%</latin1|decmulti|latin3|latin5|cp850|cp858|cp852|cp1252|next>
-%<*latin1|decmulti|latin5|cp850|cp858|cp852|cp1252|next>
+%</latin1|decmulti|latin3|latin5|cp850|cp858|cp852|cp1252|cp1257|next>
+%<*latin1|decmulti|latin5|cp850|cp858|cp852|cp1252|cp1257|next>
 \ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textonequarter}{\ensuremath{\frac14}}
-%</latin1|decmulti|latin5|cp850|cp858|cp852|cp1252|next>
-%<*latin1|latin5|cp850|cp858|cp852|cp1252|next>
+%</latin1|decmulti|latin5|cp850|cp858|cp852|cp1252|cp1257|next>
+%<*latin1|latin5|cp850|cp858|cp852|cp1252|cp1257|next>
 \ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textthreequarters}{\ensuremath{\frac34}}
-%</latin1|latin5|cp850|cp858|cp852|cp1252|next>
+%</latin1|latin5|cp850|cp858|cp852|cp1252|cp1257|next>
 %<*applemac|cp850|cp858|cp865|cp437|cp437de|cp1252|next>
 \ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textflorin}{\textit{f}}
 %</applemac|cp850|cp858|cp865|cp437|cp437de|cp1252|next>
@@ -581,10 +645,14 @@
 \ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textyen}
    {\TextSymbolUnavailable\textyen}
 %</applemac|cp1252|next>
-%<*latin9|cp1252|latin10>
+%<*cp1257>
+\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textcent}
+   {\TextSymbolUnavailable\textcent}
+%</cp1257>
+%<*latin9|cp1252|cp1257|latin10>
 \ProvideTextCommandDefault{\texteuro}
    {\TextSymbolUnavailable\texteuro}
-%</latin9|cp1252|latin10>
+%</latin9|cp1252|cp1257|latin10>
 %<*latin1|decmulti|latin2|latin3|latin4|latin5|cp850|cp858|cp852|cp865>
 \ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textcurrency}
    {\TextSymbolUnavailable\textcurrency}
@@ -593,10 +661,10 @@
 \ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textcurrency}
    {\TextSymbolUnavailable\textcurrency}
 %</applemac|cp1252|cp1250|cp1257|next>
-%<*latin1|latin5|cp850|cp858|cp852|cp1252|cp1250>
+%<*latin1|latin5|cp850|cp858|cp852|cp1252|cp1250|cp1257>
 \ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textbrokenbar}
    {\TextSymbolUnavailable\textbrokenbar}
-%</latin1|latin5|cp850|cp858|cp852|cp1252|cp1250>
+%</latin1|latin5|cp850|cp858|cp852|cp1252|cp1250|cp1257>
 %<*latin3>
 \ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textmalteseH}
    {\TextSymbolUnavailable\textmalteseH}
@@ -611,16 +679,10 @@
 \ProvideTextCommandDefault{\texttstroke}
   {\TextSymbolUnavailable\texttstroke}
 %</latin4>
-%<*next>
-\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textquotesingle}
-   {\TextSymbolUnavailable\textquotesingle}
-\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\capitalogonek}
-   {\TextSymbolUnavailable\capitalogonek}
-%</next>
-%<*cp1250|cp1252|applemac|next>
+%<*cp1250|cp1252|cp1257|applemac|next>
 \ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textperthousand}
    {\TextSymbolUnavailable\textperthousand}
-%</cp1250|cp1252|applemac|next>
+%</cp1250|cp1252|cp1257|applemac|next>
 %<*applemacce>
 \ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textdiv}
    {\TextSymbolUnavailable\textdiv}
@@ -637,18 +699,18 @@
 % encoding for math fonts is static.
 %
 %    \begin{macrocode}
-%<*latin1|decmulti|latin5|latin9|cp850|cp858|cp1252|next>
+%<*latin1|decmulti|latin5|latin9|cp850|cp858|cp1252|cp1257|next>
 \providecommand{\mathonesuperior}{{^1}}
-%</latin1|decmulti|latin5|latin9|cp850|cp858|cp1252|next>
-%<*latin1|decmulti|latin3|latin5|latin9|cp850|cp858|cp1252|next>
+%</latin1|decmulti|latin5|latin9|cp850|cp858|cp1252|cp1257|next>
+%<*latin1|decmulti|latin3|latin5|latin9|cp850|cp858|cp1252|cp1257|next>
 \providecommand{\maththreesuperior}{{^3}}
-%</latin1|decmulti|latin3|latin5|latin9|cp850|cp858|cp1252|next>
+%</latin1|decmulti|latin3|latin5|latin9|cp850|cp858|cp1252|cp1257|next>
 %<*latin1|decmulti|latin3|latin5|latin9|cp850|cp858|cp865|cp437|cp437de>
 \providecommand{\mathtwosuperior}{{^2}}
 %</latin1|decmulti|latin3|latin5|latin9|cp850|cp858|cp865|cp437|cp437de>
-%<*cp1252|next>
+%<*cp1252|cp1257|next>
 \providecommand{\mathtwosuperior}{{^2}}
-%</cp1252|next>
+%</cp1252|cp1257|next>
 %<*cp865|cp437|cp437de>
 \providecommand{\mathnsuperior}{{^n}}
 %</cp865|cp437|cp437de>
@@ -657,7 +719,14 @@
 % \section{The ASCII encoding}
 %
 % The ASCII encoding only allows characters in the range 32--127, so
-% we only need to provide an empty |.def| file.
+% we only need to provide a more or less empty |.def| file.
+% But we supress the warning that would normally appear if there are no
+% encoding definitions.
+%
+% \changes{v1.1b}{2006/03/03}{Suppress unnecessary warning (pr/3849)}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<ascii>\@inpenc@test
+%    \end{macrocode}
 %
 % \changes{v0.94}{1997/12/17}{Merged latin1 with ansinew/cp1252}
 %    
@@ -927,7 +996,7 @@
 \DeclareInputText{165}{\~I}
 \DeclareInputText{166}{\c L}
 \DeclareInputText{167}{\S}
-\DeclareInputText{168}{\"\ }
+\DeclareInputText{168}{\"{}}
 \DeclareInputText{169}{\v S}
 \DeclareInputText{170}{\@tabacckludge=E}
 \DeclareInputText{171}{\c G}
@@ -942,7 +1011,7 @@
 \DeclareInputText{180}{\@tabacckludge'{}}
 \DeclareInputText{181}{\~\i}
 \DeclareInputText{182}{\c l}
-\DeclareInputText{183}{\v\ }
+\DeclareInputText{183}{\v{}}
 \DeclareInputText{184}{\c\ }
 \DeclareInputText{185}{\v s}
 \DeclareInputText{186}{\@tabacckludge=e}
@@ -1020,7 +1089,7 @@
 \DeclareInputText{252}{\"u}
 \DeclareInputText{253}{\~u}
 \DeclareInputText{254}{\@tabacckludge=u}
-\DeclareInputText{255}{\.\ }
+\DeclareInputText{255}{\.{}}
 %</latin4>
 %    \end{macrocode}
 %
@@ -1131,7 +1200,7 @@
 \DeclareInputText{236}{\@tabacckludge`\i}
 \DeclareInputText{252}{\"u}
 \DeclareInputText{237}{\@tabacckludge'\i}
-\DeclareInputText{253}{\i }
+\DeclareInputText{253}{\i}
 \DeclareInputText{238}{\^\i}
 \DeclareInputText{254}{\c s}
 \DeclareInputText{239}{\"\i}
@@ -1350,7 +1419,7 @@
 %
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \DeclareInputText{224}{\@tabacckludge'O}
-\DeclareInputText{240}{\textendash}
+\DeclareInputText{240}{\-}
 \DeclareInputText{225}{\ss}
 \DeclareInputMath{241}{\pm}
 \DeclareInputText{226}{\^O}
@@ -1442,7 +1511,7 @@
 \DeclareInputText{167}{\v z}
 \DeclareInputText{168}{\k E}
 \DeclareInputText{169}{\k e}
-\DeclareInputText{170}{\nobreakspace}  % or empty??
+\DeclareInputMath{170}{\lnot}
 \DeclareInputText{171}{\@tabacckludge'z}
 \DeclareInputText{172}{\v C}
 \DeclareInputText{173}{\c s}
@@ -1475,7 +1544,7 @@
 %
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \DeclareInputText{224}{\@tabacckludge'O}
-\DeclareInputText{240}{\textendash}
+\DeclareInputText{240}{\-}
 \DeclareInputText{225}{\ss}
 \DeclareInputText{241}{\H{}}
 \DeclareInputText{226}{\^O}
@@ -1541,14 +1610,14 @@
 % 
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 %<*cp437|cp437de|cp865>
-\DeclareInputText{128}{{\c C}}
+\DeclareInputText{128}{\c C}
 \DeclareInputText{129}{\"u}
 \DeclareInputText{130}{\@tabacckludge'e}
 \DeclareInputText{131}{\^a}
 \DeclareInputText{132}{\"a}
 \DeclareInputText{133}{\@tabacckludge`a}
 \DeclareInputText{134}{\r a}
-\DeclareInputText{135}{{\c c}}
+\DeclareInputText{135}{\c c}
 \DeclareInputText{136}{\^e}
 \DeclareInputText{137}{\"e}
 \DeclareInputText{138}{\@tabacckludge`e}
@@ -1677,8 +1746,8 @@
 \DeclareInputMath{239}{\cap}
 \DeclareInputMath{240}{\equiv}
 \DeclareInputMath{241}{\pm}
-\DeclareInputMath{242}{\ge}
-\DeclareInputMath{243}{\le}
+\DeclareInputMath{242}{\geq}
+\DeclareInputMath{243}{\leq}
 %\DeclareInputMath{244}{}   % upper part of integral sign
 %\DeclareInputMath{245}{}   % lower part of integral sign
 \DeclareInputMath{246}{\div}
@@ -1851,6 +1920,16 @@
 %
 % \changes{v0.99b}{2002/06/16}{Added macce encoding (pr/3433)}
 % \changes{v1.0d}{2004/02/05}{Reordered code}
+% \changes{v1.0g}{2004/05/22}{Changed \cs{textellipsis} to \cs{dots}
+%    for consistency.}
+% \changes{v1.0g}{2004/05/22}{Changed \cs{textdagger} to \cs{dag}
+%    for consistency.}
+% \changes{v1.0g}{2004/05/22}{Changed \cs{textparagraph} to \cs{P}
+%    for consistency.}
+% \changes{v1.0g}{2004/05/22}{Changed \cs{textsection} to \cs{S}
+%    for consistency.}
+% \changes{v1.0g}{2004/05/22}{Changed \cs{textcopyright} to \cs{copyright}
+%    for consistency.}
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 %<*applemacce>
 \DeclareInputText{128}{\"A}
@@ -1860,7 +1939,7 @@
 \DeclareInputText{134}{\"U}
 \DeclareInputText{136}{\k a}
 \DeclareInputText{137}{\v C}
-\DeclareInputText{138}{\" a}
+\DeclareInputText{138}{\"a}
 \DeclareInputText{139}{\v c}
 \DeclareInputText{140}{\@tabacckludge'C}
 \DeclareInputText{141}{\@tabacckludge'c}
@@ -1875,27 +1954,31 @@
 %    \end{macrocode}
 %
 %    \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareInputText{160}{\textdagger}
+\DeclareInputText{160}{\dag}
 \DeclareInputText{161}{\textdegree}
 \DeclareInputText{162}{\k E}
 \DeclareInputText{163}{\pounds}
-\DeclareInputText{164}{\textsection}
+\DeclareInputText{164}{\S}
 \DeclareInputText{165}{\textbullet}
-\DeclareInputText{166}{\textparagraph}
-\DeclareInputText{167}{\SS}
+\DeclareInputText{166}{\P}
+\DeclareInputText{167}{\ss}
 \DeclareInputText{168}{\textregistered}
 \DeclareInputText{171}{\k e}
 \DeclareInputText{193}{\@tabacckludge'N}
-\DeclareInputText{169}{\textcopyright}
+\DeclareInputText{169}{\copyright}
 \DeclareInputText{184}{\l}
 \DeclareInputText{196}{\@tabacckludge'n}
 \DeclareInputText{199}{\guillemotleft}
 \DeclareInputText{200}{\guillemotright}
-\DeclareInputText{201}{\textellipsis}
+\DeclareInputText{201}{\dots}
 \DeclareInputText{202}{\nobreakspace}
 \DeclareInputText{208}{\textendash}
 \DeclareInputText{209}{\textemdash}
-\DeclareInputText{210}{\textquotedbleft}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{v1.0e}{2004/05/03}{Typo in \cs{textquotedblleft} (pr/3673)}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareInputText{210}{\textquotedblleft}
 \DeclareInputText{211}{\textquotedblright}
 \DeclareInputText{212}{\textquoteleft}
 \DeclareInputText{213}{\textquoteright}
@@ -1987,7 +2070,7 @@
 \DeclareInputText{166}{\textflorin}
 \DeclareInputText{167}{\S}
 \DeclareInputText{168}{\textcurrency}
-\DeclareInputText{169}{\textquotesingle}
+\DeclareInputText{169}{\textquoteright}
 \DeclareInputText{170}{\textquotedblleft}
 \DeclareInputText{171}{\guillemotleft}
 \DeclareInputText{172}{\guilsinglleft}
@@ -1999,7 +2082,7 @@
 \DeclareInputText{178}{\dag}
 \DeclareInputText{179}{\ddag}
 \DeclareInputText{180}{\textperiodcentered}
-\DeclareInputText{181}{\textbar}
+\DeclareInputText{181}{\textbrokenbar}
 \DeclareInputText{182}{\P}
 \DeclareInputText{183}{\textbullet}
 \DeclareInputText{184}{\quotesinglbase}
@@ -2023,11 +2106,11 @@
 \DeclareInputText{199}{\.{}}
 \DeclareInputText{200}{\"{}}
 \DeclareInputMath{201}{\mathtwosuperior}
-\DeclareInputText{202}{\textdegree}
+\DeclareInputText{202}{\r{}}
 \DeclareInputText{203}{\c\ }
 \DeclareInputMath{204}{\maththreesuperior}
 \DeclareInputText{205}{\H{}}
-\DeclareInputText{206}{\capitalogonek{}}
+\DeclareInputText{206}{\k\ }
 \DeclareInputText{207}{\v{}}
 \DeclareInputText{208}{\textemdash}
 \DeclareInputMath{209}{\pm}
@@ -2054,7 +2137,7 @@
 \DeclareInputText{227}{\textordfeminine}
 \DeclareInputText{228}{\^\i}
 \DeclareInputText{229}{\"\i}
-\DeclareInputMath{230}{\eth}
+\DeclareInputText{230}{\dh}
 \DeclareInputText{231}{\~n}
 \DeclareInputText{232}{\L}
 \DeclareInputText{233}{\O}
@@ -2078,8 +2161,6 @@
 \DeclareInputText{251}{\ss}
 \DeclareInputText{252}{\th}
 \DeclareInputText{253}{\"y}
-\DeclareInputText{254}{}
-\DeclareInputText{255}{}
 %</next>
 %    \end{macrocode}
 %
@@ -2335,6 +2416,9 @@
 % Data for the \LaTeX{} support was mainly provided by  Ionel Ciob\^{i}c\u{a}
 % with additions and corrections taken from\\ 
 % \texttt{http://www.unicode.org/Public/MAPPINGS/ISO8859/8859-16.TXT}.
+%
+% \changes{v1.1b}{2006/03/03}{Corrections (pr/3849)}
+%
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 %<*latin10>
 %    \end{macrocode}
@@ -2354,7 +2438,11 @@
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \ProvideTextCommandDefault\textpm{\ensuremath\pm}
 %    \end{macrocode}
-%    
+%    But why only for this one encoding? (Answer: because it is a new encoding:
+%    it contains only LICR objects --- Frank)
+% \changes{v1.0g}{2004/05/22}{Changed \cs{textpm} to \cs{pm}}
+% \changes{v1.1b}{2006/03/03}{Reverted back to \cs{textpm}
+%    for consistency.}
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \DeclareInputText{160}{\nobreakspace}
 \DeclareInputText{161}{\k A}
@@ -2472,8 +2560,6 @@
 %    for consistency.}
 % \changes{v0.94}{1997/12/17}{Changed \cs{textdagger} to \cs{dag}
 %    for consistency.}
-% \changes{v0.94}{1997/12/17}{Changed \cs{textdagger} to \cs{dag}
-%    for consistency.}
 % \changes{v0.94}{1997/12/17}{Changed \cs{textparagraph} to \cs{P}
 %    for consistency.}
 % \changes{v0.94}{1997/12/17}{Changed \cs{textsection} to \cs{S}
@@ -2547,7 +2633,7 @@
 \DeclareInputText{188}{\v L}% L caron (L') ?
 \DeclareInputText{189}{\H{}}
 \DeclareInputText{190}{\v l}% l caron (l') ? 
-\DeclareInputText{191}{\. z}
+\DeclareInputText{191}{\.z}
 %    \end{macrocode}
 %
 %    \begin{macrocode}
@@ -2579,7 +2665,7 @@
 \DeclareInputText{217}{\r U}
 \DeclareInputText{218}{\@tabacckludge'U}
 \DeclareInputText{219}{\H U}
-\DeclareInputText{220}{\" U}
+\DeclareInputText{220}{\"U}
 \DeclareInputText{221}{\@tabacckludge'Y}
 \DeclareInputText{222}{\c T}
 \DeclareInputText{223}{\ss}
@@ -2590,7 +2676,7 @@
 \DeclareInputText{225}{\@tabacckludge'a}
 \DeclareInputText{226}{\^a}
 \DeclareInputText{227}{\u a}
-\DeclareInputText{228}{\" a}
+\DeclareInputText{228}{\"a}
 \DeclareInputText{229}{\@tabacckludge'l}
 \DeclareInputText{230}{\@tabacckludge'c}
 \DeclareInputText{231}{\c c}
@@ -2625,111 +2711,140 @@
 %\section{The MS Windows encoding cp1257}
 %
 %    This is an MS Windows encoding for Baltic languages,
-%    known as Code Page 1257; it was provided on the web at
-%    \texttt{http://nad.datapro.lv/LaTeX} and edited by Frank
-%    to make it consistent with other files.
+%    known as Code Page 1257; provided by Heiko Oberdiek
+%    using the mappings to Unicode in
+%    \texttt{http://www.unicode.org/Public/MAPPINGS/VENDORS/MICSFT/WINDOWS/CP1257.TXT}
+%    and
+%    \texttt{http://www.microsoft.com/globaldev/reference/sbcs/1257.mspx}.
 %
+% \changes{v1.1b}{2006/03/03}{Large number of corrections (pr/3849)}
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 %<*cp1257>
+\DeclareInputText{128}{\texteuro}
+\DeclareInputText{130}{\quotesinglbase}
+\DeclareInputText{132}{\quotedblbase}
+\DeclareInputText{133}{\dots}
+\DeclareInputText{134}{\dag}
+\DeclareInputText{135}{\ddag}
+\DeclareInputText{137}{\textperthousand}
+\DeclareInputText{139}{\guilsinglleft}
+\DeclareInputText{141}{\"{}}
+\DeclareInputText{142}{\v{}}
+\DeclareInputText{143}{\c\ }
+\DeclareInputText{145}{\textquoteleft}
+\DeclareInputText{146}{\textquoteright}
+\DeclareInputText{147}{\textquotedblleft}
+\DeclareInputText{148}{\textquotedblright}
+\DeclareInputText{149}{\textbullet}
+\DeclareInputText{150}{\textendash}
+\DeclareInputText{151}{\textemdash}
+\DeclareInputText{153}{\texttrademark}
+\DeclareInputText{155}{\guilsinglright}
+\DeclareInputText{157}{\@tabacckludge={}}
+\DeclareInputText{158}{\k\ }
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
 \DeclareInputText{160}{\nobreakspace}
-\DeclareInputText{161}{\k A}
-\DeclareInputText{163}{\c R}
+\DeclareInputText{162}{\textcent}
+\DeclareInputText{163}{\pounds}
 \DeclareInputText{164}{\textcurrency}
-\DeclareInputText{165}{\~I}
-\DeclareInputText{166}{\c L}
+\DeclareInputText{166}{\textbrokenbar}
 \DeclareInputText{167}{\S}
-\DeclareInputText{168}{\"\ }
-\DeclareInputText{169}{\v S}
-\DeclareInputText{170}{\@tabacckludge=E}
-\DeclareInputText{171}{\c G}
+\DeclareInputText{168}{\O}
+\DeclareInputText{169}{\copyright}
+\DeclareInputText{170}{\c R}
+\DeclareInputText{171}{\guillemotleft}
+\DeclareInputMath{172}{\lnot}
 \DeclareInputText{173}{\-}
-\DeclareInputText{174}{\v Z}
-\DeclareInputText{175}{\@tabacckludge={}}
+\DeclareInputText{174}{\textregistered}
+\DeclareInputText{175}{\AE}
 \DeclareInputText{176}{\textdegree}
-\DeclareInputText{177}{\k a}
-\DeclareInputText{178}{\k\ }
-\DeclareInputText{179}{\c r}
+\DeclareInputMath{177}{\pm}
+\DeclareInputMath{178}{\mathtwosuperior}
+\DeclareInputMath{179}{\maththreesuperior}
 \DeclareInputText{180}{\@tabacckludge'{}}
-\DeclareInputText{181}{\~\i}
-\DeclareInputText{182}{\c l}
-\DeclareInputText{183}{\v\ }
-\DeclareInputText{184}{\c\ }
-\DeclareInputText{185}{\v s}
-\DeclareInputText{186}{\@tabacckludge=e}
-\DeclareInputText{187}{\c g}
-\DeclareInputText{189}{\NG}
-\DeclareInputText{190}{\v z}
-\DeclareInputText{191}{\ng}
+\DeclareInputMath{181}{\mu}
+\DeclareInputText{182}{\P}
+\DeclareInputText{183}{\textperiodcentered}
+\DeclareInputText{184}{\o}
+\DeclareInputMath{185}{\mathonesuperior}
+\DeclareInputText{186}{\c r}
+\DeclareInputText{187}{\guillemotright}
+\DeclareInputText{188}{\textonequarter}
+\DeclareInputText{189}{\textonehalf}
+\DeclareInputText{190}{\textthreequarters}
+\DeclareInputText{191}{\ae}
 %    \end{macrocode}
 %
 %    \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareInputText{192}{\@tabacckludge=A}
-\DeclareInputText{193}{\@tabacckludge'A}
-\DeclareInputText{194}{\=A}
-\DeclareInputText{195}{\~A}
+\DeclareInputText{192}{\k A}
+\DeclareInputText{193}{\k I}
+\DeclareInputText{194}{\@tabacckludge=A}
+\DeclareInputText{195}{\@tabacckludge'C}
 \DeclareInputText{196}{\"A}
 \DeclareInputText{197}{\r A}
-\DeclareInputText{198}{\AE}
-\DeclareInputText{199}{\=E}
+\DeclareInputText{198}{\k E}
+\DeclareInputText{199}{\@tabacckludge=E}
 \DeclareInputText{200}{\v C}
 \DeclareInputText{201}{\@tabacckludge'E}
-\DeclareInputText{202}{\k E}
-\DeclareInputText{203}{\"E}
+\DeclareInputText{202}{\@tabacckludge'Z}
+\DeclareInputText{203}{\.{E}}
 \DeclareInputText{204}{\c G}
 \DeclareInputText{205}{\c K}
 \DeclareInputText{206}{\@tabacckludge=I}
 \DeclareInputText{207}{\c L}
 \DeclareInputText{208}{\v S}
-\DeclareInputText{209}{\c N}
+\DeclareInputText{209}{\@tabacckludge'N}
 \DeclareInputText{210}{\c N}
-\DeclareInputText{211}{\c N}
-\DeclareInputText{212}{\^O}
+\DeclareInputText{211}{\@tabacckludge'O}
+\DeclareInputText{212}{\@tabacckludge=O}
 \DeclareInputText{213}{\~O}
 \DeclareInputText{214}{\"O}
 \DeclareInputMath{215}{\times}
-\DeclareInputText{216}{\O}
-\DeclareInputText{217}{\k U}
-\DeclareInputText{218}{\@tabacckludge'U}
+\DeclareInputText{216}{\k U}
+\DeclareInputText{217}{\L}
+\DeclareInputText{218}{\@tabacckludge'S}
 \DeclareInputText{219}{\@tabacckludge=U}
 \DeclareInputText{220}{\"U}
-\DeclareInputText{221}{\~U}
+\DeclareInputText{221}{\.Z}
 \DeclareInputText{222}{\v Z}
 \DeclareInputText{223}{\ss}
 %    \end{macrocode}
 %
 %    \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareInputText{224}{\@tabacckludge=a}
-\DeclareInputText{225}{\@tabacckludge'a}
+\DeclareInputText{224}{\k a}
+\DeclareInputText{225}{\k i}
 \DeclareInputText{226}{\@tabacckludge=a}
-\DeclareInputText{227}{\~a}
+\DeclareInputText{227}{\@tabacckludge'c}
 \DeclareInputText{228}{\"a}
 \DeclareInputText{229}{\r a}
-\DeclareInputText{230}{\ae}
+\DeclareInputText{230}{\k e}
 \DeclareInputText{231}{\@tabacckludge=e}
 \DeclareInputText{232}{\v c}
 \DeclareInputText{233}{\@tabacckludge'e}
-\DeclareInputText{234}{\k e}
-\DeclareInputText{235}{\"e}
-\DeclareInputText{236}{\k g}
+\DeclareInputText{234}{\@tabacckludge'z}
+\DeclareInputText{235}{\.{e}}
+\DeclareInputText{236}{\c g}
 \DeclareInputText{237}{\c k}
 \DeclareInputText{238}{\@tabacckludge=\i}
-\DeclareInputText{239}{\k l}
+\DeclareInputText{239}{\c l}
 \DeclareInputText{240}{\v s}
-\DeclareInputText{241}{\c n}
-\DeclareInputText{242}{\k n}
-\DeclareInputText{243}{\c k}
-\DeclareInputText{244}{\^o}
+\DeclareInputText{241}{\@tabacckludge'n}
+\DeclareInputText{242}{\c n}
+\DeclareInputText{243}{\@tabacckludge'o}
+\DeclareInputText{244}{\@tabacckludge=o}
 \DeclareInputText{245}{\~o}
 \DeclareInputText{246}{\"o}
 \DeclareInputMath{247}{\div}
-\DeclareInputText{248}{\o}
-\DeclareInputText{249}{\k u}
-\DeclareInputText{250}{\@tabacckludge'u}
+\DeclareInputText{248}{\k u}
+\DeclareInputText{249}{\l}
+\DeclareInputText{250}{\@tabacckludge's}
 \DeclareInputText{251}{\@tabacckludge=u}
 \DeclareInputText{252}{\"u}
-\DeclareInputText{253}{\~u}
+\DeclareInputText{253}{\.z}
 \DeclareInputText{254}{\v z}
-\DeclareInputText{255}{\.\ }
+\DeclareInputText{255}{\.{}}
 %</cp1257>
 %    \end{macrocode}
 %
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/inputenc.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/inputenc.ins
index 245b96995f4..b0cd8420d2a 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/inputenc.ins
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/inputenc.ins
@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
 %% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
 %% LaTeX or TeX.
 %%
-%% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+%% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005
 %% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 %% in this file. 
 %% 
@@ -11,12 +11,12 @@
 %% -------------------------------------------
 %% 
 %% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3b
 %% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 %% The latest version of this license is in
 %%    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%% and version 1.3b or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+%% version 2005/12/01 or later.
 %% 
 %% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
 %% 
@@ -40,7 +40,7 @@
 
 This is a generated file.
 
-Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006
 The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 in this file. 
 
@@ -48,12 +48,12 @@ This file was generated from file(s) of the LaTeX base system.
 --------------------------------------------------------------
 
 It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
 of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 The latest version of this license is in
    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
+and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+version 2005/12/01 or later.
 
 This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
 
@@ -71,6 +71,8 @@ extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
 \endpreamble
 
 \keepsilent
+\askonceonly
+
 \usedir{tex/latex/base}
 
 \Msg{*** Generating input encoding files ***}
@@ -142,7 +144,8 @@ extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
           \file{ot1enc.dfu}{\from{utf8ienc.dtx}{ot1}}
           \file{ot2enc.dfu}{\from{utf8ienc.dtx}{ot2}}
           \file{t1enc.dfu}{\from{utf8ienc.dtx}{t1}}
-          \file{t2aenc.dfu}{\from{utf8ienc.dtx}{t2a}}
+         }
+\generate{\file{t2aenc.dfu}{\from{utf8ienc.dtx}{t2a}}
           \file{t2benc.dfu}{\from{utf8ienc.dtx}{t2b}}
           \file{t2cenc.dfu}{\from{utf8ienc.dtx}{t2c}}
           \file{ts1enc.dfu}{\from{utf8ienc.dtx}{ts1}}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/latex209.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/latex209.dtx
index 323a275dfa3..b17c4b3963e 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/latex209.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/latex209.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 % \iffalse meta-comment
 %
-% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006
 % The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 % in this file. 
 % 
@@ -8,12 +8,12 @@
 % -------------------------------------------
 % 
 % It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
 % of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 % The latest version of this license is in
 %    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
 % 
 % This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
 % 
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/latex209.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/latex209.ins
index 74801ea7029..bcf143ebfac 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/latex209.ins
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/latex209.ins
@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
 %% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
 %% LaTeX or TeX.
 %%
-%% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+%% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005
 %% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 %% in this file. 
 %% 
@@ -11,12 +11,12 @@
 %% -------------------------------------------
 %% 
 %% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3b
 %% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 %% The latest version of this license is in
 %%    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%% and version 1.3b or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+%% version 2005/12/01 or later.
 %% 
 %% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
 %% 
@@ -40,7 +40,7 @@
 
 This is a generated file.
 
-Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006
 The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 in this file. 
 
@@ -48,12 +48,12 @@ This file was generated from file(s) of the LaTeX base system.
 --------------------------------------------------------------
 
 It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
 of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 The latest version of this license is in
    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
+and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+version 2005/12/01 or later.
 
 This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
 
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/latexsym.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/latexsym.dtx
index 4072447c3b4..eced4645a64 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/latexsym.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/latexsym.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 % \iffalse meta-comment
 %
-% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006
 % The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 % in this file. 
 % 
@@ -8,12 +8,12 @@
 % -------------------------------------------
 % 
 % It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
 % of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 % The latest version of this license is in
 %    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
 % 
 % This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
 % 
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/latexsym.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/latexsym.ins
index 671202d7a7e..9fc48fd12fe 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/latexsym.ins
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/latexsym.ins
@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
 %% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
 %% LaTeX or TeX.
 %%
-%% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+%% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005
 %% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 %% in this file. 
 %% 
@@ -11,12 +11,12 @@
 %% -------------------------------------------
 %% 
 %% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3b
 %% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 %% The latest version of this license is in
 %%    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%% and version 1.3b or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+%% version 2005/12/01 or later.
 %% 
 %% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
 %% 
@@ -40,7 +40,7 @@
 
 This is a generated file.
 
-Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006
 The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 in this file. 
 
@@ -48,12 +48,12 @@ This file was generated from file(s) of the LaTeX base system.
 --------------------------------------------------------------
 
 It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
 of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 The latest version of this license is in
    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
+and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+version 2005/12/01 or later.
 
 This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
 
@@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
 
 This is a generated file.
 
-Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005
 The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 in this file. 
 
@@ -82,12 +82,12 @@ This file was generated from file(s) of the LaTeX base system.
 --------------------------------------------------------------
 
 It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
 of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 The latest version of this license is in
    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
+and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+version 2005/12/01 or later.
 
 This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the LaTeX
 base system. You may however distribute the LaTeX base system without
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/letter.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/letter.dtx
index 89e8579ecb3..3b5654c7bc7 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/letter.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/letter.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 % \iffalse meta-comment
 %
-% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006
 % The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 % in this file. 
 % 
@@ -8,12 +8,12 @@
 % -------------------------------------------
 % 
 % It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
 % of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 % The latest version of this license is in
 %    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
 % 
 % This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
 % 
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/letter.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/letter.ins
index c85d5ebdf77..a4ad041483d 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/letter.ins
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/letter.ins
@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
 %% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
 %% LaTeX or TeX.
 %%
-%% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+%% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005
 %% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 %% in this file. 
 %% 
@@ -11,12 +11,12 @@
 %% -------------------------------------------
 %% 
 %% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3b
 %% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 %% The latest version of this license is in
 %%    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%% and version 1.3b or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+%% version 2005/12/01 or later.
 %% 
 %% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
 %% 
@@ -40,7 +40,7 @@
 
 This is a generated file.
 
-Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006
 The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 in this file. 
 
@@ -48,12 +48,12 @@ This file was generated from file(s) of the LaTeX base system.
 --------------------------------------------------------------
 
 It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
 of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 The latest version of this license is in
    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
+and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+version 2005/12/01 or later.
 
 This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
 
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltalloc.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltalloc.dtx
index 62082152aa8..1e0f9aba293 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltalloc.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltalloc.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 % \iffalse meta-comment
 %
-% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006
 % The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 % in this file. 
 % 
@@ -8,12 +8,12 @@
 % -------------------------------------------
 % 
 % It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
 % of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 % The latest version of this license is in
 %    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
 % 
 % This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
 % 
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltbibl.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltbibl.dtx
index d4957026a72..c0b6f07c8c3 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltbibl.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltbibl.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 % \iffalse meta-comment
 %
-% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006
 % The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 % in this file. 
 % 
@@ -8,12 +8,12 @@
 % -------------------------------------------
 % 
 % It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
 % of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 % The latest version of this license is in
 %    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
 % 
 % This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
 % 
@@ -114,7 +114,7 @@
 % \changes{v1.1a}{1994/05/19}{Initial version of ltbibl.dtx,
 %                             split from ltidxbib.dtx}
 % \changes{v1.1b}{1994/05/21}{Use new warning commands}
-% \changes{v1.1c}{1994/11/10}{Fix \cs{nocite\{*\}}}
+% \changes{v1.1c}{1994/11/10}{Fix \cs{nocite}\texttt{\char`\{*\char`\}}}
 %
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 %<*2ekernel>
@@ -231,7 +231,7 @@
 % \changes{v1.1g}{1995/05/08}{Use \cs{@firstofone}}
 % \changes{v1.1k}{1995/10/20}{Removed refundefined flag}
 % \changes{v1.1l}{1995/12/07}{Restored name of \cs{G@refundefinedtrue}}
-% \changes{v1.1m}{1997/04/24}{\cs{\@empty} to avoid primitive
+% \changes{v1.1m}{1997/04/24}{\cs{@empty} to avoid primitive
 %    error on empty cite keys. latex/2432}
 % \changes{v1.1n}{2002/12/13}{Added \cs{leavevmode} in case citation
 %    is at start of paragraph (pr/3486)}
@@ -309,7 +309,7 @@
 %
 %  \begin{macro}{\nocite}
 %    (Added 14 Jun 85)
-% \changes{v1.1c}{1994/11/10}{Fix \cs{nocite\{*\}}}
+% \changes{v1.1c}{1994/11/10}{Fix \cs{nocite}\texttt{\char`\{*\char`\}}}
 %   
 %    This puts information on the |.aux| file that causes
 %    \BibTeX{} to include the citation list in the bibliography,
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltboxes.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltboxes.dtx
index b838ef47684..d19e5e19a30 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltboxes.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltboxes.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 % \iffalse meta-comment
 %
-% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006
 % The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 % in this file. 
 % 
@@ -8,12 +8,12 @@
 % -------------------------------------------
 % 
 % It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
 % of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 % The latest version of this license is in
 %    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
 % 
 % This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
 % 
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@
 %<*driver>
 % \fi
 \ProvidesFile{ltboxes.dtx}
-             [1999/04/27 v1.1f LaTeX Kernel (Box Commands)]
+             [2006/05/18 v1.1g LaTeX Kernel (Box Commands)]
 % \iffalse
 \documentclass{ltxdoc}
 \GetFileInfo{ltboxes.dtx}
@@ -50,7 +50,7 @@
 %</driver>
 % \fi
 %
-% \CheckSum{757}
+% \CheckSum{758}
 %
 % \changes{v1.1e}{1998/08/17}{(RmS) Minor Documentation fixes.}
 % \section{\LaTeX\ Box commands}
@@ -754,6 +754,9 @@
 % \changes{v1.1f}{1999/04/27}
 %         {(CAR) Changed \cs{@empty} to \cs{relax} as flag for natural
 %          width: pr/2975}
+% \changes{v1.1g}{2006/05/18}
+%         {Ensure \cs{@parboxto} holds the value of \cs{@tempdimb} not the
+%          register itself (pr/3867)}
 % The internal version of |\parbox|.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \let\@parboxto\@empty
@@ -764,7 +767,7 @@
   \@begin@tempboxa\vbox{\hsize\@tempdima\@parboxrestore#5\@@par}%
     \ifx\relax#2\else
       \setlength\@tempdimb{#2}%
-      \def\@parboxto{to\@tempdimb}%
+      \edef\@parboxto{to\the\@tempdimb}%
     \fi
     \if#1b\vbox
     \else\if #1t\vtop
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltclass.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltclass.dtx
index 6b4c5a20626..bfa8b3cf4e2 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltclass.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltclass.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 % \iffalse meta-comment
 %
-% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006
 % The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 % in this file. 
 % 
@@ -8,12 +8,12 @@
 % -------------------------------------------
 % 
 % It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
 % of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 % The latest version of this license is in
 %    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
 % 
 % This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
 % 
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltcntrl.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltcntrl.dtx
index 304609d4523..49be70713b4 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltcntrl.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltcntrl.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 % \iffalse meta-comment
 %
-% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006
 % The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 % in this file. 
 % 
@@ -8,12 +8,12 @@
 % -------------------------------------------
 % 
 % It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
 % of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 % The latest version of this license is in
 %    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
 % 
 % This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
 % 
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltcounts.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltcounts.dtx
index 23acbc10dee..5be005aec83 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltcounts.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltcounts.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 % \iffalse meta-comment
 %
-% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006
 % The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 % in this file. 
 % 
@@ -8,12 +8,12 @@
 % -------------------------------------------
 % 
 % It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
 % of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 % The latest version of this license is in
 %    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
 % 
 % This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
 % 
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltdefns.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltdefns.dtx
index f3ef0b05149..736d15df9fd 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltdefns.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltdefns.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 % \iffalse meta-comment
 %
-% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006
 % The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 % in this file. 
 % 
@@ -8,12 +8,12 @@
 % -------------------------------------------
 % 
 % It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
 % of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 % The latest version of this license is in
 %    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
 % 
 % This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
 % 
@@ -32,7 +32,7 @@
 %<*driver>
 % \fi
 \ProvidesFile{ltdefns.dtx}
-             [2004/02/20 v1.3g LaTeX Kernel (definition commands)]
+             [2004/09/18 v1.3g LaTeX Kernel (definition commands)]
 % \iffalse
 \documentclass{ltxdoc}
 \GetFileInfo{ltdefns.dtx}
@@ -466,8 +466,8 @@
 %    Define |#1| if it is definable.
 %
 %    Both here and in |\@xargdef| the replacement text is absorbed as
-%    an argument because this removes any space-token that may appear
-%    after the optional argument(s).   
+%    an argument because if we are not allowed to make the definition
+%    we have to get rid of it completely.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \long\def\@argdef#1[#2]#3{%
    \@ifdefinable #1{\@yargdef#1\@ne{#2}{#3}}}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltdirchk.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltdirchk.dtx
index ce899b0d361..925c2506a0f 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltdirchk.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltdirchk.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 % \iffalse meta-comment
 %
-% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006
 % The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 % in this file. 
 % 
@@ -8,12 +8,12 @@
 % -------------------------------------------
 % 
 % It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
 % of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 % The latest version of this license is in
 %    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
 % 
 % This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
 % 
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/lterror.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/lterror.dtx
index 98d3304df45..1fddd397d61 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/lterror.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/lterror.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 % \iffalse meta-comment
 %
-% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006
 % The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 % in this file. 
 % 
@@ -8,12 +8,12 @@
 % -------------------------------------------
 % 
 % It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
 % of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 % The latest version of this license is in
 %    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
 % 
 % This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
 % 
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfiles.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfiles.dtx
index 4df0e8dc266..6e484dcccaf 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfiles.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfiles.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 % \iffalse meta-comment
 %
-% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006
 % The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 % in this file. 
 % 
@@ -8,12 +8,12 @@
 % -------------------------------------------
 % 
 % It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
 % of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 % The latest version of this license is in
 %    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
 % 
 % This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
 % 
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfinal.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfinal.dtx
index 3512b42a309..9b844cb81a2 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfinal.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfinal.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 % \iffalse meta-comment
 %
-% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006
 % The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 % in this file. 
 % 
@@ -8,12 +8,12 @@
 % -------------------------------------------
 % 
 % It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
 % of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 % The latest version of this license is in
 %    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
 % 
 % This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
 % 
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfloat.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfloat.dtx
index d10264e56fd..274fb1c61e1 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfloat.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfloat.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 % \iffalse meta-comment
 %
-% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006
 % The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 % in this file. 
 % 
@@ -8,12 +8,12 @@
 % -------------------------------------------
 % 
 % It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
 % of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 % The latest version of this license is in
 %    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
 % 
 % This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
 % 
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfntcmd.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfntcmd.dtx
index f6850793662..da0c9b8e166 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfntcmd.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfntcmd.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 % \iffalse meta-comment
 %
-% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006
 % The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 % in this file. 
 % 
@@ -8,12 +8,12 @@
 % -------------------------------------------
 % 
 % It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
 % of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 % The latest version of this license is in
 %    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
 % 
 % This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
 % 
@@ -92,7 +92,7 @@
 % \changes{v3.2a}{1994/03/15}{Removed \cs{@renewfontswitch}}
 % \changes{v3.2a}{1994/03/15}{Changed \cs{/} to \cs{@@italiccorr}}
 % \changes{v3.2b}{1994/04/14}{Macros renamed to non-private forms, JB}
-% \changes{v3.3a}{1994/04/20}{New implementation of \cs{\nocorr}}
+% \changes{v3.3a}{1994/04/20}{New implementation of \cs{nocorr}}
 % \changes{v3.3a}{1994/04/20}{Documentation up-dated}
 % \changes{v3.3b}{1994/04/30}{Documentation up-dated and tidied}
 % \changes{v3.3b}{1994/04/30}{Title changed}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfssbas.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfssbas.dtx
index 4adafd0cea4..bee32130ae5 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfssbas.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfssbas.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 % \iffalse meta-comment
 %
-% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006
 % The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 % in this file. 
 % 
@@ -8,12 +8,12 @@
 % -------------------------------------------
 % 
 % It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
 % of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 % The latest version of this license is in
 %    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
 % 
 % This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
 % 
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfsscmp.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfsscmp.dtx
index b4441aa4120..5e65eb2a766 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfsscmp.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfsscmp.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 % \iffalse meta-comment
 %
-% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006
 % The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 % in this file. 
 % 
@@ -8,12 +8,12 @@
 % -------------------------------------------
 % 
 % It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
 % of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 % The latest version of this license is in
 %    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
 % 
 % This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
 % 
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfssdcl.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfssdcl.dtx
index f2aee76bdab..da024b1f1e6 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfssdcl.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfssdcl.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 % \iffalse meta-comment
 %
-% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006
 % The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 % in this file. 
 % 
@@ -8,12 +8,12 @@
 % -------------------------------------------
 % 
 % It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
 % of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 % The latest version of this license is in
 %    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
 % 
 % This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
 % 
@@ -36,7 +36,7 @@
 % 
 %
 \ProvidesFile{ltfssdcl.dtx}
-            [1998/08/17 v3.0i LaTeX Kernel (NFSS Declarative Interface)]
+            [2005/09/27 v3.0k LaTeX Kernel (NFSS Declarative Interface)]
 % \iffalse
 \documentclass{ltxdoc}
 \begin{document}
@@ -52,7 +52,7 @@
 %<+checkmem>\CHECKMEM
 % \fi
 %
-% \CheckSum{1871}
+% \CheckSum{1879}
 %
 %
 % \GetFileInfo{ltfssdcl.dtx}
@@ -365,17 +365,17 @@
 % \begin{macro}{\non@alpherr}
 % \changes{v3.0c}{1995/10/10}
 %         {(DPC) autoload error message}
+% \changes{v3.0j}{2005/07/27}
+%         {(MH) Change because command is now properly robust}
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 %</2ekernel|autoload>
 %<*2ekernel|autoerr>
 \gdef\non@alpherr#1{\@latex@error{%
 %    \end{macrocode}
-%    Since the argument is the internal alphabet name, we have to get
-%    rid of the |@| in its name. The trick here is to use |\@firstoftwo|
-%    which is a \LaTeX{} macro which discards the second of two
-%    arguments.
+% The command here will have a space at the end of its name, so we make
+% sure not to insert an extra one.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
-    \expandafter\@firstoftwo\string#1 allowed only in math mode}\@ehd}
+    \string#1allowed only in math mode}\@ehd}
 %</2ekernel|autoerr>
 %<autoload>\def\non@alpherr{\@autoerr\non@alpherr}
 %<*2ekernel|autoload>
@@ -751,6 +751,8 @@
 % \end{macro}
 %
 % \begin{macro}{\DeclareMathAlphabet}
+% \changes{v3.0j}{2005/07/27}
+%         {(MH) Make document commands robust}
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \def\DeclareMathAlphabet#1#2#3#4#5{%
  \@tempswafalse
@@ -768,8 +770,8 @@
 %    Check if it is already a math alphabet.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
      \edef\reserved@a{\noexpand\in@{\string\select@group}%
-         {\expandafter\meaning\csname @\expandafter
-          \@gobble\string#1\endcsname}}%
+         {\expandafter\meaning\csname \expandafter
+          \@gobble\string#1\space\endcsname}}%
      \reserved@a
      \ifin@
        \@font@info{Redeclaring math alphabet \string#1}%
@@ -780,7 +782,7 @@
 % \changes{???}{1994/04/18}{Pass correct arg (2 not 3)}
 %    \begin{macrocode}
             \csname M@#2\expandafter\endcsname
-            \csname @\expandafter\@gobble\string#1\endcsname#1}%
+            \csname \expandafter\@gobble\string#1\space\endcsname#1}%
        \version@list
      \else
 %    \end{macrocode}
@@ -788,8 +790,8 @@
 %    |\DeclareSymbolFontAlphabet|.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
        \edef\reserved@a{\noexpand\in@{\string\use@mathgroup}%
-         {\expandafter\meaning\csname @\expandafter
-          \@gobble\string#1\endcsname}}%
+         {\expandafter\meaning\csname \expandafter
+          \@gobble\string#1\space\endcsname}}%
        \reserved@a
        \ifin@
 %    \end{macrocode}
@@ -815,11 +817,13 @@
 % \end{macro}
 %
 % \begin{macro}{\new@mathalphabet}
+% \changes{v3.0j}{2005/07/27}
+%         {(MH) Make document commands robust}
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \def\new@mathalphabet#1#2#3#4#5{%
     \toks@\expandafter{\alpha@list}%
-    \edef#1{\expandafter\noexpand\csname @\expandafter
-            \@gobble\string#1\endcsname
+    \edef#1{\expandafter\noexpand\csname \expandafter
+            \@gobble\string#1\space\endcsname
             \if/#5/%
                \noexpand\no@alphabet@error
                \noexpand\no@alphabet@error
@@ -833,8 +837,8 @@
     \def\version@elt##1{\toks@\expandafter{##1}%
                    \edef##1{\the\toks@\install@mathalphabet
                             \expandafter\noexpand
-                            \csname @\expandafter\@gobble
-                               \string#1\endcsname
+                            \csname \expandafter\@gobble
+                               \string#1\space\endcsname
                            {\if/#5/%
                              \noexpand\no@alphabet@error
                              \noexpand#1%
@@ -843,22 +847,24 @@
                             \fi}}%
                  }%
     \version@list
-    \expandafter\edef\csname @\expandafter\@gobble
-                \string#1\endcsname{\if/#5/%
+    \expandafter\edef\csname \expandafter\@gobble
+                \string#1\space\endcsname{\if/#5/%
               \noexpand\no@alphabet@error
               \noexpand#1%
             \else
               \noexpand\select@group\the\toks2
             \fi}%
     \edef#1{\noexpand\protect
-            \expandafter\noexpand\csname @\expandafter
-            \@gobble\string#1\endcsname}%
+            \expandafter\noexpand\csname \expandafter
+            \@gobble\string#1\space\endcsname}%
 }
 \@onlypreamble\new@mathalphabet
 %    \end{macrocode}
 % \end{macro}
 %
 % \begin{macro}{\SetMathAlphabet}
+% \changes{v3.0j}{2005/07/27}
+%         {(MH) Make document commands robust}
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \def\SetMathAlphabet#1#2#3#4#5#6{%
  \@tempswafalse
@@ -870,7 +876,7 @@
   \expandafter\SetMathAlphabet@
     \csname mv@#2\expandafter\endcsname\csname#3/#4/#5/#6\expandafter
     \endcsname \csname M@#3\expandafter\endcsname
-    \csname @\expandafter\@gobble\string#1\endcsname#1%
+    \csname \expandafter\@gobble\string#1\space\endcsname#1%
  \else
   \@latex@error{Encoding scheme  `#3' unknown}\@eha
  \fi
@@ -1391,10 +1397,12 @@
 % \end{macro}
 %
 % \begin{macro}{\DeclareSymbolFontAlphabet}
+% \changes{v3.0j}{2005/07/27}
+%         {(MH) Make document commands robust}
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \def\DeclareSymbolFontAlphabet#1#2{%
    \expandafter\DeclareSymbolFontAlphabet@
-     \csname @\expandafter\@gobble\string#1\endcsname{#2}#1}
+     \csname \expandafter\@gobble\string#1\space\endcsname{#2}#1}
 \@onlypreamble\DeclareSymbolFontAlphabet
 %    \end{macrocode}
 % \end{macro}
@@ -1452,7 +1460,7 @@
 %    at all:
 %    \begin{macrocode}
       \expandafter\ifx
-      \csname\expandafter\@gobble\string#1\endcsname
+      \csname\expandafter\@gobble\string#1\space\endcsname
       \relax
 %    \end{macrocode}
 %    If it is undefined, fine otherwise check if it is a math alphabet
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfssini.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfssini.dtx
index c815906b882..6b12c49d226 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfssini.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfssini.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 % \iffalse meta-comment
 %
-% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006
 % The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 % in this file. 
 % 
@@ -8,12 +8,12 @@
 % -------------------------------------------
 % 
 % It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
 % of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 % The latest version of this license is in
 %    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
 % 
 % This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
 % 
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfsstrc.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfsstrc.dtx
index 3b77cfcf22c..890d179f7ce 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfsstrc.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfsstrc.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 % \iffalse meta-comment
 %
-% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006
 % The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 % in this file. 
 % 
@@ -8,12 +8,12 @@
 % -------------------------------------------
 % 
 % It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
 % of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 % The latest version of this license is in
 %    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
 % 
 % This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
 % 
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/lthyphen.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/lthyphen.dtx
index 03849a56131..f1b2d003667 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/lthyphen.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/lthyphen.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 % \iffalse meta-comment
 %
-% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006
 % The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 % in this file. 
 % 
@@ -8,12 +8,12 @@
 % -------------------------------------------
 % 
 % It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
 % of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 % The latest version of this license is in
 %    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
 % 
 % This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
 % 
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltidxglo.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltidxglo.dtx
index 7a630b77e97..3ca80d4d23c 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltidxglo.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltidxglo.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 % \iffalse meta-comment
 %
-% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006
 % The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 % in this file. 
 % 
@@ -8,12 +8,12 @@
 % -------------------------------------------
 % 
 % It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
 % of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 % The latest version of this license is in
 %    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
 % 
 % This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
 % 
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltlength.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltlength.dtx
index e48ebfeedd6..db59b964797 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltlength.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltlength.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 % \iffalse meta-comment
 %
-% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006
 % The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 % in this file. 
 % 
@@ -8,12 +8,12 @@
 % -------------------------------------------
 % 
 % It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
 % of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 % The latest version of this license is in
 %    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
 % 
 % This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
 % 
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltlists.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltlists.dtx
index 6a4a91d7271..94d94f69027 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltlists.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltlists.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 % \iffalse meta-comment
 %
-% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006
 % The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 % in this file. 
 % 
@@ -8,12 +8,12 @@
 % -------------------------------------------
 % 
 % It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
 % of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 % The latest version of this license is in
 %    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
 % 
 % This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
 % 
@@ -161,7 +161,7 @@
 %   an |\item| is encountered and the time that \TeX{}
 %   actually enters horizontal mode.  Should be tested by commands
 %   that can be messed up by the list environment's use of |\everypar|.
-% \item[\cs{box\@labels}] When |@inlabel = true|, it holds the labels
+% \item[\cs{box}\cs{@labels}] When |@inlabel = true|, it holds the labels
 %   to be put out by |\everypar|.
 % \item[\texttt{@noparitem}] A switch set by |\list| when
 %   |@inlabel = true|.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltlogos.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltlogos.dtx
index 61173b17e2d..75a7efda37b 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltlogos.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltlogos.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 % \iffalse meta-comment
 %
-% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006
 % The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 % in this file. 
 % 
@@ -8,12 +8,12 @@
 % -------------------------------------------
 % 
 % It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
 % of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 % The latest version of this license is in
 %    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
 % 
 % This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
 % 
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltmath.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltmath.dtx
index f50778c5826..e16f0d5b097 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltmath.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltmath.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 % \iffalse meta-comment
 %
-% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006
 % The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 % in this file. 
 % 
@@ -8,12 +8,12 @@
 % -------------------------------------------
 % 
 % It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
 % of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 % The latest version of this license is in
 %    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
 % 
 % This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
 % 
@@ -38,7 +38,7 @@
 %<*driver>
 % \fi
 \ProvidesFile{ltmath.dtx}
-              [1999/10/09 v1.1f LaTeX Kernel (Math Setup)]
+              [2005/11/10 v1.1g LaTeX Kernel (Math Setup)]
 % \iffalse
 %</driver>
 %
@@ -67,7 +67,8 @@
 % \changes{v1.1b}{1996/07/26}{Removed \cs{global} before
 %     \cs{@ignoretrue} in various places.}
 % \changes{v1.1c}{1998/08/17}{(RmS) Minor documentation fixes.}
-%
+% \changes{v1.1g}{2005/11/10}{(MH) Minor documentation fixes.}
+% 
 % \section{Math setup}
 %
 % This file contains a lot of the original plain \TeX{} code, as well
@@ -210,7 +211,7 @@
 %    \end{macrocode}
 % \end{macro}
 %
-% \begin{macro}{\atopwithdelims}
+% \begin{macro}{\brack}
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \def\brack{\atopwithdelims[]}
 %    \end{macrocode}
@@ -223,8 +224,6 @@
 % \end{macro}
 %
 % \begin{macro}{\mathpalette}
-% \changes{v1.0r}{1995/05/21}{Use \cs{sqrtsign} instead of
-%                             \cs{sqrt}}
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \def\mathpalette#1#2{%
   \mathchoice
@@ -241,6 +240,8 @@
 %              plain \TeX\ definition /2359}
 % \begin{macro}{\rootbox}
 % \begin{macro}{\r@@t}
+% \changes{v1.0r}{1995/05/21}{Use \cs{sqrtsign} instead of
+%                             \cs{sqrt}}
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newbox\rootbox
 %    \end{macrocode}
@@ -546,6 +547,8 @@
 % \end{macro}
 %
 % \begin{macro}{\[}
+% \changes{v1.1g}{2005/11/10}
+%                {(MH) Fixed potential problem in \cs{[} (pr/3399).}
 % \begin{macro}{\]}
 %    Produces |$$...$$| with checks that |\[| isn't used in math mode, 
 %    and that |\]| is only used in math mode begun with |\]|.
@@ -556,7 +559,7 @@
    \else
       \ifvmode
          \nointerlineskip 
-         \makebox[.6\linewidth]%
+         \makebox[.6\linewidth]{}%
       \fi
       $$%%$$ BRACE MATCH HACK
    \fi
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltmiscen.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltmiscen.dtx
index e6eb56416ed..8b8c986c160 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltmiscen.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltmiscen.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 % \iffalse meta-comment
 %
-% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006
 % The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 % in this file. 
 % 
@@ -8,12 +8,12 @@
 % -------------------------------------------
 % 
 % It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
 % of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 % The latest version of this license is in
 %    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
 % 
 % This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
 % 
@@ -254,13 +254,13 @@
 %    The macro |\@defaultsubs| is initially |\relax| but gets redefined
 %    to produce
 %    a warning if there have been some default font substitutions.
-% \changes{v1.0z}{1995/07/13}{Use \cs{\@defaultsubs} instead of switch}
+% \changes{v1.0z}{1995/07/13}{Use \cs{@defaultsubs} instead of switch}
 %    \begin{macrocode}
      \@defaultsubs
 %    \end{macrocode}
 %    The macro |\@refundefined| is initially |\relax| but gets redefined
 %    to produce a warning if there are undefined refs.
-% \changes{v1.1b}{1995/10/24}{Use \cs{\@refundefined} instead of switch}
+% \changes{v1.1b}{1995/10/24}{Use \cs{@refundefined} instead of switch}
 %    \begin{macrocode}
      \@refundefined
 %    \end{macrocode}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltnews01.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltnews01.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..e326e70bbbf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltnews01.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,152 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file. 
+% 
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+% 
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+%    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
+% 
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+% 
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+% 
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution 
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with 
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+% 
+% \fi
+% Filename: ltnews01.tex
+ 
+% This is issue 1 of LaTeX News.
+
+\documentclass
+%   [type1fonts]
+   {ltnews}
+ 
+\publicationmonth{June}
+\publicationyear{1994}
+\publicationissue{1}
+ 
+\begin{document}
+ 
+\maketitle
+ 
+\section{Welcome to \LaTeXNews}
+ 
+An issue of \emph{\LaTeXNews} will accompany every future release of 
+\LaTeX.  It will tell you about important events, such as major bug 
+fixes, newly available packages, or any other \LaTeX{} news.
+ 
+\section{\LaTeXe---the new \LaTeX{} release}
+ 
+The most important news is the release of \LaTeXe, the new version of
+the \LaTeX{} software.  This version has better support for fonts,
+graphics and colour, and will be actively maintained by the \LaTeX3
+project team.  Upgrades will be issued every six months, in June and 
+December.
+ 
+\section{Why a new \LaTeX?}
+ 
+Over the years many extensions have been developed for \LaTeX. This
+is, of course, a sure sign of its continuing popularity but it has had
+one unfortunate result: incompatible \LaTeX{} formats came into use at
+different sites. Thus, to process documents from various places, a
+site maintainer was forced to keep \LaTeX{} (with and without \NFSS),
+\SLiTeX, \AmSLaTeX, and so on.  In addition, when looking at a source
+file it was not always clear for which format the document was written.
+ 
+To put an end to this unsatisfactory
+situation a new release of \LaTeX{} was produced.
+It brings all such extensions back under a single format and thus
+prevents the proliferation of mutually incompatible dialects of
+\LaTeX~2.09. The new release was available for several months as a
+test version, and the final release of 1~June officially
+replaces the old version.
+ 
+\section{Processing documents with \LaTeXe}
+ 
+Documents written for \LaTeX~2.09 will
+still be read by \LaTeXe.  Any such document is run in
+\emph{\LaTeX~2.09 compatibility mode}.
+ 
+Unfortunately, compatibility mode comes with a price: it can run 
+up to 50\% slower than \LaTeX~2.09 did.  If you want to run your document 
+in the faster \emph{native mode}, you should try replacing the line:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \documentstyle[<options>,<packages>]{<class>}
+\end{verbatim}
+with:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \documentclass[<options>]{<class>}
+   \usepackage{latexsym,<packages>}
+\end{verbatim}
+Unfortunately, this will not always work, because some \LaTeX~2.09 
+packages will only work in \LaTeXe{} compatibility mode.  You should find 
+out if there is a \LaTeXe{} version of the package available.
+ 
+\LaTeXe{} native mode also gives access to the new features of \LaTeXe, 
+described in \emph{\LaTeXe{} for authors}.
+ 
+\section{New packages}
+ 
+\LaTeXe{} has much better support for graphics, colour, fonts, and 
+multi-lingual typesetting.  The following software should be available 
+from the distributor who brought you \LaTeXe:
+
+\begin{citations}
+\item[babel] for typesetting in many languages.
+\item[color] for colour support.
+\item[graphics] for including images.
+\item[mfnfss] for using bitmap fonts.
+\item[psnfss] for using Type~1 fonts.
+\item[tools]  other packages by the \LaTeX3 team.
+\end{citations}
+The packages come with full documentation, and are also described in 
+\emph{\LaTeX: A Document Processing System} or 
+\emph{The \LaTeX{} Companion}.
+ 
+\section{Further information}
+ 
+More information about \LaTeXe{} is to be found in:
+
+\begin{citations}
+\item[\LaTeX: A Document Preparation System]
+   Leslie Lamport, \AW, 2nd ed, 1994.
+\item[The \LaTeX{} Companion]
+   Goossens, Mittelbach and Samarin, \AW, 1994.
+\end{citations}
+The \LaTeX{} distribution comes with documentation on the new features of 
+\LaTeX:
+
+\begin{citations}
+\item[\LaTeXe{} for authors] 
+   describes the new features of \LaTeX{} documents,
+   in the file \verb|usrguide.tex|.
+\item[\LaTeXe{} for class and package writers]
+   describes the new features of \LaTeX{} classes and packages,
+   in the file \verb|clsguide.tex|.
+\item[\LaTeXe{} font selection]
+   describes the new features of \LaTeX{} fonts for
+   class and package writers,
+   in the file \verb|fntguide.tex|.
+\end{citations}
+For more information on \TeX{} and \LaTeX, get in touch with your local 
+\TeX{} Users Group, or the international \TeX{} Users Group, 
+P.~O.~Box~869, Santa~Barbara, CA~93102-0869, USA, Fax:~+1~805~963~8358, 
+EMail:~tug@tug.org.
+ 
+\end{document}
+ 
+
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltnews02.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltnews02.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..06ce2fa9ae5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltnews02.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,154 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file. 
+% 
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+% 
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+%    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
+% 
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+% 
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+% 
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution 
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with 
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+% 
+% \fi
+% Filename: ltnews02.tex
+
+% This is issue 2 of LaTeX News.
+
+\documentclass
+%   [lw35fonts]
+   {ltnews}
+
+\publicationmonth{December}
+\publicationyear{1994}
+\publicationissue{2}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\maketitle
+
+\section{Welcome to \LaTeXNews~2}
+
+An issue of \emph{\LaTeXNews} will accompany every future release of
+\LaTeX.  It will tell you about important events, such as major bug
+fixes, newly available packages, or any other \LaTeX{} news.
+
+\section{December 1994 release of \LaTeX}
+
+December 1994 sees the second release of \LaTeXe.  We are on schedule
+to deliver a release of \LaTeX{} every six months, in December and
+June.
+
+This release has seen quite a lot of activity, which is not too
+surprising as it's only been a year since the first test release of
+\LaTeXe.  We don't expect so much activity in the next six months.
+
+Many of the changes are minor improvements and bug-fixes---see
+\emph{\LaTeXe{} for authors} (\verb|usrguide.tex|), \emph{\LaTeXe{}
+font selection} (\verb|fntguide.tex|) and our change log
+(\verb|changes.txt|) for more details.
+
+However, there are two important new packages available for \LaTeX:
+\texttt{inputenc} and AMS-\LaTeX.
+
+\section{Accented input}
+
+One of the problems with writing non-English documents in \LaTeX{} is
+the accent commands.  Reading documents containing text like
+\verb|na\"\i ve| is frustrating, especially if your keyboard allows
+you to type \texttt{na\"\i ve}.
+
+In the past, \LaTeX{} has not supported input containing accented
+characters such as \texttt{\"\i}, because Windows, Macintosh and Unix
+all have different ways of dealing with accented input, called
+\emph{input encodings}.
+
+However, the \verb|inputenc| package allows you to specify which input
+encoding your document is written with, for example to use the ISO
+Latin-1 encoding, you type:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \usepackage[latin1]{inputenc}
+\end{verbatim}
+At the moment, \verb|inputenc| supports the \verb|ascii| and
+\verb|latin1| input encodings, but more will be added with future
+releases.
+
+The \verb|inputenc| package is
+currently a test release.  The user interface for the full release will
+be upwardly compatible with the test version.
+
+\section{AMS-\LaTeX{}}
+
+ AMS-\LaTeX{} is a set of miscellaneous extensions for \LaTeX{}
+ distributed by the American Mathematical Society. They provide superior
+ information structure and superior printed output for mathematical
+ documents.
+
+ There are far too many features of AMS-\LaTeX{} to list here.  
+ AMS-\LaTeX{} is described in the accompanying documentation,
+ and in \emph{The \LaTeX{} Companion}.
+
+ Version 1.2beta of AMS-\LaTeX{} was released for testing by intrepid
+ users in October 1994.  The full release of AMS-\LaTeX{}~1.2 is expected 
+ in early January 1995.
+ 
+ It will be divided into two bundles:
+ \begin{itemize}
+ 
+ \item the \verb|amsfonts| packages, which give access to
+    hundreds of new mathematical symbols, and new math fonts
+    such as blackboard bold and fraktur.
+    
+ \item the \verb|amsmath| packages, which provide finer control over 
+    mathematical typesetting, such as multi-line subscripts,
+    enhanced theorem and proof environments, 
+    and improved displayed equations, 
+ 
+ \end{itemize}
+ For compatibility with older documents, an \verb|amstex| package will be 
+ provided.
+
+\section{\LaTeX{} on the internet}
+
+\LaTeX{} has its own home page on the World Wide Web, with the URL:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   http://www.tex.ac.uk/CTAN/latex/
+\end{verbatim}
+This page describes \LaTeX{} and the \LaTeX3 project, and contains
+pointers to other \LaTeX{} resources, such as the user guides, the
+\TeX{} Frequently Asked Questions, and the \LaTeX{} bugs database.
+
+The electronic home of anything \TeX-related is the Comprehensive
+\TeX{} Archive Network (CTAN).  This is a network of cooperating ftp
+sites, with over a gigabyte of \TeX{} material:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   ftp://ftp.tex.ac.uk/tex-archive/
+   ftp://ftp.shsu.edu/tex-archive/
+   ftp://ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/
+\end{verbatim}
+For more information, see the \LaTeX{} home page.
+
+\section{Further information}
+
+For more information on \TeX{} and \LaTeX, get in touch with your local
+\TeX{} Users Group, or the international \TeX{} Users Group,
+P.~O.~Box~869, Santa~Barbara, CA~93102-0869, USA, Fax:~+1~805~963~8358,
+EMail:~tug@tug.org.
+
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltnews03.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltnews03.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..64e83f87b1c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltnews03.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,145 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file. 
+% 
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+% 
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+%    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
+% 
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+% 
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+% 
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution 
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with 
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+% 
+% \fi
+% Filename: ltnews03.tex
+
+% This is issue 3 of LaTeX News.
+
+\documentclass
+%   [lw35fonts]
+   {ltnews}
+
+\publicationmonth{June}
+\publicationyear{1995}
+\publicationissue{3}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\maketitle
+
+\section{Welcome to \LaTeXNews~3}
+
+An issue of \emph{\LaTeXNews} will accompany every future release of
+\LaTeX.  It will tell you about important events, such as major bug
+fixes, newly available packages, or any other \LaTeX{} news.
+
+\section{June 1995 release of \LaTeX}
+
+June 1995 sees the third release of \LaTeXe.  We are on schedule
+to deliver a release of \LaTeX{} every six months, in December and
+June.
+
+In the last \emph{\LaTeXNews}, we said ``we don't expect so much
+activity in the next six months,'' which has turned out not to be
+true! 
+
+\section{Additional input encodings}
+
+In the last release of \LaTeX{} we distributed a test version of the
+\texttt{inputenc} package which allows the use of input characters
+other than just a--z and A--Z.  The package has proved to be robust,
+so we are now distributing an expanded version.
+The new release comes with a number of input encodings:
+
+\begin{itemize}
+\item \texttt{ascii} the standard encoding,
+\item \texttt{latin1} the ISO Western European alphabet,
+\item \texttt{latin2} the ISO Eastern European alphabet,
+\item \texttt{cp437} the IBM codepage 437,
+\item \texttt{cp850} the IBM codepage 850, and
+\item \texttt{applemac} the Apple Macintosh encoding.
+\end{itemize}
+These can be used by specifying an option to the \texttt{inputenc}
+package, for example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \usepackage[latin1]{inputenc}
+\end{verbatim}
+The new input encodings are currently being tested, but we don't
+expect any major changes.
+
+\section{\LaTeX\ getting smaller}
+
+In the past releases of \LaTeXe, the amount of memory \LaTeX{}
+requires has increased, but we are pleased to say that this trend has
+been reversed.  We hope that future releases of \LaTeX{} will continue
+to get smaller.
+
+For example, on this document, the December 1994 release used 52,622
+words of memory, and the June 1995 release uses 51,216 words of
+memory, which is a 2.7\% reduction.
+
+We are currently experimenting with other ways of reducing the size of
+\LaTeX.  For example, we are experimenting with an option to remove
+the \texttt{picture} and \texttt{tabbing} environments from the
+\LaTeX{} kernel, and to load them from a file the first time they are
+used.  This should help \LaTeX{} to run on machines with limited
+memory.  See \texttt{autoload.txt} for details.
+
+\section{Distribution and modification}
+
+One topic of discussion that has kept us busy is the distribution and
+modification conditions of \LaTeX.  We are committed to keeping
+\LaTeX{} as free reliable software, and ensuring that (as far as
+possible) \LaTeX{} documents will produce the same results on all
+systems. 
+
+The modification conditions are currently under discussion, and we
+would like to hear from anyone interested.  Please read
+\texttt{modguide.tex} for more information.
+
+\section{AMS-\LaTeX\ full release}
+
+The AMS-\LaTeX\ packages were still in beta test in the December 1994
+release of \LaTeX, and the full release came out in January 1995.
+
+AMS-\LaTeX\ is described in the \emph{User's Guide}
+(\texttt{amsldoc.tex}) and in \emph{The \LaTeX{} Companion}.
+
+\section{PostScript fonts}
+
+There is a new test release of the PSNFSS packages for accessing
+PostScript fonts in \LaTeXe.  This includes an update to all of the
+fonts, to remove many of the underfull and overfull \verb|\hbox|
+warnings, and improve the setting of non-English languages.
+
+The new release of \LaTeX{} removes all of the `hidden' uses of
+Computer Modern mathematics.  For example, the footnote markers used
+to use math mode, so always used Computer Modern digits rather than
+ones from the current text font.  This has now been fixed.
+
+\section{Further information}
+
+For more information on \TeX{} and \LaTeX, get in touch with your local
+\TeX{} Users Group, or the international \TeX{} Users Group,
+P.~O.~Box~869, Santa~Barbara, CA~93102-0869, USA, Fax:~+1~805~963~8358,
+EMail:~tug@tug.org.
+
+The \LaTeX{} home page is \verb|http://www.tex.ac.uk/ctan/latex/|
+and contains links to other WWW resources for \LaTeX.
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltnews04.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltnews04.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..6b8c6db034c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltnews04.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,143 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file. 
+% 
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+% 
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+%    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
+% 
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+% 
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+% 
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution 
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with 
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+% 
+% \fi
+% Filename: ltnews04.tex
+
+% This is issue 4 of LaTeX News.
+
+\documentclass
+%   [lw35fonts]
+   {ltnews}
+
+
+\publicationmonth{December}
+\publicationyear{1995}
+\publicationissue{4}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\maketitle
+
+\section{Welcome to \LaTeXNews~4}
+
+An issue of \emph{\LaTeXNews} will accompany every future release of
+\LaTeX.  It will tell you about important events, such as major bug
+fixes, newly available packages, or any other \LaTeX{} news.
+This issue accompanies the fourth release of \LaTeXe.
+
+
+\section{\LaTeX\ getting smaller}
+
+The last release in June started a trend of \LaTeX\ becoming
+smaller, we are pleased to announce that this has continued with this
+release. In particular the experimental `autoload' version described in
+\texttt{autoload.txt} is much smaller as more parts of \LaTeX\ are
+autoloaded.
+
+\section{New `concurrent' docstrip}
+
+The time taken to `unpack' this release from the documented sources
+should be much reduced (roughly half the time, depending on
+installation conditions). This is due to an improved version of the
+docstrip program that has been contributed by Marcin Woli\'nski.
+This can write up to 16 files at once. The
+previous version could only write one file at a time which meant that
+it was very slow when producing many small files from the same source
+file as the source needed to be re-read for each file written.
+
+\section{New T1 encoded fonts}
+
+This year J\"org Knappen has completed a new release of the `Cork'
+(T1) encoded Computer Modern fonts: the dc fonts release 1.2.
+
+This release of the dc fonts fixes many bugs (including the missing
+\verb|?`| (?`) and \verb|!`| (!`) ligatures) and improves the fonts in
+many other ways. It is strongly recommended that you upgrade as soon as
+possible if currently you are using the old dc fonts, release 1.1 or
+earlier. The new fonts are available from the CTAN archives, in
+\texttt{tex-archive/fonts/dc}. 
+
+The names of the font files are \emph{different}. This does not affect
+\LaTeX\ documents but \emph{does} affect the installation procedure as
+it assumes that you have the \emph{new} fonts, and will write suitable
+`fd' files for those fonts. If you have not yet upgraded your dc fonts
+then, after unpacking the distribution, you \emph{must}
+\verb|latex olddc.ins| to produce `fd' files for the old dc fonts.
+This must be done \emph{before} the format is made. Running the test
+document at \texttt{ltxcheck.tex} the end of the installation will
+inform you if the wrong set of `fd' files has been installed.
+
+Note that this change does not affect the standard `OT1' Computer
+Modern fonts that \LaTeX\ uses by default.
+
+\section{More robust commands}
+
+The commands \verb|\cite| and \verb|\sqrt| are now robust.
+
+Although most commands with optional arguments are fragile, as
+documented, such commands defined using the second optional argument
+of \verb|\newcommand| and its derivatives are now \emph{robust}.
+
+\section{New Interface to building `extension' classes}
+
+The mechanism provided by \verb|\DeclareOption|, \verb|\ProcessOptions|
+and \verb|\LoadClass| has proved to be a powerful and expressive means
+of defining one class in terms of another `base' class. However there
+have been some requests to simplify the declaration of the common case
+where you want the `base' class to be called with \emph{all} the
+options that were specified to the extension class.  This is now
+provided by the new command \verb|\LoadClassWithOptions|. A similar
+command \verb|\RequirePackageWithOptions| is provided for package use.
+More details of this feature are provided in \texttt{clsguide.tex} and
+\texttt{ltclass.dtx}.
+
+\section{More Input Encodings}
+
+The experimental \texttt{inputenc} package allows a more natural style
+of input of accented and other characters.
+
+Three new input encodings are now supported.
+\begin{itemize}
+\item \texttt{ansinew} the Windows ansi encoding, 
+                       as used in Microsoft Windows 3.x.
+\item \texttt{cp437de} a variant of \texttt{cp437}, which uses \ss\
+  rather than $\beta$  in the appropriate slot.
+\item \texttt{next} the encoding used on Next computers. 
+\end{itemize}
+
+\section{Further information}
+
+For more information on \TeX{} and \LaTeX, get in touch with your local
+\TeX{} Users Group, or the international \TeX{} Users Group,
+1850 Union Street, \#1637, San Francisco, CA~94123, USA, 
+Fax:~+1~415~982~8559,
+EMail:~tug@tug.org.
+The \LaTeX{} home page is \verb|http://www.tex.ac.uk/ctan/latex/|
+and contains links to other WWW resources for \LaTeX.
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltnews05.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltnews05.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..f5e1ff37c4f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltnews05.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,158 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file. 
+% 
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+% 
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+%    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
+% 
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+% 
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+% 
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution 
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with 
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+% 
+% \fi
+% Filename: ltnews05.tex
+
+% This is issue 5 of LaTeX News.
+
+\documentclass
+%    [lw35fonts]
+   {ltnews}
+
+% \usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+
+\publicationmonth{June}
+\publicationyear{1996}
+\publicationissue{5}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\maketitle
+
+\section{Welcome to \LaTeXNews~5}
+This issue of \emph{\LaTeXNews} accompanies the fifth release of the
+new standard \LaTeX{}, \LaTeXe.
+
+\section{Extra possibilities for section headings}
+Most \LaTeX\ sectioning commands are defined using
+\verb|\@startsection|.
+For example, the \textsf{article} class defines:
+\begin{small}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\newcommand\section{\@startsection 
+ {section}{1}{0pt}{-3.5ex plus-1ex minus-.2ex}%
+ {2.3ex plus.2ex}{\normalfont\Large\bfseries}}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{small}
+The last argument specifies the style in which the section heading is
+to be typeset.
+
+The new feature added at this release is that at the \emph{end} of
+this argument you may specify a command that \emph{takes an argument}.
+This command will be applied to the section number and heading.
+For example, one could use the \verb|\MakeUppercase| command to
+produce uppercase headings. A package or class file could contain:
+\begin{small}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\renewcommand\section{\@startsection 
+ {section}{1}{0pt}{-3.5ex plus-1ex minus-.2ex}%
+ {2.3ex plus.2ex}{\normalfont\Large\MakeUppercase}}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{small}
+to produce section headings using uppercase medium weight text, rather
+than the bold text used by \textsf{article}. Note that, like the font
+choice, the uppercasing applies only to the actual heading (including
+any automatically generated section number), not to the text as it may
+appear in the running head or table of contents.
+
+\section{The `openany' option in the `book' class}
+The \textsf{openany} option allows chapter and similar openings to
+occur on left hand pages. Previously this option only affected
+\verb|\chapter| and \verb|\backmatter|. It now also affects
+\verb|\part|, \verb|\frontmatter| and \verb|\mainmatter|.
+
+\section{More font (output) encodings}
+The font encoding name \texttt{T3} has been allocated to the encoding
+used in the new 256-character \textsc{IPA} fonts (for the phonetic
+alphabet) produced by Rei Fukui. His package, \textsf{tipa},
+gives access to these fonts and should soon be available.  (The
+encoding named \texttt{OT3} is the 128-character encoding used in the
+\textsc{IPA} fonts produced by Washington State University.)
+
+
+
+\section{More input encodings supported}
+The \textsf{inputenc} package now supports the IBM codepage~852 used
+in Eastern Europe, with the option~\texttt{[cp852]} contributed by
+Petr~Sojka.
+
+Also, the \textsf{inputenc} package now activates most `control codes'
+with \textsc{ascii} values below 32.
+Currently none of the encodings in the standard distribution makes use
+of these positions.
+
+\section{Fixes and improvements}
+The \LaTeX\ kernel has only had minor changes, apart from
+\verb|\@startsection| mentioned above.
+However, some small fixes have been incorporated removing the
+following problems:
+
+\begin{itemize}
+\item
+  In tabular and array, previous versions of \LaTeX\ `lost' the
+  inter-column space from an `\texttt{l}'-column, when that column
+  was completely empty.
+
+\item
+  Previously, the use of the \verb|\nofiles| command could change
+  the \emph{vertical spacing} in a document.\\ A side effect of fixing
+  this is that when \verb|\nofiles| is used, \verb|\label| puts a
+  blank line in the log file.
+
+\item
+  \LaTeX~often loads fonts `on demand'. Previously, this could
+  happen inside the argument of an accent command and this would
+  cause the accent to appear in the wrong place.
+
+\end{itemize}
+
+\section{Changes to the `tools' packages}
+
+\begin{itemize}
+\item
+  The \textsf{longtable} package now uses a modified algorithm,
+  contributed by David Kastrup, to align the `chunks' of a table.
+  It is now unnecessary to edit the document to add
+  \verb|\setlongtables| before the final run of \LaTeX.
+  In certain cases of overlapping \verb|\multicolumn| entries, the new
+  algorithm will produce better column widths than the old (at the
+  price of extra passes through \LaTeX).
+
+\item
+  The \textsf{dcolumn} package now has the extra possibility of
+  specifying the number of digits both \emph{before} and after the
+  `decimal point'. This makes it easy to centre the column of numbers
+  under a wide heading.
+\end{itemize}
+
+\section{New copy of the \LaTeX\ bug database}
+\verb|http://www.tex.ac.uk/ctan/latex/bugs.html| will soon have links
+to a copy of the searchable \LaTeX\ bugs database at Mainz (Germany)
+as well as the original copy at Sussex (England).
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltnews06.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltnews06.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..3c49f4e469f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltnews06.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,149 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file. 
+% 
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+% 
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+%    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
+% 
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+% 
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+% 
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution 
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with 
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+% 
+% \fi
+% Filename: ltnews06.tex
+
+% This is issue 6 of LaTeX News.
+
+\documentclass
+%    [lw35fonts]
+   {ltnews}
+
+% \usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+
+\publicationmonth{December}
+\publicationyear{1996}
+\publicationissue{6}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\maketitle
+
+\section{Welcome to \LaTeXNews~6}
+This issue of \emph{\LaTeXNews} accompanies the sixth release of the
+new standard \LaTeX{}, \LaTeXe.
+
+\section{Mono-case file names}
+Previously \LaTeX\ has used some files with `mixed-case' file names
+such as \texttt{T1cmr.fd} and \texttt{T1enc.def}.
+
+These file names cause problems on some systems (in particular they
+are illegal on the ISO 9660 CDROM format) and so in this release
+all file names have been made lowercase (for example 
+\texttt{t1cmr.fd} and \texttt{t1enc.def}).
+
+This change should \emph{not} affect any document. Within \LaTeX,
+encodings still have the usual uppercase names in uses such as
+\verb|\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}| and \verb|\fontencoding{T1}|.
+\LaTeX\ will automatically convert to the lowercase form while
+constructing the file name.
+\LaTeX\ will input the `fd' file under the old name if it fails to
+find the file with the new name, so existing collections of fd files
+should still work with this new release.
+
+The change \emph{does} affect the configuration files that may be used
+to make the \LaTeX\ format with initex. For example, the file
+\texttt{fonttext.ltx} previously specified \verb|\input{T1cmr.fd}|.
+It now has \verb|\input{t1cmr.fd}|. 
+If you use a local file \texttt{fonttext.cfg}
+you will need to make similar changes, as \verb|\input{T1cmr.fd}|
+will not work as \texttt{T1cmr.fd} is no longer in the distribution.
+
+The files affected by this change all have names of the form
+\verb|*.fd| or \verb|*enc.def|.
+
+\section{Another input encoding}
+Thanks to work by S\o ren Sandmann, the \textsf{inputenc} package now
+supports the IBM codepage~865 used in Scandinavia.
+
+\section{Better user-defined math display environments}
+Suppose that you want to define an environment for displaying text
+that is numbered as an equation.  A straightforward way to do this is
+as follows:
+\begin{verbatim}
+  \newenvironment{texteqn}
+    {\begin{equation}
+       \begin{minipage}{0.9\linewidth}}
+      {\end{minipage}
+     \end{equation}}
+\end{verbatim}
+However, if you have tried this then you will probably have noticed
+that it does not work perfectly when used in the middle of a paragraph
+because an inter-word space appears at the beginning of the first
+line after the environment.
+
+There is now an extra command (with a very long name) available that
+you can use to avoid this problem; it should be inserted as shown here:
+\begin{verbatim}
+  \newenvironment{texteqn}
+    {\begin{equation}
+       \begin{minipage}{0.9\linewidth}}
+      {\end{minipage}
+     \end{equation}
+     \ignorespacesafterend}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\section{Docstrip improvements}
+The \textsf{docstrip} program that is used to unpack the \LaTeX\ 
+sources has undergone further development. The new version should be
+able to process all old `batchfiles' but it allows a simpler syntax in
+new `batchfiles' (no need to define \verb|\def\batchfile{|\ldots).
+
+It also allows `target' directories to be specified when writing
+files.  This directory support is disabled by default unless activated
+in a local \texttt{docstrip.cfg} configuration file.
+See \texttt{docstrip.dtx} for details.
+
+\section{AMS \LaTeX\ update}
+Since the last \LaTeX\ release in June, the American Mathematical
+Society have re-issued the `AMS\LaTeX' classes and packages, fixing
+several reported problems.
+
+\section{Graphics package update}
+The \LaTeX\ color and graphics packages have been updated slightly,
+principally to support more dvi drivers, see the readme file in the
+\textsf{graphics} distribution.
+
+\section{EC Fonts released}
+The first release of the Extended Computer Modern fonts has just been
+made. (In January 1997.)
+
+This release of \LaTeX\ does \emph{not} default to these `ec' fonts
+as its T1 encoded fonts. By default it will
+use the `dc' fonts if the T1 encoding is requested.
+
+As noted in \texttt{install.txt} you may run \TeX\ on the install file
+\texttt{ec.ins} \emph{after} unpacking the base distribution but
+\emph{before} making the \LaTeX\ format. This will produce
+suitable `fd' files making \LaTeX\ (including, for the first time, the
+\textsf{slides} class) use the `ec' fonts as the default T1 encoded
+font set.
+
+
+\end{document}
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltnews07.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltnews07.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..f1965dadaa8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltnews07.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,146 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file. 
+% 
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+% 
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+%    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
+% 
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+% 
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+% 
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution 
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with 
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+% 
+% \fi
+% Filename: ltnews07.tex
+
+% This is issue 7 of LaTeX News.
+
+\documentclass
+%    [lw35fonts]
+   {ltnews}
+
+% \usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+
+\publicationmonth{June}
+\publicationyear{1997}
+\publicationissue{7}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\maketitle
+
+\section{T1 encoded Computer Modern fonts}
+As in the last release the base \LaTeX\ distribution contains
+three different sets of `fd' files for T1 encoded fonts.
+
+In this release the default installation uses \texttt{ec.ins}
+and so installs files suitable for the current `EC fonts'
+distribution. If you have still not updated to the EC fonts and
+are using the earlier test versions, known as DC then you should
+unpack \texttt{newdc.ins} (for DC release 1.2 or later) or
+\texttt{olddc.ins} (for the original releases of the DC fonts).
+This should be done after unpacking \texttt{unpack.ins} but
+before making the format by running ini\TeX{} on \texttt{latex.ltx}.
+There are further details in \texttt{install.txt}.
+
+
+\section{T1 encoded Concrete fonts}
+The Metafont sources for T1 encoded `Concrete' fonts have been
+removed from the \textsf{mfnss} distribution as they were based
+on the now obsolete DC fonts release 1.1. Similarly the
+\textsf{cmextra.ins} install file in the \textsf{base} distribution no
+longer generates fd files for the `Concrete' fonts.
+To use these fonts in either T1 or OT1 encoding it is
+recommended that you obtain Walter Schmidt's \textsf{ccfonts} package
+and fonts from CTAN \texttt{macros/latex/contrib/supported/ccfonts}.
+
+
+\section{Further input encodings}
+Two more \textsf{inputenc} packages have been added: for latin5,
+thanks to H. Turgut Uyar; and for latin3, thanks to J\"org Knappen.
+
+
+\section{Normalising spacing after punctuation}
+The command \verb|\normalsfcodes| was introduced at the last patch
+release. This is normally given the correct definition automatically
+and so need not be explicitly set. It is used to correct a problem,
+reported by Donald Arseneau, that punctuation in page headers has
+always (in all known \TeX\ formats) been potentially incorrect if the
+page break happens while a local setting of the space codes (for
+instance by the command \verb|\frenchspacing|) is in effect. A common
+example of this happening in \LaTeX\ is in the \textsf{verbatim}
+environment.
+
+
+\section{Accessing Bold Math Symbols}
+The \textsf{tools} distribution contains a new package, \textsf{bm},
+which defines a command \verb|\bm| that allows individual bold symbols
+to be accessed within a math expression (in contrast to
+\verb|\boldmath| which makes whole math expressions default to bold
+fonts). It is more general than the existing \textsf{amsbsy} package;
+however, to ease the translation of documents between these two
+packages, \textsf{bm} makes \verb|\boldsymbol| an alias for
+\verb|\bm|.
+
+This package was previously made available from the `contrib' area of
+the CTAN archives, and as part of Y\&Y's \LaTeX\ support for the
+MathTime fonts.
+
+
+\section{Policy on standard classes}
+
+Many of the problem reports we receive concerning the standard classes
+are not concerned with bugs but are suggesting, more or less politely,
+that the design decisions embodied in them are `not optimal' and
+asking us to modify them.
+
+There are several reasons why we have decided not to make such changes
+to these files.
+\begin{itemize}
+\item
+  However misguided, the current behaviour is clearly what was
+  intended when these classes were designed.
+\item
+  It is not good practice to change such aspects of `standard classes'
+  because many people will be relying on them.
+\end{itemize}
+
+We have therefore decided not to even consider making such
+modifications, nor to spend time justifying that decision.  This does
+not mean that we do not agree that there are many deficiencies in the
+design of these classes, but we have many tasks with higher priority
+than continually explaining why the standard classes for \LaTeX{}
+cannot be changed.
+
+We would, of course, welcome the production of better classes, or of
+packages that can be used to enhance these classes.
+
+
+\section{New addresses for TUG}
+For information about joining the \TeX{} Users Group, and about lots
+of other \LaTeX-related matters, please contact
+them at their new address:
+\begin{quote}\small
+   \TeX{} Users Group, P.O. Box 1239,\\
+   Three Rivers, CA~93271-1239, USA\\
+   Fax:~+1~209~561~4584\\
+   E-mail: \texttt{tug@mail.tug.org}\\
+   URL: \texttt{http://www.tug.org/}
+\end{quote}
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltnews08.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltnews08.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..8da220035b9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltnews08.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,154 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file. 
+% 
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+% 
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+%    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
+% 
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+% 
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+% 
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution 
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with 
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+% 
+% \fi
+% Filename: ltnews08.tex
+
+% This is issue 8 of LaTeX News.
+
+\documentclass
+%    [lw35fonts]
+   {ltnews}
+
+% \usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+
+\publicationmonth{December}
+\publicationyear{1997}
+\publicationissue{8}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\maketitle
+
+\section{New supported font encodings}
+
+Two new font encodings are supported as options to the \textsf{fontenc}
+package:
+\begin{description}
+\item [OT4]
+This is a seven-bit encoding designed for Polish. The \LaTeX\ support
+was developed by Mariusz Olko.
+\item [TS1] This is the `Text Companion Encoding'; it contains symbols
+designed to be used in text, as opposed to mathematical formulas, and
+some accents designed for uppercase letters.  It is currently
+supported by the `tc' fonts, which match the T1 encoded `ec' text
+fonts.  A subset of the glyphs in this encoding is supported by
+virtual fonts distributed with the PostScript font metrics on the
+\textsc{ctan} archives. (This is the `8c' encoding in Karl Berry's
+fontname scheme.)  The \textsf{textcomp} package provides access to
+this encoding but here is a warning to current users of that package:
+some of the internal names for the characters have changed.
+\end{description}
+
+
+\section{New input encodings}
+
+These additions to the \textsf{inputenc} package are
+\texttt{decmulti} (the DEC Multinational
+Character Set,  contributed by M.~Y.~Chartoire) 
+and \texttt{cp1250} (an MS-Windows encoding for Central and Eastern
+Europe, contributed by Marcin Woli\'nski).  There is also a
+\texttt{cp1252} encoding that is identical to \texttt{ansinew}.
+
+
+\section{Tools}
+
+The \textsf{calc} package (used in many examples in \emph{The \LaTeX\
+Companion}) has been contributed to this distribution by Kresten Krab
+Thorup and Frank Jensen. This is essentially the same as the version
+that has been available from the \textsc{ctan} archives for some time,
+with one minor change: to use \LaTeX-style error messages.  It enables
+the use of arithmetic expressions within arguments to standard
+\LaTeX{} commands where a length or a counter value is required.  For
+example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+  \setcounter {page} { \value{page} * 2 + 1 }
+  \parbox { 3in - ( 2mm + \textwidth / 9 ) }
+\end{verbatim}
+
+There have also been some improvements to several other packages in
+this collection.  In particular, \textsf{bm} now works correctly with
+constructions such as \verb|\bm{f'}| involving \texttt{'} or other
+characters which use \TeX's special ``\verb|\mathcode"8000|''
+feature.  Also, \textsf{multicol} sets the length \verb|\columnwidth|
+to an appropriate value; this enables it to work with classes that
+support two-column setting, e.g.,~the AMS classes.
+
+
+\section{Graphics}
+
+The special \verb|oztex.def| driver file has been removed, and Oz\TeX\
+support has been merged with dvips, following advice from
+Andrew Trevorrow about Oz\TeX~3.x.
+
+The \textsf{keyval} package has had some internal improvements: to
+use \LaTeX\ format error messages; and to avoid `\verb|#| doubling'.
+This latter change means that the \verb|command| key for the
+\textsf{graphicx} version of \verb|\includegraphics| should now be used
+with one \verb|#| rather than two. For example, \verb|command = `gunzip #1|.
+Fortunately this key is almost never used in practice, so few if any
+documents should be affected by this change.
+
+
+\section{\LaTeX3 experimental programming conventions}
+
+As announced at the \TeX\ Users Group meeting  (Summer 1997), a group of
+highly experimental packages will soon be released to allow experienced\\
+\TeX\ programmers to experiment with, and comment on, a proposed set
+of syntax conventions and basic data-types that might form
+the basis for programming large scale projects in \TeX.
+They will be located in\\
+this CTAN directory:
+\begin{verbatim}  
+  CTAN:macros/latex/packages/expl3
+\end{verbatim}
+The documentation of this material is as follows: individual package
+files provide outline, draft documentation; there is an article that
+gives an overview of the syntax and related concepts; there is a
+\texttt{readme.txt} file containing a brief description of the
+collection.
+
+All aspects of these packages are liable, indeed likely, to change.
+They should not be used at this stage for anything
+that requires a stable system.  However, we do encourage people to
+experiment with these packages, and to send comments on them to the
+\texttt{LaTeX-L} mailing list.
+To subscribe to this list, mail to:
+\begin{verbatim}
+  listserv@urz.uni-heidelberg.de
+\end{verbatim}
+the following one line message:
+\begin{verbatim}
+  subscribe LATEX-L <<first-name>> <<second-name>>
+\end{verbatim}
+
+% Revert to this if gets too full.
+% See \texttt{modguide.tex} for
+% information on how to subscribe to \texttt{LaTeX-L}.
+
+\end{document}
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltnews09.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltnews09.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..aebae8c9353
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltnews09.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,142 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file. 
+% 
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+% 
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+%    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
+% 
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+% 
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+% 
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution 
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with 
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+% 
+% \fi
+% Filename: ltnews09.tex
+
+% This is issue 9 of LaTeX News.
+
+\documentclass
+%    [lw35fonts]
+   {ltnews}[1999/02/23]
+
+%\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+
+\publicationmonth{June}
+\publicationyear{1998}
+\publicationissue{9}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\maketitle
+
+
+\section{New math font encodings}
+
+A joint working group of the \TeX{} Users Group and the \LaTeX3
+Project is developing a new 8-bit math font encoding for \TeX{}.  
+It is designed to overcome several limitations and implementation
+problems of the old math font encodings and to simplify switching
+between different sets of math fonts, much as the \LaTeX{} font
+selection interface has simplified switching between text fonts.
+
+Since the work on this project relies entirely on volunteer work, we
+cannot give a specific release date yet.  However, a prototype
+implementation already exists.  This contains several sets of virtual
+fonts, some \LaTeX{} packages and a kernel module; we hope to
+integrate it into the main \LaTeX{} distribution for the next
+release.
+
+Documents using only standard \LaTeX{} commands for math symbols
+should not be affected by switching to the new math font encodings  
+However, documents, classes or packages making specific assumptions
+about the encoding of math symbol fonts are likely to break.
+
+Further information about the Math Font Group may be found on
+the World Wide Web at \texttt{http://www.tug.org/twg/mfg/}.
+
+
+\section{A new math accent}
+
+A new math accent, \verb|\mathring|, has been added. This is a math mode
+version of the ring accent (\r{}) which is available in text 
+mode with the command \verb|\r|.
+
+\section{Extended \cs{DeclareMathDelimiter}}
+
+The command \verb|\DeclareMathDelimiter| has been extended.
+Normally this command takes six arguments. Previously, when being used
+to declare a character (such as \texttt{[}) as a delimiter, a variant
+form was used with only five arguments. The argument specifying the
+default `math class' was omitted. Now the full six-argument form may be
+used in this case. The extra information is used to implicitly declare
+the character via \verb|\DeclareMathSymbol| for use when the symbol is
+not used with \verb|\left| or \verb|\right|.
+
+The old five-argument form is detected and will work as before.
+
+\newpage
+
+\section{Tools distribution}
+
+The \texttt{multicol} package now supports the production of multiple
+columns without balancing the last page. To get this effect use the
+\texttt{multicols*} environment.
+
+The \texttt{layout} package was partly recoded by Hideo Umeki to
+display page layout effects in a better way.
+
+As suggested by Donald Arseneau, the \texttt{calc} package was extended
+to support the new commands \verb|\widthof{<text>}|,
+\verb|\heightof{<text>}|, and \verb|\depthof{<text>}| within a
+\texttt{calc}-expression.  At the same time we modified a few kernel
+commands so that \texttt{calc}-expressions can now be used in various
+useful places such as the dimension arguments to the \texttt{tabular}
+environment and the \verb|\rule| command. For many other standard
+\LaTeX{} commands this was already possible.
+
+
+\section{Support for Cyrillic encodings}
+ 
+We are very pleased that, after a lengthy period of development, a set
+of fonts, encodings and support files for using \LaTeX\ with Cyrillic
+characters will soon be available.
+ 
+Test versions of the `LH' fonts for these Cyrillic encodings, based on
+the Computer Modern design, are available from CTAN archives in the
+directory \texttt{fonts/cyrillic/lh-test}.  The \LaTeX\ support files
+(by Werner Lemberg and Vladimir Volovich) are also available from CTAN
+archives in\\
+ \texttt{macros/latex/contrib/supported/t2}
+ 
+ 
+\section{Default docstrip header}
+
+Many \LaTeX\ users now distribute packages in documented source form
+using the \textsf{docstrip} system. Docstrip allows a header to be
+placed on generated package files, suitable for giving copyright
+information, or distribution conditions.
+
+We have changed the default version of this header so that it allows
+stripped files to be distributed in ready-to-run installations such as
+the \TeX{}Live CD\@.  If you use the default header for distributing
+your files you should check that the new copyright text is acceptable
+to you.  The file \texttt{docstrip.dtx} explains how to produce your own
+header if you wish to do so.
+
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltnews10.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltnews10.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..07f53aa53a9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltnews10.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,153 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file. 
+% 
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+% 
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+%    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
+% 
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+% 
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+% 
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution 
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with 
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+% 
+% \fi
+% Filename: ltnews10.tex 12/01/1998
+
+% This is issue 10 of LaTeX News.
+
+\documentclass
+%    [lw35fonts]
+   {ltnews}[1999/02/23]
+
+% \usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+
+\publicationmonth{December}
+\publicationyear{1998}
+\publicationissue{10}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\maketitle
+
+
+\section{Five years of \LaTeXe}
+
+Since this is the 10th edition of \LaTeX{} News, the (no longer) New
+Standard \LaTeX{} must have hit the streets almost this long ago.  In
+fact it was only the beta-version that some people got just in time for
+Christmas~1993, and since then there has been a lot of tidying-up and
+smoothing of rough edges (not to mention a few bug fixes!).
+
+Maybe it is time for something more radically different to emerge and
+be hungrily adopted by the world; but don't panic, we shall be
+maintaining what you have now for a long time yet.  Amongst the more
+polite things that have been written about our efforts, we found that this
+quote (somewhat censored to protect the guilty) well reflects some of
+our feelings about working on \LaTeX{} over the years: \textit{the mere
+existence of \LaTeXe{} is a great miracle}.
+
+  
+  \section{Restructuring the \LaTeX{} distribution}
+  
+  Since the (once) `new' standard \LaTeX{} has reached such a venerable
+  age, we are reviewing the way in which the system is presented to the
+  world.
+  
+  An early intention is to define, given the wide variety of good
+  packages now available, what now constitutes a useful installation of
+  \LaTeX{}. We also hope that such a definition will help document
+  portability if it leads to a future in which a \LaTeX{} class
+  designer can reasonably assume that a known list of
+  facilities will be there for all users (so that each class
+  need not supply them).
+  
+  As a first small step towards this definition, we shall replace the
+  \texttt{latex/packages} subdirectory on \ctan{}.
+  This directory was a curious mixture of the important, such as the
+  \LaTeX{} \texttt{tools}, that any self-respecting \LaTeX{}
+  installation ought to have, and the esoteric or experimental.
+
+  The esoterica from \texttt{packages} will be moved to 
+  new locations, as follows:
+  \begin{quote}
+    \texttt{expl3}  to \texttt{latex/exptl/project}\\
+    \texttt{mfnfss} to \texttt{latex/contrib/supported/mfnfss}
+  \end{quote}
+
+  The subdirectory that replaces \texttt{packages} will be called
+  \texttt{latex/required}; all the other sub-directories of
+  \texttt{packages} will be moved there.
+
+\vspace{17pt}
+\pagebreak
+
+ \section{\LaTeX\ Project on the Internet}
+A new \texttt{latex-project.org} domain has been registered.
+The web site is not yet fully functional but the old \LaTeX\ pages from 
+\ctan\ are available at \texttt{http://www.latex-project.org/} and the
+\LaTeX\ bug reporting address has been changed to
+\texttt{latex-bugs@latex-project.org}.
+
+  \section{Restructuring the \LaTeX{} package licenses}
+
+Several people have requested an easy mechanism for the distribution
+of \LaTeX\ packages and other software ``under the same conditions as
+\LaTeX''.  The old \texttt{legal.txt} file was unsuitable as a general
+licence as it referred to specific \LaTeX\ authors, and to specific
+files.
+
+Therefore, in this release \texttt{legal.txt} contains just the
+copyright notice and a reference to the new \emph{\LaTeX\ Project
+Public License} (LPPL) for the distribution and modification
+conditions. The \texttt{tools}, \texttt{graphics}, and \texttt{mfnfss}
+packages also now refer to this license in their distribution notices.
+
+  \section{Support for Cyrillic encodings}
+
+Basic Cyrillic support, as announced in \LaTeX{} News~9, is now
+finally an official part of \LaTeX{}.  It includes support for the
+following standard Cyrillic font encodings (this list may
+grow):~\mbox{\texttt{T2A T2B T2C X2}}.
+
+It also includes various Cyrillic input encodings (20~in total,
+including commonly used variants and Mongolian Cyrillic
+encodings). This provides platform independent and
+sophisticated basic support for high-quality typesetting in various
+Cyrillic-based languages.
+ 
+For further information see the file \texttt{cyrguide.tex}.
+
+\section{Tools distribution}
+
+The \texttt{varioref} package has been extended to support textual
+page references to a range of objects: e.g.,~if \texttt{eq-first}
+and \texttt{eq-last} are the label names for the first and last
+equation in a sequence, then you can now write
+\begin{verbatim}
+  see~\vrefrange{eq-first}{eq-last}
+\end{verbatim}
+This results in different text depending on whether both
+labels fall on the same page.
+
+Some additional user commands, as well as building-blocks for writing
+private extensions, are described in the accompanying documentation.
+
+
+
+\end{document}
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltnews11.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltnews11.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..67af304c8ee
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltnews11.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,141 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file. 
+% 
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+% 
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+%    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
+% 
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+% 
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+% 
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution 
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with 
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+% 
+% \fi
+% Filename: ltnews11.tex 01/06/1999
+% This is issue 11 of LaTeX News.
+
+\documentclass
+%    [lw35fonts]     % uncomment this line to get Times
+   {ltnews}
+
+% \usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+
+\publicationmonth{June}
+\publicationyear{1999}
+\publicationissue{11}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\maketitle
+
+\section{Back in sync}
+
+The last release of \LaTeX{} was delayed even longer than you have
+come to expect.  We hope that it proved worth waiting for.  It
+required a major integration of the code from several people and,
+independently, the introduction of the LPPL (see \LaTeX{} News~10) plus
+several related changes to our internal systems.  It therefore seemed
+sensible to wait until everything was complete rather than do things
+in too much hurry.
+
+This seem to have been a successful strategy as
+the recent patch release was related to an isolated change that was
+done many months previously.  If this release does not appear a lot
+closer to its nominal date then \ldots~well, you will not be reading
+this sentence!
+
+\section{Yearly release cycles}
+
+With the year 2000 rapidly approaching, we intend to switch to a
+release frequency of just one per year (with patches if necessary) for
+the core of \LaTeXe{}. These days the system is sufficiently stable
+that the original update policy is costing everybody more time than is
+now warranted.
+
+\section{LPPL update}
+
+Thanks to extensive and valuable input from Matt Swift
+(\email{swift@alum.mit.edu}) we now have a clearer and more detailed
+form of the \LaTeX{} Project Public Licence.  This release contains
+both the original version (in \file{lppl-1-0.txt}) and the updated
+version, LPPL~1.1.
+
+\section{The future of Sli\TeX{}}
+
+We still get a very small trickle of reports about this part of the
+system (if you are no longer able to recall \LaTeX~2.09 then you will
+know it as the \class{slides} class).  We have not classified them (in
+our minds at least) as bugs since we have always known that there are
+many problems with this class.  It is clear to us that the only
+sensible action would be to redesign the system completely; in
+particular, to remove much of its complexity whose purpose is to
+support 10-year-old overlay technology.  However, this would take a
+lot too much time and would be completely out of proportion to its
+current usage.
+
+We are therefore planning to make the \class{slides} class
+unsupported in the sense that any problem related to the use of
+invisible fonts is considered to be a feature (The \LaTeXe{} manual by
+Leslie Lamport doesn't even describe this part of the class any more).
+Of course, if it still has its enthusiasts then we are happy to cede
+it to their loving care (somewhat like a preserved steam locomotive,
+in some parts of the world).
+
+\section{Fontenc package peculiarities}
+
+The \verb=\usepackage= interface normally ensures that a package is
+loaded only once.  The \pkg{fontenc} package has become an
+exception to this rule: it can be loaded several times using different
+options, e.g., allowing the user to add a font encoding in the
+preamble. This comes at a price for package writers: the low-level
+commands (see \file{ltclass.dtx}) used to check if a package was
+loaded, and with which options, do not work for the \pkg{fontenc}
+package.
+
+\section{New math font encodings}
+    
+As we announced in \LaTeX{} News~9, a joint working group of the
+\TeX{} Users Group and the \LaTeX3 Project has developed a new
+\mbox{8-bit} math font encoding for \TeX{}.
+The reason why this work is not yet released is because of other
+exciting developments in the world of math fonts and math characters.
+It is obviously wise to ensure that the encoding work is fully
+integrated with the available fonts.
+
+Those interested are reminded that further information about the Math
+Font Group may be found on the World Wide Web at:\\
+\url{http://www.tug.org/twg/mfg/}.
+
+\section{Tools distribution}
+
+The \pkg{multicol} package has now got a small but useful extension
+which allows you to force a column break where this is really
+necessary.  This is done with the command \verb=\columnbreak=, which
+can be used like \verb=\pagebreak= (e.g.,~within paragraphs) except
+that it cannot have an optional argument and thus it always forces a
+new column.
+
+\section{Coming soon}
+
+Major work on a new class file structure to support flexible
+designs is well under way; some of this work will be presented at the
+TUG'99 conference in Vancouver, Canada.  With a bit of luck much of
+this work could be ready for integration into the next release---so
+watch this space!
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltnews12.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltnews12.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..8b99d48f467
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltnews12.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,154 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file. 
+% 
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+% 
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+%    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
+% 
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+% 
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+% 
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution 
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with 
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+% 
+% \fi
+% Filename: ltnews12.tex 
+%
+% This is issue 12 of LaTeX News.
+
+\documentclass
+%    [lw35fonts]     % uncomment this line to get Times
+   {ltnews}[1999/12/01]
+
+% \usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+
+\publicationmonth{December}
+\publicationyear{1999}
+\publicationissue{12}
+
+% Should go to .cls:
+\newcommand{\acro}[1]{\textsc{\MakeLowercase{#1}}}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\maketitle
+
+\section{LPPL update}
+
+Since the release of the \LaTeX{} Project Public Licence version~1.1,
+we have received a small number of queries which resulted in some
+minor changes to improve the wording or explain the intentions better.
+As a consequence this release now contains LPPL~1.2 in the file
+\file{lppl.txt} and the previous versions as \file{lppl-1-0.txt} and
+\file{lppl-1-1.txt}.
+
+\section{fixltx2e package}
+
+    This package provides fixes to \LaTeXe{} which are desirable but
+    cannot be integrated into the \LaTeXe{} kernel directly as they
+    would produce a version incompatible to earlier releases (either
+    in formatting or functionality).
+
+    By having these fixes in the form of a package, users can benefit
+    from them without the danger that their documents will fail, or
+    produce unexpected results, at other sites; this works because a
+    document will contain a clear indication (the \verb=\usepackage=
+    line, preferably with a required date) that at least some of these
+    fixes are required to format it.
+
+\section{Outcome of TUG '99 (Vancouver)}
+
+The slides from the \acro{TUG}'99 presentation we gave on \emph{a
+new interface for \LaTeX\ class designers} are available from the
+\LaTeX\ Project website; look for the file \verb|tug99.pdf| at:
+\begin{quote}
+   \url{http://www.latex-project.org/talks/}
+\end{quote}
+
+Please note that this document was intended only to be informal
+``speaker's notes'' for our own use. We decided to make them available (the
+speaker's notes as well as the slides that were presented) because several
+people requested copies after the talk. However, they are \emph{not} in
+a polished copy-edited form and are not intended for publication.
+
+Prototype implementations of parts of this interface are now available from:
+\begin{quote}
+   \url{http://www.latex-project.org/code/experimental/}
+\end{quote}
+
+We are continuing to add new material at this location so as to
+stimulate further discussion of the underlying concepts. As of
+December 1, 1999
+the following parts can be downloaded.
+\begin{description}
+
+ \item[xparse] Prototype implementation of the interface for declaring
+  document command syntax. See the \texttt{.dtx} files for
+  documentation.
+
+ \item[template] Prototype implementation of the template interface
+  (needs parts of \texttt{xparse}).
+
+  The file \texttt{template.dtx} in that directory has a large section
+  of documentation at the front describing the commands in the
+  interface and giving a `worked example' building up some templates
+  for caption formatting.
+
+ \item[xcontents] Interface description for table of contents data (no
+  code yet).  Coding examples have been thoroughly discussed on the
+  \texttt{latex-l} list.
+
+ \item[xfootnote] Working examples for generating footnotes,
+  etc. Needs \texttt{xparse} and \texttt{template}.
+
+ \end{description}
+All examples are organised in subdirectories and additionally
+ available as \texttt{gzip} \texttt{tar} files.
+
+ Please remember
+that this material is intended only for experimentation and comments;
+thus any aspect of it, e.g., the user interface or the functionality,
+may change and, in fact, is very likely to change.
+For this reason it is explicitly forbidden to place this material on
+\acro{CD-ROM} distributions or public servers.
+
+These concepts, as well as their implementation, are under discussion
+on the list \texttt{LATEX-L}. You can join this list, which is
+intended solely for discussing ideas and concepts for future versions
+of \LaTeX, by sending mail to
+%\begin{quote}
+  \email{listserv@URZ.UNI-HEIDELBERG.DE} 
+%\end{quote}
+containing the line
+  \begin{quote}
+    \texttt{SUBSCRIBE LATEX-L} \textit{Your Name}
+  \end{quote}
+
+This list is archived and, after subscription, you can retrieve older
+posts to it by sending mail to the above address, containing a command
+such as:
+\begin{quote}
+\texttt{GET LATEX-L LOGyymm}
+\end{quote}
+where \texttt{yy}=Year and \texttt{mm}=Month, e.g.
+\begin{quote}
+\texttt{GET LATEX-L LOG9910}
+\end{quote}
+for all messages sent in October 1999.
+
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltnews13.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltnews13.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..dcab9b3f454
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltnews13.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,201 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file. 
+% 
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+% 
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+%    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
+% 
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+% 
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+% 
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution 
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with 
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+% 
+% \fi
+% Filename: ltnews13.tex 
+%
+% This is issue 13 of LaTeX News.
+
+\documentclass
+%    [lw35fonts]     % uncomment this line to get Palatino
+   {ltnews}[2000/07/21]
+
+% \usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+
+\publicationmonth{June}  
+\publicationyear{2000}
+\publicationissue{13}
+
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\maketitle
+
+\raisefirstsection 
+\section{Yearly release cycle}
+
+We announced in \textit{\LaTeX{} News~11} that we intended to switch
+to a 12-monthly release schedule.  With the present (June~2000)
+release, this switch is being made: thus the next release of \LaTeX{}
+will be dated June~2001.  We shall of course continue, as in the past,
+to release patches as needed to fix significant bugs.
+
+
+\section{PSNFSS: \small Quote of the Month}
+
+\begin{quote}
+  You should say in the \LaTeX{} News that Walter Schmidt has taken over
+  \PSNFSS{} from me. It gives me a certain pleasure to be able to draw a
+  line under that part of my life\ldots
+
+  \begin{latexonly}
+    \vspace{-\baselineskip}
+  \end{latexonly}
+
+  \begin{flushright}
+    Sebastian Rahtz
+  \end{flushright}
+\end{quote}
+
+\begin{latexonly}
+  \vspace{-\baselineskip} 
+\end{latexonly}
+
+\noindent
+The \PSNFSS{} material, which supports the use\latex{\\}
+of common PostScript fonts with \LaTeX{}, has been thoroughly updated.
+Most noticeably, the \package{mathpple} package, which used to be
+distributed separately, is now part of the basic \PSNFSS{} bundle;
+this package provides mathematical typesetting with the Palatino
+typeface family.  In addition, numerous bugs and flaws have been fixed
+and the distribution has been `cleaned up'.  The file
+\file{changes.txt} contains a detailed list of these changes.
+\latex{\looseness=-1}   %%!!!!! It worked!
+
+The documentation (in \file{psnfss2e.pdf}) has been completely
+rewritten to provide a comprehensive introduction to the use
+of PostScript fonts. 
+
+Notice that the new \PSNFSS{} needs updated files for font metrics,
+virtual fonts and font definitions.  If you received the new
+version~(8.1) as part of a complete \TeX{} system then these new font
+files should also have been installed.  However, if you intend to
+install or update \PSNFSS{} yourself, please read the instructions in
+the file \file{00readme.txt} of the new \PSNFSS{} distribution.
+
+Support for commercial PostScript fonts, such as
+Lucida~Bright, has been removed from the basic distribution;
+it is now available from \ctan{}:
+\begin{latexonly}
+  \file{\ctanhttp macros/latex/\\
+    contrib/supported/psnfssx}.
+\end{latexonly}
+\begin{htmlonly}
+  \url{http://www.tex.ac.uk/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/supported/psnfssx}.
+\end{htmlonly}
+
+\section{New AMS-\LaTeX{}}
+
+Version 2.0 of AMS-\LaTeX{} was released on December 1, 1999. It can
+be obtained via \url{ftp://ftp.ams.org/pub/tex/} or
+\url{http://www.ams.org/tex/amslatex.html}, as well from \ctan{}:
+\begin{latexonly}
+  \file{\ctanhttp macros/latex/\\
+    required/amslatex}.
+\end{latexonly}
+\begin{htmlonly}
+  \url{http://www.tex.ac.uk/tex-archive/macros/latex/required/amslatex}.
+\end{htmlonly}
+
+This release consists chiefly of bug fixes and consolidation of the
+existing features. The division of AMS-\LaTeX{} into two main parts
+(the math packages;\latex{\\}
+the AMS document classes) has been made more pronounced.
+The files \file{diffs-m.txt}, \file{diffs-c.txt},
+\file{amsmath.faq}, and \file{amsclass.faq} describe the\latex{\\}
+changes and address some common questions.
+
+The primary documentation files remain \file{amsldoc.tex}, for the
+\package{amsmath} package, and \file{instr-l.tex}, for the AMS
+document classes.\latex{\\}
+The documentation for the \package{amsthm} package,\latex{\\}
+however, has been moved from \file{amsldoc.tex}\latex{\\}
+to a separate document \file{amsthdoc.tex}.
+
+\begin{latexonly}
+  \vfill
+\end{latexonly}
+
+\section{New input encoding \package{latin4}}
+
+The package \package{inputenc} has, thanks to Hana Skoumalov\'a,
+been extended to cover the \package{latin4} input encoding; this
+covers Baltic and Scandinavian languages as well as Greenland
+Inuit and Lappish.
+
+\begin{latexonly}
+  \vfill
+\end{latexonly}
+
+\section{New experimental code}
+
+In \textit{\LaTeX{} News~12} we announced some ongoing work towards a
+`Designer Interface for \LaTeX' and we presented some early results
+thereof.  Since then, at Gutenberg\,2000 in Toulouse and TUG\,2000 in
+Oxford, we described a new output routine and an improved method of
+handling vertical mode material between paragraphs.  In combination
+these support higher quality \emph{automated}\footnote
+                             {The stress here is on automated!}
+page-breaking and page make-up\latex{\\}
+for complex pages---the best yet achieved with \TeX{}!
+
+A paper describing the new output routine is 
+\begin{latexonly}
+  at\\
+  \file{http://www.latex-project.org/papers/xo-pfloat.pdf%
+   \hspace*{-16pt}}\\
+\end{latexonly}
+\begin{htmlonly}
+  at \url{http://www.latex-project.org/papers/xo-pfloat.pdf}. 
+\end{htmlonly}
+All code examples and documentation are available 
+\begin{latexonly}
+  at\\
+   \file{http://www.latex-project.org/code/experimental/%
+   \latex{\hspace*{-5pt}}}.\\[3pt]
+\end{latexonly}
+\begin{htmlonly}
+  at \url{http://www.latex-project.org/code/experimental/}.
+
+\end{htmlonly}
+This directory has been extended to contain
+\begin{description}
+ \item[galley] Prototype implementation of the interface\latex{\\}
+   for manipulating vertical material in galleys.
+ \item[xinitials] Prototype implementation of the interface\latex{\\}
+   for paragraph initials (needs the \texttt{galley} package.
+ \item[xtheorem] Contributed example using the \texttt{template}
+   package to provide a designer interface for theorem environments.
+ \item[xoutput] A prototype implementation of the new output routine
+   as described in the \texttt{xo-pfloat.pdf} paper. Expected
+   availability: at or shortly after\latex{\\}
+   the TUG\,2000 conference.
+\end{description}
+
+\end{document}
+
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltnews14.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltnews14.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..f9466c0275b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltnews14.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,169 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file. 
+% 
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+% 
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+%    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
+% 
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+% 
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+% 
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution 
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with 
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+% 
+% \fi
+% Filename: ltnews14.tex 
+% 
+% This is issue 14 of LaTeX News.
+
+\documentclass
+%    [lw35fonts]     % uncomment this line to get Palatino
+   {ltnews}[2001/07/12]
+
+% \usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+
+\publicationmonth{June}  
+\publicationyear{2001}
+\publicationissue{14}
+
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\maketitle
+
+\raisefirstsection
+\section{Future releases}
+
+We are currently exploring how to best support the very large
+community of individuals, organisations and enterprises that depend on
+the robustness and availability of the current standard \LaTeX{}
+distribution.  The results of this may lead to some changes in the
+regular release schedule and the handling of bug reports during the
+next year.
+
+\section{New release of \textsf{Babel} (required)}
+
+Earlier this year a new release of \textsf{Babel} (3.7) became
+available. You can read about its new features in
+\begin{latexonly}
+  \file{http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/}\\
+  \hspace*{4em}\file{latex/required/babel/announce.txt}
+\end{latexonly}
+\begin{htmlonly}
+  \url{http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/required/babel/announce.txt}
+\end{htmlonly}
+
+One of the bugs that got fixed in this release deals with how labels
+are handled by \LaTeX{}.  Because this part of the kernel is modified
+by \textsf{babel}, the relevant changes need to be coordinated.
+Therefore to use \textsf{Babel} with this release of \LaTeX{} you will
+need to update your version of \textsf{babel} to at least 3.7.
+
+\section{New input encoding \package{latin9}}
+
+The package \package{inputenc} has, thanks to Karsten Tinnefeld, been
+extended to cover the \package{latin9} input encoding.  The
+ISO-Latin~9 encoding is a useful modern replacement for ISO-Latin~1
+that contains a few characters needed for French and Finnish. Of wider
+interest, it also contains the euro currency sign; this could be the
+killer argument for many 8-bit texts to use Latin-9 in the future.
+
+According to a Linux manpage, ISO~Latin-9 supports Albanian, Basque,
+Breton, Catalan, Danish, Dutch, English, Estonian, Faroese, Finnish,
+French, Frisian, Galician, German, Greenlandic, Icelandic, Irish
+Gaelic, Italian, Latin, Luxemburgish, Norwegian, Portuguese,
+Rhaeto-Romanic, Scottish Gaelic, Spanish and Swedish.\\
+The characters added in \package{latin9} are (in \LaTeX{} notation):\\
+\begin{small}
+\verb| \texteuro  \v S  \v s  \v Z  \v z  \OE  \oe  \" Y |
+\end{small}\\
+They displace the following characters from \package{latin1}:\\
+\begin{small}
+\verb| \textcurrency  \textbrokenbar  \"{}   \'{}   \c{} |\\
+\verb| \textonequarter  \textonehalf  \textthreequarters |
+\end{small}
+
+
+\section{New tools}
+
+The new package \package{trace} provides many commands to control
+\LaTeX{}'s tracing and debugging output, including the excellent new
+information available with \eTeX{} such as the extremely useful
+tracing of local assignments.  You will find it in the tools
+distribution.
+
+It offers the command \verb|\traceon|, which is similar to
+\verb|\tracingall| but suppresses uninteresting stuff such as font
+loading by NFSS (which can go on for pages if you are unlucky).  It
+also offers \verb|\traceoff| to \ldots\ guess what!  Full details are
+in the documented source file, \file{trace.dtx}.
+
+In the base \package{ifthen} package we have added
+the uppercase synonyms \verb|\NOT| \verb|\AND| and \verb|\OR|.
+
+\section{New experimental code}
+
+In \textit{\LaTeX{} News~12} we announced some ongoing work towards a
+`Designer Interface for \LaTeX' and we presented some early results
+thereof.  Since then, at Gutenberg\,2000 in Toulouse and TUG\,2000 in
+Oxford, we described a new output routine and an improved method of
+handling vertical mode material between paragraphs.  In combination
+these support higher quality \emph{automated}\footnote
+                             {The stress here is on automated!}
+page-breaking and page make-up\latex{\\}
+for complex pages---the best yet achieved with \TeX{}!
+
+More recently we have added material to handle the complex front
+matter requirements of journal articles; this was presented at 
+Gutenberg\,2001 in Metz.
+
+A paper describing the new output routine is 
+\begin{latexonly}
+  at\\
+\begin{small}
+  \file{http://www.latex-project.org/papers/xo-pfloat.pdf}\\
+\end{small}
+\end{latexonly}
+\begin{htmlonly}
+  at \url{http://www.latex-project.org/papers/xo-pfloat.pdf}. 
+\end{htmlonly}
+All code examples and documentation are available 
+\begin{latexonly}
+  at\\
+\begin{small}
+   \file{http://www.latex-project.org/code/experimental}
+\end{small}
+\end{latexonly}
+\begin{htmlonly}
+  at \url{http://www.latex-project.org/code/experimental/}.
+\end{htmlonly}
+
+This directory has been extended to contain the following.
+\begin{description}
+ \item[galley] Prototype implementation of the interface\latex{\\}
+   for manipulating vertical material in galleys.
+ \item[xinitials] Prototype implementation of the interface\latex{\\}
+   for paragraph initials (needs the \texttt{galley} package).
+ \item[xtheorem] Contributed example using the \texttt{template}
+   package to provide a designer interface for theorem environments.
+ \item[xor] A prototype implementation of the new output routine
+   as described in the \texttt{xo-pfloat.pdf} paper.
+ \item[xfrontm] A prototype version of
+   the new font matter interface.
+\end{description}
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltnews15.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltnews15.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..cfde1a4e6d3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltnews15.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,169 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file. 
+% 
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+% 
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+%    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
+% 
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+% 
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+% 
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution 
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with 
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+% 
+% \fi
+% Filename: ltnews15.tex 
+% 
+% This is issue 15 of LaTeX News.
+
+\documentclass
+%    [lw35fonts]     % uncomment this line to get Palatino
+   {ltnews}[2004/02/28]
+
+% \usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+
+\publicationmonth{December}  
+\publicationyear{2003}
+\publicationissue{15}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\maketitle
+
+%\raisefirstsection
+
+\section{Anniversary release}
+
+Yes, it's now 10~years since the first release in this series and, for
+Knuthists, this release also contains \textit{Issue 16}\,!
+
+Meanwhile this \textit{Issue~15} describes the major new features in
+the current release whilst \textit{Issue~16} looks\newline
+a little way into the future of \LaTeX{}.
+
+
+\section{LPPL -- new version}
+
+Most importantly, there is now a new version, 1.3, of the \LaTeX{}
+Project Public Licence.   Many of you will\newline
+be thrilled to know that, following the exchange of over 1600 e-mail
+messages dissecting various aspects of its philosophy such as `how
+many angels can appear in the name of a file before it becomes
+non-free', this version\newline
+is now officially a DFSG (Debian Free Software Guidelines) approved license.
+The discussions start at
+\url{http://lists.debian.org/debian-legal/2002/debian-legal-200207/threads.html}
+with high traffic throughout August to October~2002 and further
+heated discussions starting in April~2003 and concluding
+around June at
+\url{http://lists.debian.org/debian-legal/2003/debian-legal-200306/msg00206.html}.
+
+The important features of the new version are useful clarifications in
+the wording, and revised procedures\newline
+for making a change to the Current Maintainer of a package.  Special
+thanks to all those people from\newline Debian Legal who worked
+constructively with us\newline
+on this onerous task, especially but not exclusively\newline
+Jeff Licquia and Branden Robinson.
+
+
+\section{Small updates to varioref}
+
+The English has been corrected in \verb|\reftextbefore|
+(an incompatible change).  There are other extensions
+such as \verb|\labelformat|, \verb|\Ref|, \verb|\Vref| and \verb|\vpagerefnum|. 
+Some Dutch text has also been changed and two\newline
+new options added: \package{slovak} and \package{slovene}.
+
+
+\section{New and more robust commands}
+
+Many of the math mode commands for compound symbols have been made
+robust and a new robust command has been added: \verb|\nobreakdashes|.
+This last is a low-level command, borrowed from the \package{amsmath}
+package, for use only before hyphens or dashes.  It prevents the line
+break that is normally allowed\newline
+after the following sequence of dashes.
+
+
+\section{Fixing font sizes}
+
+The new \package{fix-cm} package, by Walter Schmidt, changes the CM font
+definition (\texttt{.fd}) files so that similar design sizes are used
+in both the \texttt{OT1} and \texttt{T1} encodings.
+
+
+\section{Font encodings}
+
+A number of options have been added to the \package{textcomp} package,
+enabling only available glyphs to be used.
+Also, the `NFSS font families' are now divided into five different groups
+according to the subset of glyphs each provides from the full
+collection of symbols in the TS1 encoding. 
+Given sufficient information about a font family 
+\package{textcomp} will use this in order to limit the\newline
+typesetting to those glyphs that are available.
+
+Use of this mechanism has also enhanced \verb|\oldstylenums|
+to use the current font if possible.
+
+
+\section{Displaying font tables}
+
+With the \package{nfssfont} package you can now
+specify the font to display by giving its `NFSS classification',
+rather than needing to know its external font file's name.
+It is also now possible to generate large collections of font
+tables in batch mode by providing a suitable input file.
+
+
+\section{New input encodings}
+
+The \package{inputenc} package has been extended as follows: 
+\package{macce} input encoding
+(Apple Central European),
+thanks to Radek Tryc and Marcin Wolinski; \package{cp1257}\newline
+for Baltic languages; \package{latin10},
+thanks to Ionel Ciob\^{i}c\u{a}.\newline
+The euro symbol has by
+now been added to several encodings:
+\package{ansinew}, \package{cp1250}
+and \package{cp1252} (which also\newline
+has another addition), whilst \package{cp858}
+adds it to \package{cp850}.
+
+
+\section{Unicode input}
+
+Partial, experimental support for text files that use the Unicode
+encoding form UTF-8 is now provided by the option \package{utf8} for
+the \package{inputenc} package.
+
+The only Unicode text file characters supported by the current version
+are those based on the most common inputs for glyphs from the small
+collection\newline
+of standard \LaTeX{} Latin encodings.
+
+
+\section{And finally \ldots\ pict2e}
+
+The old, non-functional version of this package has been removed 
+ as there is now a fully working version from Hubert G\"a{\ss}lein
+ and Rolf Niepraschk.  It is described
+ in \textit{The \LaTeX{} Manual}.
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltnews16.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltnews16.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..1f1ee5f63e2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltnews16.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,161 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file. 
+% 
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+% 
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+%    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
+% 
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+% 
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+% 
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution 
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with 
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+% 
+% \fi
+% Filename: ltnews16.tex 
+% 
+% This is issue 16 of LaTeX News.
+
+\documentclass
+%    [lw35fonts]     % uncomment this line to get Palatino
+   {ltnews}[2004/02/28]
+
+% \usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+
+\publicationmonth{December}  
+\publicationyear{2003}
+\publicationissue{16}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\maketitle
+
+%\raisefirstsection
+
+\section{Anniversary news}
+
+This anniversary \textit{Issue~16} takes a brief look into the future work of
+the \LaTeX3 Project Team, both short and and longer range.  Please let
+us know if you want %\newline
+to get involved with us in any of this work (see below).
+
+An overview of the 10th Anniversary Release, dated 2003/12/01, is
+can be found in \textit{Issue~15}.
+
+
+\section{TLC2: The \LaTeX{} Companion -- 2nd edition!}
+
+Since you are reading this newsletter, there is a good chance that
+you, or a friend, has already bought this encyclopedic volume: the
+incomparable Second\newline
+Edition of this work that is every \LaTeX{}ie's\newline
+ultimate lucky charm.
+
+If by some chance you have not yet purchased your own copy then get
+into training, get shopping, and get flexing your muscles (both
+physical---it's $1100+$~pages,\newline
+and intellectual) by using it to discover
+masses of invaluable `insider information' about:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item the latest release of Standard \LaTeX{};
+\item over~200~extension packages; 
+\item plus related software and systems.
+\end{itemize}
+For more information on this all new (??\ldots OK,\newline
+not \emph{all}, but over 90\%!!),
+all accurate (we hope!)\newline
+10th~Anniversary Edition, check out\newline 
+ \mbox{\url{http://www.awprofessional.com/titles/0201362996}}.
+  
+  
+\section{Future maintenance}
+
+We are currently exploring how best to support the very large and
+rapidly growing community of individuals, organisations and
+enterprises that depend on the robustness and availability of the
+current standard \LaTeX{} distribution.  Although we remain firmly\newline
+resolved not to make changes in the base distribution (the kernel) of
+Standard \LaTeX{}, there is still much that needs doing to maintain
+its reliability and utility and to keep up the necessary level of
+communication with users and supporters.  Also, as with all advanced
+software systems, bugs are still turning up occasionally so %\newline
+some fixes are still essential.
+
+One major impediment to providing adequate service levels in this area
+is, of course, the difficulties inherent in obtaining the time and
+commitment of skilled minds---hence the appeal above to anyone
+interested %\newline
+in getting involved.
+
+
+\section{LPPL certification}
+
+There are still some outstanding diplomatic tasks around the
+\LaTeX{} Project Public Licence: these include 
+e.g.,~getting it `OSF certified' and ensuring that it gains
+more support and wider use, even in the FSF world\newline
+where it has long been tolerated.
+
+
+\section{Use of \eTeX/pdf\TeX}
+
+We expect that within the next two years, releases of \LaTeX{} will
+change modestly in order to run best under an extended \TeX{} engine
+that contains the \eTeX{} primitives, e.g., \eTeX{} or pdf\TeX{}.
+The details of this possible upgrade need further work so we are not
+making a definite announcement yet.
+
+Although the current release does not \emph{require} \eTeX{} features,
+we certainly recommend using an extended \TeX{}, especially if you
+need to debug macros. 
+
+
+\section{End of `autoload' support}
+
+As computer systems generally grow in capacity, requirements change
+and so we believe that the \package{autoload} variant of \LaTeX{} is
+no longer required.  Thus, although the code remains it is no longer
+supported.  We hope this does not cause any problems.
+
+
+\section{New models, new code}
+
+In the period 1999--2001 we published many results of our work over
+the previous decade on the development of new concepts and models
+for automated typesetting based on \TeX{} as the underlying platform.
+These can be found at \url{http://www.latex-project.org/papers/}
+and
+\mbox{\url{http://www.latex-project.org/code/experimental/}}.
+
+Since then a very large proportion of the The Team's efforts have been
+diverted to provide the core author team for TLC2, which provides
+over 1000 pages of carefully researched and tested documentation of
+many aspects of the vast world of \LaTeX{} related software that 
+was developed over that same time period and that continues
+to grow and improve prodigiously.
+
+Completion of that task \ldots\ until TLC3!! \ldots\ presents the
+possibility of getting back to this more exciting development work,
+or even to more radical work on non-\TeX{}-based models and
+implementations.
+
+Of course, any such ideas are predicated on our ability to organise
+(with you, we hope) an efficient\newline
+but responsive maintenance and support system\newline
+for Standard \LaTeX{}.
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltnews17.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltnews17.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..1cbefe39fc8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltnews17.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,230 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file. 
+% 
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+% 
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+%    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
+% 
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+% 
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+% 
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution 
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with 
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+% 
+% \fi
+% Filename: ltnews17.tex
+%
+% This is issue 17 of LaTeX News.
+
+\documentclass
+    [lw35fonts]    % uncomment this line to get Palatino
+     {ltnews}[2004/02/28]
+
+% \usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+
+
+\publicationmonth{December}
+\publicationyear{2005}
+\publicationissue{17}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\maketitle
+
+% \raisefirstsection
+
+\section{Project licence news}
+
+The \LaTeX{} Project Public License has been updated slightly so that
+it is now version 1.3c.  In the warranty section the
+phrase ``unless required by applicable law'' has been reinstated,
+having got lost at some point.  Also,
+it now contains three clarifications: of the difference between
+``maintained'' and ``author-maintained''; of the
+term ``Base Interpreter''; and when clause 6b and 6d shall not apply.
+
+Following requests, we now also provide the text of the licence as a
+\LaTeX{} document (in the file \texttt{lppl.tex}). This file can be
+processed either as a stand-alone document or it can be included
+(without any modification) into another \LaTeX{} document, e.g., as an
+appendix, using \verb|\input| or \verb|\include|.
+
+
+\section{New guide on font encodings}
+
+Way back in 1995 work was started on a guide to document the
+officially allocated \LaTeX{} font encoding names. However, for one
+reason or another this guide (named \textit{\LaTeX{} font encodings})
+was, until now, not added to the distribution.  It describes the major
+7-bit and 8-bit font encodings used in the \LaTeX{} world and explains
+the restrictions required of conforming text font encodings.  It also
+lists all the `encoding specific commands' (the LICR or \LaTeX{}
+Internal Character Representation) for characters supported by the
+encodings \texttt{OT1} and \texttt{T1}.
+
+When the file \texttt{encguide.tex} is processed by \LaTeX{}, it will
+attempt to typeset an encoding table for each encoding it describes.
+For this to be possible, \LaTeX{} must be able to find \texttt{.tfm}
+files for a representative example font for each encoding.  If
+\LaTeX{} cannot find such a file then a warning is issued and the
+corresponding table is omitted.
+
+
+\section{Robust commands in math}
+
+The font changing commands in text-mode have been robust commands for years,
+but the same has not been true for the math versions such as
+\verb|\mathbf|.  While the math-mode commands worked correctly in
+section heads, they could cause problems in other places such as index
+entries.  With this release, these math-mode commands are now robust in
+the same way as their text-mode counterparts.
+
+%%
+\pagebreak
+%%
+
+
+\section{Updates of required packages}
+
+Several of the packages in the \package{tools} bundle have been updated
+for this release.
+
+The \package{xspace} package has some new features.  One is an
+interface for adding and removing the exceptions it knows about and
+another is that it works with active characters. These remove problems
+of incompatibility with the \package{babel} system.
+
+In \textit{\LaTeX\ News~16} we announced that some packages might
+begin to take advantage of \eTeX{} extensions on systems where these
+are available: and the latest version of \package{xspace} does just
+that.  Note also that \package{fixltx2e} will make use of the
+facilities in \eTeX{} whenever these are present (see below).
+
+The \package{calc} package has also been given an update with a few
+extra commands.  
+The commands \verb|\maxof| and \verb|\minof|, each with two
+brace-delimited arguments, provide the usual numeric $\max$ and $\min$
+operations. The commands \verb|\settototalheight| and
+\verb|\totalheightof| work like \verb|\settoheight| and
+\verb|\heightof|.  There are also some internal improvements to make
+\package{calc} work with some more primitive \TeX\ constructs, such as
+\verb|\ifcase|.
+
+The \package{varioref} package has acquired a few more default
+strings but there are still a number of languages for 
+which good strings are still missing.
+
+The \package{showkeys} package has also been updated slightly to work
+with more recent developments in \package{varioref}. Also, it now
+provides an easy way to define the look of the printed labels with
+the command \verb|\showkeyslabelformat|.
+
+\section{Work on \LaTeX{} fixes}
+
+The package known as \package{fixltx2e} has three new additions. A new
+command \verb|\textsubscript| has been added as a complement to the
+command \verb|\textsuperscript| in the kernel.  Secondly, a new form of
+\verb|\DeclareMathSizes| that allows all of its arguments to have a
+dimension suffix.  This means you can now use expressions such as
+\verb|\DeclareMathSizes{9.5dd}{9.5dd}{7.4dd}{6.6dd}|.  
+
+The third new
+addition is the robust command \verb|\TextOrMath| which takes two
+arguments and executes one of them when typesetting in text or math
+mode respectively. This command also takes advantage of \eTeX{}
+extensions if available; more specifically, 
+%%
+%%\pagebreak
+%%
+when the \eTeX{} extensions are available, it does not
+destroy kerning between previous letters and the text to be typeset. 
+The command is also used
+internally in \package{fixltx2e} to resolve a problem with
+\verb|\fnsymbol|.  
+
+Also, further work has been done on reimplementing
+the command \verb|\addpenalty|, which is used internally in several
+places: we hope it is an improvement!
+
+\section{The graphics bundle}
+
+The \package{graphics} bundle now supports the
+\package{dvipdfmx} post-processor and Jonathan Kew's XE\TeX\
+program. By support we mean that the graphics packages recognize the
+new options \texttt{xetex} and \texttt{dvipdfmx} but we do not
+distribute the respective driver files. 
+
+This leads elegantly to a description of the 
+new policy concerning such driver files in the \package{graphics} bundle.
+Most driver files for our graphics packages are maintained by the
+developers of the associated post-processor or \TeX\ programs.  
+The teams developing these packages are working very hard: their rapid
+development offers a stark contrast to the current schedule of \LaTeX\
+releases.  It is therefore no longer practical
+for the \LaTeX\ Team to be responsible for distributing the
+latest versions of these driver files.  
+
+Therefore the installation files for \package{graphics} have been
+split: there is now \file{graphics.ins} to install the package files and
+\file{graphics-drivers.ins} for the driver files (located in
+\file{drivers.dtx}). 
+There is no need 
+to install all those provided in the file \file{drivers.dtx}.
+
+Please also note that, as requested by the maintainers of
+\package{PStricks}, we have removed the package \package{pstcol} as
+current versions of \package{PSTricks} make it obsolete.
+
+%%
+\newpage
+%%
+
+
+\section{Future development}
+
+The title of this section is a little misleading as it actually
+describes \emph{current} development. In 1998 the \package{expl3}
+bundle of packages was put on \ctan\ to demonstrate a possible \LaTeX3
+programming environment. These packages have been lying dormant for some
+time while the \LaTeX\ Project Team were preoccupied by other things
+such as developing the experimental packages \package{xor},
+\package{template}, etc., (and also writing that indispensable
+and encyclopaedic volume,\\ 
+The \LaTeX{} Companion -- 2nd edition).
+
+In October 2004 work on this code base was resumed with the goal of
+some day turning it into a kernel for \LaTeX3.  This work can now
+also make full use of the widely accepted \eTeX\ extensions. Currently
+two areas are central to this work. 
+
+\begin{itemize} 
+\item Extending the
+  kernel code of \LaTeX3. 
+\item Converting the experimental packages
+  such as \package{xor}, \package{template} to use the new
+  syntax internally. 
+\end{itemize} 
+
+Beware! Development of
+\package{expl3} is happening so fast that the descriptions above might
+be out of date when you read this! If you wish to see what's going on
+then go to
+\url{http://www.latex-project.org/code.html} where you can download
+ fully working code (we hope!).  
+
+\end{document}
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltoutenc.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltoutenc.dtx
index f31394f32d2..89f32c7b4d3 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltoutenc.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltoutenc.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 % \iffalse meta-comment
 %
-% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006
 % The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 % in this file. 
 % 
@@ -8,12 +8,12 @@
 % -------------------------------------------
 % 
 % It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
 % of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 % The latest version of this license is in
 %    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
 % 
 % This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
 % 
@@ -37,14 +37,14 @@
 %<TS1>\ProvidesFile{ts1enc.def}[2001/06/05 v3.0e (jk/car/fm)
 %<package>\ProvidesPackage{fontenc}
 %<TS1sty>\ProvidesPackage{textcomp}
-%<OT1|T1|OMS|OML|OT4|package|TS1sty> [2004/02/22 v1.99f
+%<OT1|T1|OMS|OML|OT4|package|TS1sty> [2005/09/27 v1.99g
 %<OT1|T1|OMS|OML|OT4|TS1>         Standard LaTeX file]
 %<package|TS1sty>                 Standard LaTeX package]
 %
 %<*driver>
 % \fi
 \ProvidesFile{ltoutenc.dtx}
-             [2004/02/22 v1.99f LaTeX Kernel (font encodings)]
+             [2005/11/08 v1.99h LaTeX Kernel (font encodings)]
 % \iffalse
 \documentclass{ltxdoc}
 \GetFileInfo{ltoutenc.dtx}
@@ -65,7 +65,7 @@
 %</driver>
 % \fi
 %
-% \CheckSum{2762}
+% \CheckSum{2788}
 %
 % \CharacterTable
 %  {Upper-case    \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
@@ -345,7 +345,7 @@
 %         \meta{command}|}|
 %    \end{quote}
 % 
-% \task{Document the problems of these commands, see pr/3160}
+% \task{?}{Document the problems of these commands, see pr/3160}
 % \changes{v1.9e}{1997/08/05}{Corrected order of arguments in
 %          \cs{UseTextSymbol} example.}
 %    For example, |\UseTextSymbol{OT1}{\ss}| has the same effect as: 
@@ -833,7 +833,7 @@
 %    (pr/3160)}
 %    For a detailed discussion of this reimplementation and its
 %    deficiencies, see pr/3160.
-% \task{Improve this and document its problems, see pr/3160}
+% \task{?}{Improve this and document its problems, see pr/3160}
 % \changes{v1.9z}{2000/01/30}{Macro reimplemented (pr/3160)}
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \def\add@accent#1#2{\hmode@bgroup
@@ -1031,7 +1031,7 @@
 %    
 %    For a detailed discussion of this reimplementation and its
 %    deficiencies, see pr/3160.
-% \task{Improve this and document its problems, see pr/3160}
+% \task{?}{Improve this and document its problems, see pr/3160}
 % \changes{v1.9z}{2000/01/30}{Macro reimplemented (pr/3160)}
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \def\UseTextAccent#1#2#3{%
@@ -1302,6 +1302,14 @@
 \DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\ae}{OT1}
 \DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\i}{OT1}
 \DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\j}{OT1}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v1.99h}{2005/11/08}
+%      {Added \cs{ij} and \cs{IJ} from babel. (pr/3771)}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\ij}{OT1}
+\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\IJ}{OT1}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
 \DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\l}{OT1}
 \DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\oe}{OT1}
 \DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\o}{OT1}
@@ -1538,16 +1546,19 @@
 % macro.}
 % \changes{v1.9y}{2000/01/30}{Use \cs{hmode@bgroup} where applicable
 %    (pr/3160)}
+% \changes{v1.99g}{2005/09/27}{Replace \cs{sh@ft} by \cs{ltx@sh@ft}}
+%  In these definitions we no longer use the helper function |\sh@ft|
+%  from plain.tex since that now has two incompatible definitions.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \DeclareTextCommand{\b}{OT1}[1]
-   {\hmode@bgroup\o@lign{\relax#1\crcr\hidewidth\sh@ft{29}%
+   {\hmode@bgroup\o@lign{\relax#1\crcr\hidewidth\ltx@sh@ft{-3ex}%
      \vbox to.2ex{\hbox{\char22}\vss}\hidewidth}\egroup}
 \DeclareTextCommand{\c}{OT1}[1]
    {\leavevmode\setbox\z@\hbox{#1}\ifdim\ht\z@=1ex\accent24 #1%
     \else{\ooalign{\unhbox\z@\crcr\hidewidth\char24\hidewidth}}\fi}
 \DeclareTextCommand{\d}{OT1}[1]
    {\hmode@bgroup
-    \o@lign{\relax#1\crcr\hidewidth\sh@ft{10}.\hidewidth}\egroup}
+    \o@lign{\relax#1\crcr\hidewidth\ltx@sh@ft{-1ex}.\hidewidth}\egroup}
 %    \end{macrocode}
 %    Declare the text symbols.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
@@ -1612,6 +1623,17 @@
    {\leavevmode\setbox\z@\hbox{!}\dimen@\ht\z@\advance\dimen@-1ex%
     \rlap{\raise.67\dimen@\hbox{\char23}}A} 
 %    \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v1.99h}{2005/11/08}
+%      {Added \cs{ij} and \cs{IJ} from babel. (pr/3771)}
+%    The dutch language uses the letter `ij'. It is available in
+%    \texttt{T1} encoded fonts, but not in the \texttt{OT1} encoded
+%    fonts. Therefor we fake it for the \texttt{OT1} encoding.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareTextCommand{\ij}{OT1}{%
+  \nobreak\hskip\z@skip i\kern-0.02em j\nobreak\hskip\z@skip}
+\DeclareTextCommand{\IJ}{OT1}{%
+  \nobreak\hskip\z@skip I\kern-0.02em J\nobreak\hskip\z@skip}
+%    \end{macrocode}
 %    In the OT1 encoding, \pounds~and \$ share a slot.
 % \changes{v1.9y}{2000/01/30}{Use \cs{hmode@bgroup} where applicable
 %    (pr/3160)}
@@ -1735,9 +1757,12 @@
 % \changes{v1.99b}{2004/01/03}{Use \cs{ooalign} for \cs{k} (pr/3532)}
 % \changes{v1.99b}{2004/01/03}{Added \cs{textogonekcentered} (pr/3532)}
 % \changes{v1.99c}{2004/01/04}{More adjustments for ogonek (pr/3532)}
+% \changes{v1.99g}{2005/09/27}{Replace \cs{sh@ft} by \cs{ltx@sh@ft}}
+%  In these definitions we no longer use the helper function |\sh@ft|
+%  from plain.tex since that now has two incompatible definitions.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \DeclareTextCommand{\b}{T1}[1]
-   {\hmode@bgroup\o@lign{\relax#1\crcr\hidewidth\sh@ft{29}%
+   {\hmode@bgroup\o@lign{\relax#1\crcr\hidewidth\ltx@sh@ft{-3ex}%
      \vbox to.2ex{\hbox{\char9}\vss}\hidewidth}\egroup}
 \DeclareTextCommand{\c}{T1}[1]
    {\leavevmode\setbox\z@\hbox{#1}\ifdim\ht\z@=1ex\accent11 #1%
@@ -1745,7 +1770,7 @@
         \hidewidth\char11\hidewidth}}\fi}
 \DeclareTextCommand{\d}{T1}[1]
    {\hmode@bgroup
-    \o@lign{\relax#1\crcr\hidewidth\sh@ft{10}.\hidewidth}\egroup}
+    \o@lign{\relax#1\crcr\hidewidth\ltx@sh@ft{-1ex}.\hidewidth}\egroup}
 \DeclareTextCommand{\k}{T1}[1]
    {\hmode@bgroup\ooalign{\null#1\crcr\hidewidth\char12}\egroup}
 \DeclareTextCommand{\textogonekcentered}{T1}[1]
@@ -1772,6 +1797,8 @@
 %    \cs{textgreater} and \cs{textless}.} 
 % \changes{v1.8c}{1996/10/27}
 %      {Removed \cs{aa} and \cs{AA}}
+% \changes{v1.99h}{2005/11/08}
+%      {Added \cs{ij} and \cs{IJ} from babel. (pr/3771)}
 %      
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 %\DeclareTextSymbol{\AA}{T1}{197}
@@ -1794,6 +1821,8 @@
 \DeclareTextSymbol{\guilsinglright}{T1}{15}
 \DeclareTextSymbol{\i}{T1}{25}
 \DeclareTextSymbol{\j}{T1}{26}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\ij}{T1}{188}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\IJ}{T1}{156}
 \DeclareTextSymbol{\l}{T1}{170}
 \DeclareTextSymbol{\ng}{T1}{173}
 \DeclareTextSymbol{\oe}{T1}{247}
@@ -1830,7 +1859,7 @@
 %    \end{macrocode}
 %    Declare the composites.
 % \changes{v1.93}{2001/05/28}{Changed the effect of 
-%                             \cs{\.}\cs{\i}, pr/3295}
+%                             \cs{.}\cs{i}, pr/3295}
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \DeclareTextComposite{\.}{T1}{i}{`\i}
 \DeclareTextComposite{\.}{T1}{\i}{`\i}
@@ -2128,15 +2157,20 @@
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \DeclareTextCommand{\k}{OT4}[1]{%
     \TextSymbolUnavailable{\k{#1}}#1}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  In these definitions we no longer use the helper function |\sh@ft|
+%  from plain.tex since that now has two incompatible definitions.
+% \changes{v1.99g}{2005/09/27}{Replace \cs{sh@ft} by \cs{ltx@sh@ft}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
 \DeclareTextCommand{\b}{OT4}[1]
-   {\hmode@bgroup\o@lign{\relax#1\crcr\hidewidth\sh@ft{29}%
+   {\hmode@bgroup\o@lign{\relax#1\crcr\hidewidth\ltx@sh@ft{-3ex}%
      \vbox to.2ex{\hbox{\char22}\vss}\hidewidth}\egroup}
 \DeclareTextCommand{\c}{OT4}[1]
    {\leavevmode\setbox\z@\hbox{#1}\ifdim\ht\z@=1ex\accent24 #1%
     \else{\ooalign{\unhbox\z@\crcr\hidewidth\char24\hidewidth}}\fi}
 \DeclareTextCommand{\d}{OT4}[1]
    {\hmode@bgroup
-    \o@lign{\relax#1\crcr\hidewidth\sh@ft{10}.\hidewidth}\egroup}
+    \o@lign{\relax#1\crcr\hidewidth\ltx@sh@ft{-1ex}.\hidewidth}\egroup}
 %    \end{macrocode}
 %    Declare the text symbols.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltoutenc.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltoutenc.ins
index 8212686c492..d4acd08d2d2 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltoutenc.ins
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltoutenc.ins
@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
 %% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
 %% LaTeX or TeX.
 %%
-%% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+%% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005
 %% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 %% in this file. 
 %% 
@@ -11,12 +11,12 @@
 %% -------------------------------------------
 %% 
 %% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3b
 %% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 %% The latest version of this license is in
 %%    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%% and version 1.3b or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+%% version 2005/12/01 or later.
 %% 
 %% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
 %% 
@@ -40,7 +40,7 @@
 
 This is a generated file.
 
-Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006
 The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 in this file. 
 
@@ -48,12 +48,12 @@ This file was generated from file(s) of the LaTeX base system.
 --------------------------------------------------------------
 
 It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
 of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 The latest version of this license is in
    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
+and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+version 2005/12/01 or later.
 
 This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
 
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltoutput.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltoutput.dtx
index d7eee068854..ac0a2819366 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltoutput.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltoutput.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 % \iffalse meta-comment
 %
-% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006
 % The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 % in this file. 
 % 
@@ -8,12 +8,12 @@
 % -------------------------------------------
 % 
 % It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
 % of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 % The latest version of this license is in
 %    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
 % 
 % This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
 % 
@@ -37,7 +37,7 @@
 %<*driver>
 % \fi
 \ProvidesFile{ltoutput.dtx}
-             [2004/02/07 v1.2l LaTeX Kernel (Output Routine)]
+             [2004/10/20 v1.2m LaTeX Kernel (Output Routine)]
 % \iffalse
 \documentclass{ltxdoc}
 \GetFileInfo{ltoutput.dtx}
@@ -1503,10 +1503,11 @@
 %      outputbox below: suggested by Fred Bartlett pr/2892}
 % \changes{1.2i}{2000/07/12}{Removed negative vskip, as it gives
 %    unacceptable results when the depth is large: pr/3189}
+% \changes{v1.2m}{2004/10/20}{Removed dead code}
 % \task{CAR}{As can be seen from the above two changes, getting a good
 %    layout here is difficult: fix!}
 %    \begin{macrocode}
-       \@tempdima\dp\@cclv
+%       \@tempdima\dp\@cclv
        \unvbox \@cclv
 %       \vskip-\@tempdima  
        \vskip \skip\footins
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltpage.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltpage.dtx
index e7ded9e0e48..ae90b5babf7 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltpage.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltpage.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 % \iffalse meta-comment
 %
-% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006
 % The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 % in this file. 
 % 
@@ -8,12 +8,12 @@
 % -------------------------------------------
 % 
 % It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
 % of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 % The latest version of this license is in
 %    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
 % 
 % This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
 % 
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltpageno.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltpageno.dtx
index 3deb9820936..20b48269e46 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltpageno.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltpageno.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 % \iffalse meta-comment
 %
-% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006
 % The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 % in this file. 
 % 
@@ -8,12 +8,12 @@
 % -------------------------------------------
 % 
 % It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
 % of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 % The latest version of this license is in
 %    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
 % 
 % This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
 % 
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltpar.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltpar.dtx
index 417d45226b2..ded5ffa84ff 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltpar.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltpar.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 % \iffalse meta-comment
 %
-% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006
 % The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 % in this file. 
 % 
@@ -8,12 +8,12 @@
 % -------------------------------------------
 % 
 % It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
 % of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 % The latest version of this license is in
 %    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
 % 
 % This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
 % 
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltpictur.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltpictur.dtx
index a93f3f4cd67..ffd4dee9958 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltpictur.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltpictur.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 % \iffalse meta-comment
 %
-% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006
 % The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 % in this file. 
 % 
@@ -8,12 +8,12 @@
 % -------------------------------------------
 % 
 % It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
 % of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 % The latest version of this license is in
 %    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
 % 
 % This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
 % 
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltplain.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltplain.dtx
index 0b172df540b..08eaeb2579a 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltplain.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltplain.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 % \iffalse meta-comment
 %
-% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006
 % The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 % in this file. 
 % 
@@ -8,12 +8,12 @@
 % -------------------------------------------
 % 
 % It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
 % of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 % The latest version of this license is in
 %    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
 % 
 % This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
 % 
@@ -32,7 +32,7 @@
 %<*driver>
 % \fi
 \ProvidesFile{ltplain.dtx}
-             [2004/02/24 v1.1x LaTeX Kernel (Plain TeX)]
+             [2005/09/27 v1.1y LaTeX Kernel (Plain TeX)]
 % \iffalse
 \documentclass{ltxdoc}
 \GetFileInfo{ltplain.dtx}
@@ -49,7 +49,7 @@
 %</driver>
 % \fi
 %
-% \CheckSum{756}
+% \CheckSum{764}
 %
 % \changes{v1.0a}{1994/03/08}
 %         {Remove need for a driver file.}
@@ -982,14 +982,43 @@
 % \begin{macro}{\sh@ft}
 % \changes{v1.1t}{1996/07/26}{replace \cs{dimen}\cs{z@} by
 %          \cs{dimen@}}
+% \changes{v1.1y}{2005/09/27}{Macro no longer used but
+%   left for compatibility}
+% The definition of this macro in plain.tex was improved in
+% about 1997; but as a result its usage was changed and its new
+% definition is not appropriate for \LaTeX{}.
+%
+% Since the version given here has been in use by
+% \LaTeX{} for many years it does not seem prudent to remove it now.
+% As far as we can tell it has only been used to define~|\b| and~|\d|
+% but this cannot be certain.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \def\sh@ft#1{\dimen@.00#1ex\multiply\dimen@\fontdimen1\font
   \kern-.0156\dimen@} % compensate for slant in lowered accents
 %    \end{macrocode}
 %  \end{macro}
 %
-% \LaTeX\ change: |\d|, |\b|, |\c|, |\copyright|, |\TeX|
-%  defined elsewhere.
+% \begin{macro}{\ltx@sh@ft}
+% \changes{v1.1y}{2005/09/27}{New macro}
+% This is the \LaTeX{} version of the second incarnation of the plain
+% macro |\sh@ft|, which takes a dimension as its argument.  It shifts
+% a pseudo-accent horizontally by an amount proportional to the product
+% of its argument and the slant-per-point (fontdimen 1).  
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ltx@sh@ft #1{%
+  \dimen@ #1%
+  \kern \strip@pt
+    \fontdimen1\font \dimen@
+  } % kern by #1 times the current slant
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%  
+% \LaTeX{} change: the text commands such as
+% |\d|, |\b|, |\c|, |\copyright|,~|\TeX|
+% are now defined elsewhere.
 %
 % \changes{LaTeX2e}
 %     {1993/11/29}{All accents in decimals; suggested by Paul Taylor}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltsect.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltsect.dtx
index 6f66a92755b..45e5a20ed16 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltsect.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltsect.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 % \iffalse meta-comment
 %
-% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006
 % The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 % in this file. 
 % 
@@ -8,12 +8,12 @@
 % -------------------------------------------
 % 
 % It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
 % of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 % The latest version of this license is in
 %    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
 % 
 % This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
 % 
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltspace.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltspace.dtx
index e455958dc24..bae44ca5cb8 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltspace.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltspace.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 % \iffalse meta-comment
 %
-% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006
 % The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 % in this file. 
 % 
@@ -8,12 +8,12 @@
 % -------------------------------------------
 % 
 % It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
 % of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 % The latest version of this license is in
 %    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
 % 
 % This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
 % 
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/lttab.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/lttab.dtx
index 501e9455faa..ab2400f3362 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/lttab.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/lttab.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 % \iffalse meta-comment
 %
-% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006
 % The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 % in this file. 
 % 
@@ -8,12 +8,12 @@
 % -------------------------------------------
 % 
 % It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
 % of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 % The latest version of this license is in
 %    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
 % 
 % This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
 % 
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltthm.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltthm.dtx
index 5290fea8bd5..d2a25ebc0a9 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltthm.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltthm.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 % \iffalse meta-comment
 %
-% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006
 % The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 % in this file. 
 % 
@@ -8,12 +8,12 @@
 % -------------------------------------------
 % 
 % It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
 % of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 % The latest version of this license is in
 %    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
 % 
 % This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
 % 
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltvers.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltvers.dtx
index d4ad7af5f8b..e5dabaef897 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltvers.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltvers.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 % \iffalse meta-comment
 %
-% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006
 % The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 % in this file. 
 % 
@@ -8,12 +8,12 @@
 % -------------------------------------------
 % 
 % It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3b
 % of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 % The latest version of this license is in
 %    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+% and version 1.3b or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
 % 
 % This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
 % 
@@ -84,7 +84,7 @@
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 %<*2ekernel>
 \def\fmtname{LaTeX2e}
-\edef\fmtversion{2003/12/01}
+\edef\fmtversion{2005/12/01}
 %    \end{macrocode}
 % \end{macro}
 % \end{macro}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltx3info.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltx3info.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..3b2aa12a1cf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltx3info.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,474 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file. 
+% 
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+% 
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+%    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
+% 
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+% 
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+% 
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution 
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with 
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+% 
+% \fi
+\documentclass[a4paper]{article}
+
+% Commands and environments:
+
+\newcommand{\eg}{e.g.~}
+\newcommand{\ie}{i.e.~}
+
+
+\newenvironment{citations}{%
+   \list{}{%
+      \renewcommand{\makelabel}[1]{\normalfont\itshape ##1}%
+   }%
+}{%
+   \endlist
+}
+
+% Some logos:
+
+\newcommand{\NFSS}{NFSS}
+
+\newcommand{\LaTeXNews}{\LaTeX~News}
+
+\newcommand{\AW}{Addison Wesley}
+
+\newcommand{\SGML}{{\sc SGML}}
+\newcommand{\DSSSL}{{\sc DSSSL}}
+\newcommand{\HTML}{{\sc HTML}}
+\newcommand{\XML}{{\sc XML}}
+\newcommand{\PDF}{{\sc PDF}}
+
+\newcommand{\PS}{{\sc Post\-Script}}
+
+\newcommand{\AmSTeX}{$\mathcal A$\lower.4ex\hbox{$\!\mathcal
+                                            M\!$}$\mathcal S$-\TeX}
+\newcommand{\AmSLaTeX}{$\mathcal A$\lower.4ex\hbox{$\!\mathcal
+                                              M\!$}$\mathcal S$-\LaTeX}
+\newcommand{\MF}{{\sc Meta\-font}}
+
+% sections
+
+\setcounter{secnumdepth}{-2}
+
+% Front matter:
+
+\title{\Large The \LaTeX3 Project}
+
+\author{\copyright 1995--1999 \ 
+Frank Mittelbach and
+Chris Rowley}
+
+\date{12 January 1999}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\thispagestyle{empty}
+
+\maketitle
+
+\begin{abstract}
+  This article describes the motivation, achievements and future of
+  the \LaTeX3 Project, which was established to produce a new version
+  of \LaTeX{}, the widely-used and highly-acclaimed document
+  preparation system.  It also describes how you can help us to
+  achieve our aims.\\[2pt]
+  \textbf{For Archive maintainers, Authors, Publishers and
+          Distributors:}\\
+  The project team request that, whenever possible, you include this
+  article in any of the following:
+  \begin{itemize}
+  \item Books about \TeX{} and \LaTeX{}.
+  \item Instructions for authors on using \LaTeX{}.
+  \item The printed documentation of CD-ROM collections that contain
+    \LaTeX.
+  \item On-line collections that include a significant proportion of
+    documents encoded in \LaTeX. 
+\end{itemize}
+\end{abstract}
+
+\section{Outline}
+
+The purposes of the \LaTeX3 system can be summarized thus: it will
+greatly increase the range of documents which can be processed; and it
+will provide a flexible interface for typographic designers to easily
+specify the formatting of a class of documents.
+ 
+The \LaTeX3 Project Team is a small group of volunteers whose aim is
+to produce this major new document processing system based on the
+principles pioneered by Leslie Lamport in the current \LaTeX.
+
+The major visible work of the team before 1997 was the development of
+the current \emph{standard} version of \LaTeX{}.  This was first
+released in 1994 and has since then been actively maintained and
+enhanced by extensions to that core system.  They will continue to
+develop and maintain this system, releasing updated versions every six
+months and recording these activities in the \LaTeX{} bugs database
+(see below).
+  
+Although \LaTeX{} may be distributed freely, the production and
+maintenance of the system does require expenditure of reasonably large
+sums of money.  The \LaTeX3 Project Fund has therefore been set up to
+channel money into this work.  We know that some users are 
+aware of this fund as they have already contributed to it---many
+thanks to all of them!  If you want to know more about how you can
+help the project, see Page \pageref{fund}---and thanks in advance for
+your generosity in the future.
+
+
+\section{Background}
+
+With \TeX{}, Knuth designed a formatting system that is able to
+produce a large range of documents typeset to extremely high quality
+standards. For various reasons (\eg quality, portability, stability
+and availability) \TeX{} spread very rapidly and can nowadays be best
+described as a world-wide de facto standard for high quality
+typesetting. Its use is particularly common in specialized areas, such
+as technical documents of various kinds, and for multi-lingual
+requirements.
+ 
+The \TeX{} system is fully programmable. This allows the development
+of high-level user interfaces whose input is processed by \TeX{}'s
+interpreter to produce low-level typesetting instructions; these are
+input to \TeX{}'s typesetting engine which outputs the format of each
+page in a device-independent page-description language.  The \LaTeX{}
+system is such an interface; it was designed to support the needs of
+long documents such as textbooks and manuals. It separates content and
+form as much as possible by providing the user with a generic (\ie
+logical rather than visual) mark-up interface; this is combined with
+style sheets which specify the formatting.
+ 
+Recent years have shown that the concepts and approach of \LaTeX{} are
+now widely accepted. Indeed, \LaTeX{} has become the standard method
+of communicating and publishing documents in many academic
+disciplines.  This has led to many publishers accepting \LaTeX{}
+source for articles and books; and the American Mathematical Society
+now provides a \LaTeX{} package making the features of \AmSTeX{}
+available to all users of \LaTeX{}.  Its use has also spread into many
+other commercial and industrial environments, where the technical
+qualities of \TeX{} together with the concepts of \LaTeX{} are
+considered a powerful combination of great importance to such areas as
+corporate documentation and publishing.  This has also extended to
+on-line publishing using, for example, \PDF{} output incorporating
+hypertext and other active areas.
+  
+With the spreading use of \SGML{}-compliant systems (\eg Web-based
+publishing using \HTML{} or \XML{}) \TeX{} again is a common choice as
+the formatting engine for high quality typeset output: a widely used
+such system is {\em The Publisher\/} from ArborText, whilst a more
+recent development is the object-oriented document editor Grif.  The
+latter is used for document processing in a wide range of industrial
+applications; it has also been adopted by the Euromath consortium as
+the basis of their mathematician's workbench, one of the most advanced
+of the emerging project-oriented user environments.  Typeset output
+from \SGML{}-coded documents in these systems is obtained by
+translation into \LaTeX{}, which will therefore soon also be a natural
+choice for the output of \DSSSL-compliant systems.
+
+Because a typical \SGML{} Document Type Definition (DTD) uses concepts
+similar to those of \LaTeX{}, the formatting is often implemented by
+simply mapping document elements to \LaTeX{} constructs rather than
+directly to `raw \TeX'.
+This enables the
+sophisticated analytical techniques built into the \LaTeX{}
+software to be exploited; and it avoids the need to program in \TeX{}.
+
+\section{Motivation}
+
+This increase in the range of applications of \LaTeX{} has highlighted
+certain limitations of the current system, both for authors of
+documents and for designers of formatting styles.
+
+In addition to the need to extend the variety of classes of document
+which can be processed by \LaTeX{}, substantial enhancements are
+necessary in, at least, the following areas:
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item
+   the command syntax (attributes, short references, etc);
+ \item
+   the layout specification interface (style design);
+ \item
+   the level of robustness (error recovery, omitted tags);
+ \item
+   the extendibility (package interface);
+ \item
+   the layout specification of tabular material;
+ \item 
+   the specification and inclusion of graphical material;
+ \item 
+   the positioning of floating material, and other aspects of page
+   layout;
+ \item
+   the requirements of hypertext systems.
+ \end{itemize}
+
+ Further analysis of these deficiencies has shown that some of the
+ problems are to be found in \LaTeX{}'s internal concepts and design.
+ This project to produce a new version therefore involves thorough
+ research into the challenges posed by new applications and by the use
+ of \LaTeX{} as a formatter for a wide range of documents, \eg \SGML{}
+ documents; on-line \PDF{} documents with hypertext links.
+
+ This will result in a major re-implementation of large parts of the
+ system.  Some of the results of such rethinking of the fundamentals
+ are already available in Standard \LaTeX{}, notably in the following
+ areas:
+
+\begin{itemize}
+\item Font declaration and selection;
+\item Font and glyph handling within mathematical formulas;
+\item Handling multiple font glyph encodings within a document;
+\item Allowing multiple input character encodings within a document; 
+\item A uniform interface for graphics inclusion;
+\item Support for coloured text;
+\item Building and interfacing new classes and extension packages.
+\end{itemize}
+
+
+\section{Description}
+
+The strengths of the present version of \LaTeX{} are
+as follows:
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item excellent standard of typesetting for text, technical 
+formulas\\
+and tabular material;
+ \item  separation of generic mark-up from visual formatting;
+ \item  ease of use for authors;
+ \item  portability of documents over a wide range of platforms;
+ \item  adaptability to many languages;
+ \item  widespread and free availability;
+ \item  reliable support and maintenance by the \LaTeX3 project team.
+ \end{itemize}
+ These will be preserved and in many cases greatly enhanced by the new
+ version which is being developed to fulfill the following requirements.
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item
+ It will provide a syntax that allows highly automated translation
+ from popular \SGML{} DTDs into \LaTeX{} document classes (these 
+ will be provided as standard with the new version).
+
+ The syntax of the new \LaTeX{} user-interface will, for example,
+ support the \SGML{} concepts of `entity', `attribute' and `short
+ reference' in such a way that these can be directly linked to the
+ corresponding  \SGML{} features.
+
+ \item
+ It will support hypertext links and other features required for
+ on-line structured documents using, for example, \HTML{} and \XML{}.
+
+\item
+ It will provide a straightforward style-designer interface to support
+ both the specification of a wide variety of typographic requirements
+ and the linking of entities in the generic mark-up of a document to
+ the desired formatting.  These two parts of the design process will
+ be clearly separated so that it is possible to specify different
+ layouts for the same DTD.
+
+ The language and syntax of this interface will be as natural as
+ possible for a typographic designer.  As a result, this language
+ could easily be interfaced to a visually-oriented, menu-driven
+ specification system.
+
+ This interface will also support \DSSSL{} specifications and 
+ style-sheet concepts such as those used with \HTML{} and \XML{}.
+ 
+ \item
+ It will provide an enhanced user-interface that allows expression of
+ the typesetting requirements from a large range of subject areas. Some
+ examples are listed here.
+ 
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item The requirements of technical documentation (\eg offset layout,\\
+   change bars, etc).
+ \item The requirements of academic publishing in the humanities\\
+   (critical text editions, etc).
+ \item The requirements of structural formulas in chemistry.
+ \item Advanced use of the mathematical-typesetting features of \TeX{}.
+ \item The integration of graphical features, such as shading,
+   within text.
+ \item the integration of hypertext and other links in on-line
+   documents using systems such as \HTML{}, \XML{} and \PDF{}.
+   
+ \end{itemize}
+
+ Special care will be taken to ensure that this interface is
+ extensible: this will be achieved by use of modular designs.
+ 
+ 
+  \item
+  It will provide a more robust author-interface. For example,
+  artificial restrictions on the nesting of commands will be removed.
+  Error handling will be improved by adding
+  a more effective, interactive help system.
+ 
+  \item
+  It will provide access to arbitrary fonts from any family (such as
+  the \PS{} and TrueType fonts) including a wide range of fonts for
+  multi-lingual documents and the specialist glyphs required by
+  documents in various technical and academic areas.
+
+  \item
+  The new interfaces will be documented in detail and the
+  system will provide extensive catalogues of examples, carefully
+  designed to make the learning time for new users (both designers and
+  authors) as short as possible.
+ 
+ \item
+  The code itself will be thoroughly documented and it will be
+  designed on modular principles.  Thus the system will be easy to
+  maintain and to enhance.
+\end{itemize}
+ 
+The resulting new \LaTeX{} will, like the present version, be usable
+with any standard \TeX{} system (or whatever replaces it) and so will
+be freely available on a wide range of platforms.
+  
+
+\section{\LaTeX{} documentation}
+
+\begingroup
+\setlength{\parindent}{0pt}
+
+A complete description of Standard \LaTeX{} can be found in:
+\begin{citations}
+\item[\LaTeX: A Document Preparation System]
+   Leslie Lamport,\\ \AW, 2nd ed, 1994.
+\item[The \LaTeX{} Companion]
+   Mittelbach, Goossens with Braams, Carlisle and Rowley,\\ \AW, 2nd ed, 2004.
+\end{citations}
+
+A recent addition to the publications closely associated with the
+project is:
+\begin{citations}
+\item[The \LaTeX{} Graphics Companion]
+   Goossens, Mittelbach and Rahtz,\\ \AW, 1997.
+\end{citations}
+
+This \LaTeX{} distribution comes with documentation on several aspects
+of of the system.  The newer features of the system are described in
+the following documents:
+\begin{citations}
+\item[\LaTeXe{} for authors] 
+   describes the new features of \LaTeX{} documents,
+   in the file \texttt{usrguide.tex};
+\item[\LaTeXe{} for class and package writers]
+   describes how to produce \LaTeX{} classes and packages,
+   in the file \texttt{clsguide.tex};
+\item[\LaTeXe{} font selection]
+   describes the new features of \LaTeX{} fonts for
+   class and package writers,
+   in the file \texttt{fntguide.tex}.
+\end{citations}
+
+For further contacts and sources of information on \TeX{} and
+\LaTeX{}, see the addresses on Page~\pageref{contacts}.
+
+\endgroup
+\pagebreak
+
+
+\section{The \LaTeX3 Project Fund}
+\label{fund}
+
+Although \LaTeX{} may be distributed freely, the production and
+maintenance of the system does require expenditure of reasonably large
+sums of money.  There are many necessities that need substantial
+financing: examples are new or enhanced computing equipment and travel
+to team meetings (the volunteers come from many different countries,
+so getting together occasionally is a non-trivial exercise).
+  
+This is why we are appealing to you for contributions to the fund.
+Any sum will be much appreciated; the amount need not be large as
+small contributions add up to very useful amounts.  Contributions of
+suitable equipment and software will also be of great value.  This
+appeal is both to you as an individual author and to you as a member
+of a group or as an employee: please encourage your department or your
+employer to contribute towards sustaining our work.
+
+We should like to see funded projects that make considerable use of
+\LaTeX{} (\eg conferences and research teams who use it to publish
+their work, and electronic research archives using it) include
+contributions to this fund in their budgets.  %% e-print systems
+
+We are also asking commercial organisations to assess the benefits
+they gain from using, or distributing, a well-supported \LaTeX{} and
+to make appropriate contributions to the fund in order that we can
+continue to maintain and improve the product.  If you work for, or do
+business with, such an organisation, please bring to the attention of
+the relevant people the existence and needs of the project.
+
+In particular, we ask that all the large number of organisations and
+businesses that distribute \LaTeX{}, within other software or as part
+of a CD-ROM collection, should consider pricing all products containing
+\LaTeX{} at a level that enables them to make regular donations to the
+fund from the profit on these items.  We also ask all authors and
+publishers of books about \LaTeX{} to consider donating part of the
+royalties to the fund.
+
+Contributions should be sent to one of the following addresses:
+\begin{quote}\small\label{addrs}
+   \TeX{} Users Group, P.O. Box 2311, Portland, OR~97208-2311 USA\\
+   Fax:~+1~503~223~3960 \ Email: \texttt{tug@tug.org}
+   
+ \noindent
+   UK TUG, 1 Eymore Close, Selly Oak, Birmingham B29~4LB UK\\
+   Fax: +44 121 476 2159 \ Email: \texttt{uktug-enquiries@tex.ac.uk}
+\end{quote}
+
+Cheques should be payable to the user group (TUG or UKTUG) and be
+clearly marked as contributions to the \LaTeX3 fund.
+Many thanks to all of you who have contributed in the past and thanks
+in advance for your generosity in the future.
+
+\section{Contacts and information}
+\label{contacts}
+
+In addition to the sources mentioned above, \LaTeX{} has its home page
+on the World Wide Web at:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   http://www.latex-project.org/
+\end{verbatim}
+This page describes \LaTeX{} and the \LaTeX3 project, and contains
+pointers to other \LaTeX{} resources, such as the user guides, the
+\TeX{} Frequently Asked Questions, and the \LaTeX{} bugs database.
+
+More general information, including contacts for local User Groups,
+can be accessed via:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   http://www.tug.org/
+\end{verbatim}
+
+The electronic home of anything \TeX-related is the Comprehensive
+\TeX{} Archive Network (CTAN).  This is a network of cooperating ftp
+sites, with over a gigabyte of \TeX{} material:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   ftp://cam.ctan.org/tex-archive/
+   ftp://dante.ctan.org/tex-archive/
+   ftp://tug.ctan.org/tex-archive/
+\end{verbatim}
+
+For more information, see the \LaTeX{} home page.
+
+
+\end{document}
+
+
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltxdoc.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltxdoc.dtx
index 80390a76fcf..ec92e49697c 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltxdoc.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltxdoc.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 % \iffalse meta-comment
 %
-% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006
 % The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 % in this file. 
 % 
@@ -8,12 +8,12 @@
 % -------------------------------------------
 % 
 % It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
 % of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 % The latest version of this license is in
 %    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
 % 
 % This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
 % 
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltxref.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltxref.dtx
index f0435c49261..f0fc582a018 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltxref.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltxref.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 % \iffalse meta-comment
 %
-% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006
 % The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 % in this file. 
 % 
@@ -8,12 +8,12 @@
 % -------------------------------------------
 % 
 % It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
 % of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 % The latest version of this license is in
 %    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
 % 
 % This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
 % 
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/makeindx.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/makeindx.dtx
index 563058817f2..74e93e5a439 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/makeindx.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/makeindx.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 % \iffalse meta-comment
 %
-% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006
 % The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 % in this file. 
 % 
@@ -8,12 +8,12 @@
 % -------------------------------------------
 % 
 % It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
 % of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 % The latest version of this license is in
 %    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
 % 
 % This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
 % 
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/makeindx.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/makeindx.ins
index 73e45c3f7c4..c9e1d54d56b 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/makeindx.ins
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/makeindx.ins
@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
 %% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
 %% LaTeX or TeX.
 %%
-%% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+%% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005
 %% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 %% in this file. 
 %% 
@@ -11,12 +11,12 @@
 %% -------------------------------------------
 %% 
 %% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3b
 %% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 %% The latest version of this license is in
 %%    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%% and version 1.3b or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+%% version 2005/12/01 or later.
 %% 
 %% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
 %% 
@@ -40,7 +40,7 @@
 
 This is a generated file.
 
-Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006
 The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 in this file. 
 
@@ -48,12 +48,12 @@ This file was generated from file(s) of the LaTeX base system.
 --------------------------------------------------------------
 
 It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
 of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 The latest version of this license is in
    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
+and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+version 2005/12/01 or later.
 
 This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
 
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/modguide.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/modguide.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..c5585ffb32b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/modguide.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,412 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file. 
+% 
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+% 
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+%    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
+% 
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+% 
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+% 
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution 
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with 
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+% 
+% \fi
+% Filename: modguide.tex
+
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1995/12/01]
+ 
+\documentclass{ltxguide}[1995/11/28]
+
+\newcommand{\reasonsection}[1]{\subsubsection*{\it #1}}
+
+\newcommand{\nstex}{\textsf{NS-TeX}}
+
+\setcounter{secnumdepth}{-1}
+
+\title{Modifying \LaTeX}
+ 
+\author{\copyright~Copyright 1995, \LaTeX3 Project Team.\\
+   All rights reserved.}
+ 
+\date{12 December 1995}
+ 
+\begin{document}
+ 
+\maketitle
+ 
+\tableofcontents
+
+\begin{abstract}
+  This document was produced in response to suggestions that the
+  modification and distribution conditions for the files constituting
+  the New Standard \LaTeX{} system should be similar to those implied
+  by Version~2 of the \textsc{GNU} General Public Licence, as
+  published by the Free Software Foundation.
+\end{abstract}
+
+\section{Introduction}
+\label{sec:intro}
+
+This article describes the principles underlying our policy on
+distribution and modification of the files comprising the \LaTeX{}
+system.  It has been produced as a result of detailed discussions of
+the issues involved in the support and maintenance of a widely
+distributed document processing system used by diverse people for many
+applications.  These discussions have involved users, maintainers of
+installations that support \LaTeX{} and various types of organisations
+that distribute it.  The discussions are continuing and we hope that
+the ideas in this article will make a useful contribution to the
+debate.
+
+Our aim is that \LaTeX{} should be a system which can be trusted by
+users of all types to fulfill their needs.  Such a system must be
+stable and well-maintained.  This implies that it must be reasonably
+easy to maintain (otherwise it will simply not get maintained at
+all).  So here is a summary of our basic philosophy:
+\begin{quote}
+  We believe that the freedom to rely on a widely-used standard for
+  document interchange and formatting is as important as the freedom to
+  experiment with the contents of files.
+
+  We are therefore adopting a policy similar to that which Donald
+  Knuth applies to modifications of the underlying \TeX{} system: that
+  certain files, together with their names, are part of the system and
+  therefore the contents of these files should not be changed unless
+  the following conditions are met:
+  \begin{itemize}
+  \item they are clearly marked as being no longer part of the
+    standard system;
+  \item the name of the file is changed.
+  \end{itemize}
+\end{quote}
+
+
+\section{The system}
+\label{sec:sys}
+
+In developing this philosophy, and the consequent limitations on how
+modifications of the system should be carried out, we were heavily
+influenced by the following facts concerning the current widespread
+and wide-ranging uses of the \LaTeX{} system.
+\begin{enumerate}
+\item  \LaTeX{} is not just a document processing system;
+  it also defines a language for document exchange.
+
+\item The standard document class files, and some other files, also
+  define a particular formatting of a document.
+
+\item  The packages that we maintain define a particular document
+  interface and, in some cases, particular formatting of parts of a
+  document. 
+  
+\item The interfaces between different parts of the \LaTeX{} system
+  are very complex and it is therefore very difficult to check that a
+  change to one file does not affect the functionality of both that
+  file and also other parts of the system not obviously connected to
+  the file that has been changed.
+\end{enumerate}
+
+This leads us to the general principle that:
+\begin{quote}
+  with certain special exceptions, if you change the contents of a
+  file then the changed version should have a different file name.
+\end{quote}
+
+We certainly do not wish to prevent people from experimenting with the
+code in different ways and adapting it to their purposes.  However, we
+are concerned that any distribution of modifications to the code
+should be very clearly identified as not being a part of the standard
+distribution.  The exact wording and form of the distribution
+conditions is thus something that is flexible, but only within the
+constraint of keeping \LaTeX{} as a standardised, reliable product for
+the purposes described above: the exchange and formatting of
+documents.
+
+
+\section{Some examples}
+\label{sec:expl}
+
+Here we elaborate the arguments that have led us to the above
+conclusion.
+
+
+\reasonsection{Separate development considered harmful!}
+\label{sec:ja}
+
+In many fields, the use of \LaTeX{} as a language for communication
+is just as important as its capacity for fine typesetting; this is a
+very important consideration for a large population of authors,
+journal editors, archivists, etc.
+
+Related to this issue of portability is the fact that the file names
+are part of the end-user syntax.
+
+As a real example, the \LaTeX{} `tools' collection contains the
+package `array.sty'.  A new user-level feature was added to this file
+at the end of 1994 and a document using this feature can contain the
+line:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \usepackage{array}[1994/10/16]
+\end{verbatim}
+  
+By supplying the optional argument, the document author is indicating
+that a version of the file \texttt{array.sty} dated no earlier than
+that date is required to run this document without error.
+
+This feature would be totally worthless if we were to allow an
+alternative version of the array package to be distributed under the
+same name since it would mean that there would be in circulation files
+of a later date, but without the new feature.  If the document
+were processed using this `alternative array' then it would certainly
+produce `undefined command' errors and would probably not be
+processable at all.
+ 
+
+\reasonsection{What's in a file-name?}
+\label{sec:jb}
+
+In a pure markup language, such as SGML, it is reasonably clear that
+control over the final presentation lies with the receiver of a
+document and not with the author.
+
+However, the way that \LaTeX{} is often used in practice means that
+most people (at least when using the standard classes and packages)
+expect the formatting to be preserved when they send the document to
+another site.
+
+For example, suppose, as is still the most common use of \LaTeX{} in
+publishing, you produce a document for `camera-ready-copy' using the
+class `article' and that you carefully tune the formatting by, for
+example, adding some explicit line breaks etc, to ensure that it fits
+the 8 page limit set by the editor a journal or proceedings.
+
+It then gets sent to the editor or a referee who, without anyone
+knowing, has a non-standard version of the class file `article' and so
+it then runs to 9 pages.  The consequence of this will, at the least,
+be a lot of wasted time whilst everyone involved works out what has
+gone wrong; it will probably also lead to everyone blaming each other
+for something which was in fact caused by a misguided distribution
+policy.
+
+It should also be noted that, for most people, the version of the
+class file `article' that gets used is decided by a site maintainer
+or the compilers of a CD-ROM distribution.  To most users,
+the symbols \texttt{a\,r\,t\,i\,c\,l\,e} in:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \documentclass{article}
+\end{verbatim}
+are just as much part of \LaTeX{}'s syntax as are the symbols
+\texttt{1\,2\,p\,t} in:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \hspace{12pt}
+\end{verbatim}
+Thus they should both define a standard formatting rather than
+sometimes producing 1 more page or a 5pt larger space.
+
+Users rely on the fact that the command (or menu item) `LaTeX'
+produces a completely standard \LaTeX, including the fact that
+`article' is the `standard article'.  They would not be at all happy
+if the person who installed and maintains \LaTeX{} for them were
+allowed to customise `article' every second day so as (in her or his
+opinion) to improve the layout; or because another user wanted to write
+a document in a different language or typeset one with different fonts.
+
+\reasonsection{\TeX{} itself}
+\label{sec:tex}
+
+We have modelled our policies on those of the \TeX{} system since this
+has for some time now been widely acknowledged as a very stable and
+high quality typesetting system.
+
+The distribution policy set up by Donald Knuth for \TeX{} has the
+following features:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item There is a clearly specified method for changing parts of the
+  software by the use of `change files'.
+\item Although arbitrary changes are allowed, the resulting program
+  can be called \TeX{} only if its functionality is precisely the same
+  as that of \TeX{} (i.e.~neither less nor more) in all important
+  areas.
+\item There are many files in the system that cannot be changed at all
+  (without changing the name): examples are the file
+  \texttt{plain.tex} and the files associated with fonts, including
+  the Metafont source files.
+\end{itemize}
+
+
+\reasonsection{Maintaining complexity}
+\label{sec:compl}
+
+Our experience of maintaining \LaTeX{} has shown us just how complex
+are the interactions between different parts of the system.
+
+We have therefore, with lots of help from the bug reports you send in,
+developed a large suite of test files which we run to check the
+effects of every change we make.  A non-negligible percentage of these
+test runs give unexpected results and hence show up some unexpected
+dependency in the system.
+
+
+\section{Some assurances}
+\label{sec:conc}
+
+We are certainly not attempting to stop people reformatting \LaTeX{}
+documents in any way they wish.  There are many ways of customising
+incoming documents to your personal style that do not involve changing
+the contents of \LaTeX{}'s standard files; indeed, this freedom is one
+of the system's many advantages.
+The simplest way to achieve this is to replace
+\begin{quote}
+\verb|\documentclass{article}|\quad by\quad
+\verb|\documentclass{myart}| 
+\end{quote}
+
+Nor do we wish to discourage the production of new packages improving
+on the functionality or implementation of those we distribute.  All we
+ask is that, in the best interests of all \LaTeX{} users, you give
+your superbly improved class or package file some other name. 
+
+\section{Configuration possibilities}
+\label{sec:conposs}
+
+The standard \LaTeX{} system format can be configured in several ways
+to suit the needs and resources of an installation.  For example, the
+loading of fonts and font tables can be customised to match the font
+shapes, families and encodings normally used in text mode.  Also, by
+producing the appropriate font definition files, the font tables
+themselves can be set up to take advantage of the available fonts and
+sizes.  The loading of hyphenation patterns can be adjusted to cover
+the languages used; this has to be done as part of making the format
+since this is the only stage at which patterns can be loaded.
+
+A complete list of these configuration possibilities can be found in
+the distributed guide \emph{Configuration options for} \LaTeXe{}
+(\texttt{cfgguide.tex}).  However, as it says there, the number of
+configuration possibilities is strictly limited; we hope that having
+read this far you will appreciate the reasons for this decision.  One
+consequence of this is that there is no provision for a general
+purpose configuration file, or for adding extra code just before the
+|\dump| of the format file.
+
+This was a deliberate decision and we hope that everyone (yes, that
+includes you!) will support its intent.  Otherwise there will be a
+rapid return to the very situation, of several incompatible versions
+of \LaTeX~2.09, that originally prompted us to produce \LaTeXe{}: the
+new, and \emph{only}, `Standard \LaTeX'.  This will make \LaTeX{}
+unmaintainable and, hence, unmaintained (by us, at least).
+
+\begin{quote}
+  Therefore you should not misuse the configuration files or other
+  parts of the distribution to produce non-standard versions of
+  \LaTeX{}.
+\end{quote}
+
+Some of the allowed configurations can result in a system that can produce
+documents that are no longer `formatting compatible'; for example, the
+use of different default fonts will most likely produce different line
+and page breaks.  If you do produce a system that is configured in
+such a way that it is not `formatting compatible' then you should
+consider carefully the needs of users who need to create portable
+documents.  A good way to provide for their needs is to make
+available, in addition, a standard form of \LaTeX{} without any
+`formatting incompatible' customisations.
+
+
+\section{Modification conditions}
+\label{sec:modcon}
+
+It is possible that you need to produce a document processing system
+based on standard \LaTeX{} but with functionality that cannot be
+implemented by using the approved configuration files and complying
+with the restriction on the code that is allowed in them.  In other
+words, you may need a system which is sufficiently distinct from
+Standard \LaTeX{} that it is not feasible to do this simply by using
+the configuration options we provide or by producing new classes and
+packages.
+
+If you do produce such a system then, for the reasons described
+above, you should ensure that your system is clearly distinguished
+from Standard \LaTeX{} in every possible way, including the following.
+
+
+\begin{enumerate}
+\item
+  Give your system a distinguished name, such as \nstex, which clearly
+  distinguishes it from \LaTeX{}.
+
+\item
+  Ensure that it contains no file with a name the same as that of
+  a file in the standard distribution but with different contents.
+  (If this is not possible then you must: 
+  \begin{itemize}
+  \item
+    ensure that files from the non-\LaTeX{} system cannot be
+    accidentally accessed whilst using a standard \LaTeX{};
+  \item ensure that each file from the non-\LaTeX{} system clearly
+    identifies itself as a non-\LaTeX{} file on the terminal and in the
+    log file.)
+  \end{itemize}
+
+\item
+  Ensure that the method used to run your system is clearly
+\label{mcon:command}
+  distinct from that used to run Standard \LaTeX; e.g.~by using a
+  command name or menu entry that is clearly not \texttt{latex}
+  (or \texttt{LaTeX} etc).
+
+\item
+  Ensure that, when a file is being processed by your system, the
+  use of non-standard \LaTeX{} is clearly proclaimed to the user by
+  whatever means is appropriate.
+
+\item Ensure that what is written at the beginning of the log file
+  clearly shows that your system has been used, and that it is 
+  not Standard \LaTeX{}.
+  See the file \texttt{cfgguide.tex} for how to achieve this.
+
+\item
+ Clearly explain to users that bug reports concerning your 
+ system should not be sent to the maintainers of Standard
+ \LaTeX{}. 
+\end{enumerate}
+
+\subsection*{Note to system administrators}
+
+If you install a non-standard (modified) version of \LaTeX{} on a
+multi-user site then please, in addition, install Standard \LaTeX{}
+and observe the conditions enumerated above, particularly
+\ref{mcon:command}.
+
+
+\section{What do you think?}
+\label{sec:you}
+
+We are interested in your views on the issues raised in this document.
+The best way to let us know what you think, and to discuss your ideas
+with others, is to join the \texttt{LaTeX-L} mailing list and send your
+comments there.
+To subscribe to this list, mail to:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   listserv@urz.uni-heidelberg.de
+\end{verbatim}
+the following one line message:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   subscribe LATEX-L <your-first-name> <your-second-name>
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/newdc.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/newdc.ins
index 1e02efda6f7..9fda3c5e4b5 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/newdc.ins
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/newdc.ins
@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
 %% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
 %% LaTeX or TeX.
 %%
-%% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+%% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005
 %% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 %% in this file. 
 %% 
@@ -11,12 +11,12 @@
 %% -------------------------------------------
 %% 
 %% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3b
 %% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 %% The latest version of this license is in
 %%    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%% and version 1.3b or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+%% version 2005/12/01 or later.
 %% 
 %% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
 %% 
@@ -40,7 +40,7 @@
 
 This is a generated file.
 
-Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005
 The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 in this file. 
 
@@ -48,12 +48,12 @@ This file was generated from file(s) of the LaTeX base system.
 --------------------------------------------------------------
 
 It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
 of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 The latest version of this license is in
    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
+and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+version 2005/12/01 or later.
 
 This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the LaTeX
 base system. You may however distribute the LaTeX base system without
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/newlfont.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/newlfont.dtx
index e400850f680..f4e0c1b35ec 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/newlfont.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/newlfont.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 % \iffalse meta-comment
 %
-% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006
 % The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 % in this file. 
 % 
@@ -8,12 +8,12 @@
 % -------------------------------------------
 % 
 % It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
 % of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 % The latest version of this license is in
 %    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
 % 
 % This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
 % 
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/nfssfont.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/nfssfont.dtx
index 02da5a8db9d..85cf29fca2d 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/nfssfont.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/nfssfont.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 % \iffalse meta-comment
 %
-% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006
 % The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 % in this file. 
 % 
@@ -8,12 +8,12 @@
 % -------------------------------------------
 % 
 % It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
 % of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 % The latest version of this license is in
 %    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
 % 
 % This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
 % 
@@ -26,10 +26,10 @@
 % extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
 % 
 % \fi
-\def\nfssfontfileversion{v2.1a}
-\def\nfssfontfiledate{2003/01/12}
+\def\nfssfontfileversion{v2.2b}
+\def\nfssfontfiledate{2006/01/08}
 
-% \CheckSum{1182}
+% \CheckSum{1226}
 %% \CharacterTable
 %%  {Upper-case    \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
 %%   Lower-case    \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
@@ -48,7 +48,7 @@
 %
 % \iffalse
 % Copyright (C) 1994 Donald E. Knuth
-% Copyright (C) 1994-94,2003 Frank Mittelbach,
+% Copyright (C) 1994-94, 2003, 2006 Frank Mittelbach,
 % all rights reserved.
 % \fi
 % 
@@ -124,12 +124,14 @@
 % code documentation. Any volunteers?
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 %<*code>
-\documentclass{article}               %FMi
-\nofiles                              %FMi
-\textwidth=470pt                      %FMi
-\oddsidemargin=0pt                    %FMi
-\textheight=1000pt                    %FMi
-\def\sevenrm{\fontsize{7}{9pt}\rmfamily}    %FMi
+\documentclass{article}
+\nofiles
+\setlength\textwidth{470pt}
+\setlength\oddsidemargin{0pt}
+\addtolength\textheight{7\baselineskip}
+\addtolength\topmargin{-3\baselineskip}
+
+\def\sevenrm{\fontencoding{OT1}\fontsize{7}{9pt}\rmfamily}
 
 \typeout{**********************************************}
 \typeout{* NFSS font test program version <\nfssfontfileversion>}
@@ -168,23 +170,65 @@
    {Input external font name, e.g., cmr10^^J%
     (or <enter> for NFSS classification of font):}%
 %    \end{macrocode}
+%    If the answer is a real font name (like ``cmr10'') then we have no idea
+%    what the encoding of this font is, so in this case we record the word
+%    ``unknown'' and internally assume |T1| encoding. Commands other than
+%    |\table| are then most likely going to fail, unless that assumption was
+%    correct.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\encoding{unkown}%
+ \fontencoding{T1}\selectfont
+%    \end{macrocode}
 %    If the user answers with ``return'' we ask for the \NFSS{}
 %    classification of the font in form of encoding, family, series,
 %    shape, and size offering a default each time.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
  \ifx\currfontname\empty
-  \begingroup
   \typein[\encoding]{^^J^^J*** NFSS classification 
                      ***^^J^^JFont encoding [T1]:}%
   \ifx\encoding\empty
    \fontencoding{T1}%
+   \def\encoding{T1}%
   \else
 %    \end{macrocode}
-%    The requested encoding might not be loaded, so we pretend that it
-%    was loaded here to avoid an error, after all we only need it to
-%    find out the external font name.
+%    Depending on the chosen encoding we have the problem, that the encoding
+%    support information may not be available (only for |T1| and |OT1| this is
+%    preloaded in the kernel, all other encodings normally need a declaration in
+%    the preamble). So here we attempt to load this support file even though
+%    it is actually already too late for this.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \edef\next{%
+      \lowercase{\def\noexpand\next{\encoding enc.def}}}%
+    \next
+    \makeatletter
+    \InputIfFileExists\next
+       {}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    If the encoding support file is not found this may indicate an error, eg
+%    something misspelled. However, it may equally mean that we dealing
+%    with a math font encoding for which no encoding support is
+%    available.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+       {\PackageWarningNoLine{nfssfont}%
+        {Encoding file `\next' not found.%
+          \MessageBreak
+           You might have misspelt the name of the encoding 
+          \MessageBreak
+           or perhaps this encoding is not a text encoding,
+         \MessageBreak
+           in which case you will probably only be able to
+         \MessageBreak
+           run the \noexpand\table command successfully}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    But actually the situation is even worse, as some math
+%    encodings do have such support files. So for them we need to make the encoding
+%    known to NFSS in some other way, otherwise we could not even find the
+%    external font name, let alone typesetting a |\table|.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
-    \expandafter\let\csname T@\encoding\endcsname\empty
+       \expandafter\let\csname T@\encoding\endcsname\empty
+       }%
+    \makeatother
+    \let\next\relax
     \fontencoding\encoding
   \fi
   \typein[\family]{Font family [cmr]:}%
@@ -213,10 +257,9 @@
     \fontsize\size\size
   \fi
 %    \end{macrocode}
-%    Finally select the font and globally assign it to |\currfontname|.
+%    Finally select the font and assign it to |\currfontname|.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
-  \selectfont\xdef\currfontname{\fontname\font}%
-  \endgroup
+  \selectfont\edef\currfontname{\fontname\font}%
  \fi
  \startfont
  \message{Now type a test command (\string\help\space for help):}}
@@ -224,7 +267,8 @@
 %    
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \def\startfont{\font\testfont=\currfontname
-  \leftline{\sevenrm Test of \currfontname\unskip\ on \today\ at \hours}
+  \leftline{\sevenrm Test of font \currfontname\unskip\ (encoding 
+            \encoding\unskip) on \today\ at \hours}
   \medskip
   \testfont \setbaselineskip
   \ifdim\fontdimen6\testfont<10pt \rightskip=0pt plus 20pt
@@ -344,11 +388,14 @@ and you can use ordinary TeX commands (e.g., to \input a file).}}}
   \\M \\N \\O \\P \\Q \\R \\S \\T \\U \\V \\W \\X \\Y \\Z$\par}
  \math\endgroup}
 %    \end{macrocode}
-%    
+%    Here we have to ensure that we use a suitable encoding otherwise our
+%    octal and hexadecimal constants will appear in whatever encoding the
+%    current font is.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\oct#1{\hbox{\rmfamily\'{}\kern-.2em\itshape
-           #1\/\kern.05em}} % octal constant
-\def\hex#1{\hbox{\rmfamily\H{}\ttfamily#1}} % hexadecimal constant
+\def\oct#1{\hbox{\fontencoding{OT1}\rmfamily\'{}\kern-.2em\itshape
+           #1\/\kern.05em}}% octal constant
+\def\hex#1{\hbox{\fontencoding{OT1}\rmfamily
+           \H{}\ttfamily#1}}% hexadecimal constant
 \def\setdigs#1"#2{\gdef\h{#2}% \h=hex prefix; \0\1=corresponding octal
  \m=\n \divide\m by 64 \xdef\0{\the\m}%
  \multiply\m by-64 \advance\m by\n \divide\m by 8 \xdef\1{\the\m}}
@@ -413,8 +460,8 @@ inculcating love and reverence for the great principles of government
 as derived from the inalienable rights of man to life, liberty, and
 the pursuit of happiness.'' \moretext
 (!`THE DAZED BROWN FOX QUICKLY GAVE 12345--67890 JUMPS!)\par}}
-\def\moretext{?`But aren't Kafka's Schlo{\ss} and {\AE}sop's
-{\OE}uvres often na{\"\i}ve vis-\`a-vis the d{\ae}monic ph{\oe}nix's
+\def\moretext{?`But aren't Kafka's Schlo\ss{} and \AE sop's
+\OE uvres often na\"\i ve vis-\`a-vis the d\ae monic ph\oe nix's
 official r\^ole in fluffy souffl\'es? }
 \def\omitaccents{\let\moretext=\relax}
 
@@ -422,17 +469,25 @@ official r\^ole in fluffy souffl\'es? }
 %    \end{macrocode}
 %    
 %    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\bye{\end{document}}       %FMi
+\def\bye{\end{document}}
 %    \end{macrocode}
 %
 %    The redefinition of |\typeout| around the |\begin{document}|
 %    prevents \LaTeX{} from reporting that there is no |.aux| file.
 %    This is a bad hack, I agree :-)
 %    \begin{macrocode}
-\let\oldtypeout\typeout        %FMi
-\def\typeout#1{}               %FMi
-\begin{document}               %FMi
-\let\typeout\oldtypeout        %FMi
+\let\oldtypeout\typeout
+\def\typeout#1{}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    And another bad hack: to be able to load an encoding definition file
+%    after |\begin{document}| I disable the preamble only setting.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\makeatletter
+\let\@preamblecmds\@empty
+\makeatother
+
+\begin{document}
+\let\typeout\oldtypeout
 
 \ifx\noinit!\else\init\fi
 %</code>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/nfssfont.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/nfssfont.ins
index 1c08e06029b..756ef1e3713 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/nfssfont.ins
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/nfssfont.ins
@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
 %% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
 %% LaTeX or TeX.
 %%
-%% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+%% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005
 %% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 %% in this file. 
 %% 
@@ -11,12 +11,12 @@
 %% -------------------------------------------
 %% 
 %% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3b
 %% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 %% The latest version of this license is in
 %%    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%% and version 1.3b or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+%% version 2005/12/01 or later.
 %% 
 %% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
 %% 
@@ -40,7 +40,7 @@
 
 This is a generated file.
 
-Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006
 The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 in this file. 
 
@@ -48,12 +48,12 @@ This file was generated from file(s) of the LaTeX base system.
 --------------------------------------------------------------
 
 It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
 of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 The latest version of this license is in
    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
+and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+version 2005/12/01 or later.
 
 This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
 
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/olddc.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/olddc.ins
index fb79a18f460..47ad1661c7f 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/olddc.ins
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/olddc.ins
@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
 %% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
 %% LaTeX or TeX.
 %%
-%% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+%% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005
 %% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 %% in this file. 
 %% 
@@ -11,12 +11,12 @@
 %% -------------------------------------------
 %% 
 %% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3b
 %% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 %% The latest version of this license is in
 %%    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%% and version 1.3b or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+%% version 2005/12/01 or later.
 %% 
 %% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
 %% 
@@ -40,7 +40,7 @@
 
 This is a generated file.
 
-Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005
 The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 in this file. 
 
@@ -48,12 +48,12 @@ This file was generated from file(s) of the LaTeX base system.
 --------------------------------------------------------------
 
 It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
 of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 The latest version of this license is in
    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
+and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+version 2005/12/01 or later.
 
 This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the LaTeX
 base system. You may however distribute the LaTeX base system without
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/oldlfont.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/oldlfont.dtx
index 08856eac7f7..64e5fa44bfb 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/oldlfont.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/oldlfont.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 % \iffalse meta-comment
 %
-% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006
 % The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 % in this file. 
 % 
@@ -8,12 +8,12 @@
 % -------------------------------------------
 % 
 % It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
 % of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 % The latest version of this license is in
 %    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
 % 
 % This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
 % 
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/preload.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/preload.dtx
index 20415b73b4d..e2b3171c0f1 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/preload.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/preload.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 % \iffalse meta-comment
 %
-% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006
 % The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 % in this file. 
 % 
@@ -8,12 +8,12 @@
 % -------------------------------------------
 % 
 % It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
 % of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 % The latest version of this license is in
 %    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
 % 
 % This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
 % 
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/proc.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/proc.dtx
index 9ecc070aa7b..49f7d70ff22 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/proc.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/proc.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 % \iffalse meta-comment
 %
-% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006
 % The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 % in this file. 
 % 
@@ -8,12 +8,12 @@
 % -------------------------------------------
 % 
 % It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
 % of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 % The latest version of this license is in
 %    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
 % 
 % This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
 % 
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/proc.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/proc.ins
index 38d5985202c..911090c1668 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/proc.ins
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/proc.ins
@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
 %% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
 %% LaTeX or TeX.
 %%
-%% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+%% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005
 %% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 %% in this file. 
 %% 
@@ -11,12 +11,12 @@
 %% -------------------------------------------
 %% 
 %% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3b
 %% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 %% The latest version of this license is in
 %%    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%% and version 1.3b or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+%% version 2005/12/01 or later.
 %% 
 %% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
 %% 
@@ -40,7 +40,7 @@
 
 This is a generated file.
 
-Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006
 The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 in this file. 
 
@@ -48,12 +48,12 @@ This file was generated from file(s) of the LaTeX base system.
 --------------------------------------------------------------
 
 It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
 of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 The latest version of this license is in
    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
+and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+version 2005/12/01 or later.
 
 This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
 
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/slides.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/slides.dtx
index 2582a414d83..aba13762f69 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/slides.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/slides.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 % \iffalse meta-comment
 %
-% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006
 % The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 % in this file. 
 % 
@@ -8,12 +8,12 @@
 % -------------------------------------------
 % 
 % It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
 % of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 % The latest version of this license is in
 %    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
 % 
 % This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
 % 
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/slides.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/slides.ins
index 753528f9f29..052baf9a21b 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/slides.ins
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/slides.ins
@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
 %% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
 %% LaTeX or TeX.
 %%
-%% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+%% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005
 %% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 %% in this file. 
 %% 
@@ -11,12 +11,12 @@
 %% -------------------------------------------
 %% 
 %% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3b
 %% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 %% The latest version of this license is in
 %%    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%% and version 1.3b or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+%% version 2005/12/01 or later.
 %% 
 %% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
 %% 
@@ -40,7 +40,7 @@
 
 This is a generated file.
 
-Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006
 The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 in this file. 
 
@@ -48,12 +48,12 @@ This file was generated from file(s) of the LaTeX base system.
 --------------------------------------------------------------
 
 It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
 of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 The latest version of this license is in
    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
+and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+version 2005/12/01 or later.
 
 This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
 
@@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
 
 This is a generated file.  
 
-Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005
 The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 in this file. 
 
@@ -96,12 +96,12 @@ This file was generated from file(s) of the LaTeX base system.
 --------------------------------------------------------------
 
 It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
 of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 The latest version of this license is in
    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
+and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+version 2005/12/01 or later.
 
 This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the LaTeX
 base system. You may however distribute the LaTeX base system without
@@ -125,7 +125,7 @@ the system are in the document `cfgguide.tex'.
 
 This is a generated file.
 
-Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005
 The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 in this file. 
 
@@ -133,12 +133,12 @@ This file was generated from file(s) of the LaTeX base system.
 --------------------------------------------------------------
 
 It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
 of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 The latest version of this license is in
    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
+and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+version 2005/12/01 or later.
 
 This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the LaTeX
 base system. You may however distribute the LaTeX base system without
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/slifonts.fdd b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/slifonts.fdd
index a3e3f3f1971..09c2536cdeb 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/slifonts.fdd
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/slifonts.fdd
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 % \iffalse meta-comment
 %
-% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006
 % The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 % in this file. 
 % 
@@ -8,12 +8,12 @@
 % -------------------------------------------
 % 
 % It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
 % of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 % The latest version of this license is in
 %    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
 % 
 % This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
 % 
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/source2e.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/source2e.tex
index facf8547381..98fef6b5331 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/source2e.tex
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/source2e.tex
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 % \iffalse meta-comment
 %
-% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006
 % The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 % in this file. 
 % 
@@ -8,17 +8,23 @@
 % -------------------------------------------
 % 
 % It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.2
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
 % of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 % The latest version of this license is in
 %    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.2 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-% version 1999/12/01 or later.
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
+% 
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
 % 
 % The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
 % given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
 % information.
 % 
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution 
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with 
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+% 
 % \fi
 
 % This document will typeset the LaTeX sources as a single document.
@@ -301,7 +307,7 @@ page_precedence "rnaA"
 \hfuzz=\maxdimen
 
 \typeout{%
-  Produce change log with^^J%
+  \string # Produce change log with^^J%
   makeindex -s gglo.ist -o source2e.gls source2e.glo}
 
 
@@ -312,7 +318,7 @@ page_precedence "rnaA"
 % makeindex needs a symbol between the parts of composite page numbers
 % but we dont want one, so:
 \typeout{%
-  Produce index with^^J%
+  \string # Produce index with^^J%
   makeindex -s source2e.ist source2e.idx}
 
 \begingroup
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/syntonly.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/syntonly.dtx
index 3f549590488..869a0f7e609 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/syntonly.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/syntonly.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 % \iffalse meta-comment
 %
-% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006
 % The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 % in this file. 
 % 
@@ -8,12 +8,12 @@
 % -------------------------------------------
 % 
 % It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
 % of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 % The latest version of this license is in
 %    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
 % 
 % This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
 % 
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/syntonly.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/syntonly.ins
index b4aaa71c761..5f5113145e7 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/syntonly.ins
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/syntonly.ins
@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
 %% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
 %% LaTeX or TeX.
 %%
-%% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+%% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005
 %% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 %% in this file. 
 %% 
@@ -11,12 +11,12 @@
 %% -------------------------------------------
 %% 
 %% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3b
 %% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 %% The latest version of this license is in
 %%    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%% and version 1.3b or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+%% version 2005/12/01 or later.
 %% 
 %% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
 %% 
@@ -40,7 +40,7 @@
 
 This is a generated file.
 
-Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006
 The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 in this file. 
 
@@ -48,12 +48,12 @@ This file was generated from file(s) of the LaTeX base system.
 --------------------------------------------------------------
 
 It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
 of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 The latest version of this license is in
    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
+and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+version 2005/12/01 or later.
 
 This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
 
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/unpack.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/unpack.ins
index e2e47214875..c2a0d1bf74f 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/unpack.ins
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/unpack.ins
@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
 %% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
 %% LaTeX or TeX.
 %%
-%% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+%% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005
 %% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 %% in this file. 
 %% 
@@ -11,12 +11,12 @@
 %% -------------------------------------------
 %% 
 %% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3b
 %% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 %% The latest version of this license is in
 %%    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%% and version 1.3b or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+%% version 2005/12/01 or later.
 %% 
 %% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
 %% 
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/usrguide.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/usrguide.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..aa6d9415789
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/usrguide.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,1815 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file. 
+% 
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+% 
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+%    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
+% 
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+% 
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+% 
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution 
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with 
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+% 
+% \fi
+% Filename: usrguide.tex
+
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1995/12/01]
+
+\documentclass{ltxguide}[2001/05/28]
+
+\title{\LaTeXe~for authors}
+
+\author{\copyright~Copyright 1995--2005, \LaTeX3 Project Team.\\
+   All rights reserved.}
+
+\date{27 November 2005}
+
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\maketitle
+
+\tableofcontents
+
+\section{Introduction}
+
+Welcome to \LaTeXe, the new standard version of the \LaTeX{} Document
+Preparation System.
+
+This document describes how to take advantage of the new features of
+\LaTeX, and how to process your old \LaTeX{} documents with
+\LaTeXe. However, this document is only a brief introduction to the
+new facilities and is intended for authors who are already familiar
+with the old version of \LaTeX{}.  It is \emph{not} a reference manual
+for \LaTeXe{} nor is it a complete introduction to \LaTeX.
+
+It is somewhat of an historical document now, since \LaTeXe{} came into
+existence in 1994.
+
+\subsection[\LaTeXe---The new \LaTeX~release]
+  {\LaTeXe---The new \LaTeX~release\\ (well, for more than 10 years now)}
+
+The previous version of \LaTeX{} was known as \LaTeX~2.09.  Over the
+years many extensions have been developed for \LaTeX.  This is, of
+course, a sure sign of its continuing popularity but it has had one
+unfortunate result: incompatible \LaTeX{} formats came into use at
+different sites.  This included `standard \LaTeX~2.09', \LaTeX{} built
+with the \emph{New Font Selection Scheme}~(\NFSS), \SLiTeX, \AmSLaTeX,
+and so on.  Thus, to process documents from various places, a site
+maintainer was forced to keep multiple versions of the \LaTeX{}
+program.  In addition, when looking at a source file it was not always
+clear for which format the document was written.
+
+To put an end to this unsatisfactory situation, \LaTeXe{} has been
+produced; it brings all such extensions back under a single format and
+thus prevents the proliferation of mutually incompatible dialects of
+\LaTeX~2.09.  With \LaTeXe{} the `new font selection scheme' is
+standard and, for example, \textsf{amsmath} (formerly the \AmSLaTeX{}
+format) or \textsf{slides} (formerly the \SLiTeX{} format) are simply
+extensions, which may be loaded by documents using the same base format.
+
+The introduction of a new release also made it possible to add a small
+number of often-requested features and to make the task of writing
+packages and classes simpler.
+
+\subsection{\LaTeX3---The long-term future of \LaTeX}
+\label{Sec:ltx3}
+
+\LaTeXe{} is the consolidation step in a comprehensive
+reimplementation of the \LaTeX{} system.  The next major release of
+\LaTeX{} will be \LaTeX3, which will include a radical overhaul of the
+document designers' and package writers' interface to \LaTeX.
+
+\LaTeX3 is a long-term research project but, until it is completed,
+the project team are committed to the active maintenance of \LaTeXe{}.
+Thus the experience gained from the production and maintenance of
+\LaTeXe{} will be a major influence on the design of \LaTeX3.
+A brief description of the project can be found in the document
+|ltx3info.tex|.
+
+If you would like to support the project then you are welcome to send
+donations to the \LaTeX3 Project Fund; this has been set up to help
+the research team by financing various expenses associated with this
+voluntary work of maintaining the current \LaTeX{} and developing
+\LaTeX3.
+
+The fund is administered by The \TeX{} Users Group and by various
+local user groups.  Information about making donations and joining
+these groups is available from:
+\begin{quote}\small\label{addrs}
+   \texttt{http://www.tug.org/lugs.html}
+\end{quote}
+
+The \LaTeX3{} project has its home page
+on the World Wide Web at:
+\begin{verbatim}
+  http://www.latex-project.org/
+\end{verbatim}
+This page describes \LaTeX{} and the \LaTeX3 project, and contains
+pointers to other \LaTeX{} resources, such as the user guides, the
+\TeX{} Frequently Asked Questions, and the \LaTeX{} bugs database.
+
+Older articles covering aspects of the \LaTeX3 project are also
+available for anonymous ftp from the Comprehensive \TeX{} Archive, in
+the directory:
+\begin{verbatim}
+  tex-archive/info/ltx3pub
+\end{verbatim}
+The file |ltx3pub.bib| in that directory contains an abstract of each
+of the files.
+
+\subsection{Overview}
+
+This document contains an overview of the new structure and features
+of \LaTeX.  It is \emph{not} a self-contained document, as it contains
+only the features of \LaTeX{} which have changed since version 2.09.
+You should read this document in conjunction with an introduction to
+\LaTeX{}.
+
+\begin{description}
+
+\item[Section~\ref{Sec:class+packages}]
+   contains an overview of the new structure of
+   \LaTeX{} documents.  It describes how classes and packages work and
+   how class and package options can be used.  It lists the standard
+   packages and classes which come with \LaTeX.
+
+\item[Section~\ref{Sec:commands}] describes the new commands available
+   to authors in \LaTeXe.
+
+\item[Section~\ref{Sec:209}] shows how to process old \LaTeX{}
+   documents with \LaTeXe.
+
+\item[Section~\ref{Sec:problems}] contains advice on dealing with
+   problems you may encounter in running \LaTeXe.
+   It lists some error messages which are new in \LaTeXe{} and
+   it describes some of the more common problems and how to cure them,
+   or where to find further information.
+
+\end{description}
+
+\subsection{Further information}
+
+For a general introduction to \LaTeX, including the new features of
+\LaTeXe, you should read \emph{\LaTeXbook}
+by Leslie Lamport~\cite{A-W:LLa94}.
+
+A more detailed description of the new features of \LaTeX, including an
+overview of more than 200 packages and nearly 1000 ready to run examples, is
+to be found in \emph{\LaTeXcomp second edition} by Frank Mittelbach and
+Michel Goossens~\cite{A-W:MG2004}.
+
+Packages and programs for producing and manipulating graphics are
+discussed at length in \emph{\LaTeXGcomp} by Michel Goossens,
+Sebastian Rahtz and Frank Mittelbach~\cite{A-W:GRM97}.
+
+Solutions for publishing with \LaTeX{} on the World Wide Web are given
+in \emph{\LaTeXWcomp} by Michel Goossens and Sebastian
+Rahtz~\cite{A-W:GR99}.
+
+For more information about the many new \LaTeX{} packages you should
+read the package documentation, which should be available from the
+same source as your copy of \LaTeX.
+
+There are a number of documentation files which accompany every copy
+of \LaTeX.  A copy of \emph{\LaTeX{} News} will come out with each
+six-monthly release of \LaTeX; it will be found in the files
+|ltnews*.tex|.  The class- and package-writer's guide \emph{\clsguide}
+describes the new \LaTeX{} features for writers of document classes
+and packages; it is in |clsguide.tex|.  The guide \emph{\fntguide}
+describes the \LaTeX{} font selection scheme for class- and
+package-writers; it is in |fntguide.tex|. Support for Cyrillic languages
+in \LaTeX{} is described in \emph{\cyrguide}.
+
+The documented source code (from the files used to produce the kernel
+format via |latex.ltx|) is now available as
+\emph{The \LaTeXe\ Sources}.  ]
+This very large document also includes an index of
+\LaTeX{} commands.  It can be typeset from the \LaTeX{} file
+|source2e.tex| in the |base| directory, using the source files and
+the class file |ltxdoc.cls| from this directory.
+
+For more information about \TeX{} and \LaTeX{}, please contact your
+local \TeX{} Users Group, or the international \TeX{} Users Group (see
+page \pageref{addrs}).
+
+
+\section{Classes and packages}
+\label{Sec:class+packages}
+
+This section describes the new structure of \LaTeX{} documents and the
+new types of file: \emph{classes} and \emph{packages}.
+
+\subsection{What are classes and packages?}
+
+The main difference between \LaTeX~2.09 and \LaTeXe{} is in the
+commands before |\begin{document}|.
+
+In \LaTeX~2.09, documents had \emph{styles},
+such as \textsf{article} or \textsf{book}, and \emph{options},
+such as \textsf{twoside} or \textsf{epsfig}.
+These were indicated by the |\documentstyle| command:
+\begin{quote}
+   |\documentstyle|\oarg{options}\arg{style}
+\end{quote}
+For example, to specify a two-sided article with encapsulated
+PostScript figures, you said:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \documentstyle[twoside,epsfig]{article}
+\end{verbatim}
+However, there were two different types of document style option:
+\emph{built-in options} such as |twoside|; and \emph{packages} such as
+|epsfig.sty|.  These were very different, since any \LaTeX{} document
+style could use the \textsf{epsfig} package but only document styles
+which declared the \textsf{twoside} option could use that option.
+
+To avoid this confusion, \LaTeXe{} differentiates between built-in
+options and packages.  These are given by the new |\documentclass| and
+|\usepackage| commands:
+\begin{quote}
+   |\documentclass|\oarg{options}\arg{class} \\
+   |\usepackage|\oarg{options}\arg{packages}
+\end{quote}
+For example, to specify a two-sided article with encapsulated
+PostScript figures, you now write:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \documentclass[twoside]{article}
+   \usepackage{epsfig}
+\end{verbatim}
+You can load more than one package with a single |\usepackage|
+command; for example, rather than writing:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \usepackage{epsfig}
+   \usepackage{multicol}
+\end{verbatim}
+you can specify:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \usepackage{epsfig,multicol}
+\end{verbatim}
+Note that \LaTeXe{} still understands the \LaTeX~2.09 |\documentstyle|
+command.  This command causes \LaTeXe{} to enter \emph{\LaTeX~2.09
+compatibility mode}, which is described in Section~\ref{Sec:209}.
+
+You should not, however, use the |\documentstyle| command for new
+documents because this compatibility mode is very slow and the new
+features of \LaTeXe{} are not available in this mode.
+
+To help differentiate between classes and packages, document classes
+now end with |.cls| rather than |.sty|.  Packages still end with
+|.sty|, since most \LaTeX~2.09 packages work well with \LaTeXe.
+
+\subsection{Class and package options}
+
+In \LaTeX~2.09, only document styles could have options such as
+|twoside| or |draft|.  In \LaTeXe{}, both classes and packages are
+allowed to have options.  For example, to specify a two-sided article
+with graphics using the |dvips| driver, you write:
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \documentclass[twoside]{article}
+   \usepackage[dvips]{graphics}
+\end{verbatim}
+It is possible for packages to share common options.  For example,
+you could, in addition, load the \textsf{color} package by specifying:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \documentclass[twoside]{article}
+   \usepackage[dvips]{graphics}
+   \usepackage[dvips]{color}
+\end{verbatim}
+But because |\usepackage| allows more than one package to be listed,
+this can be shortened to:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \documentclass[twoside]{article}
+   \usepackage[dvips]{graphics,color}
+\end{verbatim}
+In addition, packages will also use each option given to
+the |\documentclass| command (if they know what to do with it), so you
+could also write:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \documentclass[twoside,dvips]{article}
+   \usepackage{graphics,color}
+\end{verbatim}
+Class and package options are covered in more detail in
+\emph{\LaTeXcomp} and in \emph{\clsguide}.
+
+\subsection{Standard classes}
+
+The following classes are distributed with \LaTeX:
+\begin{description}
+
+\item[article]  The |article| class described in \emph{\LaTeXbook}.
+\item[book]     The |book| class described in \emph{\LaTeXbook}.
+\item[report]   The |report| class described in \emph{\LaTeXbook}.
+\item[letter]   The |letter| class described in \emph{\LaTeXbook}.
+\item[slides]   The |slides| class described in \emph{\LaTeXbook},
+   formerly \SLiTeX.
+\item[proc]     A document class for proceedings, based on |article|.
+   Formerly the |proc| package.
+\item[ltxdoc]   The document class for documenting the \LaTeX{}
+   program, based on |article|.
+\item[ltxguide] The document class for \emph{\usrguide} and
+   \emph{\clsguide}, based on |article|.  The document you are reading
+   now uses the |ltxguide| class. The layout for this class is likely
+   to change in future releases of \LaTeX.
+\item[ltnews]   The document class for the \emph{\LaTeX{} News}
+   information sheet, based on |article|. The layout for this class
+   is likely to change in future releases of \LaTeX.
+\item[minimal]
+\NEWfeature{1995/12/01}
+   This class is the bare minimum (3 lines) that is needed in a
+   \LaTeX\ class file. It just sets the text width and height, and
+   defines |\normalsize|.  It is principally intended for debugging
+   and testing \LaTeX\ code in situations where you do not need to
+   load a `full' class such as |article|. If, however, you are
+   designing a completely new class that is aimed for documents with
+   structure radically different from the structure supplied by the
+   article class, then it may make sense to use this as a base and add
+   to it code implementing the required structure, rather than
+   starting from |article| and modifying the code there.
+\end{description}
+
+\subsection{Standard packages}
+\label{Sec:st-pack}
+
+The following packages are distributed with \LaTeX:
+\begin{description}
+\item[alltt]
+\NEWfeature{1994/12/01}
+   This package provides the |alltt| environment, which is like
+   the |verbatim| environment except that |\|, |{|, and |}|
+   have their usual meanings.  It is described in |alltt.dtx| and
+   \emph{\LaTeXbook}.
+\item[doc] This is the basic package for typesetting the documentation
+   of \LaTeX{} programs.  It is described in |doc.dtx| and in
+   \emph{\LaTeXcomp}.
+\item[exscale]  This provides scaled versions of the math extension
+   font.  It is described in |exscale.dtx| and \emph{\LaTeXcomp}.
+ \item[fontenc] This is used to specify which font encoding \LaTeX{}
+   should use.  It is described in |ltoutenc.dtx|.
+\item[graphpap]
+\NEWfeature{1994/12/01}
+   This package defines the |\graphpaper| command; this
+   can be used in a |picture| environment.
+\item[ifthen]   Provides commands of the form `if\dots then do\dots
+   otherwise do\dots'.
+   It is described in |ifthen.dtx| and \emph{\LaTeXcomp}.
+\item[inputenc]
+\NEWfeature{1994/12/01}
+   This is used to specify which input encoding \LaTeX{} should use.
+   It is described in |inputenc.dtx|.
+\item[latexsym] \LaTeXe{} no longer loads the \LaTeX{} symbol font by
+   default.  To access it, you should use the |latexsym| package.  It
+   is described in |latexsym.dtx| and in \emph{\LaTeXcomp}; see also
+   Section~\ref{Sec:problems}.
+ \item[makeidx] This provides commands for producing indexes.  It is
+   described in \emph{\LaTeXbook} and in \emph{\LaTeXcomp}.
+ \item[newlfont] This is used to emulate the font commands of
+   \LaTeX~2.09 with the New Font Selection Scheme. It is described in
+   \emph{\LaTeXcomp}.
+ \item[oldlfont] This is used to emulate the font commands of
+   \LaTeX~2.09.  It is described in \emph{\LaTeXcomp}.
+ \item[showidx]
+   This causes the argument of each |\index| command to
+   be printed on the page where it occurs.
+   It is described in \emph{\LaTeXbook}.
+ \item[syntonly] This is used to process a document without
+   typesetting it.  It is described in |syntonly.dtx| and in
+   \emph{\LaTeXcomp}.
+ \item[tracefnt] This allows you to control how much information about
+   \LaTeX's font loading is displayed.  It is described in
+   \emph{\LaTeXcomp}.
+\end{description}
+
+\subsection{Related software}
+
+\NEWdescription{1998/12/01}
+The following software should be available from the same distributor
+as your copy of \LaTeXe.  You should obtain at least the
+\textsf{graphics} and \textsf{tools} collections in order to have all
+the files described in \emph{\LaTeXbook}.  The |amsmath| package (part
+of \textsf{amslatex} and formerly known as |amstex|)
+and \textsf{babel} are also mentioned in the list
+of `standard packages' in section C.5.2 of that book.
+\begin{description}
+\item[amslatex]  Advanced mathematical typesetting from the American
+  Mathematical Society. This includes the |amsmath| package; it
+  provides many commands for typesetting mathematical formulas of
+  higher complexity.  It is produced and supported by the American
+  Mathematical Society and it is described in \emph{\LaTeXcomp}.
+\item[babel]  This package and related files support typesetting in
+  many languages. It is described in \emph{\LaTeXcomp}.
+\item[cyrillic]
+\NEWfeature{1998/12/01}
+  Everything you need (except the fonts themselves) for
+  typesetting with Cyrillic fonts.
+\item[graphics]  This includes the |graphics| package which
+  provides support for the inclusion and transformation of graphics,
+  including files produced by other software. Also included, is the
+  |color| package which provides support for typesetting in colour.
+  Both these packages are described in \emph{\LaTeXbook}.
+\item[psnfss]    Everything you need (except the fonts themselves) for
+  typesetting with a large range of Type~1 (PostScript) fonts.
+\item[tools]     Miscellaneous packages written by the \LaTeX3
+  project team.
+\end{description}
+These packages come with documentation and each of them is also
+described in at least one of the books \emph{\LaTeXcomp} and
+\emph{\LaTeXbook}.
+
+\subsubsection{Tools}
+
+This collection of packages includes, at least, the following (some
+files may have slightly different names on certain systems):
+
+\begin{description}
+\item[array]
+        Extended versions of the environments |array|, |tabular|
+        and |tabular*|, with many extra features.
+\item[calc]
+\NEWfeature{1996/12/01}
+        Enables the use of certain algebraic notation when specifying
+        values for lengths and counters.
+\item[dcolumn]
+        Alignment on `decimal points' in tabular entries. Requires the
+        |array| package.
+\item[delarray]
+        Adds `large delimiters' around arrays. Requires |array|.
+\item[hhline]
+        Finer control over horizontal rules in tables. Requires |array|.
+\item[longtable]
+        Multi-page tables. (Does not require |array|, but it uses the
+        extended features if both are loaded.)
+\item[tabularx]
+        Defines a |tabularx| environment that is similar to |tabular*|
+        but it modifies the column widths, rather than the inter-column
+        space, to achieve the desired table width.
+\item[afterpage]
+        Place text after the current page.
+\item[bm]
+        Access bold math symbols.
+\item[enumerate]
+        Extended version of the |enumerate| environment.
+\item[fontsmpl]
+        Package and test file for producing `font samples'.
+\item[ftnright]
+        Place all footnotes in the right-hand column in two-column mode.
+\item[indentfirst]
+        Indent the first paragraph of sections, etc.
+\item[layout]
+        Show the page layout defined by the current document class.
+\item[multicol]
+        Typeset text in columns, with the length of the columns
+        `balanced'.
+\item[rawfonts]
+        Preload fonts using the old internal font names of \LaTeX~2.09.
+        See Section~\ref{Sec:oldinternals}.
+\item[somedefs]
+       Selective handling of package options. (Used by the rawfonts
+       package.)
+\item[showkeys]
+        Prints the `keys' used by |\label|, |\ref|, |\cite| etc.; useful
+        whilst drafting.
+\item[theorem]
+       Flexible declaration of `theorem-like' environments.
+\item[varioref]
+       `Smart' handling of page references.
+\item[verbatim]
+        Flexible extension of the verbatim environment.
+\item[xr]
+       Cross reference other `external' documents.
+\item[xspace]
+       `Smart space' command that helps you to avoid the common mistake
+       of missing spaces after command names.
+\end{description}
+
+
+\section{Commands}
+\label{Sec:commands}
+
+This section describes the new commands available in \LaTeXe.
+They are covered in more detail in \emph{\LaTeXbook} and in
+\emph{\LaTeXcomp}.
+
+\subsection{Initial commands}
+
+Initial commands can appear only before the |\documentclass|
+line.
+
+\begin{decl}
+|\begin{filecontents}| \arg{file-name} \\
+  \m{file-contents} \\
+|\end{filecontents}|
+\end{decl}
+
+The |filecontents| environment is intended for bundling within a
+single document file the contents of packages, options, or other
+files.  When the document file is run through \LaTeXe{} the body of
+this environment is written verbatim (preceded by a comment line) to a
+file whose name is given as the environment's only argument.  However,
+if that file already exists then nothing happens except for an
+information message.
+
+Only normal ASCII text characters (7-bit visible text) should be
+included in a |filecontents| environment.  Anything else, such as tab
+characters, form-feeds or 8-bit characters, should not be included in a
+|filecontents| environment.
+
+Tabs and form feeds produce a warning, explaining that they are turned
+into spaces or blank lines, respectively.
+What happens to 8-bit characters depends on the \TeX{} installation and
+is in general unpredictable.
+
+The |filecontents| environment is used for including \LaTeX{} files.
+For other plain text files (such as Encapsulated PostScript files),
+you should use the |filecontents*| environment which does not add a
+comment line.
+
+These environments are allowed only before |\documentclass|.  This
+ensures that any packages that have been bundled in the document are
+present when needed.
+
+\subsection{Preamble commands}
+\label{Sec:pre}
+
+The changes to the preamble commands are intentionally designed to make
+\LaTeXe{} documents look clearly different from old documents.  The
+commands should be used only before |\begin{document}|.
+
+\begin{decl}
+|\documentclass| \oarg{option-list} \arg{class-name}
+   \oarg{release-date}
+\end{decl}
+
+This command replaces the
+\LaTeX~2.09 command |\documentstyle|.
+
+There must be exactly one |\documentclass| command in a document; and
+it must come after the |filecontents| environments, if any, but before
+any other commands.
+
+The \m{option-list} is a list of options, each of which may modify the
+formatting of elements which are defined in the \m{class-name} file,
+as well as those in all following |\usepackage| commands (see
+below).
+
+The optional argument \m{release-date} can be used to specify the
+earliest desired release date of the class file; it should contain a
+date in the format \textsc{yyyy/mm/dd}.  If a version of the class
+older than this date is found, a warning is issued.
+
+For example, to specify a two-column article, using a version of
+|article.cls| released after June 1994, you specify:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \documentclass[twocolumn]{article}[1994/06/01]
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\begin{decl}
+|\documentstyle| \oarg{option-list} \arg{class-name}
+\end{decl}
+
+This command is still supported for compatibility with old files.  It
+is essentially the same as |\documentclass| except that it invokes
+\emph{\LaTeX~2.09 compatibility mode}.  It also causes any options in
+the \m{option-list} that are not processed by the class file to be
+loaded as packages after the class has been loaded. See
+Section~\ref{Sec:209} for more details on \LaTeX~2.09 compatibility
+mode.
+
+\begin{decl}
+|\usepackage| \oarg{option-list} \arg{package-name} \oarg{release-date}
+\end{decl}
+
+Any number of |\usepackage| commands is allowed. Each package file
+(as denoted by \m{package-name}) defines new elements (or modifies
+those defined in the class file loaded by the \m{class-name} argument
+of the |\documentclass| command).  A package file thus extends the
+range of documents which can be processed.
+
+The \m{option-list} argument can contain a list of options, each of
+which can modify the formatting of elements which are defined in this
+\m{package-name} file.
+
+As above, \m{release-date} can contain the earliest desired release
+date of the package file in the format \textsc{yyyy/mm/dd}; if an
+older version of the package is found, a warning is issued.
+
+For example, to load the |graphics| package for the |dvips| driver,
+using a version of |graphics.sty| released after June 1994, you write:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \usepackage[dvips]{graphics}[1994/06/01]
+\end{verbatim}
+Each package is loaded only once.  If the same package is requested
+more than once, nothing happens in the second or following attempt
+unless the package has been requested with options that were not given
+in the original |\usepackage|. If such extra options are specified
+then an error message is produced. See Section~\ref{Sec:problems} how
+to resolve this problem.
+
+As well as processing the options given in the \m{option-list} of the
+|\usepackage| command, each package processes the
+\m{option-list} of the |\documentclass| command as well. This
+means that any option which should be processed by every package (to
+be precise, by every package that specifies an action for it) can be
+specified just once, in the |\documentclass| command, rather than
+being repeated for each package that needs it.
+
+\begin{decl}
+|\listfiles|
+\end{decl}
+
+If this command is placed in the preamble then a list of the files
+read in (as a result of processing the document) will be displayed
+on the terminal (and in the log file) at the end of the run. Where
+possible, a short description will also be produced.
+
+\NEWdescription{1995/12/01}
+\emph{Warning}: this command will list only files which were read
+using \LaTeX{} commands such as |\input|\arg{file} or
+|\include|\arg{file}.  If the file was read using the primitive \TeX{}
+syntax |\input |\emph{file} (without |{ }| braces around the file name)
+then it will not be listed; failure to use the \LaTeX{} form with the
+braces can cause more severe problems, possibly leading to overwriting
+important files, so \textbf{always put in the braces}.
+
+
+\begin{decl}
+|\setcounter{errorcontextlines}| \arg{num}
+\end{decl}
+
+\TeX~3 introduced a new primitive |\errorcontextlines| which controls
+the format of error messages. \LaTeXe\ provides an interface to this
+through the standard |\setcounter| command. As most \LaTeX\ users do
+not want to see the internal definitions of \LaTeX\ commands each time
+they make an error, \LaTeXe{} sets this to $-1$ by default.
+
+\subsection{Document structure}
+
+The |book| document class introduces new commands to indicate
+document structure.
+\begin{decl}
+|\frontmatter| \\ |\mainmatter| \\ |\backmatter|
+\end{decl}
+These commands indicate the beginning of the front matter (title page,
+table of contents and prefaces), main matter (main text) and back
+matter (bibliography, indexes and colophon).
+
+\subsection{Definitions}
+
+In \LaTeX, commands can have both mandatory and optional arguments,
+for example in:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \documentclass[11pt]{article}
+\end{verbatim}
+the |11pt| argument is optional, whereas the |article| class name is
+mandatory.
+
+In \LaTeX~2.09 users could define commands with arguments, but these
+had to be mandatory arguments.  With \LaTeXe, users can now define
+commands and environments which also have one optional argument.
+
+\begin{decl}
+|\newcommand| \arg{cmd} \oarg{num} \oarg{default} \arg{definition} \\
+|\newcommand*| \arg{cmd} \oarg{num} \oarg{default} \arg{definition} \\
+|\renewcommand| \arg{cmd} \oarg{num} \oarg{default} \arg{definition} \\
+|\renewcommand*| \arg{cmd} \oarg{num} \oarg{default} \arg{definition}
+\end{decl}
+
+These commands have a new, second, optional argument; this is used for
+defining commands which themselves take one optional argument.  This
+new argument is best introduced by means of a simple (and hence not
+very practical) example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \newcommand{\example}[2][YYY]{Mandatory arg: #2;
+                                 Optional arg: #1.}
+\end{verbatim}
+This defines |\example| to be a command with two arguments, referred
+to as |#1| and |#2| in the \arg{definition}---nothing new so far.  But
+by adding a second optional argument to this |\newcommand| (the
+|[YYY]|) the first argument (|#1|) of the newly defined command
+|\example| is made optional with its default value being |YYY|.
+
+Thus the usage of |\example| is either:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \example{BBB}
+\end{verbatim}
+which prints:
+\begin{quote}
+   Mandatory arg: BBB;
+   Optional arg: YYY.
+\end{quote}
+or:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \example[XXX]{AAA}
+\end{verbatim}
+which prints:
+\begin{quote}
+   Mandatory arg: AAA;
+   Optional arg: XXX.
+\end{quote}
+
+The default value of the optional argument is \texttt{YYY}.
+This value is specified as the \oarg{default} argument of the
+|\newcommand| that created |\example|.
+
+As another more useful example, the definition:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \newcommand{\seq}[2][n]{\lbrace #2_{0},\ldots,\,#2_{#1} \rbrace}
+\end{verbatim}
+means that the input |$\seq{a}$| produces
+the formula $\lbrace a_{0},\ldots,\,a_{n} \rbrace$,
+whereas the input |$\seq[k]{x}$| produces the formula
+$\lbrace x_{0},\ldots,\,x_{k} \rbrace$.
+
+In summary, the command:
+\begin{quote}
+   |\newcommand| \arg{cmd} \oarg{num} \oarg{default} \arg{definition}
+\end{quote}
+defines \m{cmd} to be a command with \m{num} arguments, the first of
+which is optional and has default value \m{default}.
+
+Note that there can only be one optional argument but, as before,
+there can be up to nine arguments in total.
+
+\begin{decl}
+|\newenvironment|
+ \arg{cmd} \oarg{num} \oarg{default} \arg{beg-def} \arg{end-def} \\
+|\newenvironment*|
+ \arg{cmd} \oarg{num} \oarg{default} \arg{beg-def} \arg{end-def} \\
+|\renewenvironment|
+ \arg{cmd} \oarg{num} \oarg{default} \arg{beg-def} \arg{end-def} \\
+|\renewenvironment*|
+ \arg{cmd} \oarg{num} \oarg{default} \arg{beg-def} \arg{end-def}
+\end{decl}
+
+\LaTeXe\ also supports the creation of environments that have one
+optional argument.  Thus the syntax of these two commands has
+been extended in the same way as that of |\newcommand|.
+
+\begin{decl}
+|\providecommand| \arg{cmd} \oarg{num} \oarg{default} \arg{definition} \\
+|\providecommand*| \arg{cmd} \oarg{num} \oarg{default} \arg{definition}
+\end{decl}
+
+This takes the same arguments as |\newcommand|. If \m{cmd} is already
+defined then the existing definition is kept; but if it is currently
+undefined then the effect of |\providecommand| is to define \m{cmd}
+just as if |\newcommand| had been used.
+
+\NEWfeature{1994/12/01}
+  All the above five `defining commands' now have \texttt{*}-forms that
+  are usually the better form to use when defining commands with
+  arguments, unless any of these arguments is intended to contain
+  whole paragraphs of text.  Moreover, if you ever do find yourself
+  needing to use the non-star form then you should ask whether
+  that argument would not better be treated as the contents of a
+  suitably defined environment.
+
+\NEWfeature{1995/12/01}
+  The commands produced by the above five `defining commands' are
+  now robust.
+
+\subsection{Boxes}
+
+These next three commands for making LR-boxes all existed in
+\LaTeX~2.09.  They have been enhanced in two ways.
+
+\begin{decl}
+|\makebox| \oarg{width} \oarg{pos}  \arg{text} \\
+|\framebox| \oarg{width} \oarg{pos}  \arg{text} \\
+|\savebox| \arg{cmd} \oarg{width} \oarg{pos}  \arg{text}
+\end{decl}
+
+One small but far-reaching change for \LaTeXe\ is that, within the
+\m{width} argument only, four special lengths can be used.  These are
+all dimensions of the box that would be produced by using simply
+|\mbox|\arg{text}:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item []   |\height|\quad its height above the baseline;
+\item []   |\depth|\quad its depth below the baseline;
+\item []   |\totalheight|\quad the sum of |\height| and |\depth|;
+\item []   |\width|\quad its width.
+\end{itemize}
+Thus, to put `hello' in the centre of a box of twice its natural
+width, you would use:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \makebox[2\width]{hello}
+\end{verbatim}
+Or you could put \textit{f} into a square box, like
+this:
+   \framebox{\makebox[\totalheight]{\itshape f\/}}
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \framebox{\makebox[\totalheight]{\itshape f\/}}
+\end{verbatim}
+Note that it is the total width of the framed box, including the
+frame, which is set to |\totalheight|.
+
+The other change is a new possibility for \m{pos}: |s| has been added
+to |l| and |r|.  If \m{pos} is |s| then the text is stretched the full
+length of the box, making use of any `rubber lengths' (including any
+inter-word spaces) in the contents of the box.  If no such `rubber
+length' is present, an `underfull box' will probably be produced.
+
+\begin{decl}
+|\parbox| \oarg{pos} \oarg{height} \oarg{inner-pos} \arg{width}
+         \arg{text} \\
+|\begin{minipage}|
+         \oarg{pos} \oarg{height} \oarg{inner-pos} \arg{width}\\
+\m{text}\\
+|\end{minipage}|
+\end{decl}
+
+As for the box commands above, |\height|, |\width|, etc.~may be used
+in the \oarg{height} argument to denote the natural dimensions of the
+box.
+
+The \m{inner-pos} argument is new in \LaTeXe.  It is the vertical
+equivalent to the \m{pos} argument for |\makebox|, etc, determining
+the position of \m{text} within the box.  The \m{inner-pos} may be any
+one of |t|, |b|, |c|, or |s|, denoting top, bottom, centered, or
+`stretched' alignment respectively.  When the \m{inner-pos} argument
+is not specified, \LaTeX\ gives it same  value as \m{pos} (this could be
+the latter's default value).
+
+
+\begin{decl}
+|\begin{lrbox}| \arg{cmd}\\
+\m{text}\\
+|\end{lrbox}|
+\end{decl}
+
+This is an environment which does not directly print anything.
+Its effect is to save the typeset \m{text} in the bin \m{cmd}. Thus
+it is like |\sbox| \arg{cmd} \arg{text}, except that any white space
+before or after the contents \m{text} is ignored.
+
+This is very useful as it enables both the |\verb| command and the
+\texttt{verbatim} environment to be used within \m{text}.
+
+It also makes it possible to define, for example, a `framed box'
+environment.  This is done by first using this environment to save
+some text in a bin \m{cmd} and then calling
+|\fbox{\usebox{|\m{cmd}|}}|.
+
+The following example defines an environment, called |fmpage|, that is
+a framed version of |minipage|.
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \newsavebox{\fmbox}
+   \newenvironment{fmpage}[1]
+     {\begin{lrbox}{\fmbox}\begin{minipage}{#1}}
+     {\end{minipage}\end{lrbox}\fbox{\usebox{\fmbox}}}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+
+\subsection{Measuring things}
+
+The first of these next commands was in \LaTeX~2.09. The two new
+commands are the obvious analogues.
+
+\begin{decl}
+|\settowidth|  \arg{length-cmd} \arg{lr text} \\
+|\settoheight| \arg{length-cmd} \arg{lr text} \\
+|\settodepth|  \arg{length-cmd} \arg{lr text}
+\end{decl}
+
+\subsection{Line endings}
+
+\NEWdescription{1994/12/01}
+The command |\\|, which is used to indicate a line-end in various
+places, is now a robust command when used within arguments such as
+section titles.
+
+Also, because it is often necessary to distinguish which type of line
+is to be ended, we have introduced the following new command; it
+has the same argument syntax as that of |\\|.
+\begin{decl}[1994/12/01]
+|\tabularnewline| \oarg{vertical-space}
+\end{decl}
+One example of its use is when the text in the last
+column of a |tabular| environment is set with |\raggedright|; then
+|\tabularnewline| can be used to indicate the end of a row of the
+|tabular|, whilst |\\| will indicate the end of a line of text in a
+paragraph within the column. This command can be used in the |array|
+environment as well as |tabular|, and also the extended versions of
+these environments offered by the \textsf{array} and \textsf{longtable}
+packages in the tools collection.
+
+\subsection{Controlling page breaks}
+
+Sometimes it is necessary, for a final version of a document, to
+`help' \LaTeX\ break the pages in the best way. \LaTeX~2.09 had a
+variety of commands for this situation: |\clearpage|, |\pagebreak|
+etc.  \LaTeXe\ provides, in addition, commands which can produce
+longer pages as well as shorter ones.
+
+
+\begin{decl}
+|\enlargethispage| \arg{size} \\
+|\enlargethispage*| \arg{size}
+\end{decl}
+
+These commands increase the height of a page (from its normal value of
+|\textheight|) by the specified amount \m{size}, a rigid length. This
+change affects \emph{only} the current page.
+
+This can be used, for example, to allow an extra line to be fitted
+onto the page or, with a negative length, to produce a page
+shorter than normal.
+
+The star form also shrinks any vertical white space on the page as
+much as possible, so as to fit the maximum amount of text on the
+page.
+
+\NEWdescription{1995/12/01}
+These commands do not change the position of the footer text; thus, if
+a page is lengthened too far, the main text may overprint the footer.
+
+\subsection{Floats}
+
+There is a new command, |\suppressfloats|, and a new `float
+specifier'.  These will enable people to gain better
+control of \LaTeX's float placement algorithm.
+
+\begin{decl}
+|\suppressfloats| \oarg{placement}
+\end{decl}
+
+This command stops any further floating environments from being placed
+on the current page. With an optional argument, which should be either
+|t| or |b| (not both), this restriction applies only to putting
+further floats at the top or at the bottom.  Any floats which would
+normally be placed on this page are placed on the next page instead.
+
+\begin{decl}
+The extra float location specifier: \ \texttt{!}
+\end{decl}
+
+This can be used, along with at least one of \texttt{h}, \texttt{t},
+\texttt{b} and \texttt{p}, in the location optional argument of a
+float.
+
+If a \texttt{!} is present then, just for this particular float,
+whenever it is processed by the float mechanism the following are
+ignored:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item  all restrictions on the number of floats which can appear;
+\item all explicit restrictions on the amount of space on a text page
+which may be occupied by floats or must be occupied by text.
+\end{itemize}
+The mechanism will, however, still attempt to ensure that pages are
+not overfull and that floats of the same type are printed in the
+correct order.
+
+Note that its presence has no effect on the production of float pages.
+
+A \texttt{!} specifier overrides the effect of any |\suppressfloats|
+command for this particular float.
+
+\subsection{Font changing: text}
+
+The font selection scheme used in \LaTeXe{} differs a lot from that
+used in \LaTeX~2.09.  In this section, we give a brief description of
+the new commands.  A more detailed description with examples is given
+in \emph{\LaTeXcomp}, and the interface for class- and package-writers
+is described in \emph{\fntguide}.
+
+\begin{decl}
+|\rmfamily|\\
+|\sffamily|\\
+|\ttfamily|\\
+|\mdseries|\\
+|\bfseries|\\
+|\upshape|\\
+|\itshape|\\
+|\slshape|\\
+|\scshape|
+\end{decl}
+
+These are font commands whose use is the same as the commands |\rm|,
+|\bf|, etc.  The difference is that each command changes just one
+attribute of the font (the attribute changed is part of the name).
+One result of this is that, for example, |\bfseries\itshape| produces
+both a change of series and a change of shape, to give a bold italic
+font.
+
+\begin{decl}
+|\textrm|\arg{text}\\
+|\textsf|\arg{text}\\
+|\texttt|\arg{text}\\
+|\textmd|\arg{text}\\
+|\textbf|\arg{text}\\
+|\textup|\arg{text}\\
+|\textit|\arg{text}\\
+|\textsl|\arg{text}\\
+|\textsc|\arg{text}\\
+|\emph|\arg{text}
+\end{decl}
+
+These are one-argument commands; they take as an argument the
+text which is to be typeset in the particular font. They also
+automatically insert italic corrections where appropriate; if you do
+not like the result, you can add an italic correction with |\/| or
+remove it with |\nocorr|.  The |\nocorr| should always be the first or
+last thing within the \arg{text} argument.
+
+\subsection{Font changing: math}
+
+Most of the fonts used within math mode do not need to be explicitly
+invoked; but to use letters from a range of fonts, the following
+class of commands is provided.
+
+\begin{decl}
+|\mathrm| \arg{letters}\\
+|\mathnormal| \arg{letters}\\
+|\mathcal| \arg{letters}\\
+|\mathbf| \arg{letters}\\
+|\mathsf| \arg{letters}\\
+|\mathtt| \arg{letters}\\
+|\mathit| \arg{letters}
+\end{decl}
+
+These are also one-argument commands which take as an argument the
+letters which are to be typeset in the particular font.  The argument
+is processed in math mode so spaces within it will be ignored.  Only
+letters, digits and accents have their font changed, for example
+|$\mathbf{\tilde A \times 1}$| produces $\mathbf{\tilde A \times 1}$.
+
+\subsection{Ensuring math mode}
+
+\begin{decl}
+|\ensuremath| \arg{math commands}
+\end{decl}
+
+In \LaTeX~2.09, if you wanted a command to work both in math mode and
+in text mode, the suggested method was to define something like:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \newcommand{\Gp}{\mbox{$G_p$}}
+\end{verbatim}
+Unfortunately, the |\mbox| stops |\Gp| changing size correctly in (for
+instance) subscripts or a fraction.
+
+In \LaTeXe{} you can define it thus:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \newcommand{\Gp}{\ensuremath{G_p}}
+\end{verbatim}
+Now |\Gp| will work correctly in all contexts.
+
+This is because the |\ensuremath| does nothing, producing simply
+|G_p|, when |\Gp| is used within math mode; but it ensures that math
+mode is entered (and exited) as required when |\Gp| is used in text
+mode.
+
+
+\subsection{Setting text superscripts}
+
+\begin{decl}
+|\textsuperscript| \arg{text}
+\end{decl}
+
+\NEWfeature{1995/06/01} In \LaTeX~2.09 textual superscripts such as
+footnote markers were produced by internally entering math mode and
+typesetting the number as a math superscript.  This normally looked
+fine since the digits in math fonts are the same as those in text
+fonts when Computer Modern fonts are used.  But when a different
+document font (such as Times) is selected, the results look rather
+strange.  For this reason the command |\textsuperscript| has been
+introduced which typesets its argument in the current text font, in a
+superscript position and in the correct size.
+
+\subsection{Text commands: all encodings}
+
+\NEWdescription{1994/12/01}
+  One of the main differences between \LaTeXe{} and \LaTeX~2.09 is
+  that \LaTeXe{} can deal with fonts in arbitrary \emph{encodings}.
+  (A font encoding is the sequence of characters in the font---for
+  example a Cyrillic font would have a different encoding from a Greek
+  font.)
+
+  The two major font encodings that are used for Latin languages such
+  as English or German are |OT1| (Donald Knuth's 7-bit encoding, which
+  has been used during most of \TeX's lifetime) and |T1| (the new
+  8-bit `Cork' encoding).
+
+  \LaTeX~2.09 only supported the |OT1| encoding, whereas \LaTeXe{} has
+  support for both |OT1| and |T1| built-in.  The next section will
+  cover the new commands which are available if you have |T1|-encoded
+  fonts.  This section describes new commands which are available in
+  all encodings.
+
+  Most of these commands provide characters which were available in
+  \LaTeX~2.09 already.  For example |\textemdash| gives an `em dash',
+  which was available in \LaTeX~2.09 by typing |---|.  However, some
+  fonts (for example a Greek font) may not have the |---| ligature,
+  but you will still be able to access an em dash by typing
+  |\textemdash|.
+
+\begin{decl}[1994/12/01]
+      |\r{<text>}|
+\end{decl}
+   This command gives a `ring' accent, for example `\r{o}' can be typed
+   |\r{o}|.
+
+\begin{decl}[1994/12/01]
+      |\SS|
+\end{decl}
+  This command produces a German `SS', that is a capital `\ss'.  This
+  letter can hyphenate differently from `SS', so is needed for entering
+  all-caps German.
+
+\begin{decl}[1994/12/01]
+      |\textcircled{<text>}|
+\end{decl}
+   This command is used to build `circled characters' such as
+   |\copyright|.  For example |\textcircled{a}| produces
+   \textcircled{a}.
+
+\begin{decl}[1994/12/01]
+      |\textcompwordmark|
+\end{decl}
+  This command is used to separate letters which would normally
+  ligature.  For example `f\textcompwordmark i' is produced with
+  |f\textcompwordmark i|.  Note that the `f' and `i' have not
+  ligatured to produce `fi'.  This is rarely useful in English
+  (`shelf\textcompwordmark ful' is a rare example of where it might be
+  used) but is used in languages such as German.
+
+\begin{decl}[1994/12/01]
+      |\textvisiblespace|
+\end{decl}
+   This command produces a `visible space' character
+   `\textvisiblespace'.  This is sometimes used in computer listings,
+   for example `type \textsf{hello\textvisiblespace world}'.
+
+\begin{decl}[1994/12/01]
+      |\textemdash|
+      |\textendash|
+      |\textexclamdown|
+      |\textquestiondown| \\
+      |\textquotedblleft|
+      |\textquotedblright|
+      |\textquoteleft|
+      |\textquoteright|
+\end{decl}
+   These commands produce characters which would otherwise be
+   accessed via ligatures:
+   \begin{center}
+      \begin{tabular}{ccl}
+         \emph{ligature} & \emph{character} & \emph{command} \\
+         |---| & --- & |\textemdash| \\
+         |--|  & --  & |\textendash| \\
+         |!`|  & !`  & |\textexclamdown| \\
+         |?`|  & ?`  & |\textquestiondown| \\
+         |``|  & ``  & |\textquotedblleft| \\
+         |''|  & ''  & |\textquotedblright| \\
+         |`|   & `   & |\textquoteleft| \\
+         |'|   & '   & |\textquoteright|
+      \end{tabular}
+   \end{center}
+   The reason for making these characters directly accessible is so
+   that they will work in encodings which do not have these characters.
+
+\begin{decl}[1994/12/01]
+      |\textbullet|
+      |\textperiodcentered|
+\end{decl}
+   These commands allow access to characters which were previously only
+   available in math mode:
+   \begin{center}
+      \begin{tabular}{lcl}
+         \emph{math command} & \emph{character} & \emph{text command} \\
+          |\bullet|   & $\bullet$   & |\textbullet| \\
+         |\cdot|     & $\cdot$     & |\textperiodcentered|
+      \end{tabular}
+   \end{center}
+
+\begin{decl}[1995/12/01]
+      |\textbackslash|
+      |\textbar|
+      |\textless|
+      |\textgreater|
+\end{decl}
+   These commands allow access to ASCII characters which were
+   only available in verbatim or math mode:
+   \begin{center}
+      \begin{tabular}{lcl}
+         \emph{math command} & \emph{character} & \emph{text command} \\
+          |\backslash|   & $\backslash$   & |\textbackslash| \\
+          |\mid|     & $\mid$     & |\textbar| \\
+          |<<| & $<$ & |\textless| \\
+          |>>| & $>$ & |\textgreater|
+      \end{tabular}
+   \end{center}
+
+\begin{decl}[1995/12/01]
+      |\textasciicircum|
+      |\textasciitilde|
+\end{decl}
+   These commands allow access to ASCII characters which were
+   previously only available in verbatim:
+   \begin{center}
+      \begin{tabular}{cl}
+         \emph{verbatim} & \emph{text command} \\
+         |^| & |\textasciicircum| \\
+         |~| & |\textasciitilde|
+      \end{tabular}
+   \end{center}
+
+\begin{decl}[1995/12/01]
+      |\textregistered|
+      |\texttrademark|
+\end{decl}
+   These commands provide the `registered trademark' (R) and
+   `trademark' (TM) symbols.
+
+\subsection{Text commands: the T1 encoding}
+
+\NEWdescription{1994/12/01}
+  The |OT1| font encoding is fine for typesetting in English, but has
+  problems when typesetting other languages.  The |T1| encoding solves
+  some of these problems, by providing extra characters (such as `eth'
+  and `thorn'), and it allows words containing accented letters to be
+  hyphenated (as long as you have a package like |babel| which allows
+  for non-American hyphenation).
+
+  This section describes the commands you can use if you have the |T1|
+  fonts.  To use them, you need to get the `ec fonts', or the
+  |T1|-encoded PostScript fonts, as used by \textsf{psnfss}.
+  All these fonts are
+  available by anonymous ftp in the Comprehensive \TeX{} Archive, and
+  are also available on the CD-ROMs \emph{4all \TeX} and
+  \emph{\TeX{} Live} (both available from the \TeX{} Users Group).
+
+   You can then select the |T1| fonts by saying:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+\end{verbatim}
+   This will allow you to use the commands in this section.
+
+   \emph{Note:} Since this document must be processable on any site
+   running an up-to-date \LaTeX, it does not contain any characters
+   that are present only in |T1|-encoded fonts.  This means that this
+   document cannot show you what these glyphs look like!  If you want
+   to see them then run \LaTeX{} on the document |fontsmpl| and
+   respond `|cmr|' when it prompts you for a family name.
+
+\begin{decl}[1994/12/01]
+      |\k{<text>}|
+\end{decl}
+   This command produces an `ogonek' accent.
+
+\begin{decl}[1994/12/01]
+      |\DH|
+      |\DJ|
+      |\NG|
+      |\TH|
+      |\dh|
+      |\dj|
+      |\ng|
+      |\th|
+\end{decl}
+   These commands produce characters `eth', `dbar', `eng', and `thorn'.
+
+\begin{decl}[1994/12/01]
+      |\guillemotleft|
+      |\guillemotright|
+      |\guilsinglleft|
+      |\guilsinglright| \\
+      |\quotedblbase|
+      |\quotesinglbase|
+      |\textquotedbl|
+\end{decl}
+   % A local hack (could be improved):
+   \newcommand{\fauxguillemet}[1]{$\vcenter{\hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle#1$}}$}
+   These commands produce various sorts of quotation mark.
+   Rough representations of them are:
+   \fauxguillemet\ll a\fauxguillemet\gg{} 
+   \fauxguillemet<a\fauxguillemet> 
+   ,\kern -0.1em,\kern 0.05em a\kern -0.05em`` 
+   ,\kern 0.05em a\kern -0.05em` and |"|a|"|.
+
+\NEWdescription{2001/06/01}
+   There are therefore some extra short-form ligatures available for
+   use in documents that will only be used with |T1|-encoded fonts.
+   
+   The guillemets |\guillemotleft| and |\guillemotright|% 
+   \footnote{We apologise once again for maintaining Adobe's 
+     enormous solipsism~(sic) of confusing a diving bird with 
+     punctuation marks!}  
+   can be obtained by typing |<<<<| and |>>>>| and |\quotedblbase| 
+   by typing |,,|\,.  
+
+   Also, unlike the unexpected results with
+   |OT1|-encoded fonts, |<<| and |>>| will produce \textless{} and
+   \textgreater{}.
+
+   Note also that the single character |"| will no longer produce ''
+   but rather |\textquotedbl|.
+
+\subsection{Logos}
+
+\begin{decl}
+|\LaTeX|\\
+|\LaTeXe|
+\end{decl}
+
+|\LaTeX| (producing `\LaTeX') is still the `main' logo command,
+but if you need to refer to the new features, you can write
+|\LaTeXe| (producing `\LaTeXe').
+
+\subsection{Picture commands}
+
+\begin{decl}
+   |\qbezier[<N>](<AX>,<AY>)(<BX>,<BY>)(<CX>,<CY>)| \\
+   | \bezier{<N>}(<AX>,<AY>)(<BX>,<BY>)(<CX>,<CY>)|
+\end{decl}
+The |\qbezier| command can be used in |picture| mode to draw a
+quadratic Bezier curve from position |(<AX>,<AY>)| to |(<CX>,<CY>)| with
+control point |(<BX>,<BY>)|.  The optional argument \m{N} gives the
+number of points on the curve.
+
+For example, the diagram:
+\begin{center}
+   \begin{picture}(50,50)
+      \thicklines
+      \qbezier(0,0)(0,50)(50,50)
+      \qbezier[20](0,0)(50,0)(50,50)
+      \thinlines
+      \put(0,0){\line(1,1){50}}
+   \end{picture}
+\end{center}
+is drawn with:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \begin{picture}(50,50)
+      \thicklines
+      \qbezier(0,0)(0,50)(50,50)
+      \qbezier[20](0,0)(50,0)(50,50)
+      \thinlines
+      \put(0,0){\line(1,1){50}}
+   \end{picture}
+\end{verbatim}
+The |\bezier| command is the same, except that the argument \m{N} is not
+optional.  It is provided for compatibility with the \LaTeX~2.09
+|bezier| document style option.
+
+\subsection{Old commands}
+
+\begin{decl}
+|\samepage|
+\end{decl}
+
+The |\samepage| command still exists but is no longer being
+maintained.
+This is because it only ever worked erratically; it does not
+guarantee that there will be no page-breaks within its scope; and
+it can cause footnotes and marginals to be wrongly placed.
+
+We recommend using |\enlargethispage| in conjunction with page-break
+commands such as |\newpage| and |\pagebreak| to help control page
+breaks.
+
+\begin{decl}
+   |\SLiTeX|
+\end{decl}
+Since \SLiTeX{} no longer exists, the logo is no longer defined in the
+\LaTeX{} kernel.  A suitable replacement is |\textsc{Sli\TeX}|.  The
+\SLiTeX{} logo is defined in \LaTeX~2.09 compatibility mode.
+
+\begin{decl}
+|\mho| |\Join| |\Box| |\Diamond| |\leadsto| \\
+|\sqsubset| |\sqsupset| |\lhd| |\unlhd| |\rhd| |\unrhd|
+\end{decl}
+
+These symbols are contained in the \LaTeX{} symbol font, which was
+automatically loaded by \LaTeX~2.09.  However, \TeX{} has room for
+only sixteen math font families; thus many users discovered that they
+ran out.  Because of this, \LaTeX{} does not load the \LaTeX{} symbol
+font unless you use the \textsf{latexsym} package.
+
+These symbols are also made available, using different fonts, by the
+\textsf{amsfonts} package, which also defines a large number of other
+symbols.  It is supplied by the American Mathematical Society.
+
+The \textsf{latexsym} package is loaded automatically in \LaTeX~2.09
+compatibility mode.
+
+\section{\LaTeX~2.09 documents}
+\label{Sec:209}
+
+\LaTeXe{} can process (almost) any \LaTeX~2.09 document, by entering
+\emph{\LaTeX~2.09 compatibility mode}.  Nothing has changed, you run
+\LaTeX{} in the same way you always did, and you will get much the
+same results.
+
+The reason for the `almost' is that some \LaTeX~2.09 packages made use
+of low-level unsupported features of \LaTeX.  If you discover such a
+package, you should find out if it has been updated to work with
+\LaTeXe.  Most packages will still work with \LaTeXe---the easiest way
+to find out whether a package still works is to try it!
+
+\LaTeX~2.09 compatibility mode is a comprehensive emulation of
+\LaTeX~2.09, but at the cost of time.  Documents can run up to 50\%
+slower in compatibility mode than they did under \LaTeX~2.09.
+In addition, many of the new features of \LaTeXe{} are not available in
+\LaTeX~2.09 compatibility mode.
+
+\subsection{Warning}
+
+\NEWdescription{1995/12/01}
+This \emph{\LaTeX~2.09 compatibility mode} is provided solely to allow
+you to process 2.09 documents, i.e.~documents that were written (we
+hope, a long time ago) for a very old system and therefore could be
+processed by using a genuine antique \LaTeX~2.09 system.
+
+This mode is therefore \emph{not} intended to provide access to the
+enhanced features of \LaTeXe{}.  Thus it must not be used to process
+new documents which masquerade as 2.09 documents (i.e.~they begin with
+|\documentstyle|) but which could not be processed using that genuine
+antique \LaTeX~2.09 system because they contain some new,
+\LaTeXe{}-only, commands or environments.
+
+To prevent such misuse of the system, and the consequent trouble it
+causes when such misleadingly encoded documents are distributed, the
+\emph{\LaTeX~2.09 compatibility mode} turns off most of these new
+features and commands.  Any attempt to use them will give you an error
+message and, moreover, many of them simply  will not work, whilst
+others will produce unpredictable results.
+So don't bother sending us any bug reports about such occurences since
+they are intentional.
+
+
+\subsection{Font selection problems}
+\label{Sec:fsprob}
+
+When using compatibility mode, it is possible that you will find
+problems with font-changing commands in some old documents.  These
+problems are of two types:
+
+\begin{itemize}
+\item producing error messages;
+\item not producing the font changes you expected.
+\end{itemize}
+
+In case of error messages it is possible that the document (or an old
+style file used therein) contains references to old internal commands
+which are no longer defined, see Section~\ref{Sec:oldinternals} for
+more information if this is the case.
+
+\NEWdescription{1995/12/01}
+One example of the unexpected is if you use one of the new style of
+math-mode font changing command as follows:
+\begin{verbatim}
+$ \mathbf{xy} A $
+\end{verbatim}
+You may well find that this behaves as if you had put:
+\begin{verbatim}
+$ \bf {xy} A $
+\end{verbatim}
+everything including the $A$ coming out bold.
+
+\LaTeX~2.09 allowed sites to customize their \LaTeX{} installation,
+which resulted in documents producing different results on different
+\LaTeX{} installations.  \LaTeXe{} no longer allows so much
+customization but, for compatibility with old documents, the local
+configuration file |latex209.cfg| is loaded every time \LaTeXe{}
+enters \LaTeX~2.09 compatibility mode.
+
+For example, if your site was customized to use the New Font
+Selection Scheme (\NFSS) with the |oldlfont| option, then you can
+make \LaTeXe{} emulate this by creating a |latex209.cfg| file
+containing the commands:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\ExecuteOptions{oldlfont}\RequirePackage{oldlfont}
+\end{verbatim}
+Similarly, to emulate \NFSS{} with the |newlfont| option, you can
+create a |latex209.cfg| file containing:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\ExecuteOptions{newlfont}\RequirePackage{newlfont}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+
+\subsection{Native mode}
+\label{Sec:native}
+
+To run an old document faster, and use the new features of
+\LaTeXe, you should try using \emph{\LaTeXe{} native mode}.
+This is done by replacing the command:
+\begin{quote}
+   |\documentstyle[|\m{options}|,|\m{packages}|]|\arg{class}
+\end{quote}
+with:
+\begin{quote}
+   |\documentclass|\oarg{options}\arg{class} \\
+   |\usepackage{latexsym,|\m{packages}|}|
+\end{quote}
+However, some documents which can be processed in \LaTeX~2.09
+compatibility mode may not work in native mode.  Some \LaTeX~2.09
+packages will only work with \LaTeXe{} in 2.09 compatibility mode.
+Some documents will cause errors because of \LaTeXe's improved error
+detection abilities.
+
+But most \LaTeX~2.09 documents can be processed by \LaTeXe{}'s native
+mode with the above change.  Again, the easiest way to find out
+whether your documents can be processed in native mode is to try it!
+
+
+\section{Local modifications}
+\label{sec:loc}
+
+\NEWdescription{1995/12/01}
+There are two common types of local modifications that can be done
+very simply.  Do not forget that documents produced using such
+modifications will not be usable at other places (such documents are
+called `non-portable').
+
+One type of modification is the use of personal commands for commonly
+used symbols or constructions.  These should be put into a package
+file (for example, one called \texttt{mymacros.sty}) and loaded by
+putting |\usepackage{mymacros}| in the document preamble.
+
+Another type is a local document class that is very similar to one of
+the standard classes but contains some straightforward modifications
+such as extra environments, different values for some parameters, etc.
+These should be put into a class file; here we shall describe a simple
+method of constructing such a file using, as an example, a class
+called \textsf{larticle} that is very similar to the \textsf{article}
+class.
+
+\NEWfeature{1995/12/01}
+The class file called \texttt{larticle.cls} should (after the
+preliminary identification commands) start as follows:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \LoadClassWithOptions{article}
+\end{verbatim}
+This command should be followed by whatever additions and changes you
+wish to make to the results of reading in the file
+\texttt{article.sty}.
+
+The effect of using the above |\LoadClassWithOptions| command is to
+load the standard class file \textsf{article} with whatever options
+are asked for by the document.  Thus a document using your
+\textsf{larticle} class can specify any option that could be specified
+when using the standard \textsf{article} class; for example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \documentclass[a4paper,twocolumn,dvips]{larticle}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+
+\section{Problems}
+\label{Sec:problems}
+
+This section describes some of the things which may go wrong when
+using \LaTeXe, and what you can do about it.
+
+\subsection{New error messages}
+
+\LaTeXe{} has a number of new error messages.
+Please also note that many error messages now produce further helpful
+information if you press |h| in response to the error prompt.
+
+\begin{decl}
+|Option clash for package |\m{package}|.|
+\end{decl}
+The named package has been loaded twice with different options.  If
+you enter |h| you will be told what the options were, for example, if
+your document contained:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \usepackage[foo]{fred}
+   \usepackage[baz]{fred}
+\end{verbatim}
+then you will get the error message:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   Option clash for package fred.
+\end{verbatim}
+and typing |h| at the |?| prompt will give you:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   The package fred has already been loaded with options:
+     [foo]
+   There has now been an attempt to load it with options:
+     [baz]
+   Adding the line:
+     \usepackage[foo,baz]{fred}
+   to your document may fix this.
+   Try typing <<return>> to proceed.
+\end{verbatim}
+The cure is, as suggested, to load the package with both sets of
+options.  Note that since \LaTeX{} packages can call other packages,
+it is possible to get a package option clash without explicitly
+requesting the same package twice.
+
+\begin{decl}
+   |Command |\m{command}| not provided in base NFSS.|
+\end{decl}
+The \m{command} is not provided by default in \LaTeXe.  This error is
+generated by using one of the commands:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \mho \Join \Box \Diamond \leadsto
+   \sqsubset \sqsupset \lhd \unlhd \rhd \unrhd
+\end{verbatim}
+which are now part of the \textsf{latexsym} package.
+The cure is to add:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \usepackage{latexsym}
+\end{verbatim}
+in the preamble of your document.
+
+\begin{decl}
+   |LaTeX2e command <command> in LaTeX 2.09 document.|
+\end{decl}
+The \m{command} is a \LaTeXe{} command but this is a \LaTeX~2.09
+document.  The cure is to replace the command by a \LaTeX~2.09
+command, or to run document in native mode, as described in
+Section~\ref{Sec:native}.
+
+\begin{decl}
+   |NFSS release 1 command \newmathalphabet found.|
+\end{decl}
+The command |\newmathalphabet| was used by the New Font Selection
+Scheme Release 1 but it has now been replaced by
+|\DeclareMathAlphabet|, the use of which is described in
+\emph{\fntguide}.
+
+The best cure is to update the package which contained the
+|\newmathalphabet| command.  Find out if there is a new release of
+the package, or (if you wrote the package yourself) consult
+\emph{\fntguide} for the new syntax of font commands.
+
+If there is no updated version of the package then you can cure this
+error by using the \textsf{newlfont} or \textsf{oldlfont} package,
+which tells \LaTeX{} which version of |\newmathalphabet| should be
+emulated.
+
+You should use \textsf{oldlfont} if the document selects math fonts with
+syntax such as this:
+\begin{quote}
+  |{\cal A}|, etc.
+\end{quote}
+Use \textsf{newlfont} if the document's syntax is like this:
+\begin{quote}
+  |\cal{A}|, etc.
+\end{quote}
+
+
+\begin{decl}
+   |Text for \verb command ended by end of line.|
+\end{decl}
+The |\verb| command has been begun but not ended on that line.  This
+usually means that you have forgotten to put in the end-character of
+the |\verb| command.
+
+\begin{decl}
+   |Illegal use of \verb command.|
+\end{decl}
+The |\verb| command has been used inside the argument of another
+command.  This has never been allowed in \LaTeX{}---often producing
+incorrect output without any warning---and so \LaTeXe{} produces
+an error message.
+
+\subsection{Old internal commands}
+\label{Sec:oldinternals}
+
+A number of \LaTeX~2.09 internal commands have been removed, since
+their functionality is now provided in a different way.  See
+\emph{\clsguide} for more details of the new, supported interface for
+class and package writers.
+
+\begin{decl}
+   |\tenrm| |\elvrm| |\twlrm| \dots\\
+   |\tenbf| |\elvbf| |\twlbf| \dots\\
+   |\tensf| |\elvsf| |\twlsf| \dots\\
+   $\vdots$
+\end{decl}
+These commands provided access to the seventy fonts preloaded by
+\LaTeX~2.09.  In contrast, \LaTeXe{} normally preloads at most
+fourteen fonts, which saves a lot of font memory; but a consequence is
+that any \LaTeX{} file which used the above commands to directly
+access fonts will no longer work.
+
+Their use will usually produce an error message such as:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   ! Undefined control sequence.
+   l.5 \tenrm
+\end{verbatim}
+The cure for this is to update the document to use the new
+font-changing commands provided by \LaTeXe; these are described in
+\emph{\fntguide}.
+
+If this is not possible then, as a last resort, you can
+use the \textsf{rawfonts} package, which loads the
+seventy \LaTeX~2.09 fonts and provides direct access to them using the
+old commands.  This takes both time and memory.  If you do not
+wish to load all seventy fonts, you can select some of them by using the
+|only| option to \textsf{rawfonts}.  For example, to load only |tenrm|
+and |tenbf| you write:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \usepackage[only,tenrm,tenbf]{rawfonts}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+The \textsf{rawfonts} package is distributed as part of the \LaTeX{}
+tools software, see Section~\ref{Sec:st-pack}.
+
+\subsection{Old files}
+
+One of the more common mistakes in running \LaTeX{} is to read in old
+versions of packages instead of the new versions.  If you get an
+incomprehensible error message from a standard package, make sure you
+are loading the most recent version of the package.  You can find out
+which version of the package has been loaded by looking in the log
+file for a line like:
+\begin{verbatim}
+   Package: fred 1994/06/01 v0.01 Fred's package.
+\end{verbatim}
+You can use the \m{release-date} options to |\documentclass| and
+|\usepackage| to make sure that you are getting a suitably recent copy
+of the document class or package.  This is useful when sending a
+document to another site, which may have out-of-date software.
+
+\subsection{Where to go for more help}
+
+If you can't find the answer for your problem here, try looking in
+\emph{\LaTeXbook} or \emph{\LaTeXcomp}.  If you have a problem with
+installing \LaTeX, look in the installation guide files which come with
+the distribution.
+
+If this doesn't help, contact your local \LaTeX{} guru or local
+\LaTeX{} mailing list.
+
+If you think you've discovered a bug then please report it!  First,
+you should find out if the problem is with a third-party package or
+class.  If the problem is caused by a package or class other than
+those listed in Section~\ref{Sec:class+packages} then please report
+the problem to the author of the package or class, not to the \LaTeX3
+project team.
+
+If the bug really is with core \LaTeX{} then you should create a
+\emph{short}, \emph{self-contained} document which exhibits the
+problem.  You should run a \emph{recent} (less than a year old)
+version of \LaTeX{} on the file and then run \LaTeX{} on
+|latexbug.tex|.  This will create an error report which you should
+send, together with the sample document and log file, to the
+\LaTeX{} bugs address which can be found in the file
+|latexbug.tex| or |bugs.txt|.
+
+
+\section{Enjoy!}
+\label{Sec:enjoy}
+
+We certainly hope you will enjoy using the new standard \LaTeX{} but,
+if this is not possible, we hope that you will enjoy success and
+fulfillment as a result of the documents which it will help you to
+create.
+
+If you find that the contribution of \LaTeX{} to your life is such
+that you would like to support the work of the project team, then
+please read Section~\ref{Sec:ltx3} and discover practical ways to do
+this.
+
+\begin{thebibliography}{1}
+
+\bibitem{A-W:GRM97}
+Michel Goossens, Sebastian Rahtz and Frank Mittelbach.
+\newblock {\em The {\LaTeX} Graphics Companion}.
+\newblock Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, 1997.
+
+
+\bibitem{A-W:GR99}
+Michel Goossens and Sebastian Rahtz.
+\newblock {\em The {\LaTeX} Web Companion}.
+\newblock Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, 1999.
+
+
+\bibitem{A-W:DEK91}
+Donald~E. Knuth.
+\newblock {\em The \TeX book}.
+\newblock Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, 1986.
+\newblock Revised to cover \TeX3, 1991.
+
+
+\bibitem{A-W:LLa94}
+Leslie Lamport.
+\newblock {\em {\LaTeX:} A Document Preparation System}.
+\newblock Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, second edition, 1994.
+
+\bibitem{A-W:MG2004}
+Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens.
+\newblock {\em The {\LaTeX} Companion second edition}.
+\newblock With Johannes Braams, David Carlisle, and Chris Rowley.
+\newblock Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, 2004.
+
+
+\end{thebibliography}
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/utf8ienc.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/utf8ienc.dtx
index f0c3e434ccb..5b9fe574c4a 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/utf8ienc.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/utf8ienc.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 % \iffalse meta-comment
 %
-% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006
 % The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
 % in this file. 
 % 
@@ -8,12 +8,12 @@
 % -------------------------------------------
 % 
 % It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
 % of this license or (at your option) any later version.
 % The latest version of this license is in
 %    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
 % 
 % This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
 % 
@@ -30,7 +30,6 @@
 % \iffalse
 %<*driver>
 \documentclass{ltxdoc}
-%% \usepackage[utf8]{inputenc}  %% That looked wrong to Chris.
 \GetFileInfo{utf8.def}
 \title{Providing some UTF-8 support via \texttt{inputenc}}
 \date{\fileversion\space\filedate{} printed \today}
@@ -46,7 +45,7 @@
 %</driver>
 % \fi
 %
-% \CheckSum{1068}
+% \CheckSum{1090}
 %
 % \newpage
 %
@@ -207,7 +206,7 @@
 %<utf8>\ProvidesFile{utf8.def}
 %<test>\ProvidesFile{utf8-test.tex}
 %<+lcy> \ProvidesFile{lcyenc.dfu}
-%<+ly1> \ProvidesFile{lcyenc.dfu}
+%<+ly1> \ProvidesFile{ly1enc.dfu}
 %<+oms> \ProvidesFile{omsenc.dfu}
 %<+ot1> \ProvidesFile{ot1enc.dfu}
 %<+ot2> \ProvidesFile{ot2enc.dfu}
@@ -218,13 +217,21 @@
 %<+ts1> \ProvidesFile{ts1enc.dfu}
 %<+x2>  \ProvidesFile{x2enc.dfu}
 %<+all> \ProvidesFile{utf8enc.dfu}
-   [2004/02/09 v1.1b UTF-8 support for inputenc]
+   [2006/03/30 v1.1i UTF-8 support for inputenc]
 %    \end{macrocode}
 %    
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 %<*utf8>
 \makeatletter
 %    \end{macrocode}
+%    We restore the |\catcode| of space (which is set to ignore in
+%    \texttt{inputenc}) while reading \texttt{.def} files. Otherwise
+%    we would need to explicitly use |\space| all over the place in
+%    error and log messages.
+% \changes{v1.1d}{2004/05/08}{Explicitly set catcode of space}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\catcode`\ \saved@space@catcode
+%    \end{macrocode}
 %    
 %
 %
@@ -284,10 +291,12 @@
 %    The endline character has a special definition within the
 %    inputenc package (it is gobbling spaces). For this reason we
 %    can't produce multiline strings without some precaution.
-% \changes{v1.1b}{2004/02/09}{no newlines in error messages allowed}
+% \changes{v1.1b}{2004/02/09}{No newlines allowed in error messages}
+% \changes{v1.1g}{2005/09/27}{Real spaces do not show up so use \cs{space}}
 %    \begin{macrocode}
-      \PackageError{inputenc}{Unicode char \string#1 not set up\space
-                              for use with LaTeX}\@eha
+      \PackageError{inputenc}{Unicode\space char\space \string#1\space 
+                              not\space set\space up\space
+                              for\space use\space with\space LaTeX}\@eha
   \else\expandafter
     #1%
   \fi
@@ -486,9 +495,11 @@
 %    \end{macrocode}
 %    As |\count@| already contains the right value we make
 %    |\parse@XML@charref| work without arguments. 
+% \changes{v1.1g}{2005/09/27}{Real spaces do not show up so use \cs{space}}
 %    \begin{macrocode}
   \ifnum\count@<"A0\relax
-     \PackageError{inputenc}{Cannot define Unicode char value < 00A0}\@eha
+     \PackageError{inputenc}{Cannot\space define\space Unicode\space 
+                             char\space value\space <\space 00A0}\@eha
 %    \end{macrocode}
 %    Do not ask us to provide an explanation for the code below, it is
 %    borrowed straight from \texttt{xmltex} by David and we trust him
@@ -519,7 +530,7 @@
 %
 % \begin{macro}{\parse@UTFviii@a}
 %    \ldots so somebody else can document this part :-) \ldots~David?:-))))!
-% \changes{v1.1b}{2004/02/09}{space in the wrong place \cs{count @64}}
+% \changes{v1.1b}{2004/02/09}{Space in the wrong place \cs{count @64}}
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \gdef\parse@UTFviii@a#1{%
      \@tempcnta\count@
@@ -577,8 +588,17 @@
   \def\cdp@elt#1#2#3#4{%
     \wlog{Now handling font encoding #1 ...}%
     \lowercase{%
-       \InputIfFileExists{#1enc.dfu}}
-          {\wlog{... processing UTF-8 mapping file for font encoding #1}}%
+        \InputIfFileExists{#1enc.dfu}}%
+           {\wlog{... processing UTF-8 mapping file for font encoding
+                  #1}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    From this point on we ignore spaces again, i.e., while we are
+%    reading the \texttt{.dfu} file. The |\endgroup| below will
+%    restore it again.
+% \changes{v1.1d}{2004/05/08}{Explicitly set catcode of space}
+% \changes{v1.1g}{2005/09/27}{We lost the ``false'' case}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+            \catcode`\ 9\relax}%
           {\wlog{... no UTF-8 mapping file for font encoding #1}}%
   }
   \cdp@list
@@ -684,7 +704,9 @@
 % \subsection{The mapping table}
 %
 % Note that the first argument must be a 4-hex-digit number greater
-% than \texttt{00BF}. 
+% than \texttt{00BF}.
+%
+% There are few notes about inconsistencies etc at the end of the table.
 % 
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 %<all,t1,ot1,ly1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A1}{\textexclamdown}
@@ -708,7 +730,7 @@
 %<all,ts1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B4}{\textasciiacute}
 %<all,ts1,ly1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B5}{\textmu} % micro sign
 %<all,ts1,oms,ly1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B6}{\textparagraph}
-%<all,ts1,ly1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B7}{\textperiodcentered}
+%<all,oms,ts1,ly1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B7}{\textperiodcentered}
 %<all,ot1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B8}{\c\ }
 %<all,ts1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B9}{\textonesuperior}
 %<all,ts1,ly1,utf8>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BA}{\textordmasculine}
@@ -801,6 +823,8 @@
 %<all,t1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011F}{\u g}
 %<all,t1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0130}{\.I}
 %<all,t2c,t2b,t2a,t1,ot2,ot1,ly1,lcy>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0131}{\i}
+%<all,t1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0132}{\IJ}
+%<all,t1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0133}{\ij}
 %<all,t1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0139}{\@tabacckludge'L}
 %<all,t1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013A}{\@tabacckludge'l}
 %<all,t1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013D}{\v L}
@@ -845,9 +869,8 @@
 %<all,ts1,ly1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0192}{\textflorin}
 %<all,ly1,utf8>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{02C6}{\textasciicircum}
 %<all,ts1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{02C7}{\textasciicaron}
-%<all,ly1,utf8>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{02CA}{\textasciitilde}
+%<all,ly1,utf8>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{02DC}{\textasciitilde}
 %<all,ts1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{02D8}{\textasciibreve}
-%<all,oms>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{02D9}{\textperiodcentered}
 %<all,ts1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{02DD}{\textacutedbl}
 %<all,x2,t2c,t2b,t2a,ot2,lcy>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0401}{\CYRYO}
 %<all,x2,t2a,ot2>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0402}{\CYRDJE}
@@ -1016,7 +1039,7 @@
 %<all,x2,t2c,t2b>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{04E1}{\cyrabhdze}
 %<all,x2,t2c,t2b,t2a>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{04E8}{\CYROTLD}
 %<all,x2,t2c,t2b,t2a>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{04E9}{\cyrotld}
-%<all,ts1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0E37}{\textbaht}
+%<all,ts1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0E3F}{\textbaht}
 %<all,x2,t2c,t2b,t2a,t1,utf8>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{200C}{\textcompwordmark}
 %<all,x2,t2c,t2b,t2a,t1,ot2,ot1,ly1,lcy>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2013}{\textendash}
 %<all,x2,t2c,t2b,t2a,t1,ot2,ot1,ly1,lcy>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2014}{\textemdash}
@@ -1068,8 +1091,26 @@
 %<all,ts1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{25EF}{\textbigcircle}
 %<all,ts1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{266A}{\textmusicalnote}
 %    \end{macrocode}
-%    The following definitions are in the encoding file but have no
-%    direct equivalent in Unicode or simply do not make sense in that
+% 
+% \subsection{Notes}
+% 
+% \changes{v1.1e}{2004/05/22}{Added notes on inconsistency with `8-bit files'.}
+% The following inputs are inconsistent with the 8-bit inputenc files
+% since they will always only produce the `text character'.  This is an
+% area where inputenc is notoriously confused.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% %<all,ts1,t1,ot1,ly1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A3}{\textsterling}
+% %<all,x2,ts1,t2c,t2b,t2a,oms,ly1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A7}{\textsection}
+% %<all,ts1,utf8>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A9}{\textcopyright}
+% %<all,ts1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B1}{\textpm}
+% %<all,ts1,oms,ly1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B6}{\textparagraph}
+% %<all,ts1,oms,ly1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2020}{\textdagger}
+% %<all,ts1,oms,ly1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2021}{\textdaggerdbl}
+% %<all,ly1,utf8>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2026}{\textellipsis}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+%    The following definitions are in an encoding file but have no
+%    direct equivalent in Unicode, or they simply do not make sense in that
 %    context (or we have not yet found anything or \ldots :-).  For
 %    example, the non-combining accent charcaters are certainly
 %    available somehwere but these are not equivalent to a \TeX{}
@@ -1168,7 +1209,7 @@
 %
 % Also there are a number of |\providecommand|s in the various input
 % encoding files which may or may not go into this part.
-% \changes{v1.1b}{2004/02/09}{added commands already defined in the kernel}
+% \changes{v1.1b}{2004/02/09}{Added commands already defined in the kernel}
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 %<*utf8>
 % This space is intentionally empty ...